Administrator’s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software Volumes 1, 2, and 3 Release 1.
Copyright 2002, Avaya Inc. All Rights Reserved Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change. Preventing Toll Fraud “Toll fraud” is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party (for example, a person who is not a corporate employee, agent, subcontractor, or is not working on your company's behalf).
Product Safety Standards This product complies with and conforms to the following international Product Safety standards as applicable: Safety of Information Technology Equipment, IEC 60950, 3rd Edition including all relevant national deviations as listed in Compliance with IEC for Electrical Equipment (IECEE) CB-96A. Safety of Laser products, equipment classification and requirements: • IEC 60825-1, 1.1 Edition • Safety of Information Technology Equipment, CAN/CSAC22.2 No.
Copies of these Declarations of Conformity (DoCs) signed by the Vice It is recommended that repairs be performed by Avaya certified technicians. The equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information. This equipment, if it uses a telephone receiver, is hearing aid compatible.
Volume 1 Volume 1 About this document ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 19 19 19 23 23 26 27 28 28 29 31 Logging into the system Accessing the S8700 Media Server Logging in with Access Security Gateway Logging off the system Setting command permissions Establishing daylight savings rules Setting the system date and time Setting time of day clock synchronization Using the bulletin board Saving translations Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server only) 31 33 37 39 40 41 44 45 53 55 58
Features and technical reference ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 3 Managing phones ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Installing new phones Adding new phones Using templates to add phones Using an alias Customizing your phone Upgrading phones Swapping phones Using ACTR to move phones Using TTI to move phones Removing phones Adding a fax or modem Adding an IP Telephone Adding an IP Softphone Setting up remote office 2420 DCP telephone Managing phone features ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 6 Administering treatment for denied or invalid calls
Volume 1 5 Managing your attendant consoles ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 6 Managing displays ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 7 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Setting up basic call coverage Setting up advanced call coverage Setting up call forwarding Setting up night service Adding call pickup Managing hunt groups Managing vectors and VDNs Understanding Automatic Call Distribution Assigning a terminating extension group Routing outgoing calls ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 555-233-506 Displaying caller information Displaying ANI calling party information Displaying
Features and technical reference ■ ■ ■ ■ 9 Managing multimedia calling ■ ■ ■ ■ 10 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Configuring Avaya MultiVantage for telecommuting Setting up Personal Station Access Creating a station security code Assigning coverage options Setting up call forwarding Assigning an extender password Installing home equipment Setting up remote access Training users Enhancing system security ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 8 Multimedia Applications Server Interface Multimedia Call Handling Understanding the
Volume 1 ■ ■ ■ 12 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 411 Tips for working with trunk groups Adding a CO, FX, or WATS trunk group Adding a DID trunk group Adding a DIOD trunk group Adding a PCOL trunk group Adding a Tie or Access trunk group Setting up digital trunks Adding trunks to a trunk group Removing trunks from a trunk group Removing trunk groups Inserting and absorbing digits Administering answer detection Administering trunks for listed directory numbers 411 414 417 419 420 423 426 430 432 433 434 436 43
Features and technical reference 14 Managing group communication ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 15 Managing data calls ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 16 Types of data connections Data Call Setup Default Dialing Alphanumeric Dialing Data Hotline Data Privacy Data Restriction Data-Only Off-Premises Extensions Data Modules — general Administered Connection Modem Pooling PC Interface Wideband Switching CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Application Interface Setting up CallVisor ASAI Setting up DEFINITY LAN Gateway Collecting bil
Volume 2 17 Administering Media Servers ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Overview G700 Media Gateway administration Media Server administration Call-processing administration SNMP Agents 549 549 549 555 560 564 Volume 2 18 Screen reference ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 555-233-506 AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table Abbreviated Dialing List Access Endpoint Administered Connection Alias Station Alphanumeric Dialing Table Announcements/Audio Sources ARS Toll Table
Features and technical reference ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 12 Daylight Savings Rules DCS to QSIG TSC Gateway screen Dial Plan Analysis Table Dial Plan Parameters Digit Absorption DLG Administration DS1 Circuit Pack Extended Pickup Group Extensions Administered to have an MCT-Control Button Feature Access Code Feature-Related System Parameters Group Paging Using Speakerphone Holiday Table Hospitality Hunt Group Intercom Group Inter-Exchange Carrier
Volume 3 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Music Sources Packet Gateway Board Partition Route Table Personal CO Line Group Pickup Group PRI Endpoint QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway Remote Access Remote Call Coverage Table Remote Office RHNPA Table Route Pattern Security-Related System Parameters Signaling Group Site Data Station System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding System Parameters Country-Options System-Parameters Customer-Options System Parameters OCM Call Classificat
Features and technical reference 20 Phone reference ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 21 Features and technical reference ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 500 telephones 2420 telephones 2500-series telephones 4600-series IP telephones 6200-series telephones 6400-series telephones 7100-series telephones 7300-series telephones 731x-series hybrid telephones 7400-series telephones ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s) 8110 telephones 8400-series telephones CALLMASTER telephones Cordless telephone Inte
Volume 3 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 555-233-506 Busy indicator Busy tone disconnect Busy verification Call charge information Call coverage Call detail recording Call forwarding Call park Call Pickup Call waiting termination Call-by-call service selection Calling party/billing number Calling party number restriction CLAN and processor CLAN QoS and CIDR support Class of restriction Conference Co-Resident DEFINITY Local Area Network Gateway Restric
Features and technical reference ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 16 Loudspeaker paging Malicious Call Trace Misoperation Handling Modem pooling Multiappearance Preselection and Preference Multifrequency signaling Night Service Off-Premises Station PC Interface Personal Station Access Priority Calling Recorded Telephone Dictation Access Remote Access Reset Shift Call Remotely readable electronic phone IDs Ringer Cutoff Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed Sec
Volume 3 GL Glossary and abbreviations 1949 IN Index 2003 555-233-506 Issue 5 October 2002 17
Features and technical reference 18 Issue 5 October 2002 555-233-506
About this document Overview This document describes the October 2002 release of Avaya MultiVantage™ administration, and includes all incremental releases up to and including this release. You may also want to see the Avaya Multivantage™ running on a DEFINITY® Server Change Description to see what is new. This document provides an overall reference for planning, operating, and administering your MultiVantage solution.
About this document The book is divided into three volumes that present information on how to perform administrative tasks, how to complete administrative screens, and more detailed information on individual features. Organization The first volume of this document provides step-by-step tasks for the administrative procedures that implement MultiVantage features. The second volume explains how to fill out MultiVantage screens and defines the values for the fields on the screens.
Using this book ‘‘Setting up telecommuting’’ provides information on switch-wide settings and individual administration for telecommuting. ‘‘Enhancing system security’’ provides information on analyzing and setting up basic system security, preventing toll fraud, using logins and permissions and passwords, and dealing with security violations. ‘‘Managing trunks’’ contains procedures for working with analog and digital trunks.
About this document Task-related information The information for each task is usually presented under the following headings: ■ Task Identifies the administrative procedure and gives a brief explanation of what is accomplished by completing the task. ■ Before you start Lists hardware that must be installed or other tasks that must be completed before starting the task.
New product names New product names Use Table 1 as a reference for new product names as you read this document. Table 1.
About this document Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals for Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions, 555-233-116 Reports for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software, 555-233-505 Upgrades and Additions for Avaya DEFINITY® Server R, 555-233-115 DEFINITY® Enterprise Communications Server Release 1.
Related Sources Maintenance for Avaya DEFINITY® Server R, 555-233-117 Maintenance for Avaya DEFINITY® Server SI, 555-233-123 Avaya DEFINITY® Enterprise Communications Server System Description, 555-233-200 GuestWorks® and Avaya® MultiVantage Enterprise Communications Server Property Management Interface Specifications, 555-231-601 INTUITY AUDIX System Description or INTUITY AUDIX Administration, and INTUITY Messaging Solutions Integration with System 75, Generic 1 and 3, and R5/6 DEFINITY AUDIX System Feat
About this document Avaya MultiVantage™ System Monitoring and Reporting Made Easy Tools for DEFINITY® Media Server Configurations Conventions used in this document Become familiar with the following terms and conventions. They help you use this book with your MultiVantage system. ■ Commands are printed in bold face as follows: command. We show complete commands in this book, but you can usually type an abbreviated version of the command.
Trademarks ■ When a procedure requires you to press ENTER to save your changes, the screen you were working on clears and the cursor returns to the command prompt. The message line shows “command successfully completed” to indicate that the system accepted your changes. Tip: Draws attention to information that you may find helpful. NOTE: Draws attention to information that you must heed. ! CAUTION: Denotes possible harm to software, possible loss of data, or possible service interruptions.
About this document How to get this book on the web If you have internet access, you can view and download the latest version of the Administrator’s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software. To view the book, you must have a copy of Acrobat Reader. To access the latest version: 1. Access the Avaya web site at http://avaya.com 2. Click Support. 3. Click Online Services. 4. Click Documentation. 5. Click Recent Documents. 6. Scroll down to find the latest release of MultiVantage documents. 7.
Tell us what you think — Saumur +33-241-534-000 — UK +44-1483-308-000 — Australia +612-9352-9151 — Hong Kong +852-3121-6423 — Japan +813-5575-8800 — Shanghai +8621-5459-4590 — Singapore +65-872-8686 — Canada 1-800-387-4268 Tell us what you think Let us know what you like or do not like about this book. Although we cannot respond personally to all your feedback, we promise we will read each response we receive. Write to us at: Avaya Inc. Product Documentation Group Room B3-H13 1300 W.
About this document 30 Issue 5 October 2002 555-233-506
System basics This section provides the basic step-by-step procedures you need to manage your Avaya MultiVantage solution. It explains how to log in and log off, set permissions for others who use the administration terminal, set daylight savings rules, set date and time, post messages, and back up the information you administer. Logging into the system You must log in before you can administer your system.
System basics Instructions Logging into the system This procedure provides instructions for logging in from the system terminal not a remote terminal. To log into the system: 1. Enter your login name and press RETURN. 2. Enter your password and press RETURN. For security, your password does not display as you type it. 3. Enter the kind of terminal you have or the type your system emulates and press RETURN. The Command prompt displays.
Accessing the S8700 Media Server ■ If you are on-premises, use an extension number. If you dialed a DID number, dedicated trunk number, or extension, you receive data tone or visually receive answer confirmation. If an LDN was dialed, the attendant will answer. a. Ask to be transferred to the UCD group extension number. You receive data tone or visually receive answer confirmation. b. Transfer the voice call to your data terminal. The Login prompt displays. 2.
System basics Accessing the S8700 Media Server Directly You can access the S8700 Media Server directly by plugging a computer into the services port which defaults to port 2 (Eth1) on the back of the media server. You must use a crossover cable with an RJ45 connector on each end. Plug the other end into the network connector (NIC card) on the your computer. You may need a NIC card adapter.
Accessing the S8700 Media Server Avaya Site Administration To use ASA: 1. You must have a PC or laptop with Avaya™ Site Administration on it. 2. You must be connected over a LAN to either: ■ a dedicated LAN port for service technicians, or ■ a customer LAN port Instructions 1. Start up ASA by double-clicking the ASA icon. 2. In the Target System field, use the pull-down menu to select the desired system.
System basics Table 2. Minimum requirements to run ASA Operating systems MS Windows 95 MS Windows 98 MS Windows NT 4.0 MS Windows 2000 Processor/RAM 486SL/66/16 MB Pentium/32 MB Pentium/64 MB Pentium-class 300 MHz/64 MB Graphics adapter SVGA with minimum screen resolution of 800 x 600 Floppy disk drive 3-1/2 in. 1.44-MB floppy disk drive CD-ROM CD-ROM drive (required to install ASA from CD) Available hard disk space A minimum of 100-MB free hard disk space is required.
Logging in with Access Security Gateway From the ASA CD Place the ASA CD in the CD-ROM drive and follow the installation instructions in the install wizard. From the S8700 Media Server 1. Connect to one of the media servers either directly or through the network from the computer you want ASA to be installed on. 2. Access the media server web interface by typing in the Location/Address field 192.11.13.6 (direct connect) or the IP address or the domain name of the media server (over the network). 3.
System basics Authentication is successful only when Avaya MultiVantage and ASG communicate with a compatible key. You must maintain consistency between the Access Security Gateway Key and the secret key assigned to the Avaya MultiVantage login. For more information about ASG, see ‘‘Using access security gateway’’ on page 393.
Logging off the system Fixing problems When logging in failures occur, if you are a super-user, you can use the list asg-history command to determine the cause. The ASG history log contains the last 100 or 250 records depending on your system. This log contains the date and time, the port mnemonic, the login ID entered (correct or incorrect), and the status for each session attempt. For specific information about the ASG history log, see Reports for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software.
System basics Setting command permissions Avaya MultiVantage allows you to modify the permissions associated with a login. The system maintains default permissions for each level of login, but you may want to further restrict the login, or at least make sure the defaults are appropriate for the user. The default values for these fields vary based on the login type. When set to y, the permissions on the Command Permission Categories screen apply for any object that is not restricted.
Establishing daylight savings rules More information There are 2 types of users — superuser and non-superuser. ■ A superuser provides access to the add, change, display, list, and remove commands for all customer logins and passwords. The superuser can administer any mix of superuser/non-superuser logins. The superuser can administer between 10 and 19 logins depending on your system.
System basics Instructions Establishing daylight savings rules In our example, we set daylight savings time rules. To modify a daylight savings rule: 1. Type change daylight-savings-rules and press RETURN. The Daylight Savings Rules screen displays.
Establishing daylight savings rules e. Type 1:00 in the Increment field. This information specifies the day, month, date, and time and increment at which you want the system clock to transition to daylight saving time. NOTE: You cannot delete a daylight savings rule if it is in use on either the Locations or Date and Time screens. However, you can change any rule except rule 0 (zero). 3. Complete the Stop fields for rule 1. a. Type Sunday in the Change Day field. b. Type October in the Month field. c.
System basics Before you start Before you can set the date and time, you need to know whether it is currently daylight savings or standard time and know which daylight savings rule number you want to use. Daylight savings rule numbers are located on the Daylight Savings Rule screen. Setting the system date and time In our example, we set the date and time to Tuesday, November 5 at 8:30 p.m. standard time. To set the system date and time: 1. Type set time and press RETURN.
Setting time of day clock synchronization 4. Press ENTER to save your changes. NOTE: When you change the date or time, some display phones may not automatically refresh the display. If this occurs, have each user press the date/time button on their phone to update the display. Displaying the system date and time To display the system date and time: 1. Type display time and press RETURN. The Date and Time screen displays. Verify the information you entered is correct.
System basics The following systems use Avaya™ Site Administration (ASA) for time synchronization. ■ DEFINITY R ■ DEFINITY CSI ■ DEFINITY SI Before you start ■ A standard TCP/IP LAN connection is required to connect to the Internet time servers. If a LAN connection is not available, time sync will be done by setting the platform clock manually through the command line or web interface. ■ You can set the following NTP/SNTP configuration information.
Setting time of day clock synchronization The Fault & Performance icons display.
System basics 3. Click Time Synchronization. The Time Synchronization - Properties screen displays. 4. Click in the “Offset” box. The Plus and Minus radio buttons and the Hours and Minutes fields display.
Setting time of day clock synchronization 5. Click NEXT. The Time Synchronization - Properties screen displays. 6. Click Plus to add hours to the remote station (located to the west of the system time) or click Minus to subtract hours to the remote station (located to the east of the system time). 7. In the hours field, enter the number of hours to be added or subtracted to synchronize with the remote site.
System basics 8. Click NEXT. The Time Synchronization - Schedule displays.
Setting time of day clock synchronization 9. Select either: ■ “Run Now” to run this program immediately and click NEXT. ■ “Schedule this task to run” and check the field below to determine if the default setting is satisfactory. If this setting is not satisfactory, click SCHEDULE. The Scheduler screen displays. 10. In the Date field, highlight each object and use the pull-down menu to select the desired setting. 11.
System basics 15. Click NEXT. The Time Synchronization - Summary displays. 16. If the time synchronization description is satisfactory, click FINISH. If the time synchronization is not satisfactory, click BACK and revise the necessary information. Related topics See Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD Call Centers, for more information about using time of day clock synchronization.
Using the bulletin board Using the bulletin board Avaya MultiVantage allows you to post information to the bulletin board. You can also display and print messages from other switch administrators and Avaya personnel using the bulletin board. Anyone with the appropriate permissions can use the bulletin board for messages. Only one user can post or change a message at a time. Whenever you log in, the system alerts you if you have any messages on the bulletin board and the date of the latest message.
System basics Posting a message In our example, we post a message to the bulletin board about a problem with a new trunk group, and an Avaya representative replies to our message. To post a message to the bulletin board: 1. Type change bulletin-board and press RETURN. The Bulletin Board screen displays. There are three pages of message space within the bulletin board. The first page has 19 lines, but you can only enter text on lines 11-19.
Saving translations Saving translations NOTE: An alternate method of saving (backing up) and restoring translations is available for S8100 Media Server with a CMC1. See ‘‘Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server only)’’ on page 58. Avaya MultiVantage retains all translation data in memory while the system is operating. If the switch goes down, you lose all translation data. You must save in-memory translation data to the memory card (flash ROM), disk, or tape.
System basics An attempt to initialize (boot) the system with translations that do not contain the same identification number as stored in the processor circuit pack raises a major alarm and disables access to the save translations command for all non-Avaya logins. You also receive a warning message on the copyright screen notifying you of the mismatch. Contact your Avaya representative to correct this mismatch and reset the save translations command.
Saving translations More information When mass storage system (‘‘MSS’’) devices on both processors in a duplex system are specified, translation data is saved from the active processor to the active and standby MSS devices at the same time. If the save to one device fails or one device is out of service, the other save continues. You receive the status of each save separately.
System basics Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server only) The following are web interface procedures: 1. Open internet explorer. 2. Enter http:// in the address area of the web browser. The DEFINITY ONE Home page displays: 3. Click Administer System. The login screen displays: Enter your login ID and password. The login ID must have the correct backup permissions and be a member of the S8100 Media Server Administrator’s login group. The Notice screen displays: 4. Click Continue.
Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server only) From the backup and restore main menu, you can: ■ Perform immediate backups ■ Schedule multiple backups ■ Restore backups ■ Access last scheduled backup information ■ View contents of backup location NOTE: As you navigate the backup and restore screens, the main menu items remain available. If you are using the Web, use the Back button to return to previous screens. Perform immediate backup 1.
System basics After you click Backup, the following screen displays: Viewing backup progress 1. To view backup progress, click View Backup Progress.
Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server only) Backing up to a LAN address You can back up your data to a LAN address using the Other locations feature. To back up data to a LAN address: 1. Click Other locations. Click Other locations. The following screen displays: 2. Enter LAN location information. 3. Click Verify.
System basics The following screen displays: 4. Click Continue to return to the Immediate backup screen. 5. Select items to back up and select Backup. Viewing scheduled backups To view scheduled backups: 1. Click Scheduled Backups. The following screen displays: From this screen, you can add, edit, or delete scheduled backups. NOTE: The backup feature can be disabled and later enabled to allow you to perform another function. If disabled, the current schedules remain intact.
Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server only) Adding a new scheduled backup (multiple backup schedules) To add a new scheduled backup to the list: 1. On the Current list of scheduled backup jobs screen, click Add new schedule. The following screen displays: 2. Select backup destination either to a LAN address or a PCMCIA Flash Disk. 3. Select items for scheduled backup. 4. Select a day and time for the backup. 5. Click Submit.
System basics Changing a scheduled backup 1. To change an existing scheduled backup, click Scheduled Backups. The Current List of scheduled backup jobs displays: 2. Click the pencil symbol next to the scheduled backup you want to change. The Changing this backup schedule displays: 3. Make any changes as appropriate, and click Submit. The Current list of scheduled backups displays. The changes are activated.
Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server only) Checking Scheduled Backup Status 1. To review previous backups, click Last scheduled backup results. The following screen displays: Checking the contents of a backup 1. To view contents click Contents of backup location. The following screen displays: 2. Scroll to the location of backup contents and click Display or click Other locations.
System basics The following screen displays: Perform restore 1. Click Restore. The following screen displays: 2. Select the restore source from the Source pull down menu. The source is the media and/or location of the backup data. It could be a network or shared drive location, or the pcmcia flash card. 3. Select items to restore.
Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server only) 4. Click Restore. The following screen displays: 5. After the restore is completed, reboot the system. NOTE: A reboot is required. The restored stations will not be used if the S8100 Media Server is not rebooted.
System basics 68 Issue 5 October 2002 555-233-506
Introduction to the MultiVantage system This section provides you with general information about Avaya MultiVantage and some of the system-wide functions. It explains how to understand your configuration, read and use your dial plan, and shows you how to make simple changes such as adding extension ranges. This section also explains how to assign feature access codes (‘‘FAC’’).
Introduction to the MultiVantage system SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Board Number Board Type Code 01A05 01A06 01B05 DIGITAL LINE ANALOG LINE ANALOG LINE TN754B 000002 TN742 000010 TN746B 000008 01C04 ANALOG LINE TN746B 000008 01C05 DIGITAL LINE TN2224 000004 01C06 01C10 HYBRID LINE DIGITAL LINE TN762B 000004 TN754 000004 Vintage Assigned Ports u=unassigned t=tti p=psa 01 01 u u u u 01 u u 01 u u 02 u u u u u u u 02 u 03 03 u u u u u u u u u u 04 u u u u 04 u u u u 05 u u u u u u u u u u u u u u
Understanding the dial plan Understanding the dial plan Your dial plan tells your system how to interpret dialed digits. For example, if you dial 9 on your system to access an outside line, it is actually the dial plan that tells the system to find an external trunk when a dialed string begins with a 9. The dial plan also tells the system how many digits to expect for certain calls. For example, the dial plan may indicate that all internal extensions are 4-digit numbers that start with 1 or 2.
Introduction to the MultiVantage system ■ Dial access code (dac) — Allows you to use trunk access codes (‘‘TAC’’) and feature access codes (FAC) in the same range. For example, you could define the group 100–199, which would allow both FAC and TAC in that range. Dial access codes can start with any number from 1 to 9, * and #, and contain up to 4 digits. In our example figure, dial access codes begin with 1 and must be 3 digits long.
Understanding the dial plan 5. Type dac in the Call Type Column. 6. Press ENTER to save your changes. Adding extension ranges You may find that as your needs grow you want a new set of extensions. Before you can assign a station to an extension, the extension must belong to a range that is defined in the dial plan. We will add a new set of extensions that start with 3 and are 4 digits long (3000–3999). To add this set of extensions to the dial plan: 1. Type change dialplan analysis and press RETURN.
Introduction to the MultiVantage system To add a FAC range from 30–39: 1. Type change dialplan analysis and press RETURN. The ‘‘Dial Plan Analysis Table’’ on page 748 appears. 2. Move the cursor to an empty row. 3. Type 3 in the Dialed String column. Press TAB to move to the next field. 4. Type 2 in the Total Length Column. Press TAB to move to the next field. 5. Type fac in the Call Type Column. 6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Controlling the calls your users can make and receive Controlling the calls your users can make and receive The Avaya MultiVantage provides several ways for you to restrict the types of calls your users can make, and the features that they can access. You use Class of Restriction (‘‘COR’’) to define the types of calls your users can place and receive. Your system may have only a single COR, a COR with no restrictions, or as many CORs as necessary to effect the desired restrictions.
Introduction to the MultiVantage system Before you start ■ Be sure that Change COR by FAC field is set to y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Note that you cannot have both Change COR by FAC and Tenant Partitioning enabled. ■ Be sure that each user (who you want to allow to change a COR) has a class of service with console permissions. For more information about console permissions, refer to ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672.
Controlling the features your users can access Controlling the features your users can access The Avaya MultiVantage offers a wide range of features and functions. Some of these you can administer differently from one user to the next. For example, you can give one user a certain set of phone buttons, and the next user a completely different set, depending on what each person needs to get his/her job done. You decide on these things as you administer the phones for these individuals.
Introduction to the MultiVantage system Changing feature parameters You can modify the system parameters that are associated with some of the system features. For example, you can use the system parameters to allow music to play if callers are on hold or to allow trunk-to-trunk transfers on the system. Generally, Avaya sets your system parameters when your system is installed. However, you can change these parameters as your organization’s needs change.
Administering treatment for denied or invalid calls Administering treatment for denied or invalid calls You can administer your system to reroute denied or invalid calls to an announcement, the attendant, or to another extension. Instructions In this example, we want: ■ all outward restricted call attempts to route to an announcement at extension 2040 ■ all incoming calls that are denied to route to the attendant ■ all invalid dialed numbers to route to an announcement at extension 2045 1.
Introduction to the MultiVantage system Setting up Music-on-Hold Music-on-Hold automatically provides music to a caller placed on hold. Providing music lets the caller know that the connection is still active. The system does not provide music to callers in a multiple-party connection who are in queue, on hold, or parked. Before you start You need to determine the music source you will use, and obtain the necessary circuit pack.
Setting up Music-on-Hold 2. In the Music/Tone On Hold field, type music. The Port field appears. 3. In the Port field, type 6040. This is the port address of the music source. 4. In the Music (or Silence) on Transferred Trunk Calls, type all. 5. Press ENTER to save your changes. 6. Now administer a class of restriction with Hear System Music on Hold set to y, to allow your local users to hear music on hold.
Introduction to the MultiVantage system Providing service for multiple tenants If you manage the switching system for an entire office building, you may need to provide individualized phone service for each of the firms who are tenants. You can set up your system so that each tenant can have its own attendant, and can chose to have music or play special announcements while callers are on hold.
Providing service for multiple tenants 3. Move to Source 3, and enter music for the Type, 01A1003 for the Port, and Classical for the Description. 4. Press ENTER to save your changes. 5. Type change tenant 1 and press RETURN. The Tenant screen appears. Tenant 18 Tenant Description: ________________________________________ Attendant Group: 1 Ext Alert Port (TAAS): _______ Ext Alert (TAAS) Extension: ____ Night Destination: _____ Music Source: 1 6. In the Tenant Description field, type Dentist.
Introduction to the MultiVantage system Receiving notification in an emergency If one of your users calls an emergency service such as the police or ambulance, someone, perhaps the receptionist, security or the front desk, needs to know who made the call. Thus, when the emergency personnel arrive, they can be directed to the right place. You can set up the switch to alert the attendant and up to ten other extensions whenever an end-user dials an emergency number.
Receiving notification in an emergency ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE Location: all Percent Full: 6 Dialed Total Route Call Node ANI String Min Max Pattern Type Num Reqd 5555_____________ 4_ 4_ 1____ alrt ___ n _________________ __ __ _____ ____ ___ n _________________ __ __ _____ ____ ___ n _________________ __ __ _____ ____ ___ n _________________ __ __ _____ ____ ___ n _________________ __ __ _____ ____ ___ n _________________ __ __ _____ ____ ___ n _________________ __ __ _____ ____ ___ n ________________
Introduction to the MultiVantage system Finally, we make sure that all security personnel and the attendant will have to acknowledge the alert. 11. Type change system-parameters crisis-alert and press RETURN. The ‘‘Crisis Alert System Parameters’’ screen appears. 12. Go to the Every User Responds field and type y. 13. Press ENTER to save your changes. More information Attendants cancel an alert by pressing the crisis alert button three times.
Notifying a digital pager of an emergency For information about updating station location information without having to change the USA 911 system’s Automatic Location Identification database, see Emergency Location extension field in ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127. For information on how to administer IP phones to make emergency calls, see ‘‘Setting up emergency calls on IP phones’’ on page 114.
Introduction to the MultiVantage system 4. In the Crisis Alert Code field, type 911. This is the number used to call the crisis alert pager. 5. In the Retries field, type 5. This is the number of additional times the system tries to send out the alert message in case of an unsuccessful attempt. 6. In the Retry Interval (sec) field, type 30. This is length of time between retries. 7. In the Main Number field, type the number that is to be displayed at the end of the pager message. We’ll type 303-555-0800.
Fiber link administration Automatic callback if an extension is busy You can allow users to request that the system call them back if they call a user whose telephone is busy. See ‘‘Automatic callback’’ on page 1486. Automatic hold You can set a system-wide parameter that allows your users to initiate a call on a second line without putting the first call on Hold. This is called Automatic Hold, and you enable it on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
Introduction to the MultiVantage system 90 Issue 5 October 2002 555-233-506
Managing phones This section explains how to add, swap, upgrade, and remove different kinds of phones on your system. This section also gives you tips for customizing your own phone (for system administration) so it has the feature buttons you need for many administration and troubleshooting tasks. Most of the information applies to traditional Digital Communications Protocol (DCP) phones, and headings specifically state that certain procedures apply to IP (internet protocol) phones.
Managing phones Before you start On the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, be sure the Customer Telephone Activation (CTA) Enabled field is y and the TTI Enabled field is y. Complete the station screen for the new phone and type x in the port field. Note that the phone type must match the board type. For example, match a two-wire digital phone with a port on a two-wire digital circuit pack. Use this procedure with all circuit-switched phones except BRI (ISDN) and model 7103A.
Adding new phones If you misdial and the wrong extension is activated for the phone you are using, use the terminal translation initialization (TTI) unmerge feature access code to “uninstall” the phone before you try again. See “TTI separation from a telephone” for more information.
Managing phones SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Board Number Board Type Code Assigned Ports Vintage u=unassigned t=tti p=psa 01A05 01A06 01B05 DIGITAL LINE ANALOG LINE ANALOG LINE TN754B 000002 TN742 000010 TN746B 000008 01C04 ANALOG LINE TN746B 000008 01C05 DIGITAL LINE TN2224 000004 01C06 01C10 HYBRID LINE DIGITAL LINE TN762B 000004 TN754 000004 01 01 u u u u 01 u u 01 u u 02 u u u u u u u 02 u 03 03 u u u u u u u u u u 04 u u u u 04 u u u u 05 u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u 07 u u
Adding new phones Physically connecting the phone Once you have collected all the information, you are ready to physically wire the port to the cross-connect field. If you have an Avaya representative or on-site technician who completes the physical connections, you need to notify them that you are ready to add the phone to the system. To request that Avaya install the new connections, call your Avaya representative to place an order.
Managing phones STATION Extension: Type: Port: Name: Lock Messages? 2345 6480D+ Security Code: _______________ Coverage Path 1: _____________________ Coverage Path 2: Hunt-to Station: STATION OPTIONS Loss Group: Data Module? Speakerphone: Display Language: none n 2-way english n _________ ____ ____ ________ BCC: TN: COR: COS: _ 1_ 1 1 Personalized Ringing Pattern: 1 Message Lamp Ext: 2345 Mute Button Enabled? y MM Complex Data Ext: IP SoftPhone? n 2.
Using templates to add phones To duplicate an existing phone: 1. Type display station nnnn and press RETURN. nnnn is the extension of the station screen you want to duplicate to use as a template. Verify that this extension is the one you want to duplicate. 2. Press CANCEL to return to the command prompt. 3. Type duplicate station nnnn and press RETURN, where nnnn is the extension you want to duplicate. The system displays a blank Duplicate Station screen. Ext.
Managing phones Using an alias Not every phone model or device has a unique station screen in the system. You might have to use an available model as an “alias” for another. If you need to enter a phone type that the system does not recognize or support, use an alias. Defining aliases is also a useful method to identify items that act as analog stations on the switch, such as a fax machine, a modem, or other analog device.
Customizing your phone ALIAS STATION Alias Set Type Supported Set Type 6220 2500 modem 2500 _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ’#’ indicates previously aliased set type is now native Now you can follow the instructions for adding a new phone (or adding a fax or modem). Your switch now recognizes the new type (6220 or modem) that you enter in the Type field.
Managing phones Once you select a phone, you’ll want to determine if you want to place this phone at your desk or in the switch room. If the phone is in the switch room (near the system administration terminal), you can quickly add or remove feature buttons to test features and facilities. You may decide that you want a phone at both your desk and in the switch room — it’s up to you. You may also find it handy to set up multiple phones for testing applications and features before you provide them to users.
Swapping phones Swapping phones You will often find that you need to move or swap phones. For example, employees moving from one office to another may want to bring their phones. In this case, you can use X ports to easily swap the phones. In general, to swap one phone (phone A) with another phone (B), you change phone A’s port assignment to x, change phone B’s port assignment to A’s old port, and, finally, change the x for phone A to B’s old port.
Managing phones Using ACTR to move phones Automatic Customer Telephone Rearrangement (ACTR) allows a phone to be unplugged from one location and moved to a new location without additional switch administration. The switch automatically associates the extension to the new port. ACTR works with 6400 Serialized phones and to the 2420 phones. The 6400 Serialized phone is stamped with the word “Serialized” on the faceplate for easy identification.
Using ACTR to move phones Call processing When a phone is unplugged while on a call, and a 6400 Serialized phone or a 2420 phone that is administered for automatic moves is plugged into the port within 60 seconds: ■ both extensions are placed in idle state ■ active calls on either extension are dropped, unless the call is active on a bridged appearance at some other phone ■ held calls remain in a hold state ■ any calls ringing on either extension instantly proceed to the next point in coverage or s
Managing phones change station 1014 Page 2 of X STATION FEATURE OPTIONS LWC Reception? LWC Activation? LWC Log External Calls? CDR Privacy? Redirect Notification? Per Button Ring Control? Bridged Call Alerting? Active Station Ringing: H.
Using TTI to move phones removing the feature access code (FAC) from the system when it does not need to be used (for example, there are no moves going on at present). Consult the Avaya Products Security Handbook for additional steps to secure your system and find out about obtaining information regularly about security developments. Before you start Before you can merge a telephone, you must set the TTI State field to voice on the Feature-Related System-Parameters screen.
Managing phones 2. Dial the TTI security code from the telephone you want to merge. — If the code is correct, you receive dial tone. — If the code is not correct, you receive intercept tone. 3. Dial the extension of the telephone you want to merge. — If the extension is valid, you receive confirmation tone, which may be followed by dial tone. (It is possible to receive intercept tone immediately following the confirmation tone. If this happens, you need to attempt the merge again.
Using TTI to move phones Fixing problems If you are having difficulty using TTI, you may want to review the following system restrictions: ■ The TTI Ports field on the System Capacity screen shows the number of TTI ports used in a switch. This field shows only the number of TTI ports being administered. If a TTI exceeds the maximum number of ports, the port is not administered and cannot be added. In that case, a telephone cannot be added. BRI endpoints are only counted as one TTI port.
Managing phones Removing phones Before you physically remove a phone from your system, check the phone’s status, remove it from any group or usage lists, and then delete it from the system’s memory. For example, to remove a phone at extension 1234: 1. Type status station 1234 and press RETURN. The General Status screen appears. 2.
Adding a fax or modem 11. Type remove station 1234 and press RETURN. The system displays the station screen for this phone so you can verify that you are removing the correct phone. Tip: Be sure to record the port assignment for this jack in case you want to use it again later. 12. If this is the correct phone, press ENTER. If the system responds with an error message, the phone is busy or still belongs to a group. Press CANCEL to stop the request, correct the problem, and enter remove station 1234 again.
Managing phones For this example, let us assume that we have already defined an alias for ‘fax’ as a 2500 and that we now want to add a fax machine to extension 4444. To add a fax machine as extension 444, complete the following steps: 1. Type add station 4444 and press RETURN. 2. In the Type field, type fax. 3. In the Port field, type the port address. 4. In the Name field, type a name to associate with this fax. 5. Move to the Data Restriction field and type y.
Adding an IP Telephone Before you start Verify the system has a: ■ TN2302 IP Media Processor circuit pack for audio capability ■ TN799 Control-LAN circuit pack for signaling capability (for Servers R, CSI, and SI only) Be sure that your system has been enabled to use IP Telephones.
Managing phones 3. In the Security Code field, enter a password for the IP phone user. NOTE: Although the system accepts a null password, the IP phone will not work unless you assign a password. 4. Press ENTER to save your work. Changing from dual-connect to single-connect IP phones When you have a dual extension phone and you upgrade to a single extension phone, you can remove the connection that is no longer used for that phone. To remove the H.
Adding an IP Telephone 3. Type list groups-of-extension 1234 and press RETURN. The Extension Group Membership screen shows whether the extension is a member of any groups on the system. 4. Press CANCEL. 5. If the extension belongs to a group, access the group screen and delete the extension from that group. For example, if extension 1234 belongs to pickup group 2, type change pickup group 2 and delete the extension from the list. 6. Type list usage extension 1234 and press RETURN.
Managing phones Tasks Setting up emergency calls on IP phones Set up which “calling number” to send to the public safety access point when an emergency call is placed from an IP phone. Instructions You use the Station screen to set up emergency call handling options for IP phones. As an example, we’ll administer the option that prevents emergency calls from an IP phone. To prevent an emergency call from an IP phone: 1.
Adding an IP Softphone Adding an IP Softphone Avaya IP Softphones enable the end user to control telephone calls directly from a personal computer (PC). An end user can log into your company’s MultiVantage server remotely and make and receive telephone calls from the telephone extension. Avaya IP Softphone supports the following two configurations: ■ road-warrior application You typically use this configuration for laptop users who are travelling.
Managing phones Once you’re finished administering your MultiVantage system, you need to install the IP Softphone software on each user’s PC. Instructions for adding a road-warrior application You can use the road-warrior application when you have only a single telephone line available to access the MultiVantage system over the IP network. You also can “take over” an IP phone. Typically you would not have a different extension for your softphone.
Adding an IP Softphone Now, you need to administer the phone (DCP) extension. To do so, complete the following steps: 1. Type add station 3001 and press RETURN. The Station screen appears. Note that you choose to change an existing DCP extension by using change station nnnn in this step, where nnnn is the existing DCP extension.
Managing phones Fixing problems Problem Possible causes Solutions Display characters on the phone can not be recognized. Microsoft Windows is not set to use Eurofont characters. Set the Microsoft Windows operating system to use Eurofont. Instructions for adding a telecommuter application Assign this configuration to remote users who have two available phone lines. For example, to administer a telecommuter application for a home user at extension 3010, complete the following steps: 1.
Setting up remote office Related topics See the ‘‘Internet Protocol (IP) Softphones’’ on page 1444 for descriptions of the IP Softphone configurations. See the online help and to Avaya IP Softphone Overview and Troubleshooting for customer information on Avaya IP Softphone applications. This document is a Portable Document Format (PDF) document that is located in the Overview Document folder on the Avaya IP Softphone CD.
Managing phones Adding remote office to Avaya MultiVantage Solution In our example, we’ll set up a remote office location using Avaya R300 Remote Office Communicator hardware in our branch office in Santa Fe. We’ll add a new node, and set up the signaling group and trunk group. Adding a node Instructions To add the remote office node to MULTIVANTAGE: 1. Type change node-names IP and press RETURN. The Node Name screen appears.
Setting up remote office 5. Type add remote office and the number for this remote office, and press RETURN. The remote office screen appears. add remote-office 6 Page 1 of 1 REMOTE OFFICE 6 Node Name: Network Region: Location: Site Data: Remote Office 6 22 1 Contact: Joe Smith Phone: xxx-yyy-zzz _______________________________ Screen 2. Remote Office 6. Fill in the following fields: ■ Node Name - match the name on the IP Node Names screen.
Managing phones Before you start Perform ‘‘Setting up a signaling group’’ on page 122. To set up the trunk group for your remote office: 1. Type add trunk group 6. The Trunk Group screen appears.
Setting up remote office Instructions Set up the signaling group for remote office: 1. Type add signaling-group and the number of the group you want to add. The signaling group screen appears. add signaling-group 6 Page 1 of 5 SIGNALING GROUP Group Number 6 Group Type: Remote Office? H.
Managing phones Setting up remote office on network regions Now we will set up a network region and show the connections between regions. Instructions Set up network region 1: 1. Type add ip-network-region 1 and press ENTER. The IP Network Region screen appears.
Setting up remote office change ip-network-region 1 Page 2 of 2 Inter Network Region Connection Management Region 001-032 033-064 065-096 097-128 129-160 161-192 193-224 225-250 1 1 _ _ _ _ _ 6 _ 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ _ _ 5 _ _ _ _ 4 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 6 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 7 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 8 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 9 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 0 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 4 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (Group of 5 6 7 8 9 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Managing phones Instructions 1. Type add station nnnn and press ENTER, where nnnn is the extension you are adding. The station screen appears.
2420 DCP telephone 2420 DCP telephone Downloading firmware to a 2420 DCP telephone You can copy updated application code into ACP via TFTP over a TCP/IP connection. This eliminates the need to physically remove the telephone and send it to the factory for the firmware update. This feature is available on all Avaya MultiVantage platforms. Before you start 1. Type change node-name ip and press ENTER. The IP Node Names screen appears. 2.
Managing phones 4. In the TFTP Server Node Name field, enter the valid TFTP server node name from the IP Nodes Names screen. 5. In the TFTP Server Port field, enter the TFTP server port number from where the file download begins. 6. In the File to Retrieve field, enter the name of the file to be retrieved. 7. Press ENTER to save your changes. The file transfer begins. 8. Enter display tftp-server and press ENTER to view the status of the file transfer.
Managing phone features This section provides generic instructions for adding any feature button. Because you may need more information to decide which feature buttons you want to assign to a user or group of users, we included the Telephone feature buttons table in this section. This table lists all of the feature buttons that are available on the Avaya MultiVantage solution.
Managing phone features Instructions To assign feature buttons: 1. Type change station nnnn and press ENTER, where nnnn is the extension for the phone you want to modify. The Station screen appears. 2. Press NEXT PAGE until you locate the Feature Button Assignment fields. Some phones have several feature button groups. Make sure that you are changing the correct button.
Telephone feature buttons Telephone feature buttons The following table provides descriptions of the feature buttons that you can administer on multiappearance telephones. It also lists the administrable software names and recommended button label names. Display buttons support telephones equipped with alphanumeric displays. Note that some buttons may require 1-lamp or 2-lamp buttons. Some buttons are not allowed on some systems and on some phones. Table 3.
Managing phone features Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label ac-alarm aca-halt Description Maximum AC Alarm Administered Connection alarm notification: allows the user to monitor when the number of failures for an administered connection has met the specified threshold. 1 per station Auto-Ckt Assure Automatic Circuit Assurance (display button): allows users of display telephones to identify trunk malfunctions.
Telephone feature buttons Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label alt-frl Description Maximum Alt FRL Alternate Facility Restriction Level (‘‘FRL’’): activates or deactivates an alternate facility restriction level for the extension. 1 per system ani-requst ANI Request Automatic Number Identification Request: allows the user to display the calling party’s number from incoming trunks during the voice state of call. The trunk must support this functionality.
Managing phone features Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label Description Maximum auto-cback Auto CallBack Automatic Call Back: when activated, allows inside user who placed a call to a busy or unanswered telephone to be called back automatically when the called telephone becomes available to receive a call. 1 per station auto-icom (Group: __) Auto (name or ext #) Automatic Intercom: places a call to the station associated with the button.
Telephone feature buttons Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name brdg-appr (Btn: __ Ext: ___) Button label (extension) Description Maximum Bridged Call Appearance: provides an appearance of another user’s extension on this telephone. For example, an assistant might have a bridged appearance of their supervisor’s extension. The bridged appearance button functions exactly like the original call appearance, for instance it indicates when the appearance is active or ringing.
Managing phone features Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name busy-ind (TAC/Ext: __) Button label Busy Description Maximum Busy Indication: indicates the busy or idle status of an extension, trunk group, terminating extension group (‘‘TEG’’), hunt group, or loudspeaker paging zone. Users can press the busy-ind button to dial the specified extension. 1 per TAC/Ext You can assign this button to any lamp button and must specify which Trunk or extension the user wants to monitor.
Telephone feature buttons Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label Description Maximum cas-backup CAS Backup Centralized Attendant Service Backup: used to redirect all ‘‘CAS’’ calls to a backup extension in the local branch if all RLTs are out-of-service or maintenance busy. The associated status lamp indicates if CAS is in the backup mode.
Managing phone features Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label Description Maximum conf-dsp Conference Display Allows a user to display information about each party of a conference call. This button can be assigned to stations and attendant consoles. 1 per station consult Consult The Consult button allows a covering user, after answering a coverage call, to call the principal (called party) for private consultation.
Telephone feature buttons Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label crss-alert Crisis Description Maximum Crisis Alert (display button): provide this button to the telephones or consoles that you want to notify when any user makes an emergency call. (You define which calls are emergency calls on the AAR/ARS Analysis screen by setting the Call Type to alrt.
Managing phone features Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label directory Directory Description Maximum Directory (display button): allows users with display telephones to access the system directory, use the touch-tone buttons to key in a name, and retrieve an extension from the directory. The directory contains the names and extensions that you have assigned to the telephones administered in your system.
Telephone feature buttons Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label exclusion Exclusion Description Maximum Exclusion: allows multiappearance telephone users to keep other users with appearances of the same extension from bridging onto an existing call. 1 per station If the user press the EXCLUSION button while other users are already bridged onto the call, the other users are dropped. There are two means of activating exclusion.
Managing phone features Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label flash goto-cover Description Maximum Flash 1) Allows a station on a trunk call with Trunk Flash to send a Trunk Flash signal to the far end (e.g., Central Office); 2) allows a station on a CAS main call to send a Trunk Flash signal over the connected RLT trunk back to the branch to conference or transfer the call.
Telephone feature buttons Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name in-call-id (Type: __ Grp: ___) Button label Coverage (group #, type, name, or ext #) Description Maximum The Coverage Incoming Call Identification (‘‘ICI’’) button allows a member of a coverage answer group or hunt group to identify an incoming call to that group even though the member does not have a display telephone.
Managing phone features Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label link-alarm (link# ___) Description Maximum Link Failure (link #) Link Alarm: associated status lamp indicates that a failure has occurred on one of the Processor Interface circuit pack data links. Link: Link number — 1 to 8 for multi-carrier cabinets or 1 to 4 for single-carrier cabinets.
Telephone feature buttons Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label man-overid (TOD: _) Immediate Override Description Maximum Immediate Manual Override (display button): allows the user (on a system with Time of Day Routing) to temporarily override the routing plan and use the specified ‘‘TOD’’ routing plan. 1 per station TOD: specify the routing plan the user wants to follow in override situations.
Managing phone features Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name mct-contr Button label MCT Control Description Maximum Malicious Call Trace Control: allows the user to take control of a malicious call trace request. Once the user becomes the MCT controller, the system stops notifying other MCT control extensions of the MCT request.
Telephone feature buttons Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label mm-call Description Maximum MM Call Multimedia Call: used to indicate a call is to be a multimedia call. 1 per station mm-cfwd MM CallFwd Multimedia Call Forward: used to activate forwarding of multimedia calls as multimedia calls, not as voice calls.
Managing phone features Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label noans-alrt Description Maximum RONA Redirection on No Answer Alert: indicates a Redirection on No Answer timeout has occurred for the split. 1 per hunt group no-hld-cnf No Hold Conference No Hold Conference: can automatically conference another party while continuing the existing call.
Telephone feature buttons Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label print-msgs Description Maximum Print Msgs Print Messages: allows users to print messages for any extension by pressing the button and entering the extension and a security code. 1 per station priority Priority Call Priority Calling: allows a user to place priority calls or change an existing call to a priority call.
Managing phone features Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label send-calls (Ext: ___) Description Maximum Send All Calls Send All Calls allows users to temporarily direct all incoming calls to coverage regardless of the assigned call-coverage redirection criteria. Assign to a lamp button. 1 per station send-term Send All Calls-TEG Send All Calls For Terminating Extension Group: allows the user to forward all calls directed to a terminating extension group.
Telephone feature buttons Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label trk-ac-alm Description Maximum FTC Alarm Facility Test Call Alarm: associated status lamp lights when a successful Facility Test Call (‘‘FTC’’) occurs. 1 per station trk-id Trunk ID Trunk Identification (display button): identifies the tac (trunk access code) and trunk member number associated with a call.
Managing phone features Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued) Button name Button label voa-repeat vu-display (format: __ ID: __) Description Maximum VOA repeat VDN of Origin Announcement. VDN of Origin Announcement must be enabled. 1 per station VuStats # VuStats Display: allows the agent to specify a display format for the statistics. If you assign a different VuStats display format to each button, the agent can use the buttons to access different statistics.
Adding abbreviated dialing lists Adding abbreviated dialing lists Abbreviated dialing is sometimes called speed dialing. It allows you to dial a short code in place of an extension or phone number. When you dial abbreviated-dialing codes or press abbreviated-dialing buttons, you access stored numbers from special lists.
Managing phone features 2. Enter a number (in multiples of 5) in the Size field. This number defines the number of entries on your dialing list. For example, if you have 8 phone numbers you want to store in the list, type 10 in the Size field. 3. If you want another user to be able to add numbers to this list, enter their extension in the Program Ext field. For example, if you want the user at 4567 to be able to change group list 3, enter 4567 in this field. 4.
Adding abbreviated dialing lists 5. Press ENTER to save your changes. The user at extension 4567 can now use this list by dialing the feature access code for the list and the dial code for the number they want to dial. Alternatively, you can assign an abbreviated dialing button to this station that allows the user press one button to dial a specific stored number on one of their three assigned abbreviated lists. Fixing problems Problem A user cannot access a dial list.
Managing phone features Problem Possible causes A user complains that using an abbreviated dial list dials the wrong number. ■ The user could be using the wrong dial code. ■ The dial code could be defined incorrectly. Solutions 1. Ask the user what number they dialed or button they pressed to determine which list and dial code they attempted to call. 2. Access the dialing list and verify that the number stored for the specific dial code corresponds to the number the user wanted to dial.
Setting up bridged call appearances Setting up bridged call appearances Think of a bridged call appearance as a phone (the primary set) with an extension (the bridged-to appearance). Both phones can be used to call in and out and both show when a line is in use. A call to the primary phone is bridged to a specific appearance, or button, on the secondary phone. The secondary phone retains all its functions, and a specific button is dedicated as the bridged-to appearance from the primary phone.
Managing phone features 4. Press NEXT PAGE until Per Button Ring Control appears (digital sets only). ■ If you want to assign ringing separately to each bridged appearance, type y. ■ If you want all bridged appearances to either ring or not ring, leave the default n. 5. Move to Bridge Call Alerting. If you want the bridged appearance to ring when a call arrives at the primary phone, type y. Otherwise, leave the default n. 6. Complete the appropriate field for your phone type. If. . . Then. . .
Setting up bridged call appearances STATION SITE DATA Room: _______ Jack: _____ Cable: _____ Floor: _______ Building: _______ Headset? n Speaker? n Mounting: d Cord Length: 0 Set Color: ______ ABBREVIATED DIALING List1: ________ BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS 1: brdg-appr Btn: 1: brdg-appr Btn: List2: ________ Ext: Ext: List3: ________ Ring: Ring: Screen 4. Station screen (digital set) 8. Enter the primary phone’s button number that you want to assign as the bridged call appearance.
Managing phone features ■ Visitor telephones An executive may have another telephone in their office that is to be used by visitors. It may be desirable that the visitor be able to bridge onto a call that is active on the executive’s primary extension number. A bridged call appearance makes this possible. ■ Service environments It may be necessary that several people be able to handle calls to a particular extension number.
Setting up Terminal Self Administration For example, to assign a security code of 12345678 to extension 4234, complete the following steps: 1. Type change station 4234 and press RETURN. The Station screen for extension 4234 appears. 2. In the Security Code field, type 12345678. You should assign unique security codes for each user. Once you enter the code and move off the field, the system changes the field to ‘*’ for extra security. 3. In one of feature button fields, type admin.
Managing phone features Fixing problems ■ When a telephone is in the Admin mode, the telephone cannot accept any calls — the telephone is treated as if it were busy. Also, a user cannot make calls while in the Admin mode. ■ Any button state a telephone is in when the telephone enters the Admin mode stays active while the telephone is in the Admin mode. ■ ACD agents who wish access to the Admin mode of TSA must be logged off before pressing the Admin button.
Managing your attendant consoles This section provides an overview to the Avaya attendant consoles. It also explains how to add new consoles, remove consoles, and how to set your system-wide console parameters. Overview The attendant console is the main answering position for your organization. The console operator is responsible for answering incoming calls and for efficiently directing or “extending” calls to the appropriate phone.
Managing your attendant consoles 302bphn1 KLC 051496 Figure Notes 1. Call processing area 8. Volume control buttons 2. Handset 9. Select buttons 3. Handset cradle 10. Console display panel 4. Warning lamps and call waiting lamps 11. Display buttons 5. Call appearance buttons 12. Trunk group select buttons 6. Feature area 13. Lamp Test Switch 7. Trunk group select buttons Figure 1.
Overview 8 7 9 6 Ringer Select Volume Date Time 5 1 Control Control Warning Warning Busy Busy 10 Forced Release 3 ABC DEF 1 2 3 GHI JKL MNO 4 5 6 PRQS TUV WXYZ 7 8 9 Night Pos Busy Calls Waiting Calls Waiting Warning Individual Calls Waiting 11 Alarm Alarm Reported 0 Position Available Split 2 Cancel Start a Release 4 Hold b c d e f 12 phdg302c KLC 031199 Figure Notes 1. Handset 7. Display 2. Handset cradle 8. Select buttons 3.
Managing your attendant consoles Figure 3.
Overview 302D Console The 302D console provides the following enhancements to the 302C console: ■ Modular handset/headset connection The console accepts a standard RJ11, 4-pin modular handset or headset. This connection replaces the quarter-inch, dual-prong handset/headset connection. ■ Activate/deactivate push-button You can use the push-button on the left side of the console to activate or deactivate the console.
Managing your attendant consoles And, because PC Console resides on a Windows-based PC, you are able to use other software applications at the same time. If a call comes in while you are in another application, you are able to handle it immediately. For more information about the Avaya PC Console, contact your Avaya account team. SoftConsole IP Attendant The SoftConsole is a Windows-based application that can replace the 302B hard console.
Adding an attendant console 3. If you want this attendant to have its own extension, enter one in the Extension field. Tip: If you assign an extension to the console, the class of restriction (‘‘COR’’) and class of service (‘‘COS’’) that you assign on this Console screen override the COR and COS you assigned on the Console Parameters screen. To avoid unexpected behavior, you should assign the same COR and same COS on both screens.
Managing your attendant consoles Attendant console feature buttons The following table lists the feature buttons that you can assign to an attendant console. Table 4. Attendant console feature buttons Feature or Function Recommended Button Label Name Entered on Station Screen Maximum Allowed Abbreviated Dialing AD abrv-dial (List:___ DC:___) 1 per List/DC Administered Connection [status lamp] AC Alarm ac-alarm 1 Automatic Call Distribution (‘‘ACD’’) After Call Work after-call (Grp. No.
Attendant console feature buttons Table 4.
Managing your attendant consoles Table 4.
Attendant console feature buttons Table 4.
Managing your attendant consoles Table 4. Attendant console feature buttons (Continued) Feature or Function Recommended Button Label Name Entered on Station Screen Maximum Allowed Login Security Violation lsvn-halt lsvn-halt 1 per system Message Waiting Message Waiting Act. mwn-act 1 per system Message Waiting Deact. mwn-deact 1 per system Night Service Trunk Grp. NS trunk-ns (Grp. No.
Attendant console feature buttons Table 4. Attendant console feature buttons (Continued) Feature or Function Recommended Button Label Name Entered on Station Screen Maximum Allowed Station Security Code Notification Halt ssvn-halt ssvn-halt 1 per system Night Service (ACD) Hunt Group hunt-ns (Grp. No.
Managing your attendant consoles 2. 3. 4. Grp: The split group number for ACD. Code: Enter a stroke code (0 through 9). TAC: local-tgs — TAC of local TG remote-tgs — (L-TAC) TAC of TG to remote PBX remote-tgs — (R-TAC) TAC of TG on remote PBX The combination of local-tgs/remote-tgs per console must not exceed 12 (maximum). Label associated button appropriately so as to easily identify the trunk group. 5. Grp: Enter a hundreds group number (1 through 20). 6.
Setting console parameters 7. If this is the correct attendant, press ENTER. If the system responds with an error message, the attendant is busy or still belongs to a group. Press CANCEL to stop the request, correct the problem, and enter remove attendant 3 again. 8. Remove the extension from voice mail service if the extension has a voice mailbox. 9. Type save translations and press RETURN to save your changes. Note that you do not need to delete the extension from coverage paths.
Managing your attendant consoles 2. In the Calls in Queue Warning field, enter 3. The system lights the console’s second call waiting lamp if the number of calls waiting in the attendant queue exceeds 3 calls. 3. In the Time in Queue Warning field, enter 20. The system issues a reminder tone if a call waits in the attendant queue for more than 20 seconds. 4. Press ENTER to save changes. Note that some of the settings on the individual Attendant screens can override your system-wide settings.
Providing backup for an attendant Instructions To enable your system to alert backup stations, you need to administer the Console Parameters screen for backup alerting. You also need to give the backup phones an attendant queue calls feature button and train your backup users how to answer the attendant calls. To configure the system to provide backup alerts and to setup extension 4345 to receive these alerts, complete the following steps: 1. Type change console-parameters and press RETURN.
Managing your attendant consoles 180 Issue 5 October 2002 555-233-506
Managing displays Displaying caller information This chapter provides information on the messages that appear on the read-out screen on display phones. Your system uses automatic incoming call display to provide information about incoming calls to a display phone that is in use, or active on a call. The information is displayed for 30 seconds on all phones except for CALLMASTER phones, where the display goes blank after 30 seconds. However, the information for each new call overrides the existing message.
Managing displays Instructions We will set up tie trunk group 10 to receive calling party information and display the calling party number on the phone of the person called. 1. Type change trunk group 10. The Trunk Group screen for trunk group 10 appears.
Displaying ICLID Information Instructions We will set up the analog diod trunk group 1 to receive calling party information and display the calling party number on the phone of the person called. 1. Type change trunk group 1. The Trunk Group screen for trunk group 1 appears. The Group Type field is already set to diod. 2. Press NEXT PAGE to display the Trunk Features page.
Managing displays Changing the display language This section explains how to change the display language. Before you start ■ Make sure the Display Character Set field on the System Parameters Country-Options screen is set to the character type you want to display. This field is set by Avaya.
Changing the display language 2. Type user-defined in the Display Language field. NOTE: If “user-defined” is selected for the display language and no translations are defined on the Language Translation screens, all display messages appear as a string of asterisks. 3. Press ENTER to save your changes. 4. Type change display-language transfer-conference and press ENTER. The Language Translations screen for Transfer Completed appears.
Managing displays Fixing problems 186 Symptom Cause and Solution Characters that display are not what you thought you entered. This feature is case sensitive. Check the table to make sure that you entered the right case. You entered “~c”, and “*” appears on the display instead. Lower-case “c” has a specific meaning in the MultiVantage system, and therefore cannot be mapped to any other character. An asterisk “*” appears in its place. You entered “~->” or “~<-” and nothing appears on the display.
Setting up directory buttons Setting up directory buttons Your switch directory contains the names and extensions that are assigned on each station screen. Display-phone users can use a phone button to access the directory, use the touch-tone buttons to key in a name, and retrieve an extension from the directory. Instructions We will assign directory phone buttons for extension 2000. Our button assignment plan is set up so that phone buttons 6, 7, and 8 are used for the directory.
Managing displays 188 Issue 5 October 2002 555-233-506
Handling incoming calls Setting up basic call coverage This chapter shows you how to set up call coverage for incoming calls to be sure that incoming calls are answered when the called party is not available.
Handling incoming calls Administering system-wide call coverage characteristics This section shows you how to set up system-wide call coverage characteristics that govern how coverage is handled. Instructions The System-Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding screen sets up the global parameters which direct the switch on how to act in certain situations. 1. Leave all default settings as they are set for your system. 2.
Setting up basic call coverage Instructions To create a coverage path: 1. Type add coverage path next and press RETURN. The Coverage Path screen appears. The system displays the next undefined coverage path in the sequence of coverage paths. Our example shows coverage path number 2.
Handling incoming calls Tip: If you want to see which extensions or groups use a specific coverage path, type display coverage sender group n, where n is the coverage path number. For example, you should determine which extensions use a coverage path before you make any changes to it. Assigning a coverage path to users Now assign the new coverage path to a user. For example, we will assign this new coverage path to extension 2054. NOTE: A coverage path can be used for more than one extension.
Setting up advanced call coverage Setting up advanced call coverage Advanced incoming call coverage: ■ redirects calls based on time-of-day ■ allows coverage of calls that are redirected to sites not on the local switch ■ allows users to change back and forth between two coverage choices (either specific lead coverage paths or time-of-day tables).
Handling incoming calls SYSTEM PARAMETERS -- CALL COVERAGE / CALL FORWARDING COVERAGE OF CALLS REDIRECTED OFF-NET (CCRON) Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled? Activate Answer Detection (Preserves SBA) On Final CCRON Cvg Point? Ignore Network Answer Supervision? Immediate Redirection On Receipt Of PROGRESS Inband Information? y y n n 2. In the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled field, type y.
Setting up advanced call coverage To use a remote phone number as a coverage point, you need to define the number in the Remote Call Coverage Table and then use the remote code in the coverage path. Instructions For example, to add an external number (303-538-1000) to coverage path 2: 1. Type change coverage remote and press RETURN. The Remote Call Coverage Table appears.
Handling incoming calls COVERAGE PATH Coverage Path Number: _ Next Path Number: ___ COVERAGE CRITERIA Station/Group Status Active? Busy? Don’t Answer? All? DND/SAC/Goto Cover? Inside Call n y y n y Hunt After Coverage: y Linkage: ___ ___ Outside Call n y y Number of Rings: 2 n y COVERAGE POINTS Terminate to Coverage Pts. with Bridged Appearance? n Point1: 4101 Point2: r1 Point3: h77 Point4: _________ Point5: _________ Point6: _________ 6. Type r1 in a coverage Point field.
Setting up advanced call coverage Instructions To set up a time-of-day coverage plan that redirects calls for our example above: 1. Type add coverage time-of-day next and press RETURN. The Time of Day Coverage Table screen appears and the selects the next undefined table number in the sequence of time-of-day table numbers. If this is the first time-of-day coverage plan in your system, the table number is 1.
Handling incoming calls Now assign the time-of-day coverage to a user. For example, we use extension 2054: 1. Type change station 2054 and press RETURN. The Station screen for extension 2054 appears.
Setting up call forwarding Instructions To add a coverage answer group: 1. Type add coverage answer-group next and press RETURN. The Coverage Answer Group screen appears.
Handling incoming calls Within each class of service, you can determine whether the users in that COS have the following call forwarding features: ■ Call Forwarding All Calls — allows users to redirect all incoming calls to an extension, attendant, or external phone number. ■ Call Forwarding Busy/Don’t Answer — allows users to redirect calls only if their extensions are busy or they do not answer.
Setting up call forwarding Setting up call forwarding for users This section shows you how to give your users access to call forwarding. Instructions We will change a call forwarding access code from a local phone with a Class of Service of 1: 1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN. The Feature Access Code screen appears.
Handling incoming calls CLASS OF SERVICE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Auto Callback Call Fwd-All Calls Data Privacy Priority Calling Console Permissions Off-hook Alert Client Room Restrict Call Fwd-Off Net Call Forward Busy/DA Personal Station Access Extended Forwarding All Extended Forwarding B/DA Trk-to-Trk Restriction Override QSIG Call Offer Originations n n n n n n n n n n n n n n y y y y n n n y y n n n n n y n n n n n n y n n n n n n n y n n n n n y n n n n n n y y n n n n n y n n n n
Setting up call forwarding 2. They dial their “forwarding-to” off-site or on-site number. In this example, enter 2081. This is a local number; for off-site forwarding, include the AAR/ARS feature access code. 3. When they hear the 3-beep confirmation tone, they hang up.
Handling incoming calls Instructions To change call coverage from off-site: 1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN. The Feature Access Code screen appears. 2. In the Change Coverage Access Code field, type *85. Use the *85 feature access code to change a coverage path from a phone or remote station. 3. Press ENTER to save your changes. 4. Type change cor and press RETURN. The Class of Restriction screen appears. 5. In the Can Change Coverage field, type y.
Setting up night service Setting up night service You can use night service to direct calls to an alternate location when the primary answering group is not available. For example, you can administer night service so that anyone in your marketing department can answer incoming calls when the attendant is at lunch or has left for the day.
Handling incoming calls To set up a night station service to voice mail: 1. Type add hunt-group next and press RETURN. The Hunt Group screen appears.
Setting up night service Page 1 of 2 LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBERS Ext 1: 51001 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: Name Attendant TN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Night Destination: 51002 5. In the Night Destination field, add the night destination on the listed directory phone. In our example, type 51002. 6. Press ENTER to save your changes. 7. Type change console-parameters and press RETURN. The Console Parameters screen appears.
Handling incoming calls 10. From a phone with console permissions, dial the call forwarding feature access code, then the hunt group’s extension, followed by the main number of AUDIX. In our example, dial 51002. NOTE: You should receive the confirmation tone (3 beeps). This step is very important as calls to the LDN night service extension do not follow coverage. 11. In voice mail, build your auto attendant with the extension of the Listed Directory Number, not the hunt group.
Setting up night service Instructions We will put the attendant console (attendant 2) in a night service mode. To set up Night Console Service: 1. Type change attendant 2 and press RETURN. The Attendant Console screen appears.
Handling incoming calls To set up night station service, you need to record the announcement (in our example, it is recorded at announcement extension 1234). See ‘‘Managing announcements’’ on page 439 for information on setting up the announcement. Tip: All trunk groups that are routed through the attendant direct to this night service destination provided they already do not have a night service destination and, on the Console Parameters screen, the DID-LDN Only to DID-LDN Night Ext field is n.
Setting up night service Attendant Group Name: COS: Calls in Queue Warning: Ext Alert Port (TAAS): CAS: SAC Notification? IAS (Branch)? IAS Att. Access Code: Backup Alerting? CONSOLE PARAMETERS 27 character name 1 5 none n n n OPERATOR COR: 1 Attendant Lockout? y Night Service Act. Ext.: 1234 IAS Tie Trunk Group No.
Handling incoming calls Before you start You need a ringing device and 1 port on an analog line circuit pack. See Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for more information on the circuit pack. Instructions To set the feature access code for TAAS: 1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN. The Feature Access Code screen appears.
Setting up night service 2. In the EXT Alert Port (TAAS) field, type 01A0702. Use the port address assigned to the external alerting device. 3. Press ENTER to save your changes. Setting up external alerting night service Calls redirected to the attendant via Call Forwarding or Call Coverage will not go to the LDN Night Station. If there is no night station specified, and the TAAS bell is being used, these calls ring the TAAS bell.
Handling incoming calls The Console Parameters screen appears. Attendant Group Name: COS: Calls in Queue Warning: Ext Alert Port (TAAS): CAS: SAC Notification? IAS (Branch)? IAS Att. Access Code: Backup Alerting? CONSOLE PARAMETERS Operator 0 COR: 0 5 Attendant Lockout? y 01A0702 none n Night Service Act. Ext.: n IAS Tie Trunk Group No.
Setting up night service To send LDN calls to the attendant during the day and to the TAAS bell at night: 1. Type change console-parameters and press RETURN. The Console Parameters screen appears. Attendant Group Name: COS: Calls in Queue Warning: Ext Alert Port (TAAS): CAS: SAC Notification? IAS (Branch)? IAS Att. Access Code: Backup Alerting? CONSOLE PARAMETERS Operator 0 COR: 0 5 Attendant Lockout? y 01A0702 none n Night Service Act. Ext.: n IAS Tie Trunk Group No.
Handling incoming calls Instructions We will direct night calls for trunk group 2 to extension 1245. To set up trunk group night service: 1. Type change trunk-group 2 and press RETURN. The Trunk Group screen appears.
Setting up night service Instructions To set up night service for your helpline, you need to record the announcement (in our example, the announcement is on extension 1234) and then modify the hunt group to send calls to this extension. To administer the hunt group for night service: 1. Type change hunt-group 3 and press RETURN. The Hunt Group screen appears for hunt group 3.
Handling incoming calls How do night service types interact? Let us look at an example of how several types of night service might be used in one company.
Adding call pickup Creating pickup groups A pickup group is a list of phones where each member of the group can answer another member’s calls. For example, if you want everyone in the payroll department to be able to answer calls to any payroll extension (in case someone is away from their desk), create a pickup group that contains all of the payroll extensions. Members of a pickup group should be located in the same area so that they can hear when the other extensions in the group ring.
Handling incoming calls Setting up directed call pickup To set up a phone so that the user can pick up calls with Directed Call Pickup, you need to determine if directed call pickup is enabled on your system and make sure that the user’s phone has a COR that allows directed call pickup. To determine if Directed Call Pickup is enabled on your system: 1. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN. The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears. 2.
Adding call pickup 7. Type add pickup-group next and press RETURN. The Pickup Group screen appears. PICKUP GROUP Group Number: 1 Extended Group Number: ____ GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Ext 1:51001 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: Name (first 26 characters) station 51001 Ext 14:51001 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: Name (first 26 characters) station 51002 8. Enter the primary extensions of the users desired in the pickup group.
Handling incoming calls 10. In the Pickup Group Number column, enter the pickup group number of the pickup groups that belong to the extended group being administered. The Pickup Number associated with the entered Pickup Group Number is the number users will enter following the FAC when pickup group. In the above listed example, a user in Pickup Group 2 will enter “0” following the FAC to pick up a call from pickup group 345.
Adding call pickup 10. Type change extended-pickup-group n and press RETURN, where n is the number of the extended pickup group to change. The Extended Pickup Group screen appears.
Handling incoming calls Managing hunt groups This section shows you how to set up hunt groups. It explains how calls to a hunt group are handled and shows you different call distribution methods. What are hunt groups? A hunt group is a group of extensions that receive calls according to the call distribution method you choose. When a call is made to a certain phone number, the system connects the call to an extension in the group.
Managing hunt groups Instructions To set up our helpline hunt group: 1. Type add hunt-group next and press RETURN. The Hunt Group screen appears. The Group Number field is automatically filled in with the next hunt group number. Page 1 of X HUNT GROUP Group Number: 4__ ACD? Group Name: internal helpline____________ Queue? Group Extension: 1200____ Vector? Group Type: ucd-loa Coverage Path: ____ TN: Night Service Destination: _____ COR: MM Early Answer? Security Code: ____ ISDN Caller Disp: ________ 2.
Handling incoming calls 5. Press NEXT PAGE to find the Group Member Assignments page. HUNT GROUP Group Number: 4 Group Extension: 3001 Group Type: ucd Member Range Allowed: 1 - 999 Administered Members (min/max): 1 /9 Total Administered Members: 9 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Ext Name (24 characters) Ext Name (24 characters) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 :1011 :1012 :1013 : : : : : : : : : : 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 : : : : : : : : : : : : : More Members Exist 6.
Managing hunt groups Setting up a queue You can tell your switch how to handle a hunt-group call when it cannot be answered right away. The call waits in a “queue.” We will tell the switch that up to 10 calls can wait in the queue, but that you want to be notified if a call waits for more than 30 seconds. You also want the switch to send a warning when 5 or more calls are waiting in the queue. This warning flashes queue-status buttons on phones that have a status button for this hunt group.
Handling incoming calls 4. In the Calls Waiting Threshold field, type the maximum number of calls that can be in the queue before the system flashes the queue status buttons. In our example, type 5. 5. In the Time Warning Threshold field, type the maximum number of seconds you want a call to wait in the queue before the system flashes the queue status buttons. In our example, type 30. 6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Managing hunt groups 2. Press NEXT PAGE to find the First Announcement Extension field.
Handling incoming calls Managing vectors and VDNs This section provides an introduction to vectors and Vector Directory Numbers (‘‘VDN’’). It gives you basic instructions for writing simple vectors. ! SECURITY ALERT: Vector fraud is one of the most common types of toll fraud because vectors route calls based on the Class of Restriction (COR) assigned to the VDN. See BCS Products Security Handbook for more information.
Managing vectors and VDNs Writing vectors Writing vectors is easy, but Avaya recommends that you set up and test your vectors before you use them across the system. We’ll write a vector to handle calls to our main number. It is the first vector so we’ll use number 1. Tip: Use list vector to see a list of existing vectors. Before you start ■ On the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, verify the Basic Call Vectoring field is y. If not, contact your Avaya representative.
Handling incoming calls The vector Number field on the left side of the screen is filled in automatically. 2. In the Name field, type a description for the vector. In our example, type main number calls. Tip: The information in the heading of the Call Vector screen is display only. Use display system-parameters customer-options to see the features that are turned on in your switch. 3. Type your vector steps in the numbered column on the left of the screen.
Managing vectors and VDNs Number: Basic? y Prompting? y 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 CALL VECTOR Name: main number calls ______ Multimedia? n 1 EAS? n LAI? n G3V4 Enhanced? n G3V4 Adv Route? n ANI/II-Digits? n CINFO? n Lock? n ASAI Routing? n BSR? n ____________ queue-to main split 47 pri 1 ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ Tip: Remember, the switch automatically fills in some of the information when you type
Handling incoming calls Number: Basic? y Prompting? y 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 CALL VECTOR Name: main number calls ______ Multimedia? n 1 EAS? n LAI? n G3V4 Enhanced? n G3V4 Adv Route? n ANI/II-Digits? n CINFO? n Lock? n ASAI Routing? n BSR? n ____________ queue-to main split 47 pri 1 announcement 4001 (All agents are busy, please wait...
Managing vectors and VDNs If the goto command in step 5 fails, the switch goes to the next step. The stop in step 6 prevents callers from incorrectly hearing the “office is closed” announcement in step 7. Stop keeps the call in the state it was in before the command failed. In this case, if step 5 fails, the call remains in step 4 and the caller continues to hear music. ! CAUTION: Add a stop vector step only after calls are routed to a queue.
Handling incoming calls To let callers leave messages, write this vector (step 7): Number: Basic? y Prompting? y 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 CALL VECTOR Name: main number calls ______ Multimedia? n 1 EAS? n LAI? n G3V4 Enhanced? n G3V4 Adv Route? n ANI/II-Digits? n CINFO? n Lock? n ASAI Routing? n BSR? n goto step 7 if time-of-day is all 17:00 to all 8:00 queue-to main split 47 pri 1 announcement 4001 (All agents are busy, please wait...
Managing vectors and VDNs Number: Basic? y Prompting? y 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 1 CALL VECTOR Name: main number calls ______ Multimedia? n EAS? n LAI? n G3V4 Enhanced? n G3V4 Adv Route? n ANI/II-Digits? n CINFO? n Lock? n ASAI Routing? n BSR? n goto step 10 if staff agents split 10 > 0 goto step 8 if time-of-day is all 17:00 to all 8:00 queue-to main split 47 pri 1 announcement 4001 (All agents are busy, please wait...
Handling incoming calls To let callers connect to an extension, write this kind of vector: Number: CALL VECTOR Name: main number calls ______ Multimedia? n 1 Basic? y Prompting? y EAS? n LAI? n G3V4 Enhanced? n G3V4 Adv Route? n ANI/II-Digits? n CINFO? n Lock? n ASAI Routing? n BSR? n wait-time 0 seconds hearing music collect 4 digits after announcement 4004 (You have reached our company. Please dial a 4-digit extension or wait for the attendant.
Managing vectors and VDNs Deleting a step To delete vector step 5 from vector 20: 1. Type change vector 20 and press RETURN. The Call Vector screen appears. 2. Press EDIT. 3. Type d followed by a space and the number of the step you want to delete. In our example, type d 5. Tip: You can delete a range of vector steps. For example, to delete steps 2 through 5, type d 2-5 and press ENTER. 4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Handling incoming calls To view the Event Report: 1. Type display events and press RETURN. The Event Report screen appears. EVENT REPORT The following option control which events will be displayed: EVENT CATEGORY Category: Vector REPORT PERIOD Interval: _a_ From: __/__/__:__ To: __/__/__:__ SEARCH OPTIONS Vector Number: __ Event Type: ___ 2. To see all current vector events, press RETURN. OR Indicate the events that you want to see by completing the Report Period and Search Option fields.
Managing vectors and VDNs We will create VDN 5011 for our sales department. A call into 5011 routes to vector 11. This vector plays an announcement and queues calls to the sales department. ! SECURITY ALERT: Vector fraud is one of the most common types of toll fraud because vectors route calls based on the class of restriction (COR) assigned to the VDN. See BCS Products Security Handbook for more information. Adding a vector directory number To add a vector directory number: 1.
Handling incoming calls Tip: The VDN Override on the Vector Directory Number screen controls the operation of the display. 3. Enter the vector number. In our example, type 11. 4. In the Measured field, indicate how you want to measure calls to his VDN. In our example, type both (for both CMS and BCMS). Tip: BCMS must be enabled to use “both.” Use display system-parameters customer-options to see if BCMS is enabled. 5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Understanding Automatic Call Distribution Understanding Automatic Call Distribution Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) is MultiVantage feature used in many call centers. ACD gives you greater flexibility to control call flow and to measure the performance of agents. ACD systems operate differently from non-ACD systems, and they can be much more complex. ACD systems can also be more powerful because they allow you to use features and products that are not available in non-ACD systems.
Handling incoming calls Assigning a terminating extension group A Terminating Extension Group (‘‘TEG’’) allows an incoming call to ring as many as 4 phones at one time. Any user in the group can answer the call. Once a member of the TEG has answered a group call, the TEG is considered busy. If a second call is directed to the group, it follows a coverage path if one has been assigned. Instructions Now assign a terminating extension group to the advertising department.
Assigning a terminating extension group 7. In the ISDN Call Display field, type mbr-name. This specifies that the member name (member of the TEG where the call terminated) is sent to the originating user. 8. In the Ext field, in the 1st place, type 5101. 9. In the 4th place, type 5102. 10. Press ENTER to save your changes. 11. Type change station 6725 and press RETURN. The Station screen for extension 6725 appears.
Handling incoming calls 246 Issue 5 October 2002 555-233-506
Routing outgoing calls World class routing Your system uses Automatic Alternate Routing (‘‘AAR’’) and Automatic Route Selection (‘‘ARS’’) to direct outgoing calls. ■ AAR routes calls within your company over your own private network. ■ ARS routes calls that go outside your company over public networks. ARS also routes calls to remote company locations if you do not have a private network.
Routing outgoing calls Managing calling privileges Each time you set up a phone, you use the station screen to assign a class of restriction (‘‘COR’’). You can create different CORs for different groups of users. For example, you may want executives in your company to have different calling privileges than receptionists. When you set up a COR, you specify a facility restriction level (‘‘FRL’’) on the Class of Restriction screen. The FRL determines the calling privileges of the user.
Assigning ARS FAC Assigning ARS FAC Be sure the ARS feature access code (FAC) is set up on your system. In the U.S., 9 is usually the ARS FAC. Users dial 9 to make an outgoing call. When a user dials 9 to access ARS and make an outgoing call, the ARS access code 9 is dropped before digit analysis takes place. will not be part of the digit analysis. Instructions To assign the ARS FAC: 1. Type change dialplan and press ENTER. The DCS to QSIG TSC Gateway screen screen appears. 2.
Routing outgoing calls Understanding ARS analysis With ARS, the switch checks the digits in the number called against the ARS Digit Analysis Table to determine how to handle the dialed digits. Your switch also uses Class of Restriction (COR) and Facility Restriction Level (FRL) to determine the calling privileges. Let us look at a very simple AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table. Your system likely has more defined dialed strings than our example.
Understanding ARS analysis Examples of digit conversion Your system uses the AAR or ARS Digit Conversion Table to change a dialed number for more efficient routing. Digits may be inserted or deleted from the dialed number. For instance, you can tell the switch to delete a 1 and an area code on calls to one of your locations, and avoid long-distance charges by routing the call over your private network.
Routing outgoing calls Table 5. ARS digit conversion examples Operation Actual Digits Dialed Matching Pattern Replacement String Modified Address Notes DDD call to ETN 9-1-303-538-1345 1-303-538 362 362-1345 Call routes via AAR for RNX 362 Long-distance call to specified carrier 9-10222+DDD 10222 (blank) (blank) Call routes as dialed with DDD # over private network Terminating a local DDD call to an internal station 9-1-201-957-5567 or 9-957-5567 1-201-957-5 or 957-5 222-5 222-5567.
Understanding ARS analysis To see how your switch handles a call to an operator: 1. Type display ars analysis 0 and press ENTER. The AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table screen starting with 0 appears.
Routing outgoing calls Instructions To see how your switch handles a call to an IXC: 1. Type display ars analysis 1 and press ENTER. The AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table screen starting with 1 appears.
Understanding ARS analysis To deny long distance calls to the 200 area code: 1. Type change ars analysis 120 and press ENTER. The AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table screen beginning with 120 appears. ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE Location: all Dialed Total Route Call Node String Min Max Pattern Type Num 120__________________11 11 4 fnpa ___ 1200_________________11_ 11____ deny fnpa ___ Percent Full: ANI Req n n 6 The table in our example shows 2 translations for calls that begin with 120.
Routing outgoing calls ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE Location: all Dialed Total Route Call Node String Min Max Pattern Type Num 1____________________11_ 11 ___ 1 intl ___ 1xxx555______________11_ 11 ___ 1 intl ___ 1010xxx______________7 _ 7 ____ 1 op ___ Percent Full: ANI Req n n n 6 2. Use the arrow keys to move to a blank Dialed String field. 3. Enter 1xxx555 in the Dialed String field. 4. Enter 11 in the Total Mn and 11 in Total Mx fields. 5. Enter deny (denied) in the Route Pattern field. 6.
Setting up multiple locations Setting up multiple locations When you define a location number for: ■ cabinets in DEFINITY R ■ Remote offices on DEFINITY CSI, SI, and R ■ media gateways on S8300 Media Servers ■ IP phones and softphones according to IP network region you can create numbering plans and time zone and daylight savings plans that are specific for each cabinet.
Routing outgoing calls To define locations for cabinets in Chicago and New York: 1. Type change multiple locations and press ENTER. The Locations screen appears.
Routing with multiple locations 8. Type -01:00 in the TimeZone Offset field in the Number 2 row. In our example, subtract one hour from the system clock in Chicago to provide the correct time for the location in New York. 9. Type 1 in the Daylight Savings Rule field in the Number 2 row. In our example, daylight savings rule 1 applies to U.S. daylight savings time, and both locations use the same rule. 10. Type 212 in the NANP field in the Number 2 row.
Routing outgoing calls Instructions For example, we will use ARS to set up local call routing for two switch locations. Our Chicago switch is assigned to location 1, and our New York switch is assigned to location 2. Our example shows a simple local dialing plan. Each location already contains location-specific routing tables. We’ll use route pattern 1 for local service calls and route pattern 2 for local HNPA calls in the Chicago location.
Modifying call routing In our example, for location 1 (Chicago) local service calls: ■ Type the appropriate digits in the Dialed String field ■ Type 3 in the Total Min field ■ Type 3 in the Total Max field ■ Type 1 in the Route Pattern field ■ Type svcl in the Call Type field 3. Press ENTER to save your changes. 4. Type change ars analysis 4 location 2 and press ENTER. The ARS Digit Analysis Table for location 2 appears. 5. Type in the local HNPA and service call routing information for New York.
Routing outgoing calls Instructions We will add a new area code. When the California area code, 415, splits and portions change to 650, you’ll need to add this new area code to your system. Tip: If you do not need to use 1 for area code calls, omit the 1 in steps 1, 3, and 5 in our example. Also, enter 10 in the Total Min and Total Max fields (instead of 11) in step 6. To add this non-local area code: 1. Type list ars route-chosen 14152223333 and press RETURN.
Modifying call routing 4. Move to a blank Dialed String field. If the dialed string is already defined in your system, the cursor appears in the appropriate Dialed String field, where you can make changes. 5. Enter 1650 in the Dialed String field. 6. Enter the minimum and maximum values from step 2 in the Total Mn and Total Mx fields. In our example, enter 11 in each field. 7. Enter the route pattern from step 2 in the Route Pattern field. In our example, enter 30. 8. Enter fnpa in the Call Type field. 9.
Routing outgoing calls Instructions To prevent callers from placing calls to Colombia (57): 1. Type change ars analysis 01157 and press RETURN. You enter 011 (international access) and the country code (57). The ARS Digit Analysis Table screen appears. 2. Move to a blank Dialed String field. If the dialed string is already defined in your system, the cursor appears in the appropriate Dialed String field. Skip to step 5 to deny calls to this dialed string. 3. Enter 01157 in the Dialed String field. 4.
Defining ARS Partitions Instructions We will create an authorization code 4395721with a COR of 2. 1. Type change authorization-code 4395721 and press RETURN. The Authorization Code — COR Mapping screen appears. 2. In the AC field, type 4395721. 3. In the COR field, enter 2. 4. Press ENTER to save your changes. Authorization Code - COR Mapping NOTE: 2 codes administered. Use ’list’ to display all codes.
Routing outgoing calls Setting up partition groups Let us say you allow your employees to make local, long distance, and emergency calls. However, you have a lobby phone for visitors and you want to allow users to make only local, toll-free, and emergency calls from this phone. To restrict the lobby phone, you modify the routing for a partition group to enable only specific calls, such as U.S. based toll-free 1-800 calls, and then assign this partition group to the lobby phone.
Defining ARS Partitions 4. Type change partition-route-table index 1 and press RETURN. The Partition Route Table screen appears. In our example, partition group 1 can make 1800 calls and these calls use route pattern 30.
Routing outgoing calls 3. Type change cor 3 and press RETURN. The Class of Restriction screen appears.
Setting up time of day routing Before you start AAR or ARS must be administered on your switch before you use Time of Day Routing. ■ For AAR, verify that either the Private Networking field or the Uniform Dialing Plan field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. ■ For ARS, verify that the ARS field is y and the Time of Day Routing field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Routing outgoing calls Now we will create a new time of day routing plan for long-distance calls for our executives. 1. Type change time-of-day 2 and press RETURN. The Time of Day Routing Plan 2 appears. 2. Type 1 in each field as shown on Time of Day Routing Plan 1. In our example, this is the PGN used for after hours and the lunch hour. 3. Type 3 in all other fields. In our example, PGN 3 uses the route pattern for long-distance calls during business hours.
Location by region Related topics See ‘‘Route Pattern’’ on page 1096 screens for more information. See ‘‘Defining ARS Partitions’’ on page 265 to see how to set up partition groups. Location by region Location by Region provides a way to administer location by IP network region. This allows for the correct date and time information and trunk routing based on the IP network region.
Routing outgoing calls 3. In the first Timezone Offset field, enter + to indicate the time is ahead of the system time. 4. In the second Timezone Offset field, enter 08 for the number of hours difference between this location and system time. 5. In the Daylight Savings field, enter 1 if this country has daylight savings. 6. Press ENTER to save your changes. 7. Type change ip-network-map and press ENTER. The IP Address Mapping screen displays.
Location by region change ip-network-region 100 Page 1 of 2 IP Network Region Region: 100 Name: Germany Audio Parameters Codec Set: 1 Location: 11 UDP Port Range Min: 2048 Max: 65535 Direct IP-IP Audio Connections? n IP Audio Hairpinning? y DiffServ/TOS Parameters Call Control PHB Value: VoIP Media PHB Value: BBE PHB Value: 802.1p/Q Enabled? n Call Control 802.1p Priority: VoIP Media 802.1p Priority: 802.
Routing outgoing calls 274 Issue 5 October 2002 555-233-506
Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface The Multimedia Applications Server Interface (‘‘MASI’’) defines a protocol and a set of operations that are used to extend Avaya MultiVantage feature functionality to a Multimedia Communications Exchange (‘‘MMCX’’) system. MASI architecture fits the client/server model, where the Avaya MultiVantage functions as a server for MMCX clients.
Managing multimedia calling MultiVantage/MASI features: ■ Basic Call (Place/Drop) — Avaya MultiVantage tracks the status of all calls placed to or from a MASI terminal. ■ Call Detail Recording — Avaya MultiVantage tracks calls to and from MASI terminals and can produce call records that indicate if a call uses MASI. ■ Call Coverage — Avaya MultiVantage tracks MMCX calls that are sent to coverage. A MultiVantage coverage path can contain both MASI terminals and MultiVantage stations.
Multimedia Applications Server Interface About this document The following section describes the Multimedia Applications Server Interface, and provides instructions on how to set it up, including administration and monitoring. It also includes a section on troubleshooting. You need to use both the DEFINITY Server system administration terminal (‘‘SAT’’) and the MMCX administration terminal to administer MASI. This document describes what you need to do at the DEFINITY Server SAT.
Managing multimedia calling ■ MASI signaling link — ISDN D-channel used to transport a new ISO protocol called the MASI protocol between the Avaya MultiVantage and the MMCX. ■ MASI terminal — The MultiVantage system representation of MMCX terminals in a MASI environment. ■ MMCX interface — PRI interface for connecting an MMCX server to other public, private or wide area network (WAN) switching systems or equipment that is part of the public network. Similar to a MultiVantage trunk group.
Multimedia Applications Server Interface MASI configurations There are several ways to set up combinations of MASI nodes and DEFINITY servers.The following figures depict several possible configurations. PSTN PSTN 1 Trunk 1 DEFINITY 1 AUDIX WAN Trunk 2 2 MMCX 1 SG1 DEFINITY S1 LAN E1 E2 cydfdda1 LJK 071597 Figure 5.
Managing multimedia calling ■ MMCX — Determine a node number for each MMCX server. This can be any number from 1–15. Once established, Avaya MULTIVANTAGE informs the MMCX of its node number. ■ S1 — MultiVantage station. E3 E4 LAN PSTN MMCX 2 Trunk 1 Trunk 3 SG2 DEFINITY 1 AUDIX 3 4 PSTN DEFINITY WAN 1 2 Trunk 2 S1 SG1 MMCX 1 LAN E1 E2 cydfdda2 LJK 071597 Figure 6.
Multimedia Applications Server Interface E3 E4 LAN DEFINITY 2 AUDIX DEFINITY Trunk 3 MMCX 2 SG2 S2 3 Trunk 4 PSTN PSTN Trunk 1 WAN 1 DEFINITY 1 AUDIX 4 Trunk 2 2 MMCX 1 SG1 DEFINITY S1 LAN E1 E2 cydfdda3 LJK 071897 Figure 7.
Managing multimedia calling E3 E4 LAN MMCX 2 3 PSTN PSTN Trunk 1 DEFINITY 1 INTUITY 4 WAN 1 2 Trunk 2 MMCX 1 SG1 DEFINITY S1 LAN E1 E2 cydfdda4 LJK 071897 Figure 8. One MASI domain, and one non-MASI MMCX The MASI node must be directly connected to the Avaya DEFINITY Server for MASI features to work. In this configuration, terminals that belong to MMCX 2 (E3 and E4), do not take advantage of MASI capabilities.
Multimedia Applications Server Interface How to administer MASI This section discusses the administration required to make MASI work. You perform most of this administration from the DEFINITY Server administration terminal. However, there are a few things you must do at the MMCX administration terminal. This section sometimes refers to the chgmasi command. This is the command you use to administer MASI parameters on the MMCX.
Managing multimedia calling ■ Interface = network ■ Country Protocol = 1 ■ Protocol Version = a Step 5 — Administer a signaling group For each MASI node, you need to establish a unique signaling group. Use the command add signaling-group xxx to access the Signaling Group screen.
Multimedia Applications Server Interface Page 2 of 5 ADMINISTERED NCA TSC ASSIGNMENT Service/Feature: ___________ As-needed Inactivity Time-out (min):_ TSC Local Adj. Mach. Index Ext. Enabled Established Dest. Digits Appl.
Managing multimedia calling ■ ■ Appl. — Specifies the application this administered NCA-TSC is going to be used for. Enter masi. Machine ID — Used to indicate the MASI node to which this administered NCA-TSC is connected. This number should be the same as the MASI node number found on other screens. How to list TSCs or determine status of the TSC To determine which TSCs are designated for MASI, use the list masi tsc command. MASI TEMPORARY SIGNALING CONNECTIONS (TSC) Sig.
Multimedia Applications Server Interface Step 6 — Administer ISDN-PRI trunk group Use the command add trunk-group xxx to access the Trunk Groups screen. For a more detailed description of the ISDN-PRI trunk group, see ‘‘ISDN trunk group’’ on page 936.
Managing multimedia calling Establish a MASI Path with the following attributes: ■ Near-End Path Extension — An unassigned MultiVantage extension. When using the chgmasi command to administer the MMCX, this is the farpath extension. See the MMCX Technical Reference for more information. ■ MASI Node — The node number for the MMCX. For each MMCX/MASI node, this number must be the same everywhere it occurs (signaling group, masi trunk group, and masi terminal screens).
Multimedia Applications Server Interface MASI TRUNK GROUP Group Number: 15 Group Name: INCOMING CALL______________ COR: 1_ MASI Node Number: __ TN: 1 CDR Reports? y TAC: 915_ Remote Group Number: _ Screen 9. MASI Trunk Group screen ■ Group Number — This field displays the MASI trunk group number. This is the number assigned when executing the add masi trunk-group command. ■ CDR Reports — Valid entries are y, n, and r. Default is y.
Managing multimedia calling combination of MASI Node Number and Remote Group Number must be unique. Remote group number corresponds to the group number on the MASI node. How to view a list of all MASI trunk groups To view a list of all the MASI trunks administered on the ECS, use the command list masi trunk-group. MASI TRUNK GROUP Group Number TAC Group Name Node Number Remote Grp No. CDR COR TN xxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx x x xx xxx Screen 10.
Multimedia Applications Server Interface Step 9 — Administer MASI terminals Use the add masi terminal xxxxx or next command to administer each MASI terminal as a MASI terminal. You use available extensions on the ECS, so they need to conform to the Avaya MultiVantage dial plan. The extension must match the MultiVantage dial plan, and for the add command, the extension must not already be in use.The extension of the MASI terminal must match the number of the MASI terminal.
Managing multimedia calling ■ Name — The name associated with the terminal. This can be any alphanumeric string up to 27 characters. ■ Send Display Info — Indicates whether Avaya MultiVantage should forward display information associated with a call. Set to y. MASI TERMINAL FEATURE OPTIONS LWC Reception: none___ CDR Privacy? n AUDIX Name: ________ Screen 13. MASI Terminal screen — page 2 ■ LWC Reception — This field indicates whether the terminal can receive Leave Word Calling (‘‘LWC’’) messages.
Multimedia Applications Server Interface ■ AUDIX Name — This field only appears on DEFINITY R configurations. This field contains the name of the AUDIX adjunct for LWC messages. If LWC reception field is set to audix, this field must contain a name. The name must match a machine name on the Adjunct Names screen. MASI TERMINAL SITE DATA Room: Jack: Cable: Floor: Building: _______ _____ _____ _______ _______ BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS 1: call-appr Screen 14.
Managing multimedia calling Duplicate MASI terminal Once you have one MASI terminal administered to your liking, you can use the duplicate masi terminal command to administer other stations with the same characteristics.
Multimedia Applications Server Interface To view the active or idle status of a specific MASI terminal, use the command status masi terminal (extension). GENERAL STATUS TYPE: MASI Extension: 54001 MASI Node Number: 14 Screen 17. Service State: active Status MASI terminal command To determine which extension you assigned as the MASI Near-End Path Termination extension, use the command list extension-type. This command displays the extension number and type (attendant, masi-terminal, etc.
Managing multimedia calling 2. The MMCX dial plan must use the same feature access codes as Avaya MultiVantage. If this is not already the case, modify the MMCX dial plan using the chgdp command. See the MMCX Technical Reference for more information. 3. Include this feature access code in the chgmasi command. CDR 1. To get call detail records for calls over MMCX interfaces, set CDR Reports = y on the MASI Trunk Group screen. 2.
Multimedia Applications Server Interface Step 11 — Verify administration Make test calls from MultiVantage to MMCX, ensure that you can indeed place and receive calls. Call an unattended MASI terminal. Verify that the call goes to AUDX. Retrieve the call from the MASI terminal. Verify that all works as expected. MASI command permissions If you are the super-user for your system, you can restrict other administrative logins from changing MASI administration.
Managing multimedia calling The following are the CDR capabilities of MASI. Administration information is under the heading ‘‘How to administer MASI’’ on page 283. ■ Incoming/Outgoing Trunk Call Splitting Call splitting does not produce separate records for MMCX calls that are transferred or conferenced. ■ Intraswitch CDR You can administer intraswitch CDR to monitor MASI terminals. To do this, simply add the MASI terminal extension on the Intraswitch CDR screen.
Multimedia Applications Server Interface Transfer MASI terminals cannot transfer calls to MultiVantage stations, and cannot transfer a call to another MASI terminal if the call involves a MultiVantage station. Conferencing Conferences can involve both MASI terminals and MultiVantage stations, and either one may initiate the conference. MultiVantage stations participate in such conferences in voice-only mode.
Managing multimedia calling Unsupported Call Center features ■ ASAI — You must not administer a MASI terminal in an ASAI domain. MASI terminals and MMCX trunks are not monitored by ASAI. It may be possible for a MASI terminal to place a call to a MultiVantage station that is part of an ASAI domain. ASAI will not be blocked from controlling this call, but there may be unpredictable results.
Multimedia Applications Server Interface Other interactions The following section describes feature behaviors that may not be as expected, but that are not likely to be destructive. Attendant features 555-233-506 ■ Dial Access to the Attendant — MASI terminals will be able to dial the attendant access code, if it is administered in the MMCX dial plan.
Managing multimedia calling Basic features 302 ■ Abbreviated Dialing — A MultiVantage station can enter an MMCX extension in an AD list. However, MASI terminals cannot use AD. ■ Administered Connections — MASI terminals must not be the originator nor the destination of an administered connection. ■ Automatic Callback — Automatic callback does not work towards a MASI terminal. ■ Automatic Circuit Assurance — You must not administer a MASI terminal as an ACA referral destination.
Multimedia Applications Server Interface ■ Override — Executive override does not work towards MASI terminals. ■ Priority Calling — Priority calling is not supported for calls to or from MASI terminals. ■ Ringback Queueing — Ringback Queueing is not supported for MASI terminals. ■ Send All Calls — MMCX has an autonomous SAC function. See Call Redirection for more information. ■ Tenant Partitioning — All MASI terminals exist in tenant 1, and you cannot change the tenant number.
Managing multimedia calling If the far-end path termination number is incorrect, you should observe MASI-PTH error 513. To resolve, correct administration using the MASI Path Parameters screen. If the Layer 3 TSC is not administered properly or is out of service, you should observe errors (but no alarms) raised against TSC-ADM. Verify the signaling group administration and follow normal escalation procedures for TSC-ADM. See the appropriate Avaya MultiVantage Maintenance manual for more information.
Multimedia Call Handling Definitions: MMCH features and components Multimedia call A multimedia call, for MMCH, is one that conforms to the H.320 and T.120 suite of protocol standards. These standards allow video-conferencing packages from different vendors to communicate with one another. The capabilities of the individual multimedia-endpoint package can vary, however. ■ An H.320 call can contain voice, video and data. ■ The bandwidth for MMCH calls is limited to 2 B-channels. Any vendor’s H.
Managing multimedia calling Enhanced multimedia complex An Enhanced multimedia complex consists of a BRI-connected multimedia-equipped PC and a non-BRI-connected multifunction telephone administered in Enhanced mode. The Enhanced multimedia complex acts as though the PC were directly connected to the multifunction telephone. Thus, voice call control, multimedia call control and call status are enabled at the telephone. An Enhanced multimedia complex provides a tight integration of the voice station and H.
Multimedia Call Handling Enhanced mode service link The service link is the combined hardware and software multimedia connection between the user’s multimedia endpoint and the Avaya DEFINITY Server which terminates the H.320 protocol. The service link provides video, data, and, optionally, voice streams to augment the capabilities of the telephone and PC. A service link only applies to an Enhanced multimedia complex, never to a Basic multimedia complex.
Managing multimedia calling ■ Service Links are not used by Basic mode complexes. ■ A single number may be used to reach the Basic multimedia complex for voice or H.320 multimedia calls. Enhanced Mode Operation The Enhanced multimedia complex provides a much more tightly coupled integration of the complex voice station and H.320 DVC system. In Enhanced Mode: ■ Both multimedia and voice calls must originate at the telephone set. ■ Voice and multimedia calls can be controlled at the telephone set.
Multimedia Call Handling MMCH works with any H.320 system that is fully H.320 compliant and operates at the 2B or 128K rate. NOTE: If you intend to share applications among users or whiteboard capabilities, the endpoint software you choose must also support the T.120 protocol. The following endpoint-software packages have been tested: ■ PictureTel PCS 50 & PCS 100, Release 1.6T ■ Proshare 2.0a, 2.1 ■ Zydacron Z250 Ver. 2.02, Z350 Ver. 1.2 (With Netmeeting 2.
Managing multimedia calling ESM Installation Figure Notes 1. Port B Y-cable connector to a TN787 5. D8W cord connected to 356A multimedia interface (MMI) circuit pack adapter S/B port 8 2. Port A Y-cable connector to a TN2207 PRI circuit pack 6. Expansion service module (ESM) 3. 25-pair Y-cable 7. Port B on compatible primary rate interface (PRI) card 4. 356A adapter Figure 11.
Multimedia Call Handling Planning for MMCH The following are some of the tasks you perform in planning and administering MMCH. Planning the system This is a list of questions to help you use Avaya MultiVantage for multimedia. ■ How many MMCH users are you going to have? ■ How many multimedia calls do you expect to have at any given time? With the information above you can determine how many Voice Conditioner (VC) and Multimedia Interface (MMI) circuit packs you need.
Managing multimedia calling 7. Administer early answer and H.320 flag for stations, the early answer flag for hunt groups, and the multimedia flag for vectors as appropriate. 8. Train end users. 9. Monitor traffic and performance. Related screens ■ System-Parameters Customer-Options — Multimedia Call Handling (Basic) — Multimedia Call Handling (Enhanced) ■ Feature Related System-Parameters — Default Multimedia Outgoing Trunk Parameter Selection (p.
Multimedia Call Handling ■ Feature Access Codes — Basic Mode Activation (p.5) — Enhanced Mode Activation (p.5) — Multimedia Call Access Code (p.5) — Multimedia Data Conference Activation & Deactivation (p.5) The Multimedia Data Conference Deactivation FAC must be entered after you are active on a multimedia call. To enter the FAC: 1. Select TRANSFER 2. Receive a dialtone 3. Dial the FAC 4. Receive a confirmation tone 5. Re-select the call appearance for the held multimedia call.
Managing multimedia calling Administration commands System-Parameters Customer-Options screen: To enable the MMCH release 6.3 feature, you need to purchase a new license file. System-Parameters Features screen: The default bandwidth for MMCH calls is defined on the System-Parameters Features screen shown below. NOTE: Originating a multimedia call with the mm-call button will originate a call according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the System Parameters Features screen.
Multimedia Call Handling Page 1 of 2 DATA MODULE Data Extension: 65001 Name: ___________________________ Type: 7500_______ COS: 1_ Multimedia? y Port: _____ COR: 1_ MM Complex Voice Ext: 67434 ABBREVIATED DIALING List1: ____________ SPECIAL DIALING OPTION: hot-line HOT LINE DESTINATION Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code (From above list): _ CIRCUIT SWITCHED DATA ATTRIBUTES (used for modem pooling) Default Duplex: full Default Mode: async Default Speed: 1200_ DATA MODULE CAPABILITIES Default ITC: restricted Defa
Managing multimedia calling Station screen After you have administered the BRI data module, use the Station screen to associate it with a voice station to screen a multimedia complex. This is a one-to-one relationship: you can administer only one station and one data endpoint per multimedia complex. Neither the voice station, nor the data endpoint can be a member of another multimedia complex. NOTE: A BRI station cannot be part of a multimedia complex. ■ H.
Multimedia Call Handling ■ Service Link Mode — The service link is the combined hardware and software multimedia connection between an Enhanced mode complex’s H.320 DVC system and the Avaya DEFINITY Server which terminates the H.320 protocol. A service link is never used by a Basic mode complex H.320 DVC system. Connecting a service link will take several seconds. When the service link is connected, it uses MMI, VC and system timeslot resources.
Managing multimedia calling — Enhanced — An Enhanced multimedia complex consists of a BRI-connected multimedia-equipped PC and a non-BRI-connected multifunction telephone. The Enhanced mode station acts as though the PC were directly connected to the multifunction telephone; the service link provides the actual connection between the Avaya DEFINITY Server and the PC. Thus, voice and multimedia calls are originated and received at the telephone set.
Multimedia Call Handling ■ mm-call — This button may exist on any voice station. Most multimedia enabled users will want an mm-call button. This button (or it’s corresponding FAC) must be used to indicate that the user is placing a multimedia mode call. To place a multimedia mode call the user would go off-hook, select an idle call appearance, and press the mm-call button followed by the destination extension digits.
Managing multimedia calling ■ mm-datacnf — Pressing the mm-datacnf button from any voice station that is participating in a multimedia call will light the status lamp and alert the Avaya DEFINITY Server that you want to enable T.120 data collaboration with the other parties on the call. The button status lamp will also light for other participants in the multimedia call who have mm-datacnf buttons.
Multimedia Call Handling ESM T.120 Server Administration change ds1 1c09 Page 1 of 1 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location: 01C09 Bit Rate: 2.048 Name: Line Coding: hdb3 Signaling Mode: isdn-pri Connect: pbx Interface: network Country Protocol: 1 CRC? y Idle Code: 11111111 MMI Cabling Board: 01C10 DCP/Analog Bearer Capability: 3.1kHz MMI Interface: ESM Slip Detection? n Screen 21. Near-end CSU Type: other DS1 screen (Page 1 of 1) From the system administration terminal: 1.
Managing multimedia calling 13. The DCP/Analog Bearer Capability default is 3.1 kHz. 14. Set the MMI Cabling Board field to xxxxx (where xxxxx is the location of the TN787 MMI circuit pack recorded in step 2). This must be the slot for port B of the Y-cable. 15. The MMI Interface field ESM appears.
Understanding the multimedia complex When a vector is used to route video (56K/64K) calls to a hunt group comprised of data extensions, the vector must have the multimedia field set to n. This field causes multimedia calls routed through the vector to receive early answer treatment prior to processing the vector steps. This provides a talk path to the caller for announcements or immediate conversation with an agent and starts network billing for the incoming call when vector processing begins.
Managing multimedia calling 1. H.320 DVC system GUI. The normal way for a Basic multimedia complex endpoint to originate a multimedia call is through the vendor provided user interface. Generally, digits to dial are entered, speed is selected and the call originates from the DVC system. The voice station is not involved in such as origination. Any voice station may use the following mechanisms to originate a multimedia call from the voice station.
Understanding the multimedia complex Originating a multimedia call with the mm-call button will originate a call according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the System Parameters Features screen. This default parameter will be either 2x56 or 2x64. The bearer capability of the multimedia calls will either be 56K or 64K and the bandwidth will be 2B channels.
Managing multimedia calling NOTE: The mm-multinbr feature button is generally used by stations that are part of an Enhanced multimedia complex, but may be used by any station to originate a dual address multimedia call. 5. Multimedia Multi-number Call feature Access Code. For stations that do not have an administered mm-multinbr button, the Multimedia Multi-number call feature access code may be used instead. It allows origination of a multimedia call from a voice station.
Understanding the multimedia complex The MM parameter selection FAC may be used in conjunction with the mm-multinbr button or FAC to make a single or dual address multimedia call at the desired bearer and bandwidth. The user goes off-hook and dials the MM-parameter selection feature access code. Dialtone is returned. The user enters a single digit, 1 or 2, where 1 = 2x64, 2 = 2x56. All other digits will produce reorder. Dialtone is returned.
Managing multimedia calling 6. Dual address with AAR/ARS and authorization code ■ Dial mm-multinbr button or FAC, Hear dialtone ■ Dial AAR/ARS FAC, Dial 1st dest. digits, Hear dialtone ■ Dial AAR/ARS FAC, Dial 2nd dest. digits, Hear stutter dialtone ■ Dial authorization code 7.
Understanding the multimedia complex Early Answer. The answering party may administer their station to avoid hearing hourglass tone. With the station screen Early Answer field set to y, the system answers the incoming multimedia call on behalf of the station and establishes the H.320 protocol. After audio path has been established, the call will then alert at the voice station of the Basic complex destination. The station may then answer by going off-hook and will have immediate audio path.
Managing multimedia calling Conferencing . A multimedia conference can consist of multimedia and voice-only conferees. All multimedia conferees are added to a multimedia conference by a voice-terminal user on the switch, who acts as the controller of the multimedia conference. When the controller is a Basic complex voice station, the controller must remain on the conference until all parties have joined.
Understanding the multimedia complex If an Enhanced mode complex is the covering party, the answering voice station will receive voice and video. If all voice stations in the coverage path have the station screen Early Answer field set to n and the originator of the multimedia call was not a local Enhanced mode complex, the answering station will hear hourglass tone. Coverage: Multimedia calls and off-net call coverage.
Managing multimedia calling 3. Each H.320 DVC system in the conference call is joined to the data conference. On many DVC systems, the provided GUI may prompt the user with a dialog box, requesting the user to select a specific conference to join. With MMCH, there should only be one conference available to select. 4. The user must now use the PC’s GUI to begin application sharing. The method for beginning application sharing or file transfer is different for each H.320 multimedia application. One of the H.
Understanding the multimedia complex Multi- switch data collaboration. When all parties involved in data collaboration conference are not located on the same physical Avaya DEFINITY Server, the parties located on the Avaya DEFINITY Server hosting the data conference (i.e. the switch that activated mm-datacnf) may be any combination of Enhanced multimedia complexes, Basic multimedia complexes or stand-alone H.320 DVC systems.
Managing multimedia calling Consult. After a call is converted to voice, consult may be used when transferring or conferencing the call. COR/COS. The Class of Restriction and Class of Service for H.320 calls originated from a 1-number complex are the same as those of the telephone in the complex. Data Call Setup. Basic complex multimedia endpoints are BRI data endpoints, and may use data call-setup procedures as provided by the software vendor. Data Hotline.
Understanding the multimedia complex In order to guarantee that all members of a voice hunt group or skill can receive voice or multimedia calls, all members should have the H.320 field on the station screen set to y. Simple voice stations and Basic complex mode voice stations will receive voice only. Enhanced mode stations will receive voice and video.
Managing multimedia calling Hunting with Multimedia vectors. Very often, calls are routed to hunt groups or skills via a vector. The existing VDNs and vectors which exist for routing voice calls can be used to route multimedia calls. In order to use a vector for multimedia calls that will terminate to voice stations, you must set the Multimedia field on the vector screen to y. This field has no effect on voice calls routing through the vector.
Enhanced Mode MM complex Station Hunting . Basic mode data calls to endpoints that have an extension administered in the hunt-to-station field hunt based on established hunting criteria. The call is converted to voice before station hunting. Tenant Partitioning. Permission to make multimedia calls or add parties of any type to a conference is subject to standard tenant-partitioning restrictions. Terminating Extension Groups.
Managing multimedia calling AVD (Alternate voice/data) trunk groups cannot be used to provide 1-number access with MMCH. If the AVD trunk group has a BCC of 0, all calls arriving over the AVD trunk to the Basic mode complex will be assumed to be voice calls. If the AVD trunk group has a BCC of 1 or 4, all calls arriving over the AVD trunk to the Basic mode complex will be assumed to be multimedia calls.
Enhanced Mode MM complex 1. mm-call (Multimedia Call) button. If the station has an mm-call button administered, the user goes off-hook and selects the mm-call button. The user may select the mm-call button and then go off-hook. If the user has a speakerphone on the station, the user may originate the call simply by selecting the mm-call button. The speakerphone will automatically be placed off-hook and dialtone will be heard.
Managing multimedia calling For calls with a bandwidth of 2B, use of the mm-call button to originate will cause the same destination address to be used for both channels of the 2B call. See the section below on the mm-multinbr button/FAC for information on originating a 2B call where the destination has a different address for each B-channel.
Enhanced Mode MM complex 4. Multimedia Multi-number Call feature Access Code. For stations that do not have an administered mm-multinbr button, the Multimedia Multi-number call feature access code may be used instead. It allows origination of a multimedia call from a voice station. It is used when the destination being dialed requires a different address for each of the 2 B-channels. An example of this is Central Office provided ISDN-BRI.
Managing multimedia calling point with the mm-multinbr button or FAC. The user now dials one or two sets of destination address digits. The destination address may be provided by dialing digits, using abbreviated dial entries, last number dialed, etc. NOTE: The mm-parameter selection FAC is generally used by stations that are part of an Enhanced multimedia complex, but may be used by any station to originate a dual address multimedia call. 6.
Enhanced Mode MM complex 7. Single address with TAC or AAR/ARS and CDR account code ■ Dial mm-call button or FAC, Hear dialtone ■ Dial CDR FAC, Hear dialtone ■ Dial CDR account code, Hear dialtone ■ Dial TAC or AAR/ARS, Dial destination digits 8. Dual address with TAC or AAR/ARS and CDR account code ■ Dial mm-multinbr button or FAC, Hear dialtone ■ Dial CDR FAC, Hear dialtone ■ Dial CDR account code, Hear dialtone ■ Dial TAC or AAR/ARS, Dial 1st dest.
Managing multimedia calling If the originating party is providing a video signal, then a complete 2-way multimedia call will exist. If the originating party is not providing a video signal, the answering party will receive loopback video. The audio signal will exist at the handset of the voice station. The audio signal may be moved to the H.320 DVC system via activation of a mm-pcaudio button on the voice station. Hourglass Tone.
Enhanced Mode MM complex - creating a multi-party video conference An Enhanced multimedia complex can create a spontaneous video conference in the same way that a spontaneous voice conference is created. Given an active call, the user activates the CONFERENCE button. This puts the current call on HOLD and activates a new call appearance. The user makes a multimedia call according to the instructions for originating a multimedia call and then selects CONFERENCE to combine or merge the two call appearances.
Managing multimedia calling Data Collaboration Once you have established a multi-point video conference, multi-point T.120 data collaboration may be enabled for that call. This will allow all video parties on the current conference to collaborate. T.120 Data conferencing is made possible through the Expansion Services Module (ESM) which is an adjunct to the Avaya DEFINITY Server.
Enhanced Mode MM complex 6. To end the data collaboration session and retain the voice/video conference, the station that selected the mm-datacnf button or FAC may press the mm-datacnf button or hit transfer and dial the mm-datacnf deactivation FAC. NOTE: Currently, many endpoints do not respond correctly to ending the data collaboration session and retaining voice/video. Some H.320 DVC systems drop the entire call. Avaya recommends that once T.
Managing multimedia calling Multi- switch data collaboration. When all parties involved in data collaboration conference are not located on the same physical Avaya DEFINITY Server, the parties located on the Avaya DEFINITY Server hosting the data conference (i.e. the switch that activated mm-datacnf) may be any combination of Enhanced multimedia complexes, Basic multimedia complexes or stand-alone H.320 DVC systems. NOTE: All parties on remote switches must not be Enhanced multimedia complexes.
Enhanced Mode MM complex Switching between Basic and Enhanced modes There may exist occasions when an Enhanced mode complex needs to switch to Basic mode operation temporarily. One example is when a user wishes to make a direct point to point multimedia call originated directly from the H.320 DVC. Basic mode operation allows this functionality at the expense of losing multimedia call handling capabilities (i.e. hold/xfer/conf).
Managing multimedia calling If a plain voice station or a Basic mode complex is the covering party, the answering voice station will receive audio only. If all voice stations in the coverage path have the Station screen Early Answer field set to n and the originator of the multimedia call was not a local Enhanced mode complex, the answering station will hear hourglass tone. If an Enhanced mode complex is the covering party, the answering voice station will receive voice and video.
Enhanced Mode MM complex Call association (routing). Typically incoming voice calls consist of 2 B-channel calls to the same address, to provide greater bandwidth and better video resolution. Avaya MultiVantage attempts to correctly pair up incoming calls and offer them as a unit to a single agent. MMCH uses call association to route both calls to the extension that answered the first call, regardless of how the call was routed internally.
Managing multimedia calling Interactions Interactions are listed here only if the operation is different from standard. ■ Administered Connections An Enhanced multimedia complex voice station may serve as the origination point or destination of an administered connection. If the Multimedia call feature access code is included in the administration of the administered connection, this will result in a video AC. An Enhanced multimedia complex H.
Enhanced Mode MM complex ■ COR/COS The Class of Restriction and Class of Service for a multimedia call originated from an Enhanced multimedia complex are those of the voice station in the complex. ■ Data Call Setup An Enhanced mode multimedia H.320 DVC system may not originate calls from the DVC system. All calls, both voice or video are originated from the voice station. ■ Data Hotline An Enhanced multimedia complex H.320 DVC endpoint may not be used to originate a call for hotline dialing.
Managing multimedia calling ■ Terminating Extension Groups A multimedia call to a TEG may be answered by any member of the TEG. If the member answering the call is an Enhanced mode complex station, a multimedia call will result. ■ Telephone Display Display information for calls to or from an Enhanced multimedia complex contains the display information associated with the voice station.
Enhanced Mode MM complex Status commands The status commands for data module, station, trunk, and attendant provide the conference ID and endpoint ID for any of these involved in an active multimedia conference.
Managing multimedia calling List commands The list multimedia endpoints command shows you all the multimedia data modules that exist in your system, and their associated telephones, if any. The list multimedia H.320-stations command shows you all the stations that are administered for H.320 conversion. MULTIMEDIA ENDPOINTS Data Ext MM Complex Voice Ext 100 1321 15683 Screen 24. H.320 Conversion? 87654 y 738 n List Multimedia Endpoints screen MULTIMEDIA H.
Setting up telecommuting Configuring Avaya MultiVantage for telecommuting Telecommuting emphasizes the ability to perform telephony activities while remote from the Avaya MultiVantage solution. It is a combination of four features which permit you to remotely perform changes to your station’s Coverage and Call Forwarding.
Setting up telecommuting ■ The Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls feature allows you to change the direction of calls to your station. This activates the capability to have 2 coverage path options. These 2 path options can be specified on the station screen; however, unless the Can Change Coverage field is set to y on the Class of Restriction screen the second path option cannot be populated.
Configuring Avaya MultiVantage for telecommuting Configure Security Violation Notification for Station Security Codes. For information about Security Violation Notification, see ‘‘Setting up security violations notification’’ on page 401. Instructions In our example, we set up the telecommuting extension and enable coverage of calls redirected off-net. To configure Avaya MultiVantage for telecommuting: 1. Type change telecommuting-access and press RETURN. The Telecommuting Access screen appears.
Setting up telecommuting Setting up Personal Station Access Personal Station Access (‘‘PSA’’) allows you to associate the preferences and permissions assigned to your own extension with any other compatible phone. When you request a PSA associate, the system automatically dissociates another extension from the phone.
Setting up Personal Station Access Instructions In our example, we specify the TTI State, the Record PSA/TTI Transactions, the class of service, and the feature access codes set up PSA. To set up Personal Station Access: 1. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN. The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears. 2. Complete the following fields and press ENTER. a. Type voice in the TTI State field. b. (Optional) Type y on the Record PSA/TTI Transactions in History Log field.
Setting up telecommuting Related topics See ‘‘Training users’’ on page 373 for information on how to associate or disassociate PSA. Creating a station security code Station Security Codes (‘‘SREPN’’) provide security to station users by preventing other users from accessing functions associated with the user’s station. Each station user can change their own SSC if they know the station’s current settings.
Assigning coverage options 5. Type change station 1234 and press RETURN. This is the station extension you configured for telecommuting. The Station screen appears.
Setting up telecommuting Instructions In our example, we assign two coverage options so a user can choose from either option to control how their calls are handled. To assign 2 coverage options: 1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN. The Feature Access Code screen appears. 2. Type #9 in the Change Coverage Access Code field and press ENTER. 3. Type change cor 1 and press RETURN. The Class of Restriction screen appears. 4.
Setting up call forwarding Instructions In our example, we assign the feature access codes and class of service to set up call forwarding. This allows your users to forward their calls to another extension. To set up call forwarding: 1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN. The Feature Access Code screen appears. 2. Set a 2-digit access code for the following fields and press ENTER. a. Type *8 in the Extended Call Fwd Activate Busy D/A field. b.
Setting up telecommuting ■ Distributed Communications System Assign a different telecommuting access extension for each switch. You can use Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls from any of the DCS nodes, but you must dial the extension of the node on which your station is defined before dialing the FAC. ■ Tenant Partitioning The telecommuting access extension is always automatically assigned to Tenant Partition 1, so it can be accessed by all tenants.
Assigning an extender password 3. Select Enable Password to enable the password. 4. Click random. This means that the password is a system generated random number. The system displays a 10-digit number in the Password field. Take note of this number, your user will need it to access the switch from home. 5. Type Doe, John and click OK. This is the last name and first name of the user. The system returns you to the Password Manager screen. 6. Select CommLink:Select Cards.
Setting up telecommuting Installing home equipment Avaya MultiVantage allows you to install equipment in your home so that you can utilize system facilities from off-site. Before you start You need the following equipment: ■ MultiVantage extender remote module ■ DCP sets (office and home must match) Configure a feature access code for associating your home number to your office number.
Installing home equipment 8. Press 2 (OK). The module dials the number. When the modules connect, the phone display Enter Password appears. 9. Type 0123456789 and press DROP. Associating your office phone number to the home station To associate your phone number: 1. On your home station, type #4. This is the associate feature access code. 2. Type 4321 and press #. This is your extension number. 3. Type 1996 and press #. This is your password.
Setting up telecommuting Setting up remote access Remote Access permits a caller located outside the system to access the switch through the public or private network and then use the features and services of the system. Remote Access users can dial into the system using central office (CO), Foreign Exchange (‘‘FX’’), Wide Area Telecommunications trunks (‘‘WATS’’), and Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI) trunks.
Setting up remote access Instructions Setting up remote access In our example, we set up a remote access extension with maximum security. This assists you in blocking unauthorized people from gaining access to your network. To set up remote access: 1. Type change remote-access and press RETURN. The QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen screen appears.
Setting up telecommuting 6. Type 1234567 in the Barrier Code field. This is the 7-digit barrier code you must enter to access the system’s Remote Access facilities. 7. Type 1 in the COR field. This is the class of restriction (COR) number associated with the barrier code that defines the call restriction features. 8. Type 1 in the TN field. This is the Tenant Partition (TN) number. 9. Type 1 in the COS field.
Training users More information Remote Access provides you with access to the system and its features from the public network. This allows you to make business calls from home or use Recorded Telephone Dictation Access to dictate a letter. If authorized, you can also access system features from any on-site extension. With Remote Access you can dial into the system using Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Central Office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FX), or 800 Service trunks.
Setting up telecommuting Instructions Associating PSA In this example, we associate PSA (preferences and permissions) assigned to your station with another compatible terminal. To associate PSA: 1. Dial #4. This is the associate PSA feature access code. You hear dial tone. 2. Type 1234 and press #. This is your extension. 3. Type 4321 and press #. This is your Station Security Code. You hear a confirmation tone. Disassociating PSA In our example, we disassociate PSA from the station you are using.
Training users Changing call forwarding In this example, we change call forwarding to extension 1235. To change call forwarding: 1. Dial 1234. This is the extension you configured for telecommuting. 2. Dial #8 and press #. This is the feature access code you set for activating extended call forward. You hear dial tone. 3. Dial 4321and press #. This is the extension from which you want to forward calls. 4. Dial 87654321 and press #. This is the extension security code. You hear dial tone. 5. Dial 1235.
Setting up telecommuting Interrupting the command sequence for personal station security codes To interrupt the command sequence for personal station security codes: 1. To interrupt the command sequence before step 3, choose one of these options: ■ Hang up or press the disconnect or recall button before hearing intercept tone in step 3. The system does not log an invalid attempt. You must restart the process at step 1. ■ Type * before the second # in step 3.
Enhancing system security Toll fraud is the theft of long distance service and can come from both internal and external sources. When toll fraud occurs, your company is responsible for usage charges. In addition, unauthorized use may tie up your system, preventing your customers from reaching you and your employees from doing business. Avaya designed Avaya MultiVantage to help you to limit toll fraud.
Enhancing system security Basic security Keeping your system secure The following is a partial list you can use to help secure your system. It is not intended as a comprehensive security checklist. See the BCS Products Security Handbook for more information about these and other security-related features. 378 ■ Secure the system administration and maintenance ports and/or logins on Avaya MultiVantage using the Access Security Gateway.
Preventing toll fraud Preventing toll fraud Top 15 tips to help prevent toll fraud 1. Protect system administration access Make sure secure passwords exist for all logins that allow System Administration or Maintenance access to the system. Change the passwords frequently. Set logoff notification and forced password aging when administering logins. You must assign passwords for these logins at setup time. Establish well-controlled procedures for resetting passwords. 2.
Enhancing system security 7. Protect access to information stored as voice Password restrict access to voice mail mailboxes. Use non-trivial passwords and change passwords regularly. 8. Provide physical security for telecommunications assets Restrict unauthorized access to equipment rooms and wire connection closets. Protect system documentation and reports data from being compromised. 9.
Physical security 14. Callers misrepresenting themselves as the “phone company,” “AT&T,” “RBOCS,” or even known employees within your company may claim to be testing the lines and ask to be transferred to “900,” “90,” or ask the attendant to do “start 9 release.” This transfer reaches an outside operator, allowing the unauthorized caller to place a long distance or international call. Instruct your users to never transfer these calls.
Enhancing system security System security checklist Here’s some of the steps required for indemnification. Use these to analyze your system security. 1. Remove all default factory logins of cust, rcust, browse, nms, and bcms and assign unique logins with 7-character alphanumeric passwords and a 90-day password aging. Use the list logins command to find out what logins are there. 2. If you do not use Remote Access, be sure to disable it permanently.
System security checklist 4. If you use Remote Access to process calls off-net or in any way access the public network: a. Use a 7-digit barrier code. b. Assign a unique COR to the barrier code. c. Restrict the COR assigned to each barrier code by FRL level to only the required calling areas to conduct business. d. Set the aging cycle to 90 days with 100 call limit per barrier code. e. Suppress dial tone where applicable. f. Administer Authorization Codes. g.
Enhancing system security c. If the vector has a “route-to” step that routes the call to a remote switch via AAR, assign a unique COR with a unique ARS/AAR Partition Group, the lowest FRL to complete an AAR call, and n on all unique COR assigned to your public network trunking facilities on the Calling Permissions. Assign the appropriate AAR route patterns on the AAR Partition Group using the change aar analysis partition x 2 command.
System security checklist 8. If loop start trunks are administered in the switch and cannot be changed by the Local Exchange Company, block all class of service from forwarding calls off-net. In the Class of Service screen, Restriction Call Fwd-Off Net field, set to y for the 16 (0-15) COS numbers. See ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672 for more information.
Enhancing system security 14. Assign all trunk groups or same trunk group types a unique Class of Restriction. If the trunk group does not require networking through your switch, administer the Class of Restriction of the trunk group where the FRL is 0, the Calling Party Restriction field is outward, and all unique Class of Restriction assigned to your outgoing trunk groups are n. See ‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page 658 for more information.
Adding logins and passwords 17. Administer all fax machines, modems, and answering machines analog voice ports as follows: ■ Set the Switchhook Flash field to n. ■ Set the Distinctive Audible Alert field to n. See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for more information. 18. Install a Call Accounting System to maintain call records. In the CDR System Parameters screen, Record Outgoing Calls Only field, set to y. See ‘‘CDR System Parameters’’ on page 646 for more information.
Enhancing system security LOGIN ADMINISTRATION Password of Login Making Change: LOGIN BEING ADMINISTERED Login’s Name: angi3 Login Type: Service Level: Disable Following a Security Violation? Access to INADS Port? _ LOGIN’S PASSWORD INFORMATION Login’s Password: Reenter Login’s Password: Password Aging Cycle Length (Days): 30 LOGOFF NOTIFICATION Facility Test Call Notification? y Remote Access Notification? y Acknowledgment Required? y Acknowledgment Required? y ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY PARAMETERS Access
Adding logins and passwords 8. Type change permissions angi3 and press RETURN. The Command Permission Categories screen appears. COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES Login Name: angi3 COMMON COMMANDS Display Admin. and Maint.
Enhancing system security More information When you add a login, the Security Measurement reports do not update until the next hour. Password aging is an option you can start while administering logins. The password for each login can be aged starting with the date the password was created or changed and continuing for a specified number of days (1 to 99). The system notifies the user at the login prompt, 7 days before the password expiration date, their password is about to expire.
Changing a login The Login Administration screen appears.
Enhancing system security Displaying a login This section shows you how to display a user’s login and review their permissions. Instructions To display a login such as angi3: 1. Type display login angi3 and press RETURN. The Login Administration appears and displays all information about the requested login except the password. Removing a login This section shows you how to remove a user’s login. To remove a login, you must be a superuser. Instructions To remove a login such as angi3: 1.
Using access security gateway Using access security gateway This section shows you how to use Access Security Gateway (‘‘ASG’’). ASG prevents unauthorized access by requiring the use of the hand-held Access Security Gateway Key for logging into the system. You need superuser privileges to perform any of the ASG procedures. Before you start You need an Access Security Gateway Key. On the ‘‘System-Parameters Customer-Options’’ screen, verify the Access Security Gateway (ASG) field is y.
Enhancing system security 2. In the Password of Login Making Change field, type your password. 3. In the Access Security Gateway field, type y. When set to y, the Access Security Gateway Login Administration screen (page 2) appears automatically. 4. Either: ■ ■ Set the System Generated Secret Key field to: ■ y for a system-generated secret key, or ■ n for a secret key to be entered by the administrator, or In the Secret Key field, enter your secret key. Be sure to remember your secret key number. 5.
Using access security gateway Disabling Access Security Gateway To temporarily disable ASG while users are on vacation or travel: 1. Type change login xxxx and press RETURN, where xxxx is the alphanumeric login ID. The Login Administration screen appears.
Enhancing system security Loss of an ASG key If a user loses their Access Security Gateway Key: 1. Modify any logins associated with the lost Access Security Gateway Key. See the Access Security Gateway (ASG) Key Release 1.0 User’s Guide to change your PIN. 2. If the login is no longer valid, type remove login xxxx and press RETURN, to remove the invalid login from the system, where xxxx is the alphanumeric login ID. 3.
Changing login permissions ■ Port — Contains the port mnemonic associated with the port on which the session was established or rejected. The port mnemonics for G3r systems are SYSAM-LCL, SYSAM-RMT, MAINT, and SYS-PORT. For G3si systems, they are MRG1, INADS, NET, and EPN. ■ Login — Contains the alphanumeric login string entered by the user and associated with the session establishment or rejection.
Enhancing system security The Command Permission Categories screen appears. COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES Login Name: angi3 COMMON COMMANDS Display Admin. and Maint.
Changing passwords Changing passwords This section shows you how to change a user’s password. Instructions We will change the password for login angi3 to g3or5e. To change passwords: 1. Type change password angi3 and press RETURN. The Password Administration screen appears. PASSWORD ADMINISTRATION Password of Login Making Change: angi3 LOGIN BEING CHANGED Login Name: LOGIN’S PASSWORD INFORMATION Login’s Password: Reenter Login’s Password: 2.
Enhancing system security Using busy verify This section shows you how to use Busy Verify (also known as Busy Verification) to help find fraud problems. When you suspect toll fraud, you can interrupt the call on a specified trunk group or extension number and monitor the call in progress. Callers will hear a long tone to indicate the call is being monitored. ! SECURITY ALERT: Listening to someone else’s calls may be subject to federal, state, or local laws, rules, or regulations.
Setting up security violations notification 2. In the Feature Button Assignments area, type verify. 3. Press ENTER to save your changes. 4. To activate the feature, press the VERIFY button on the phone and then enter the Trunk Access Code and member number to be monitored. Setting up security violations notification This section shows you how to use Security Violations Notification (‘‘SVN’’) to set security-related parameters and to receive notification when established limits are exceeded.
Enhancing system security The Security-Related System Parameters screen appears.
Setting up security violations notification 8. (Optional) Type change remote-access and press RETURN. The QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen screen appears. REMOTE ACCESS Remote Access Extension________ Barrier Code Length____ Authorization Code Required? y Remote Access Dial Tone: n Barrier Code COR TN COS Expiration Date No.
Enhancing system security 12. In the Feature Button Assignments section, type one of the following: ■ asvn-halt — The Authorization Code Security Violation Notification call is activated when an authorization code security violation is detected. This applies only if you are using authorization codes. ■ lsvn-halt — The Login Security Violation Notification call is activated a referral call when a login security violation is detected.
Setting up authorization codes Instructions 1. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN. The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears.
Enhancing system security 8. Type change authorization-code nnnn and press RETURN, where nnnn is the authorization code. The Authorization Code — COR Mapping screen appears. Page 1 of 1 Note: AC COR 4285193 1_ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __ Authorization Code - COR Mapping XX codes administered.
Using Station Lock See ‘‘Facility restriction levels and traveling class marks’’ on page 1684 and ‘‘Route Pattern’’ on page 1096 for more information on assigning Facility Restriction Levels. See ‘‘Call detail recording’’ on page 1553 and ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for more information on using Call Detail Recording on station phones. See ‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page 658 and ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for more information on using Class of Restriction on station phones.
Enhancing system security 5. Type change cor 1 and press RETURN. 6. In the Calling Party Restriction field, type none. This means that no calling party restrictions exist on extension 7262. 7. In the Station Lock COR field, type 2. 8. Press ENTER to save your changes. 9. Type change cor 2 and press RETURN. 10. In the Calling Party Restriction field, verify it is outward. 11. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Dealing with security violations Dealing with security violations When a security violation occurs, there are steps that you can take to be sure that this same attempt is not successful in the future. Disabling a login ID There may be occasions when you have to disable a login for one of your users because of a security violation. 1. Log in to the switch using a login ID with the correct permissions. 2. Type disable login ge0rg3 and press RETURN.
Enhancing system security 410 Issue 5 October 2002 555-233-506
Managing trunks This chapter contains basic procedures for working with analog and digital trunks. Specialized trunks such as Internet Protocol (‘‘IP’’), H.323, APLT, tandem, release-link, and DMI-BOS trunks are not covered in this manual. For more information, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software. This chapter also does not contain procedures for working with ISDN trunk groups.
Managing trunks 3. Administer a trunk group to control the operation of the trunks. 4. Assign the ports you’re using to the trunk group. 5. For outgoing or 2-way trunks, administer Automatic Route Selection so Avaya MultiVantage knows which outgoing calls to route over this trunk group. 6. Test your new trunk group. Using the trunk access code, place a variety of calls. This chapter provides instructions for steps 3 and 4 in this process.
Tips for working with trunk groups The questions you need to answer The kind of information you need to get Which phone numbers are associated with each trunk group? For incoming or two-way trunk groups: ■ What number or numbers do outside callers use to call into your switch over this group? ■ What’s the destination extension to which this trunk group delivers calls? Does it terminate at an attendant or a voice-mail system? For outgoing trunk groups: ■ Is the service from your network service prov
Managing trunks ■ Outgoing Display — Typing y in this field allows display phones to show the name and group number of the trunk group used for an outgoing call. This information may be useful to you when you’re trying to diagnose trunking problems. ■ Queue Length — Don’t create a queue for two-way loop-start trunks, or you may have a problem with glare (the interference that happens when a two-way trunk is seized simultaneously at both ends).
Adding a CO, FX, or WATS trunk group Before you start Before you can administer any trunk group, you must have one or more circuit packs of the correct type with enough open ports to handle the number of trunks you need to add. To find out what circuit packs you need, see the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide. Instructions As an example, we will set up a two-way CO trunk group that carries voice and voice-grade data only.
Managing trunks 4. Type 85 in the COR field. This field controls which users can make and receive calls over this trunk group. Assign a class of restriction that’s appropriate for the ‘‘COR’’ calling permissions administered on your system. 5. In the TAC field, type 105. This field defines a unique code that you or your users can dial to access this trunk group. The code also identifies this trunk group in call detail reports. 6. In the Direction field, type two-way.
Adding a DID trunk group Adding a DID trunk group In most cases, Avaya recommends leaving the default settings in fields that aren’t specifically mentioned in the following instructions. Your Avaya representative or network service provider can give you more information.
Managing trunks Instructions To add the new Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk-group: 1. Type add trunk-group next and press RETURN. The Trunk Group screen appears. The system assigns the next available trunk group number to this group. In our example, we’re adding trunk group 5.
Adding a DIOD trunk group 7. In the Incoming Dial Type field, type tone. This field tells the switch how digits are transmitted for incoming calls. Entering tone actually allows the trunk group to support both ‘‘DTMF’’ and rotary signals, so Avaya recommends that you always put tone in this field. 8. In the Trunk Termination field, type rc. Use rc in this field when the distance to the central office or the switch at the other end of the trunk is more than 3,000 feet.
Managing trunks Adding a PCOL trunk group In most cases, when administering Personal Central Office Line (‘‘PCOL’’) trunk groups, Avaya recommends leaving the default settings in fields that aren’t specifically mentioned in the following instructions. Your Avaya representative or network service provider can give you more information.
Adding a PCOL trunk group The Personal CO Line Group screen appears.
Managing trunks 8. In the Outgoing Dial Type field, type tone. This field tells the switch how digits are to be transmitted for outgoing calls. Entering tone actually allows the trunk group to support both DTMF and rotary signals, so Avaya recommends that you always put tone in this field. 9. Press ENTER to save your changes. You assign phones to a PCOL group by administering a CO Line button on each phone.
Adding a Tie or Access trunk group ■ Only phones in the same PCOL group can bridge onto calls on the personal CO line. If a user is active on his or her primary extension number on a PCOL call, bridged call appearances of that extension number cannot be used to bridge onto the call. ■ When a user puts a call on hold on a personal CO line, the status lamp associated with the PCOL button does not track the busy/idle status of the line.
Managing trunks To add the new tie trunk-group: 1. Type add trunk-group next and press RETURN. The Trunk Group screen appears. The system assigns the next available trunk group number to this group. In our example, we’re adding trunk group 5.
Adding a Tie or Access trunk group 7. Type 1234 in the Night Service field. This field assigns an extension to which calls are routed outside of business hours. 8. In the Comm Type field, type voice. This field defines whether a trunk group can carry voice, data, or both. Analog trunks only carry voice and voice-grade data. If you’re administering a T1 connection in North America, type rbavd in this field. 9. In the Trunk Type field, type wink/wink.
Managing trunks Setting up digital trunks Any of the common trunks, except for PCOL trunks, can be analog or digital. (PCOL trunks can only be analog.) Administering a digital trunk group is very similar to administering its analog counterpart, but digital trunks must connect to a DS1 circuit pack and this circuit pack must be administered separately. The example in this section shows you how to do this.
Setting up digital trunks Instructions The following example shows a DS1 circuit pack configured for T1 service. The circuit pack is supporting a two-way CO trunk group that carries only voice and voice-grade data. To configure a new DS1 circuit pack: 1. Type add ds1 07A19 and press ENTER. The DS1 Circuit Pack screen appears. You must enter a specific port address for the circuit pack. DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location: Bit Rate: Line Compensation: Signaling Mode: 07A19 1.
Managing trunks More information T1 recommended settings The table below shows recommended settings for standard T1 connections to your local exchange carrier. Field Value Notes Line Coding b8zs Use ami-zcs if b8zs is not available. Signaling Mode robbed-bit Robbed-bit signaling gives you 56K bandwidth per channel. If you need a 64K clear channel for applications like asynchronous data transmission or remote administration access, use common channel signaling.
Setting up digital trunks The following enhanced DS1 administration login permissions must be assigned on the Command Permission Categories screen: ■ The Maintain Enhanced DS1 field must be y. ■ The Maintain Trunks field must be y. ■ The Maintain Switch Circuit Packs field must be y. If you busy out the DS1 circuit pack, you can change the following fields: CRC, Connect, Country Protocol, Framing Mode, Interface, Interconnect, Line Coding, and Protocol Version.
Managing trunks ITC, Bit Rate, and Line Coding. The ITC (Information Transfer Capability) field appears on the Route Pattern screen, Trunk Group screen, and Access Endpoint screen. The Line Coding and the Bit Rate fields appear on the DS1 Circuit Pack screen. The settings for these fields on all the screens must be coordinated as shown in the following tables. ITC field Bit Rate Line Coding field restricted 1.544 Mbps ami-zcs 2.048 Mbps ami-basic 1.544 Mbps b8zs 2.
Adding trunks to a trunk group Instructions As an example, we will assign 5 trunks to a new tie trunk group, trunk group 5. We’ll use ports on several circuit packs for members of this group. To assign trunks to trunk group 5: 1. Type change trunk-group 5 and press RETURN. The Trunk Group screen appears. 2. Move to the Group Member Assignments page. Some of the fields on this screen won’t appear for every trunk group.
Managing trunks 6. In the Type field, type t1-comp. An entry in this field is only required for some circuit packs. 7. Repeat steps 3–6, as appropriate, for the remaining trunks. Notice that you can assign trunks in the same trunk group to ports on different circuit packs. 8. Press ENTER to save your changes. Removing trunks from a trunk group Use this procedure to remove vacant trunk ports or to change the assignment of existing trunks.
Removing trunk groups 4. Move the cursor to the Port 5 field and clear its entry. 5. Press ENTER to save your changes. The switch will automatically clear the other fields associated with these 2 trunks. Removing trunk groups There’s more to removing a trunk group than just executing the remove trunk-group command. If you’re using Automatic Route Selection (‘‘ARS’’), you must remove an outgoing or two-way trunk group from any route patterns that use it.
Managing trunks Inserting and absorbing digits Use this procedure to modify the incoming digit string on DID and tie trunks by inserting (adding) or absorbing (deleting) digits. You’ll need to do this if the number of digits you receive doesn’t match your dial plan. Instructions As an example, let us say you have a DID trunk group. It’s group number is 5. Your service provider can only send 4 digits, but your dial plan defines 5-digit extensions beginning with 6: 1.
Inserting and absorbing digits 4. In the Expected Digits field, type 4. This field tells the switch how many digits the central office sends. NOTE: The Expected digits field doesn’t appear on the screen for tie trunk groups. 5. Press ENTER to save your changes. If your service provider sends 7 digits but you only need 5, you need to absorb the first 2 digits in the digit string. To absorb digits: 1. Type change trunk-group 5 and press ENTER. The Trunk Group screen appears. 2.
Managing trunks Administering answer detection Use this procedure to administer an outgoing or two-way trunk group for network answer supervision or answer supervision by timeout. If your network supplies answer supervision to a trunk group, you can administer Avaya MultiVantage to recognize and respond to that signal. If your network does not supply answer supervision, you can set a timer for all calls on that group.
Administering trunks for listed directory numbers Administering trunks for listed directory numbers Listed directory numbers (‘‘LDN’’) are the phone numbers given for an organization in public telephone directories. You can administer Avaya MultiVantage so that calls to different listed directory numbers go to the same attendant group. How you administer your system for LDN calls depends on whether the calls are coming in over DID and tie trunks or over CO and FX trunks.
Managing trunks 2. In the Ext 1 field type 2020. This is the LDN for Company A. 3. Type Company A in the Name field. This name will appear on the console display so the attendant knows which business the call is for and how to answer it. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other two businesses. You can enter up to 20 different listed directory numbers on this screen. 5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Managing announcements Understanding announcements An announcement is a recorded message a caller may hear while the call is in a queue, or if a call receives intercept treatment for some reason. An announcement is often used in conjunction with music. Announcements can be integrated or external. Integrated announcements reside on a circuit pack in the switch carrier. External announcements are stored and played back from adjunct equipment.
Managing announcements Instructions To set up the announcement data module, determine the port location of the Announcement circuit pack. You can find circuit pack information on the Integrated Announcement Board screen. To set up the data module on the Announcement circuit pack located at 01B18: 1. Type add data-module next and press RETURN. The Data modules screen appears. The system automatically fills in the number of the next available extension. Make sure the extension conforms to your dial plan.
Adding announcement extensions Adding announcement extensions You need to assign an extension for each announcement that you want to record. After you define an announcement extension, you use it to record and access the announcement.
Managing announcements 5. In the Q field, type y. This sets up an announcement queue so calls wait in a queue to hear an announcement if all the ports on the announcement circuit pack are busy. If you leave this field n, there is no announcement queue. When all the announcement ports are busy the caller hears busy or other feedback depending upon how the announcement was accessed. 6. N/A appears in the QLen (queue length) field.
Recording announcements If you want to change an announcement that is recorded on a circuit pack without memory, you have to delete the original message and record a new announcement. See ‘‘Deleting and erasing announcements’’ on page 448. Announcement sessions always use port 0, which also is used for playing announcements, on the TN750 circuit packs. Announcement sessions always use port 1, which is dedicated for telephone access, on the TN2501AP circuit packs.
Managing announcements 1. Dial *56 from a phone or console. ■ If you hear dial tone, go to step 2. ■ If you hear a fast busy signal, hang up and redial the FAC and extension every 45 seconds until you hear dial tone. 2. Dial the announcement extension 1234. You hear dial tone. 3. Dial 1 to begin recording. ■ If you hear a beep or stutter tone, begin speaking. If the circuit pack memory becomes full during recording, the system drops your connection and does not retain the announcement.
Saving announcements Saving announcements NOTE: This task is only applies if you are using a TN750-series announcement circuit pack. If you are using the TN2501AP (VAL) announcement circuit pack or VVAL announcements, see ‘‘Moving announcements from the VAL circuit pack’’ on page 461. If you are using the ISSPA announcements capability of the S8100 Media Server, see ‘‘Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server only)’’ on page 58.
Managing announcements For example to save the announcements from the circuit pack at 01B18: 1. Type save announcements from 01B18 and press RETURN. NOTE: If you have announcement circuit packs with and without built-in memory, save the circuit pack without built-in memory. If you have a duplicated system with an active processor and a stand-by processor, you can save announcements from the announcement circuit pack to both processors.
Restoring announcements Instructions We will copy the announcements stored in our weekly disk back-up to the tape back-up we take off company premises for a month. To copy announcements between your back-up disk and tape: 1. Type copy announcements and press RETURN to save the changes. This process can take up to 40 minutes. You cannot administer your system while it is copying announcements. Restoring announcements NOTE: This task only applies if you are using a TN750-series announcement circuit pack.
Managing announcements We will restore announcements from system memory to an announcement circuit pack that has built-in memory. We know that the announcement circuit pack is located at 01B18: 1. Type restore announcements from cabinet 01. carrier B, slot 18 and press RETURN. 2. Press ENTER to restore announcements. Fixing problems Problem Possible causes and solutions You receive error code E28 You do not have an integrated announcement circuit pack in the system.
Deleting and erasing announcements Before you start ■ Look up the announcement extension, which is mapped to a specific TN2501AP circuit pack or VVAL gateway by location. 1. At the SAT, type list integrated-annc-boards and press RETURN. 2. Determine the extension(s) for the announcement(s) that you want to delete. ■ Record the feature access code (FAC) for an announcement session. Instructions We will use a phone with console permissions to delete the recorded announcement assigned to extension 1234.
Managing announcements Finally, to erase announcements on the announcement circuit pack located at 01B18: 1. Type erase announcements 01B18. A warning message appears. 2. Press ENTER to erase the announcements on the circuit pack. Setting up continuous-play announcements You can set up announcements to keep on repeating while callers are connected to the announcement, so a caller listens until the system plays the entire announcement.
Getting started with the TN2501AP or G700 Virtual VAL Getting started with the TN2501AP or G700 Virtual VAL Before you can use the capabilities of the TN2501AP or G700 VVAL announcement circuit pack, it must be properly installed and configured. These instructions are contained in other documents in the Avaya MultiVantage documentation library. For more information about these and other tasks related to using the TN2501AP, see the documents listed in the following table.
Managing announcements Task Information source Installing VVAL for a G700 Media Gateway using the Media-Gateway screen and the enable announcement command Administering IP Connections Adding IP Routes Testing the IP Connections Each G700 Media Gateway that will be used to provide announcements through the embedded VAL circuitry on the Gateway processor circuit pack must be assigned on the ‘‘Media-Gateway’’ screen and enabled using the enable announcements command before announcements can be recorded usi
Managing VAL Announcements Using the SAT Task Information source The G700 Media Gateway embedded VAL also can be disabled using the disable announcement-board ggV9 command. This removes that gateway from the VAL circuit pack count but announcements already assigned and recorded/FTPed on that circuit pack remain but will not play. Administering Announcements (recording, copying, deleting, etc.
Managing announcements Recording VAL announcements You can record an announcement for callers to hear when they dial a specific extension or as part of call vectoring. You can use the same steps to change an existing announcement. You can record announcements in many ways: ■ Professional or computer recordings ■ Recording new announcements at a computer ■ Recording announcements at a system phone Before you start Ensure that the announcement administration is complete before proceeding.
Managing VAL Announcements Using the SAT Announcement file format requirements In order to be compatible with the TN2501AP circuit pack and the MultiVantage system, announcement recordings must have the following parameters: ■ CCITT A-Law or CCITT µ-Law companding format (do not use PCM) ■ 8KHz sample rate ■ 8-bit resolution (bits per sample) ■ Mono (channels = 1) ■ The µ-Law (Mu-Law) companding is used in the United States and A-Law is used internationally.
Managing announcements Converting announcement files to VAL format If you are sharing recordings in a multi-site environment with Avaya MultiVantage and S8100 Media Server or CONVERSANT systems, you must convert announcement files for use on either system. If you need to convert an announcement file to the required format, you can use a sound recording utility application to do so.
Managing VAL Announcements Using the SAT 4. Save (Convert Now or Save As) the announcement with these formats: ■ Format: PCM ■ Bits/Sample: 8 ■ Sample Rate: 8KHz ■ Mono (channels = 1) NOTE: The recording conversion utility requires that announcement files are in PCM format. VAL files are in CCIT A-Law or µ-Law format. 5. Open the file in recording conversion utility. 6. Convert the file to SSP format. Deleting VAL announcements Before you start Look up the announcement information: 1.
Managing announcements Deleting individual VAL announcement files using the SAT To delete the announcement named Closed (announcement #3 on Screen 13): 1. At the SAT, type remove file board board-location /annc/filename.wav and press RETURN. For example, to delete announcement #3 in Screen 13, type: remove file board 01A11 /annc/Closed.wav NOTE: Filenames are case-sensitive and require the .wav file extension.
Managing VAL Announcements Using FTP 4. Verify that there are no files listed. NOTE: The announcement directory on the TN2501AP or G700 Media Gateway is /annc. 5. Type list integrated-annc-boards and press RETURN. Check the list to see that the announcement was deleted. The Length in Seconds field should show 0. Deleting VAL announcements at a system phone See ‘‘Deleting and erasing announcements’’.
Managing announcements Preparing the VAL circuit pack for the FTP session To prepare the VAL circuit pack for the FTP session, including setting the username and password: 1. At the SAT, type enable filesystem board board-location login ftp-username [3-6 characters] ftp-password [7-11 characters] and press RETURN. For example, the command: enable filesystem board 01A11 login romeo shakespeare enables an FTP session into the VAL circuit pack in Cabinet 1, carrier A, slot 11.
Managing VAL Announcements Using FTP Instructions 1. At the FTP client, type ftp val-ip-address and press ENTER. The IP address must match the switch-administered IP address (see change node-names ip). 2. At the username prompt, type romeo and press RETURN. 3. At the password prompt, type shakespeare and press RETURN. The system responds with User logged in. NOTE: Once you are logged in you are in the announcements directory (/annc). 4.
Managing announcements Before you start ■ Ensure that the steps in ‘‘Setting up an FTP session’’ are complete. ■ Ensure that you have adequate storage space for backup on the remote host computer. Depending on the number of announcements and file type, 60 minutes of recording may require up to 32 megabytes of storage space for backup on the remote host computer.
Managing VAL Announcements Using FTP Before you start ■ Know the IP address, the announcement filename that you are deleting, and the VAL circuit pack location (list directory board). Instructions To delete an announcement on a TN2501AP circuit pack through an FTP session: 1. Ensure that the steps in ‘‘Setting up an FTP session’’ are complete. 2. At the computer client, type delete filename.wav and press RETURN. Example: delete Closed.
Managing announcements ■ Ensure that you have not just administered the announcement on the Announcements/Audio Sources screen. If announcement administration precedes the file transfer, then — the announcement appears with a zero (0) length on the list integrated-annc-boards screen. — The Time Remaining fields on both the list integrated-annc-boards and display integrated-annc-boards screens do not refresh to reflect the presence of the new announcement file on the circuit pack.
Managing VAL Announcements Using FTP Combining tasks When you combine copying (the get command) and moving (the put command) announcement files, you can rearrange VAL announcements. Before you start ■ Know the IP address, the filename, and location of the destination VAL circuit pack to which you are moving an announcement (list directory board). Instructions To move an announcement to a VAL circuit pack from another VAL circuit pack in an FTP session: 1.
Managing announcements Ending an FTP session FTP sessions to a VAL circuit pack originate at the FTP client end. You terminate an FTP session by ■ logging out from the FTP client (type bye or quit and press ENTER) and ■ typing disable filesystem board board-location at the SAT and press RETURN. (This clears the ftp-username and ftp-password.) or ■ you can effectively terminate the session from the Avaya MultiVantage end by letting the system time out (10 minutes of inactivity).
Troubleshooting VAL Announcements Troubleshooting VAL Announcements If a working announcement file is deleted via FTP, the next attempt to play the announcement fails, and the system adds a software event to the Denial Events Log. You can view this log to see if the announcement has been deleted, and to see if other events have occurred related to announcements. Viewing the Denial Events Log To view the Denial Events Log: 1. At the SAT, type display events and press RETURN.
Managing announcements 4. Press ENTER. The Events Report screen appears. display events Page 1 of 1 EVENTS REPORT Event Event Type Description 2028 2027 Event Data 1 Annc file has bad format Annc not found on board Screen 27. 8C0009 8C0007 Event Data 2 0 0 First Occur Last Occur Evnt Cnt 05/14/11:55 05/14/12:04 05/14/12:09 05/14/12:09 2 1 Events report screen (display events) 5. Look at the 2027 entry in the Event Type field.
Troubleshooting VAL Announcements The system records a software denial event in the Denial Events Log each time it plays an announcement with a bad file format. Refer back to the Events report screen (display events) and find the 2028 entry in the Event Type field: ■ The Event Description field explains that the announcement has a bad file format. ■ The Event Data 1 field contains the announcement number (hexadecimal in the lower three digits).
Managing announcements Non-volatile storage of announcements on VAL The VAL board has a RAM based file system on which the announcements are stored. This is where a newly recorded or FTP’d announcement resides. The VAL constantly checks to determine whether changes have been made to the file system (file added or deleted or renamed). Once a change has been detected, the VAL waits for 5 minutes of stability. After such a stable period, the VAL backs up the RAM based file system to its FLASH.
Non-volatile storage of announcements on VAL Changing the name of the announcement To change the name of an announcement you must do two things. 1. Change the administered name (using the change announcement command) 2. Change the name of the file on the VAL board Changing the name of the file on the VAL board There are two ways to accomplish this. NOTE: For the following steps, do not use the FTP rename command since the FTP server on the VAL board does not support it. 1.
Managing announcements 2. Re-record the announcement with the new file name. a. FTP the new announcement to the VAL board. b. Assign the new name to the existing extension on the announcement screen (replacing the old file name). c. Delete the old announcement file using the remove file command (if desired).
Managing group communication Group communication features allow co-workers to communicate with each other more efficiently. This chapter shows you how to administer your system so users can place a variety of pages from their phones or use their phones as intercoms. You can also give specific users permission to monitor other users’ calls or to interrupt active calls with important messages.
Managing group communication Instructions As an example, we will set up voice paging for an office with 5 zones. We’ll allow users to page all 5 zones at once, and we’ll assign a class of restriction of 1 to all zones. 1. Type change paging loudspeaker and press RETURN. The Loudspeaker Paging screen appears.
Setting up voice paging over loudspeakers 7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for zones 2 to 5. 8. In the ALL row, type 310 in the Voice Paging — TAC field and 1 in the Voice Paging — COR field. By completing this row, you allow users to page all zones at once. You do not have to assign a port to this row. 9. Press ENTER to save your changes. You can integrate loudspeaker voice paging and call parking. This is called “deluxe paging.
Managing group communication With an appropriate class of restriction, remote callers can also make loudspeaker pages. When deluxe paging is enabled, if a user with an active call dials the trunk access code for a paging zone the active call is automatically parked. ■ Users dial the trunk access code + “#” to page and park an active call on their own extensions. ■ Users with console permission can park a call on any extension by dialing the trunk access code + the extension.
Setting up chime paging over loudspeakers Instructions To set up chime paging, you fill out the necessary fields on the Loudspeaker Paging screen and then assign chime codes to individual extensions on the Code Calling IDs screen. As an example, we will set up chime paging for a clothing store with 3 zones. We’ll allow users to page all zones at once, and we will assign a class of restriction of 1 to all zones. 1. Type change paging loudspeaker and press RETURN. The Loudspeaker Paging screen appears.
Managing group communication 6. On the Zone 1 row, type Men’s Department in the Location field. Give each zone a descriptive name so you can easily remember the corresponding physical location. 7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for zones 2 and 3. 8. In the ALL row, type 89 in the Code Calling — TAC field and 1 in the Code Calling — COR field. By completing this row, you allow users to page all zones at once. You do not have to assign a port to this row. 9. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Paging over speakerphones Fixing problems Problem Possible causes Solutions Users report that they can’t page. The attendant has taken control of the trunk group. Deactivate attendant control. More information Users page by dialing the trunk access code assigned to a zone. For your users’ convenience, you may also want to consider the following options: ■ Add the paging trunk access codes to an abbreviated dialing list and allow users to page using the list.
Managing group communication Before you start You must have ‘‘DCP’’ set speakerphones or IP set speakerphones. Instructions To set up speakerphone paging, you create a paging group and assign phones to it. In the following example, we’ll create paging group 1 and add 4 members. 1. Type add group-page 1 and press RETURN. The Group Paging Using Speakerphone screen appears.
Paging users who are on active calls 6. Enter the remaining extensions that are members of this group. The switch fills in the Name fields with the names from the Station screen when you save your changes. 7. Press ENTER to save your changes. Fixing problems Problem Possible causes Solutions Users get a busy signal when they try to page. All phones in the group are busy or off-hook. Wait a few minutes and try again. All phones in the group have Send All Calls or Do Not Disturb activated.
Managing group communication Before you start Before you administer whisper paging: ■ Your switch must have a circuit pack that supports whisper paging. See the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for information on specific models. ■ Users must have 6400-, 7400-, 8400-, or 9400-series DCP (digital) phones. Instructions You give users the ability to use whisper paging by administering feature buttons or feature access codes.
Using phones as intercoms Using phones as intercoms Use this procedure to make communications quicker and easier for users who frequently call each other. With the intercom feature, you can allow one user to call another user in a predefined group just by pressing a couple of buttons. You can even administer a button that always calls a predefined extension when pressed. Instructions Administering the intercom feature is a 2-step process. First, you create an intercom group and assign extensions to it.
Managing group communication 4. On row 1, type 1 in the DC field. This is the code a user will dial to make an intercom call to extension 2010. The length of this code must exactly match the entry in the Length of Dial Code field. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the remaining extensions. Dial codes don’t have to be in any order. The switch fills in the Name field with the name from the Station screen when you save your changes. 6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Using phones as intercoms 4. In the Grp field, type 1. This is the number of the intercom group. Since an extension can belong to more than one intercom group, you must assign a group number to intercom buttons. 5. In the DC field, type 2. This is the dial code for extension 2011, the destination extension. 6. Press ENTER to save your changes. 7. Repeat steps 1–6 for extension 2011. Assign a dial code of 1 to 2011’s automatic intercom button.
Managing group communication Setting up automatic answer intercom calls Automatic Answer Intercom Calls (Auto Answer ICOM) allows a user to answer an intercom call within the intercom group without pressing the intercom button. Auto Answer ICOM works with digital, BRI, and hybrid phones with built-in speaker, headphones, or adjunct speakerphone.
Observing calls Observing calls Use this procedure to allow designated users, normally supervisors, to listen to other users’ calls. This capability is often used to monitor service quality in call centers and other environments where employees serve customers over the phone. On Avaya MultiVantage, this is called “service observing” and the user observing calls is the “observer.” This section describes service observing in environments without Automatic Call Distribution (‘‘ACD’’) or call vectoring.
Managing group communication To set up service observing: 1. Set the observer’s class of restriction to permit service observing: a. In the Class of Restriction screen for COR 5, type y in the Can Be A Service Observer? field. b. Move to the page of the Class of Restriction screen that shows service observing permissions. c. Type y in the field for class of restriction 10. 2. In the Class of Restriction screen for COR 10, type y in the Can Be Service Observed? field.
Managing data calls Types of data connections You can use MultiVantage to allow the following types of data elements/devices to communicate to the world: ■ Data Terminals ■ Personal computers ■ Host Computers (for example, CentreVu CMS or Intuity AUDIX) ■ Digital Phones (Digital Communications Protocol (‘‘DCP’’) and Integrated Services Digital Network-Basic Rate Interface (‘‘ISDN-BRI’’)) ■ Audio/Video Equipment ■ Printers ■ Local area networks (‘‘LAN’’) You enable these connections using a la
Managing data calls Once you have connected these data devices to the switch, you can use networking and routing capabilities to allow them to communicate with other devices over your private network or the public network. This section describes the system features available to enable data communications.
Data Call Setup 3. On the Modem Pool Group screen, administer the Circuit Pack Assignments field. See ‘‘Modem Pool Group’’ on page 1038 for more information.
Managing data calls Examples of dialing are: ■ DIAL: 3478 ■ DIAL: 9+(201) 555-1212 ■ DIAL: 8, 555-2368 ■ DIAL: 9+555-2368+%9999+123 (remote access) The following call-progress messages and their meanings are provided for DCP and ISDN-BRI modules. Table 7. Call-progress messages Message Application Meaning DIAL: DCP Equivalent to dial tone. Enter the desired number or FAC followed by Enter. CMD BRI Equivalent to dial tone. Enter the desired number or FAC followed by Enter.
Data Call Setup Table 7. Call-progress messages (Continued) Message Application Meaning FORWARDED DCP, BRI Equivalent to redirection-notification signal. Called terminal activates Call Forwarding and receives a call, and call is forwarded. INCOMING CALL DCP, BRI Equivalent to ringing. INVALID ADDRESS DCP Entered name is not in alphanumeric-dialing table. WRONG ADDRESS BRI Entered name is not in alphanumeric-dialing table.
Managing data calls 3. To originate and disconnect a call, the user presses BREAK. If the terminal does not generate a 2-second continuous break signal, the user can press originate/disconnect on the data module. 4. The user can enter digits at the DIAL: prompt. Telephone dialing DCP telephone dialing allows telephone users to originate and control data calls from a telephone. Users can set up a call using any unrestricted telephone and then transfer the call to a data endpoint.
Data Call Setup ISDN-BRI data modules Data-terminal dialing A user can set up and disconnect data calls directly from a data terminal without using a telephone as follows: 1. The user presses ENTER a few times. If the CMD: prompt does not appear, the user presses BREAK A + T at the same time, and then presses ENTER. 2. At the CMD: prompt, the user types and presses ENTER. 3. To disconnect, the user enters +++. At the CMD: prompt, the user types end and presses ENTER.
Managing data calls Analog modems When a telephone user places a data call with a modem, the user dials the data-origination access code assigned in the system before dialing the endpoint. Considerations ■ A BRI phone cannot call a data terminal, and a data terminal cannot call a BRI phone. ■ Abbreviated Dialing Interactions Only 22 of the 24 (maximum) digits in an abbreviated-dialing number are available for keyboard dialing.
Default Dialing Default Dialing Default Dialing provides data-terminal users who dial a specific number the majority of the time a very simple method of dialing that number. Normal data terminal dialing and alphanumeric dialing are unaffected.
Managing data calls Alphanumeric Dialing Alphanumeric Dialing enhances data-terminal dialing by allowing users to place data calls by entering an alphanumeric name rather than a long string of numbers. For example, a user could type 9+1-800-telefon instead of 9+1-800-835-3366 to make a call. Users need to remember only the alpha-name of the far-end terminating point.
Data Hotline Data Hotline Data Hotline provides for automatic-nondial placement of a data call preassigned to an endpoint when the originating switch goes off-hook. Use for security purposes. Administering Data Hotline 1. You can use an abbreviated dialing list for your default ID. See ‘‘Abbreviated dialing’’ on page 1449 for more information. 2. On the Station screen, administer the following fields. See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for more information.
Managing data calls Data Privacy Data Privacy protects analog data calls from being disturbed by any of the system’s overriding or ringing features. Administering Data Privacy 1. Choose either of the following: ■ On the Feature Access Code screen, administer the Data Privacy Access Code field. See ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781 for more information. ■ On the Class of Service screen, administer the Data Privacy field. See ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672 for more information. 2.
Data Restriction ■ Intercom — Automatic and Dial An extension with Data Privacy or Data Restriction active cannot originate an intercom call. The user receives an intercept tone. ■ Music-on-Hold Access If a user places a call with Data Privacy on hold, the user must withhold Music-on-Hold to prevent the transmission of tones that a connected data service might falsely interpret as a data transmission. ■ Priority Calls If a user activates Data Privacy, Priority Calls are denied on analog telephones.
Managing data calls ■ Integrated Services Digital Network-Primary Rate Interface (‘‘ISDN-PRI’’) ■ Release-Link Trunk (‘‘RLT’’) ■ Tandem ■ Tie ■ Wide Area Telecommunications Service (‘‘WATS’’) Interactions - Data Restriction ■ Attendant Call Waiting and Call Waiting Termination If Data Restriction is active, Call Waiting is denied. ■ Busy Verification Busy Verification cannot be active when Data Restriction is active.
Data-Only Off-Premises Extensions Users can place data calls to this type of data endpoint using Telephone Dialing or Data Terminal (Keyboard) Dialing. Since there is no telephone at the remote site, originate data calls from the remote data terminal using Keyboard Dialing only. Administering Data-Only Off-Premises Extensions 1. On the Processor/Trunk Data Module screen, administer all fields. See ‘‘Data modules’’ on page 707 for more information.
Managing data calls Data Modules — general A Data Module is a connection device between a basic-rate interface (BRI) or ‘‘DCP’’ interface of the switch and DTE or DCE. The following types of data modules can be used with the system: ■ Announcement data module ■ Data line data module ■ Processor/trunk data module (P/TDM) ■ Netcon data module (DEFINITY SI configurations only) See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information.
Data Modules — general Detailed description of data modules TTI allows data modules without hardware translation to merge with an appropriate data module connected to an unadministered port. The unadministered port is given TTI default translation sufficient to allow a terminal connected to the data module (connected to the port) to request a TTI merge with the extension of a data module administered without hardware translation. NOTE: TTI is not useful for Announcement and X.25 hardware.
Managing data calls 7400C High Speed Link The 7400C high-speed link (HSL) is a data-service unit that allows access to DCP data services. It provides synchronous data transmission at speeds of 56- and 64-Kbps and provides a link to high-speed data networks. Used for Group 4 fax applications that include electronic mail and messaging, and electronic storage of printed documents and graphics. Use the 7400C for video teleconferencing and LAN interconnect applications.
Administered Connection Administered Connection An Administered Connection (‘‘AC’’) is a connection between two access or data endpoints. Avaya MultiVantage automatically establishes and maintains the connection based on the attributes you administer. ACs provides the following capabilities.
Managing data calls Access endpoints Access endpoints are non-signaling trunk ports. They neither generate signaling to the far-end of the trunk nor respond to signaling from the far-end. Designate an access endpoint as the originating endpoint or destination endpoint in an AC. Typical AC applications The following are typical AC applications: ■ A local data endpoint connection to a local or remote-access endpoint.
Administered Connection AC attempts can fail for the following reasons: ■ Resources are unavailable to route to the destination. ■ A required conversion resource is not available. ■ Access is denied by class of restriction (‘‘COR’’), facilities restriction level (‘‘FRL’’), or bearer capability class (‘‘BCC’’). Or, an attempt is made to route voice-band-data over SDDN trunks in the public switch network. ■ Destination address is incorrect. ■ Destination endpoint is busy.
Managing data calls If an AC drops because it was disabled/removed or is no longer due to be active, no action is taken. If an AC drops because of changed AC attributes, an immediate attempt is made to establish the connection with the changed attributes if it is still due to be active. Existing entries in the error/alarm log are resolved if they no longer apply.
Administered Connection Administering Administered Connections 1. Choose one of the following data modules and administer all fields: ■ Data Line Data Module (use with Data Line circuit pack) ■ Processor/Trunk Data Module (use with one of the following:) — MPDMs, 700D, 7400B, 7400D, or 8400B MTDMs, 700B, 700C, 700E, or 7400A ■ Processor Interface Data Module (see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information) ■ X.
Managing data calls 9. On the Station screen, assign one button as ac-alarm. See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for more information. 10. On the Attendant Console screen, assign one button as ac-alarm. See ‘‘Attendant Console’’ on page 614 for more information. Interactions ■ Abbreviated Dialing Use Abbreviated Dialing entries in the Destination field. Entries must comply with restrictions.
Modem Pooling ■ Set Time Command When you change the system time via the set time command, all scheduled ACs are examined. If the time change causes an active AC to be outside its scheduled period, the AC is dropped. If the time change causes an inactive AC to be within its scheduled period, the switch attempts to establish the AC. If any AC (scheduled or continuous) is in retry mode and the system time changes, the switch attempts to establish the AC.
Managing data calls Administering Modem Pooling For Integrated modem poolings: 1. On the Modem Pool Group screen, administer all fields. See ‘‘Modem Pool Group’’ on page 1038 for more information. 2. On the Feature Access Code screen, administer the Data Origination Access Code field. See ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781 for more information. 3. On the Data Module screen, administer all fields. See ‘‘Data modules’’ on page 707 for more information. For Combined modem poolings: 1.
PC Interface Interactions ■ Call Detail Recording Data call CDR records the use of modem pools on trunk calls. ■ Data Call Setup Data calls to or from a TDM cannot use Modem Pooling. ■ Data Privacy and Data Restriction The insertion of a modem pool does not turn off Data Privacy or Data Restriction. ■ Data-Only Off-Premises Extensions Calls to or from a Data-Only Off-Premises Extension cannot use Modem Pooling, when this type of digital-data endpoint uses a TDM.
Managing data calls ■ The line jack on the card provides a digital port connection to Avaya DEFINITY servers. ■ The distance between the PC Interface card and the PBX should be no more than 1524m for 24-gauge wire or 1219m for 26-gauge wire. Figure Notes 1. IBM-compatible PC with DCP Interface card Figure 12. 4. DCP telephone 2. IBM-compatible PC with DCP Interface card 5. Avaya (Digital Line, Digital Line (16-DCP-2-Wire), or Digital Line (24-DCP-2-wire) circuit pack) 3. DCP 6.
PC Interface Figure Notes 1. ISDN telephone 7. Avaya Media Server 2. PC with application 8. PRI trunks 3. Handset or Headset 9. BRI stations 4. BRI Interface card 10. Interworking 5. 2B + D 11. DMI 6. ISDN Line (12-BRI-S-NT) circuit pack) 12. Switch features Figure 13. ISDN—BRI PC interface configuration (Group 2) PC Interface users have multiple appearances (depending on the software application used) for their assigned extension.
Managing data calls Security There are two areas where unauthorized use may occur with this feature: unauthorized local use and remote access. ! SECURITY ALERT: Unauthorized local use involves unauthorized users who attempt to make calls from a PC. The PC software has a security setting so users can place the PC in Security Mode when it is unattended. You also can assign Automatic Security so that the administration program on the PC is always active and runs in Security Mode.
Wideband Switching ■ Do not use telephones with data modules with the PC Interface. (You can still use 3270 Data Modules if you also use 3270 emulation). If you attach a DCP data module or ISDN data module to a telephone that is connected to a PC Interface card, the data module is bypassed (not used). All the interface functions are performed by the interface card even if a data module is present. ■ The 7404D telephone with messaging cartridge cannot be used with PC Interface.
Managing data calls The following table provides information on Wideband Switching channel types.
Wideband Switching Typical uses A typical video application uses an ISDN-PRI interface to DS0 1 through 6 of the line-side facility. See Figure 14. wdbndex CJL 061996 Figure Notes 1. Video application 8. Network 2. Port 1 9. DS0 24 D-channel 3. Port 2 10. DS0 23 unused 4. ISDN terminal adaptor 11. DS0 1–6 wideband 5. Line-side ISDN-PRI 12. DS0 24 D-channel 6. Avaya Media Server 13. DS0 7–23 narrow bands 7. ISDN trunk 14. DS0 1–6 wideband Figure 14.
Managing data calls Endpoint applications An endpoint application is the origination or destination of a wideband call. Endpoint application can be any number of data applications based on the customer’s particular needs. ISDN-PRI terminal adapters For wideband switching with non-ISDN-PRI equipment, you can use an ISDN-PRI terminal adapter. ISDN-PRI terminal adapters translate standard ISDN signaling into a form that can be used by the endpoint application and vice versa.
Wideband Switching Non-signaling configuration Wideband also can support configurations using non-signaling (non-ISDN-PRI) line-side T1 or E1 connections. The endpoints are the same as those defined for configurations with signaling. Data service unit/channel service unit This unit simply passes the call to the endpoint application. Unlike terminal adapters, the DSU/CSU does not have signaling capability. NOTE: No DSU/CSU is needed if the endpoint application has a fractional T1 interface.
Managing data calls Guidelines and examples This section examines wideband and its components in relation to the following specific customer usage scenarios: ■ Data backup connection ■ Scheduled batch processing ■ Primary data connectivity ■ Networking Data backup connection Using wideband for data transmission backup provides customers with alternate transmission paths for critical data in the event of primary transmission path failure.
Wideband Switching Networking All of the wideband networking is over ISDN-PRI facilities (and the emulation of them by ATM-CES) but may connect to a variety of networks, other domestic interexchange carriers’ services, private line, RBOC services, and services in other countries. ISDN-PRI trunk groups and channel allocation Only ISDN-PRI trunks (and the emulation of them by ATM-CES) support wideband calls to the network.
Managing data calls Given this facility list concept, the algorithms have the ability to search for trunks, by facility, in an attempt to satisfy the bandwidth requirements of a given wideband call.
Wideband Switching Note that on a T1 facility, a D-channel is not considered a busy trunk and results in a facility with a D-channel always being partially contaminated. On an E1 facility, however, a D-channel is not considered a busy trunk because H11 and H12 calls may still be placed on that facility; an E1 facility with a D-channel and idle B-channels is considered an idle facility. H12 Since H12 is 1,920 Kbps which is comprised of 30 B-channels, a 1,920-kbps call can only be carried on an E1 facility.
Managing data calls N x DS0 For the N x DS0 multi-rate service, a trunk group parameter determines whether a floating or a flexible trunk allocation scheme is to be used. The algorithm to satisfy an N x DS0 call is either floating or flexible. ■ Floating (Contiguous) — In the floating scheme, an N x DS0 call is placed on a contiguous group of B-channels large enough to satisfy the requested bandwidth without any constraint being put on the starting channel (that is, no fixed starting point trunk).
Wideband Switching Glare and blocking Glare prevention Glare occurs when both sides of an ISDN interface select the same B-channel for call initiation. For example, a user side of an interface selects the B-channel for an outgoing call and, before the switch receives and processes the SETUP message, the switch selects the same B-channel for call origination. Since any single wideband call uses more channels, the chances of glare are greater.
Managing data calls Administering Wideband Switching Before you start You need a DS1 Converter circuit pack. See the Avaya MultiVantage™ System Release 4.0 System Description Pocket Reference for more information on the circuit pack. Instructions To administer wideband switching: 1. On the Access Endpoint screen, administer all fields. See ‘‘Access Endpoint’’ on page 593 for more information. 2. On the PRI Endpoint screen, administer all fields. See ‘‘PRI Endpoint’’ on page 1080 for more information. 3.
Wideband Switching ■ Automatic Circuit Assurance Treats wideband calls as logical single-trunk calls so that a single ACA-referral call is made if an ACA-referral call is required. The call is referred to the lowest B-channel associated with the wideband call. ■ Call Coverage A wideband endpoint extension cannot be administered as a coverage point in a call-coverage path. ■ Call Detail Recording When CDR is active for the trunk group, all wideband calls generate CDR records.
Managing data calls ■ Generalized Route Selection GRS supports wideband BCC to identify wideband calls. GRS searches a route pattern for a preference that has wideband BCC. Route preferences that support wideband BCC also can support other BCCs to allow different call types to share the same trunk group. ■ CO Trunk (TTC - Japan) Circuit Pack This circuit pack cannot perform wideband switching. No member of the circuit pack should be a member of a wideband group.
CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Application Interface Figure Notes 1. ASAI adjunct 5. ISDN-BRI 2. ISDN Line circuit pack 6. Packet bus 3. Packet Controller circuit pack 7. Memory bus 4. Switch processing element (SPE) Figure 15. ASAI Switch Interface Link — BRI Transport ASAI Capabilities For information concerning the types of associations over which various event reports can be sent, see Avaya MultiVantage™ CallVisor® ASAI Technical Reference.
Managing data calls Setting up CallVisor ASAI CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Applications Interface (ASAI) can be used in the telemarketing and help-desk environments. It is used to allow adjunct applications to monitor and control resources in Avaya MultiVantage. Before you start ■ On the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, verify the: — ASAI Interface field is y. If not, contact your Avaya representative.
Setting up DEFINITY LAN Gateway Setting up DEFINITY LAN Gateway Before you start This section describes pre-administrative tasks associated with the Co-Resident DLG. For S8100 Media Server Configurations If you want to use a TN799 C-LAN circuit pack as the Ethernet Interface for the Co-Resident DLG, proceed as follows: 1. Type display system-parameters customer-options and press ENTER. 2.
Managing data calls Make sure the PROCR is administered and its Ethernet port is enabled. If the PROCR is not listed (PROCR should appear in the Type field and the previously administered node name should appear in the Node Name field), add a PROCR. For S8300 Media Server Although the S8300 Media Server does not use a standard DEFINITY server port board, the pre-administration is the same. 1. Type display system-parameters customer-options and press ENTER. 2.
Collecting billing information Collecting information about calls Call detail recording (CDR) collects detailed information about all incoming and outgoing calls on specified trunk groups. If you use intraswitch CDR, you can also collect information about calls between designated extensions on the switch. Avaya MultiVantage sends this information to a printer or to some other CDR output device that collects call records and that may also provide reports.
Collecting billing information Instructions In this example, we are going to establish call detail recording for all calls that come in on trunk group 1 (our CO trunk). We are going to set up CDR so that any call that is handled by an attendant produces a separate record for the attendant part of the call. 1. Type change trunk-group 1 and press RETURN. The Trunk Group screen appears.
Collecting information about calls CDR SYSTEM PARAMETERS Page 1 of X Node Number (Local PBX ID): 1 CDR Date Format: month/day Primary Output Format: ___________ Primary Output Ext: ________ Secondary Output Format: ___________ Secondary Output Ext: ________ Use ISDN Layouts? _ EIA Device Bit Rate: ____ Use Enhanced Formats? _ Modify Circuit ID Display? _ Remove # from Called Number? _ Record Outgoing Calls Only? _ Intra-switch CDR? _ Suppress CDR for Ineffective Call Attempts? _ Outg Trk Call Splitting? _
Collecting billing information More information You can also administer the switch to produce separate records for calls that are conferenced or transferred. This is called Call Splitting. There are many other variations that you can administer for CDR, and these are described in the screens section of this book. Related topics For additional information on CDR, see ‘‘Call detail recording’’ on page 1553.
Tracking calls by account code The Intra-Switch CDR screen appears.
Collecting billing information CDR SYSTEM PARAMETERS Page 1 of X Node Number (Local PBX ID): 1 CDR Date Format: _________ Primary Output Format: ___________ Primary Output Ext: ________ Secondary Output Format: ___________ Secondary Output Ext: ________ Use ISDN Layouts? _ EIA Device Bit Rate: ____ Use Enhanced Formats? _ Modify Circuit ID Display? _ Remove # from Called Number? _ Record Outgoing Calls Only? _ Intra-switch CDR? _ Suppress CDR for Ineffective Call Attempts? _ Outg Trk Call Splitting? _ Disc
Forcing users to enter account codes Instructions In this example, we administer the system to force users in our North American office to enter an account code before making international calls. 1. Type change system-parameters cdr and press RETURN. The CDR System Parameters screen appears. 2. In the Force Entry of Acct Code for Calls Marked on Toll Analysis Form field, type y. 3. In the CDR Account Code Length field, type 5. 4. Press ENTER to save your changes. 5. Type change toll 0 and press RETURN. 6.
Collecting billing information More information You can also establish a class of restriction with Forced Entry of Account Codes set to y, and assign this class of restriction (COR) to trunks or other facilities that you want to restrict. With this method, all users with this COR must enter account codes before making any outgoing trunk calls. See ‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page 658 for more information.
Receiving call-charge information Collecting call charge information over ISDN In this example, we administer the system to provide Advice of Charge over an existing ISDN trunk group, at the end of a call. This information will appear on CDR reports. 1. Type change trunk-group 2. The ISDN trunk group screen appears with existing administration for this ISDN trunk group.
Collecting billing information Receiving call-charge information over non-ISDN trunks In this example, we will administer an existing Direct Inward and Outward Dialing (DIOD) trunk to receive PPM from the public network. 1. Type change trunk-group 3. The Trunk Group screen appears with existing administration for this trunk group.
Viewing call charge information Related topics See ‘‘Call charge information’’ on page 1527 for more information about AOC and PPM. Viewing call charge information Avaya MultiVantage provides two ways for you to view call-charge information: on a telephone display or as part of the Call Detail Recording (CDR) report. From a display, users can see the cost of an outgoing call, both while the call is in progress and at the end of the call.
Collecting billing information 6. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN. The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears. 7. In the Charge Display Update Frequency (seconds) field, type 30. Frequent display updates may have considerable performance impact. 8. Press ENTER to save your changes. 9. Now assign extension 5040 a disp-chrg button to give this user the ability to control the charge display. See ‘‘Adding feature buttons’’ on page 129 for more information.
Administering Media Servers This chapter describes how to administer an S8700 Media Server and a G700 Media Gateway and the S8300 Media Server. It is targeted for system administrators after the product is installed and tested. In a converged network where voice and data are both sent over a corporate local area network (LAN), this configuration can provide primary or standby telephony and communications-processing capabilities.
Administering Media Servers G700 Media Gateway physical design (For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) The G700 Media Gateway is a19-inch, rack-mount design similar to other Avaya P330 hardware. The media gateway can be a member of a P330 stack of Layer 2 or 3 devices, reside in a stack of other media gateways, or operate as a standalone unit. Figure 16 shows the front of the media gateway. Figure 16.
G700 Media Gateway administration S8300 Media Server faceplate (For S8300 Media Servers) Figure 17 shows the faceplate of the S8300 Media Server. Figure 17. S8300 Media Server faceplate The faceplate of the S8300 Media Server has the following components: ■ The LED array on the left indicates when the S8300 is active and when it is safe to power it down. ■ A Shut Down button can be used to shut down the server (the S8300 can also be shut down and restarted using software commands).
Administering Media Servers ■ (For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) The other media module slots are filled as needed to meet the call-processing needs at your site. Media modules can be mixed and matched. Table 8 lists the administrative name and port capacities for the media modules that may be installed in a G700 Media Gateway. Table 8.
G700 Media Gateway administration (For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) If the primary call-processing server goes offline and an LSP is available as a standby unit, it will assume call processing as follows: ■ IP phones and media gateways that were previously using the primary media server will try to register with the standby media server for call processing, provided that they have been administered to do so in the controller list (use the set mgc list command).
Administering Media Servers Accessing Device Manager from a web browser (For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) To access the P330 Device Manager from a web browser: 1. Open a compatible web browser on your computer. Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 (or higher) and Netscape Navigator 4.7 and 6.2 are supported. The Java Plug-in 1.3.1_02 is required. 2. In the Address (or Location) field of your browser, type the IP address of the P330 stack. 3. Log in as prompted.
Media Server administration ■ Command line interface (CLI) access procedures are covered in Welcome to the Avaya S8300 Media Server and Avaya G700 Media Gateway. ■ For a list of CLI commands, see the Maintenance for Avaya™ G700 Media Gateway controlled by an Avaya™ S8300 Media Server or an Avaya™ S8700 Media Server, 555-234-101, October 2002.
Administering Media Servers Accessing the Media Server Web Interface (For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) The Web Interface can be accessed through the corporate LAN connection to the G700 Media Gateway, or through the Services Ethernet interface on the front of the S8300 and S8700 Media Server connected to a laptop PC using a crossover cable. Details on how to configure a laptop for a direct connection are in the online help and in Welcome to the Avaya S8300 Media Server and Avaya G700 Media Gateway.
Media Server administration 3. If your browser does not have a valid security certificate, you will see a warning screen and instructions to load the security certificate. ■ If you are certain your connection is secure, accept the server security certificate to access the Login screen. ■ If you plan to use this computer and browser to access this or other Avaya media servers again, click the main menu link to Install Avaya Root Certificate after you log in. 4. The Login screen appears.
Administering Media Servers Web interface main menu (For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) The tasks you can perform are shown by a list of links in the left panel of the main web interface window. (For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) For help with any of these tasks, click the Help button on the main menu. Alternatively, if you have already clicked on a link, click the About This Screen button on the web interface page to go directly to the help for that specific screen.
Media Server administration Copy files to the server (For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) Files must be copied to the media server from another computer or server in the network, or uploaded from a directly connected laptop computer. Files that may be copied to the server include license and authentication files, system announcements, and files for software upgrades.
Administering Media Servers NOTE: The VoIP Monitoring Manager may not be available on all S8300 Media Servers. (It is available on all S8700 Media Servers.) It is normally offered as part of the Avaya VisAbility Management Suite. Contact your Avaya representative if you are interested in obtaining this program.
Call-processing administration ■ Optional encryption for data backups (see ‘‘Backup and restore data’’). ■ Support for RADIUS authentication for media gateways and P330 stack elements using the P330 Device Manager. See ‘‘Using Device Manager to administer G700 Media Gateway components’’. Command syntax changes for media modules (For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) The syntax for using the SAT commands for a G700 Media Gateway or S8300 Media Server has changed.
Administering Media Servers ■ The list media-gateway [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] command shows the list of currently administered gateways. Information includes the media gateway number, name, serial number, IP address, and whether or not this media gateway is currently registered with the call controller. The IP address field is blank until the media gateway registers once, then remains populated.
Call-processing administration ■ ■ The IP Network Region screen also must be administered for QoS monitoring (see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for details). If the RTCP Enabled field is left at default (“y”), then be sure to set a valid IP address in the IP-Options System Parameters screen. For situations that require customization, this screen is administered on a per IP network regional basis.
Administering Media Servers SNMP Agents The S8300 and S8700 Media Servers contain SNMP modules. A simplified SNMP manager exists to collect traps from network elements such as the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), Ethernet switches, and media gateways. An SNMP alarm sub-agent exists to send SNMP traps to customer provided network managers. An SNMP alarm sub-agent exists to send alarms as traps to the Initialization and Administration System (INADS).
SNMP Agents The Add Trap Destination page displays. Screen 29. Add Trap Destination screen, upper portion 3. In the Fill-in IP address and provide data for one of the three SNMP versions section, check the Check to enable this destination box. 4. In the IP address field, enter the IP address for destination. NOTE: To use MultiVantage Fault Performance Management (MFPM), use SNMP Version 1. 5. In the SNMP version 1 section, in the Community name field, type public if you are using MFPM.
Administering Media Servers The updated Configure Trap Destinations page displays. Screen 30. Updated Configure Trap Destinations screen Administering SNMP agents This link provides support for administration of the co-resident SNMP master agent and MultiVantage sub-agent. ■ Enable and disable access to the MultiVantage sub-agent ■ Enable and disable each protocol (V1, V2, V3) individually. Any combination may be enabled.
SNMP Agents ■ Shows the status of SNMP version 3 read-only and read-write users. If a user has been administered, its information displays. Passwords do not display; stars display to show a password has been administered. If a privacy password is used, an authentication password also must be given. 3. IP Addresses for SNMP Access ■ A list of IP addresses from which SNMP access is allowed, or ■ All IP addresses. Each SNMP version can be enabled and disabled independently of the other versions.
Administering Media Servers Screen 31.
SNMP Agents Screen 32. Administer SNMP Agents, lower portion 2. In the MultiVantage Management Sub-Agent section, check the Check to enable MultiVantage Management Sub-Agent box. If checked, an SNMP manager can interact with the ACP application using the MultiVantage sub-agent within the restrictions administered on this screen. If not checked, SNMP access to the ACP application is denied. Disabling the MultiVantage sub-agent does not inhibit access to other SNMP agents running on the server.
Administering Media Servers 4. In the Verify New Agent ACP Login Password field, repeat the new password. NOTE: To use MFPM you must use both SNMP Version 1 and Version 2c. Community strings must be set up in the special format. 5. In the SNMP Version 1 section, check the Check to enable SNMP Version 1 box. This is the SNMP version of the protocol to be used in communicating with the SNMP agents on the server. NOTE: The Community Name fields are the authentication mechanism for SNMP v1 and v2c.
SNMP Agents For example, trumpet!g3mgt!soundblast. Notice the term ‘g3mgt’ appears in all names. NOTE: If you do not use MFPM, you can enter anything but it has to be coordinated with the receiving network management station. NOTE: If you are using MFPM, whatever is entered in the community string for ‘anything’ must also be administered in MFPM. For more information, see Avaya MultiVantage Fault and Performance Manager, Installation and Configuration, 555-233-138. 8.
Administering Media Servers Administering SNMP version 3 If you decide to use SNMP Version 3, there are three levels of security provided. 1. The user name with no password provides the same level of security as SNMP Version 1 and Version 2c. 2. The Authentication Password field provides an enhanced level of security. 3. The Privacy Password provides an additional level of security. Instructions To set up SNMP, we will use Version 3 for the IP addresses. To set up Version 3: 1.
SNMP Agents Screen 34. Administer SNMP Agents, lower portion 2. In the MultiVantage Management Sub-Agent section, check the Check to enable MultiVantage Management Sub-Agent box. 3. If checked, an SNMP manager can interact with the ACP application using the MultiVantage sub-agent within the restrictions administered on this screen. 4. If not checked, SNMP access to the ACP application is denied. Disabling the MultiVantage sub-agent does not inhibit access to other SNMP agents running on the server. 5.
Administering Media Servers 8. Scroll down to the SNMP Version 3 section and check the Check to enable SNMP Version 3 box. This is the SNMP version of the protocol to be used in communicating with the SNMP agents on the server. 9. In the User Name field, type the user name. The user can query only for information. Your entry must be in any alphanumeric format and up to 50 characters in length. 10. (Optional) In the Authentication Password field, type the security password.
SNMP Agents To stop Master Agent: 1. On the main page, under SNMP, click Start/Stop Master Agent. The Start/Stop SNMP Master Agent page displays. Screen 35. Start/Stop SNMP Master Agent screen 2. To stop Master Agent, click Stop Agent. Administering ACP log-in permissions Now that you have set up SNMP, you need the ability to display administration commands and get system measurements. Instructions 1. On the SAT, type change permissions acpsmp and press ENTER.
Administering Media Servers 2. In the Display Admin. and Maint. Data field, type y. 3. In the System Measurements field, type y. NOTE: To be able to do busy out and release commands, do the following step. 4. In the Maintain Stations field, type y. 5. In the Maintain Trunks field, type y. 6. In the Maintain System field, type y. 7. In the Maintain Switch Circuit Packs field, type y. 8. In the Maintain Process Circuit Packs field, type y. 9. In the Maintain Enhanced DS1 field, type y. 10.
Screen reference AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table Your switch compares dialed S8100 Media Server with CMC1 numbers with the dialed strings on this table and determines the route pattern for the number. change aar analysis Page 1 of X AAR DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE Percent Full: Dialed String _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ Screen 36.
Screen reference change ars analysis Page 1 of X ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE Location: ___ Dialed String _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ Screen 37.
AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table Valid entries Usage intl The Route Index contains public network ISDN trunks that require international type of number encodings. pubu The Route Index contains public network ISDN trunks that require unknown type of number encodings. lev0 to lev2 Specify ISDN Private Numbering Plan (PNP) number formats. (See ‘‘ISDN Numbering — Private’’ on page 970 for more information.) ISDN Protocol Call Type Numbering Plan Identifier Type of Numbering aar E.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage China # 1 Call Type op operator attendant pubu public-network number (E.164)-unknown normal svcl national(2) toll-auto svct national(2) normal svft service call, first party control local svfl service call, first party control toll Dialed String User-dialed numbers are matched to the dialed string entry that most closely matches the dialed number.
AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table Max Valid entries Usage Between Min and 28 Enter the maximum number of user-dialed digits the system collects to match to the dialed string. Valid entries Usage Between 1 and Max Enter the minimum number of user-dialed digits the system collects to match to the dialed string. Min Node Number Valid entries Usage 1 to 999 or blank Enter the number of the destination node in a private network if you are using node number routing or DCS.
Screen reference AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table Your system uses the AAR or ARS Digit Conversion Table to change a dialed number for more efficient routing. Digits may be inserted or deleted from the dialed number. For instance, you can tell the switch to delete a 1 and an area code on calls to one of your locations, and avoid long-distance charges by routing the call over your private network.
AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table ANI Req This field applies only if the Request Incoming ANI (non-AAR/ARS) field on the Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters screen is n. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to require ANI on incoming R2-MFC or Russian MF ANI calls. r Allowed only if the Allow ANI Restriction on AAR/ARS field is y on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. Use to drop a call on a Russian Shuttle trunk or Russian Rotary trunk if the ANI request fails.
Screen reference Matching Pattern Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Enter the number you want the switch to match to dialed numbers. If a Prefix Digit 1 is required for 10-digit direct distance dialing (DDD) numbers, be sure the matching pattern begins with a 1. (1 to 18 digits) *, x, X wildcard characters Max Valid entries Usage Min to 28 Enter the maximum number of user-dialed digits the system collects to match to this Matching Pattern.
Abbreviated Dialing List Replacement String Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Enter the digits that replace the deleted portion of the dialed number. Leave this field blank to simply delete the digits. (1 to 18 digits) * # Use # to indicate end-of-dialing. It must be at the end of the digit-string. blank Abbreviated Dialing List This screen establishes system-wide or personal lists for speed dialing.
Screen reference Page 1 display abbreviated-dialing enhanced ABBREVIATED DIALING LIST Enhanced List Size (multiple of 5): 5 DIAL CODE 100: ________________________ 101: ________________________ 102: ________________________ 103: ________________________ 104: ________________________ 105: ________________________ Screen 40. Page 1 of 4 Privileged? n Abbreviated Dialing Enhanced List See Abbreviated Dialing for a detailed description of the special characters.
Abbreviated Dialing List Privileged Indicates whether users of this list can dial any number in the list, regardless of the COR of the station from which they dial. Valid entries Usage y/n Set this field to n if you want the system to verify that this station is allowed to dial this number. Size (multiple of 5) The number of dial code list entries you want in this list.
Screen reference Vector Directory Number extension may also be assigned. Valid entries Usage Digits 0 to 9 Up to 24 characters * (star) Part of FAC # (pound) Part of FAC ~p Pause 1.5 seconds ~w Wait for dial tone ~m Change to outpulse DTMF digits at the end-to-end rate ~s Start suppressing display of the digits being outpulsed ~W Wait indefinitely for dial tone. Use this only if network response time is more than 30 seconds. Not available for S8300 Media Server.
Abbreviated Dialing List Personal List This screen establishes a personal dialing list for phone/data module users. The personal list must first be assigned to the phone by the System Administrator before the phone user can add entries in the list. The lists can be accessed by users to place local, long-distance, and international calls; to activate/deactivate features; or to access remote computer equipment.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage ~m Change to outpulse DTMF digits at the end-to-end rate ~s Start suppressing display of the digits being outpulsed ~W Wait indefinitely for dial tone. Only use this if network response time is more than 30 seconds. List Number A display-only field indicating which of the three personal lists is defined for the phone. Personal List A display-only field indicating the extension of the phone that will use this list.
Abbreviated Dialing List Page 1 of 4 of the screen display abbreviated-dialing system ABBREVIATED DIALING LIST System List Size (multiple of 5): 5 Privileged? n DIAL CODE 01: ________________ 02: ________________ 03: ________________ 04: ________________ 05: ________________ 06: ________________ 07: ________________ 08: ________________ 09: ________________ 10: ________________ 11: ________________ 12: ________________ 13: ________________ 14: ________________ 15: ________________ Screen 43.
Screen reference Privileged Valid entries Usage y Enter y if the originating party’s class of restriction (COR) is never checked and any number in the list can be dialed. n Enter n if the COR is to be checked to determine if the number can be dialed. Size (multiple of 5) Enter the number of abbreviated dialing numbers you want to assign in multiples of 5, up to 100. 7103A Button List This screen assigns abbreviated dialing numbers to the 7103A phone buttons.
Access Endpoint DIAL CODE Enter the number you want to assign to each dial code (button). Any additions or changes apply to all 7103A fixed feature phones. While the system is waiting, a call progress tone receiver is tied up, and, since there are a limited number of receivers in the system, outgoing calling capability may be impaired. Vector Directory Number extension may also be assigned.
Screen reference The WAE is defined by a starting port (DS0) and a width specifying the number of adjacent nonsignaling DS0s (positioned within a DS1 facility) that make up the endpoint. This width may be between 2 and 31 adjacent DS0s. NOTE: Access Endpoints and Wideband Access Endpoints consume the same resources that trunks use. Thus, the sum of Access Endpoints and trunks cannot exceed the maximum number of trunks available in your system configuration.
Access Endpoint COS The COS is administered (see ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672) so that the use of the Call Forwarding All Calls feature for access endpoints is prohibited. Valid entries Usage 0 through 15 Enter the appropriate COS number. Extension A display-only field showing the extension number as specified in the command line, or shows the next available extension number if next was entered on the command line.
Screen reference Without this end validation, a user could administer an access endpoint as unrestricted when in fact it is restricted, that is, its associated port is a member of a DS1 circuit pack that uses ZCS data transmission. Valid entries Usage unrestricted When unrestricted, only unrestricted transmission facilities (b8zs) will be used to complete the call.
Access Endpoint Valid entries Usage 1 through 80 Gateway (DEFINITY R, CSI) or 1 through 10 (DEFINITY SI) or 1 through 250 (S8700 IP-Connect / S8700 Multi-Connect / S8300 Media Server) V1 through V9 Module 01 through 31 Circuit For example, 01A0612 is in cabinet 01, carrier A, slot 06, and circuit number (port) 12. NOTE: For Wideband Access Endpoints, analog tie trunks cannot be used and the DS1 Interface circuit pack, Version C or later, must be used.
Screen reference Administered Connection This screen assigns an end-to-end Administered Connection (AC) between two access endpoints or data endpoints. The AC is established automatically by the system whenever the system restarts or the AC is due to be active. See ‘‘Administered connections’’ on page 1454 and ‘‘Access Endpoint’’ on page 593 for additional information.
Administered Connection an extension, feature access code, or trunk access code, or DDD Number). If a local extension is entered, it must be assigned to either an access or data endpoint. Abbreviated Dialing entries may be used in this field. Valid entries Usage Enter the assigned access endpoint/data module extension or valid dialed string. Enable Provides the administered connection. Valid entries Usage y Indicates an attempt will be made to establish the AC when the AC is due to be active.
Screen reference ■ 515 BCT, 615 BCT, or 715 BCT terminal ■ PC/switch connection ISDN-BRI Line circuit pack connections, including: ■ 7500 data module ■ 7505D/7506D/7507D phone with ADM Valid entries Usage Assigned access endpoint/data module extension The endpoint must be local to the switch on which the AC is administered. Nonsignaling DS1 trunk or analog tie trunk. Authorized Time of Day Continuous The connection will be up all the time or re-established if the connection goes down.
Administered Connection Start Days (Sun through Sat) These fields indicate only the days on which an attempt will be made to establish the AC and not necessarily the days it is active. A scheduled AC may be active over a number of days, and, in this situation, these fields should be used only to specify the days on which the AC starts and not other days on which the AC may be active. Only appears if the Continuous field is n.
Screen reference Alarm Type Enter the type of alarm to be generated if the AC cannot be initially established, or fails and cannot be reestablished, and the number of consecutive failures equals the alarm threshold. All AC alarms and the errors that caused the alarms are recorded in the system’s alarm and error log. In addition, a status lamp associated with an attendant console or phone feature button (ac-alarm) may be used to indicate the AC alarm.
Alias Station Retry Interval Valid entries Usage 1 through 60 Enter the number of minutes between attempts to establish or reestablish the AC. Alias Station This screen allows you to configure the system so that you can administer new phone types that are not supported by your system software. This screen maps new telephone models to a supported telephone model. This mapping does not guarantee compatibility, but allows nonsupported models to be administered and tracked by their own names.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 1 change alias station Page 1 of 1 ALIAS STATION Alias Set Type Supported Set Type ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ’#’ indicates previously aliased set type is now native Screen 47. Alias Station screen Alias Set Type Enter up to a 5-character name for the non-supported phone type that you want to alias to a similar supported telephone type.
Alphanumeric Dialing Table Field descriptions for page 1 change alphanumeric-dial-table ALPHANUMERIC DIALING TABLE XXX of XXX administered Alpha-name Mapped String | Alpha-name | ____________ ______________________ | _____________ ____________ ______________________ | _____________ ____________ ______________________ | _____________ ____________ ______________________ | _____________ ____________ ______________________ | _____________ ____________ ______________________ | _____________ ____________ _______
Screen reference Valid entries Usage Digits 0 through 9 Numeric A through Z, a through z Alpha (note uppercase entries are mapped to lowercase) ( Character delimiters used for easy reading of the dial string ) Delimiters consisting of both readability and special characters are used to separate tokens of “alpha-names” or numeric sub-strings.
Announcements/Audio Sources COR Valid entries Usage 0 – 95 Enter the class of restriction (COR) you want associated with this announcement Valid entries Usage 1 to 8 digits Enter the extension you assign to this announcement.
Screen reference Port For External Announcements (analog, Lineside T1/E1, or Aux. Trunk). Enter the necessary characters in the aaxssyy format (where aa = the cabinet number, x = the carrier, ss = the slot number, and yy = the circuit number). Valid entries Usage 01 through 44 First and second characters are the cabinet number. (DEFINITY R) or 01 through 03 (DEFINITY CSI, SI) or 1 through 64 (S8700 IP-Connect / S8700 Multi-Connect) A through E Third character is the carrier.
Announcements/Audio Sources For ISSPA. Valid entries Usage 1A13 Denotes the embedded announcement in S8100 Media Server with CMC1 Media Gateway, or S8100 Media Server with G600 Media Gateway For G700 Media Gateway (VVAL) circuit pack). Enter the necessary characters in the ggV9 format (where gg = the gateway number and V9 = embedded announcements). Valid entries Usage 01 through 30 Media gateway number. For example, 10V9 is gateway 10.
Screen reference Q (Queue) Valid entries y Usage Enter y to queue calls for the announcement if the Type field is integrated, integ-rep or aux-trunk. The caller is always connected to the beginning of the announcement. Enter y for ACD and vectoring delay announcements. Call centers should always use this option. n No queue and no barge-in. The caller is always connected to the beginning of the announcement. The announcement does not play if a port is not available.
Announcements/Audio Sources QLen (Queue Length) The queue length is the number of calls that can queue for this announcement. The maximum number of queues allowed depends on your system configuration. The QLen field applies if the Q field is y and the Type field is analog, ds1 or aux-trunk. When the Type field is integrated or integ-rep, N/A appears in this field. Integrated announcements have a pre-set queue length.
Screen reference TN Valid entries Usage 1 to 100 Enter the Tenant Partition number, if any. Type Enter the type of announcement you want to assign to this extension number. If you enter integrated or integ-rep, complete the Q, Protect, Rate, and Port fields. If you enter analog, ds1-fd, ds1-sa, ds1-ops, or aux-trunk, complete QLen (if Q is y) and Port. 612 Valid entries Usage analog Use to play announcements from an external device for a specific period and hang up when finished.
ARS Toll Table Valid entries Usage ds1-sa Provides a disconnect to stop playback when the announcement is done. Callers do not hear a click when the device hangs up. integrated Stored internally on the switch on a special integrated announcement circuit pack. Use for general announcements and VDN of Origin Announcements.
Screen reference ARS TOLL TABLE Valid entries Usage 2 through 9 Identify the number of the ARS Toll Table OFFICE CODES Valid entries Usage 200–299 through 900–999 Identify the block of numbers on this screen. Attendant Console This screen assigns an Attendant Console to the system.
Attendant Console Auto Answer Valid entries Usage all Entering all in this field indicates an incoming call to an idle attendant will be answered automatically without any action (no button presses required) by the attendant. acd Entering acd indicates only ACD split/skill calls and direct agent calls can auto answer. Non-ACD calls terminated to an attendant console with Auto Answer set to acd ring audibly.
Screen reference Data Module Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if the console is to be connected to a data terminal via 7400B or 8400 Data Module. If y is entered, complete the Data Module screen (page 4). Disp Client Redir This field is administrable only if the Hospitality feature has been enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. This field affects the station’s display on calls originated from a station with Client Room Class of Service.
Attendant Console Extension (Optional) Enter the extension for the individual attendant console. Individual attendant extensions allow attendants to use features that an attendant group cannot use. For example, extensions can be members of a DDC or UCD group. An individual attendant extension can have its own Class of Restriction and Class of Service.
Screen reference Port Enter the necessary characters. Valid entries Usage 01 through 44 First and second characters are the cabinet number. (DEFINITY R) or 01 through 03 (DEFINITY CSI, SI) or 1 through 64 (S8700 IP-Connect / S8700 Multi-Connect / S8300 Media Server) A through E Third character is the carrier. 0 through 20 Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number. 01 through 04 Six and seventh characters are the circuit number.
Attendant Console Each attendant console requires a port on a digital line circuit pack. For reliability, the attendant consoles should not be assigned to ports on the same digital line circuit pack. For example, if three attendant consoles are to be provided, assign each console to a port on three different digital line circuit pack, if possible. However, if required, all attendant consoles can be assigned to ports on the same digital line circuit pack. Security Code Does not apply to S8700 IP-Connect.
Screen reference HUNDREDS SELECT BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS Enter in the appropriate field (1 through 20), the hundreds group to be associated with a Hundreds Group Select button located on an optional selector console. Valid entries Usage 1-5 digit hundreds group (plus prefix, if needed) Fields 1 through 8 are used when the selector console is a 24A-type console and fields 1 through 20 are used for a 26A-type console.
Attendant Console Emergency Location Ext The Emergency Location Ext field defaults to the phone’s extension. This extension is the starting point for identifying the street address or nearby location when an emergency call is made. The entry in this field is manipulated by ‘‘CAMA Numbering Format’’ before being sent over CAMA trunks; or similarly by ‘‘ISDN Numbering — Public/ Unknown’’ before being sent over ISDN trunks.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage extension Enter extension to send the attendant extension entered in the Emergency Location Extension field to the Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP). block Enter block to prevent the completion of emergency calls. Use this entry for attendants who move around but always have a circuit-switched phone nearby, and for users who are farther away from the switch than an adjacent area code served by the same 911 Tandem office.
Attendant Console Field descriptions for page 2 change attendant 1 Page 2 of 4 ATTENDANT DATA MODULE Data Extension: ____ ITC: restricted Name: COS: COR: TN: _______________ 1_ 1_ 1_ BCC: 2 ABBREVIATED DIALING List1: ________ SPECIAL DIALING OPTION: default ASSIGNED MEMBER (Station with a data extension button for this data module) Ext Name 1: Screen 53. Attendant Console Data Module (page 2) This page displays if the Data Module field on Page 1 is y.
Screen reference Data Extension Enter the extension number assigned to the data module. Valid entries Usage 1- to 5-digit number Must agree with the system’s dial plan ITC Valid entries Usage restricted unrestricted Name Enter the name of the user associated with the data module. The name is optional; it can be left blank. TN Enter the Tenant Partitioning number. Valid entries Usage 1–100 ABBREVIATED DIALING List1 624 Valid entries Usage s System g Group.
Attendant Console SPECIAL DIALING OPTION Enter one of three dialing options that are available. This identifies the destination of all calls when this data module originates calls. Valid entries Usage hot-line default HOT LINE DESTINATION — Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code Only displays when the Special Dialing Option field is hot-line or default (S8700 IP-Connect only). The associated AD number is dialed when the user goes off-hook on a Data Hot Line call.
Screen reference Ext This is the extension number of a previously administered user who has an associated Data Extension button and who will share the use of the module. Name Contains the name assigned to the above extension number.
Attendant Console Valid entries Usage re-ringoff Timed reminder ringer off; turns on/off the audible tone for timer reminder ringer (1 per console). alt-frl Alternate FRL. Alternate facility restriction level; allows the attendant to activate or deactivate the AFRL feature. When activated, this allows the originating device (lines or trunks) to use an alternate set of the facility restriction levels to originate a call (1 per console).
Screen reference Valid entries Usage override Attendant Override. This button enables the attendant to override diversion features such as, Call Forwarding, Call Coverage, and so on (1 per console). intrusion Call Offer. Depression of this button allows the attendant to extend a call when the called party is active on another call (1 per console). dont-split Don’t Split. This button allows the attendant to not split away a call when dialing (1 per console).
Attendant Console Valid entries Usage hundrd-sel Hundreds group select; in addition to the fixed HGS buttons on Field descriptions for page 1, a user can administer hundreds group select feature buttons on this page. When a feature button is administered as “hundrd-sel,” a subfield appears that must then be administered in the same manner as the fixed HGS button fields (a 1 to 3 digit hundreds group plus prefix, if needed).
Screen reference change attendant 1 Page Y of X ATTENDANT CONSOLE DISPLAY MODULE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS 1: normal____ 2: inspect___ 3: cov-msg-rt 4: next______ Screen 55. 5: 6: 7: 8: delete-msg call-disp_ date-time_ timer_____ Attendant Console ■ DISPLAY MODULE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS — Display-type buttons obtain display functions on the associated alphanumeric display. These buttons are noted as [display button] in the Feature or Function column on the table.
Authorization Code — COR Mapping IP Address The IP address associated with the node name. This field can be blank for X.25 connections. MSA Names Identifies the name of the MSA node. Valid entries Usage 1-7 character string Used as a label for the associated IP address. The MSA names must be unique on each switch. Authorization Code — COR Mapping You use this screen to assign authorization codes and the class of restriction (COR) that is associated with a given authorization code.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 1 change authorization-code Page 1 of 1 Authorization Code - COR Mapping Note: XX codes administered. Use “list” to display all codes.
Best Service Routing Best Service Routing This screen administers the routing numbers for each location associated with a particular application. This allows the DEFINITY ECS to compare specified skills, identify the skill that will provide the best service to a call, and deliver the call to that resource. For information on setting up Best Service Routing (BSR), see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Guide to ACD Call Centers.
Screen reference Interflow VDN When a given remote switch is the best available, the origin switch interflows the call to this vector on the remote switch. Each remote switch in a given application has to have a dedicated interflow switch. Valid entries Usage 0 through 9, *, #, ~p (pause) ~w/~W (wait) ~m (mark) ~s (suppress) or blank (DEFINITY R, SI, CSI) Location Name Indicates the location. Valid entries Usage Up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
Best Service Routing Name Contains the name assigned to the BSR number. Valid entries Usage Up to 15 alphanumeric characters. (DEFINITY R, SI, CSI) Assign a descriptive name for the physical location. Net Redir Valid entries Usage y/n Set to y for each to location to which calls are to be redirected using Network Call Redirection. For more information, see “Network Call Redirection.” (DEFINITY R, SI, CSI) Num This field corresponds to the “consider location x” step from the Call Vector screen.
Screen reference Switch Node Enter a number unique to the switch in a network of switches. Valid entries Usage 1 to 32767 or This number is an important part of the UCID tag and must be unique to the switch. blank (DEFINITY R, SI, CSI) Bulletin Board Use the bulletin board to post and receive information. There are three pages of message space within the bulletin board. The first page has 19 lines, but you can only enter text on lines 11-19.
Bulletin Board Date This display-only field contains the date the information was entered or last changed. Lines 1 through 10 These lines are reserved for high priority messages and are noted with an asterisk (*) in the first column on the left. If you have an init or inads login you can enter high-priority information to trigger the high-priority message at login time. Valid entries Usage A through Z Enter any information. a through z Blank 0 through 9 !@#$%^&*()_ +-=[]{}|\’˜;:’,”<.
Screen reference Lines 1 through 20 These lines can be used by anyone with access. Valid entries Usage A through Z Enter any information. a through z Blank 0 through 9 !@#$%^&*()_ +-=[]{}|\’˜;:’,”<.>/? Call Vector This screen programs a series of commands that specify how to handle calls directed to a Vector Directory Number (VDN). See the Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide for additional information.
Call Vector Field descriptions for page 2 change vector 129 Page 2 of 3 CALL VECTOR 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ Screen 61.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage collect Allows the user to enter up to 16 digits from a touch-tone phone, or allows the vector to retrieve Caller Information Forwarding (CINFO) digits from the network. consider Defines the resource (split, skill, or location) that is checked as part of a Best Service Routing (BSR) consider series and obtains the data BSR uses to compare resources.
Call Vector ASAI Routing A display-only field indicating whether, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the CallVisor Adjunct/Switch Applications Interface (ASAI Link Core Capabilities) field is y. Attendant Vectoring This field appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Attendant Vectoring field is y. Attendant Vectoring and Meet-me Conference cannot be enabled at the same time. This field does not appear for S8700 IP-Connect.
Screen reference EAS A display-only field indicating whether, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Expert Agent Selection (EAS) field is y. NOTE: When Expert Agent Selection (EAS) field is y, the help messages and error messages associated with this screen will reflect a terminology change from “Split” to “Skill”. In addition, the vector commands entered also will be affected by this terminology change (for example, check backup split becomes check backup skill when EAS is enabled).
Call Vector Meet-me Conf This field appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Enhanced Conferencing field is y. This field designates the VDN as a Meet-me Conference VDN. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to enable Meet-me Conference for this vector. If Meet-me Conference is y, the Lock field also must be y. When the Lock field is y, the vector cannot be changed by adjunct vectoring programs such as Visual Vectors.
Screen reference Prompting A display-only field indicating whether, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Vectoring (Prompting) field is y. CAMA Numbering Format This screen administers the Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks and provides Caller’s Emergency Service Identification (CESID) information to the local community’s Enhanced 911 system through the local tandem office. This screen provides the CESID format by extension number or number blocks.
CAMA Numbering Format CESID Valid entries Usage 1 to 11 digits or blank Enter the number that will be used to identify the calling terminal within an emergency service system. This field may represent a prefix to an extension or the entire CESID.
Screen reference CDR System Parameters Use the Call Detail Recording (CDR) System Parameters screen to set parameters for the types of calls you want to record and how to format the information. You can use CDR records to determine call costs, diagnose problems, detect abuse, and optimize your network.
CDR System Parameters Call Record Handling Option Displays on DEFINITY R only. Used to control call routing when new calls come in, the CDR link is down, and the buffer is filled. NOTE: Changing this field from the default warning may cause ACD & vector calls that are measured by CDR to be redirected. Valid entries Usage reorder Enter reorder to block calls with reorder tone when the buffer is full. This applies to all calls.
Screen reference Condition Code ‘T’ for Redirected Calls You can elect to identify CDR records of calls that have been redirected automatically off the switch. Valid entries Usage y The Condition Code of both CDR records for the call will be ‘T.’ n The Condition Codes normally associated with the Record Outgoing Calls Only field are generated. Digits to Record for Outgoing Calls Valid entries Usage dialed Use dialed to record the digits a user actually dials.
CDR System Parameters Force Entry of Acct Code for Calls Marked on Toll Analysis Form Specifies whether an account code will be required when making a toll call. This will not necessarily be all chargeable calls and it may even include some non-chargeable calls. See‘‘Forcing users to enter account codes’’ on page 542 for more information. Valid entries Usage y Enter y to deny all toll calls unless the user dials an account code.
Screen reference Intra-Switch CDR Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to record calls within the switch. If you choose this option, you must complete the Intraswitch CDR screen to indicate which extensions to monitor. Modified Circuit ID Display This affects the “printer,” “teleseer,” and “59-character” output formats. Valid entries Usage y Enter y to display the circuit ID in its actual format (100’s, 10’s, units). For example, circuit ID 123 displays as 123.
CDR System Parameters Primary Output Endpoint This field determines where the switch sends the CDR records, and is required if you specify a Primary Output Format. Valid entries Usage eia If you use the EIA port to connect the CDR device, enter eia. This is not a valid option on DEFINITY R systems. Extension number This is the extension of the data module (if used) that links the primary output device to the switch.
Screen reference Privacy — Digits to Hide If you enable CDR Privacy on the Station screen for a given phone, use this field to indicate how much of the dialed number to hide on the CDR record. Valid entries Usage 0–7 Enter the number of digits to hide, counting from the end (right to left). For example, if you enter 4 in this field and the user dials 555-1234, only “555” would appear in the Dialed Number field of the CDR record.
CDR System Parameters Record Called Vector Directory Number Instead of Group or Member If this option is enabled, the called VDN overrides the group or member information that normally appears in the Dialed Number Field of the CDR record. If a call is directed through more than one VDN, the first VDN used for the call is stored. This applies only to calls routed to a hunt group by a vector, not to calls routed directly to an extension by a vector.
Screen reference Secondary Output Endpoint Appears when the Secondary Output Format field is administered. Valid entries Usage eia Use this if the secondary output device is connected to the eia port. This is not a valid option on DEFINITY R systems. Extension number This is the extension of the data module (if used) that links the secondary output device to the switch.
CDR System Parameters Suppress CDR for Ineffective Call Attempts Ineffective call attempts are calls that are blocked because the user did not have sufficient calling privileges or because all outgoing trunks were busy. This includes the unavailable incoming or outgoing trunks due to trunk usage allocation for ISDN Call-by-Call Service Selection trunks, incoming calls rejected by the switch due to NSF mismatch, and ISDN calls that did not complete at the far end, if a cause value was provided.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 2 change system-parameters cdr 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: Data Item - Length time____________ - 4_ space___________ - 1_ duration________ - 4_ return__________ - 1_ line-feed_______ - 1_ ________________ - __ ________________ - __ ________________ - __ ________________ - __ ________________ - __ ________________ - __ ________________ - __ ________________ - __ ________________ - __ ________________ - __ ________________ - __ Scree
CDR System Parameters Table 9.
Screen reference Class of Restriction Use this screen to establish classes of restriction (COR). Classes of restriction control call origination and termination. Your system may use only one COR or as many as necessary to control calling privileges. You can assign up to 96 different CORs (0 – 95). Consider the following to enhance your system security: 1. Assign a separate COR to incoming and outgoing trunk groups, then restrict calling between the two groups. 2.
Class of Restriction Access to MCT? This field refers to Malicious Call Trace. Valid entries Usage y Enter y to allow permissions to activate a request to trace a malicious call. n Entering n prohibits this user from requesting a malicious call trace, but does not prevent this extension from appearing in the MCT History report, should this extension be the subject of a malicious call trace.
Screen reference Called Party Restriction Valid entries Usage Inward Blocks the calling party from receiving incoming exchange network calls, attendant originated calls, and attendant completed calls. Manual Blocks the called party from receiving all calls except for those originated or extended by the attendant. Public Blocks the called party from receiving public network calls.
Class of Restriction Valid entries Usage All-toll Blocks the calling party from making ARS and trunk access calls from a facility assigned the COR to certain toll areas as defined in the Dialed String field on the Toll Analysis screen. The Dialed String field must be marked as being associated with the system’s Toll List. The call completes if the facility’s COR also is associated with an Unrestricted Call List and whose Dialed String field also matches the dialed number.
Screen reference Can Be Picked Up By Directed Call Pickup Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow this Station’s or EAS agent’s calls to be picked up by using the Directed Call Pickup Up feature. Before you can set this field to y, you must set Directed Call Pickup on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen to y. Can Be Service Observed Note that this field allows or denies service observing for not only physical extensions, but also for logical agent IDs and VDNs.
Class of Restriction Category For MFC ANI The Category for MFC ANI field always controls categories for Russian signaling trunks. It also may control categories for R2-MFC signaling trunks, depending on what value is in the Use COR for Calling Party Category field on the system-parameters multi-frequency screen. The Calling Party Category digit administered in this field is included as part of the ANI information sent to the Central Office on request using R2-MFC signaling.
Screen reference Forced Entry of Account Codes FEAC must be enabled on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen and on the CDR System Parameters screen. See ‘‘Forced Entry of Account Codes’’ on page 1554 and ‘‘Forcing users to enter account codes’’ on page 542 for more information. NOTE: If a COR requiring entry of account codes is assigned a VDN, the route to commands executed by the associated vector will not be successful.
Class of Restriction Fully Restricted Service NOTE: If this field is enabled, the APLT field must be n. Valid entries Usage y/n When y entered for a given COR, stations assigned that COR will not have access to the public network for either incoming or outgoing calls. Group II Category For MFC This field always controls categories for Russian signaling trunks.
Screen reference Hear VDN of Origin Announcement Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if users with this COR can receive VDN of Origin messages. MF ANI Prefix Defines the prefix to apply to an extension number when ANI is sent to the CO. This overrides any ANI prefix administered on the Multifrequency Signaling screen. This does not apply when ANI is tandemed through the switch on tandem calls. This field also applies to the ANI for the switch when the originating side is a trunk and there was no ANI.
Class of Restriction Restricted Call List This list can be used whether the COR is toll restricted. The Restricted Call List (RCL) has priority over the Toll Analysis Unrestricted Call List (UCL). A call attempt from a facility assigned a COR (with RCL field set to y), whose dialed digit string is on the Toll Analysis screen and is marked as being associated with the RCL, will be denied.
Screen reference Time of Day Chart Appears only if Time of Day field is enabled on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen. See ‘‘Setting up time of day routing’’ on page 268 for more information. Valid entries Usage 1–8 Enter the AAR/ARS time-of-day-chart number associated with this COR. Unrestricted Call List Any entry on the Toll Analysis screen with an “X” in the Toll List column is restricted, meaning that the system blocks any attempt to complete a call containing the Dialed String.
Class of Restriction Field descriptions for page 2 change cor 10 Page 2 of 4 CLASS OF RESTRICTION MF Incoming Call Trace? Brazil Collect Call Blocking? Block Transfer Display? Block Enhanced Conference/Transfer Displays? Remote Logout of Agent? n n n y n Station Lock COR: 10 Screen 67. Class of Restriction screen Block Enhanced Conference/Transfer Display Use this field to add display messages regarding conference and transfer features on digital phones.
Screen reference MF Incoming Call Trace Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow assignment of a Call Trace COR to a station. Avaya MultiVantage then generates an MFC backward signal (administered on the System-Parameters Multifrequency-Signaling screen) during call setup instead of the “free” signal. This triggers the central office to collect trace information before releasing the calling party, if the terminating station’s COR has this feature set to y.
Class of Restriction CALLING PERMISSION Valid entries Usage y/n A y means an originating facility assigned this COR can be used to call facilities assigned this COR. Enter n for each COR number (0 through 95) that cannot be called by the COR being implemented.
Screen reference Class of Service This screen administers access permissions for call processing features that require dial code or feature button access. NOTE: Class of Service (COS) does not apply to trunk groups except for the Remote Access feature. A COS assignment defines whether or not a telephone user may access or use the following features and functions. Up to 16 different COS numbers may be administered (0–15).
Class of Service Automatic Exclusion Allows a user to activate automatically Exclusion when they go off hook on a station that has an assigned EXCLUSION button. If set to n, allows a user manual exclusion when they press the EXCLUSION button before dialing or during a call. Appears when, on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, the Automatic Exclusion by COS field is y. Call Forwarding All Calls Allows this user to forward all calls to any extension.
Screen reference Data Privacy Allows this user to enter a feature access code to protect a data call from interruption by any of the system’s override or ringing features. See ‘‘Data Privacy’’ on page 500 for more information. Extended Forwarding All Allows a user to administer call forwarding (for all calls) from a remote location. You cannot change a COS to y if Extended Cvg/Fwd Admin on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen is n.
Code Calling IDs Restrict Call Fwd-Off Net This restricts users from forwarding calls to the public network. For security reasons, this should be enabled for all classes of service except the ones you use for very special circumstances. See ‘‘Call Forwarding Off Net’’ on page 1613 for more information.
Screen reference Ext This field assigns extensions to chime codes. Only one extension can be assigned to each chime code. Valid entries Usage An extension number Enter a physical extension, not a VDN, to assign that extension to a code. Otherwise, leave this field blank. Related topics See ‘‘Setting up chime paging over loudspeakers’’ on page 476 for instructions. See ‘‘Loudspeaker paging’’ on page 1753 for a description of the feature.
Command Permission Categories Additional Restrictions Use page 2 and 3 to add objects (up to 40) that this user cannot manipulate. If an object appears on the Additional Restrictions page, users cannot display, add, change, or do anything else with that object. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to create additional restrictions, and to have the second and third pages of this screen appear. Administer Features Use caution when assigning this permission to a user.
Screen reference Display Admin. and Maint. Data Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow a user to use the display, list, monitor, status, and schedule commands and also change their own passwords and schedule reports. Login Name This display-only field shows the login to which these permissions apply. Maintain Enhanced DS1 You can only enter a value in this field if the DS1 MSP field is set to y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Command Permission Categories Maintain Systems You can only enter a value in this field if the Processor and System MSP field is set to y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow a user to perform system maintenance. Maintain Trunks You can only enter a value in this field if the Station and Trunk MSP field is set to y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow a user to perform trunk maintenance.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 2 change permissions angi3 Page 2 of 3 COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES RESTRICTED OBJECT LIST _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ___________________
Configuration Set Calling Number Style Determines the format of the caller ID for calls from a local switch extension to an EC500 cell phone. Valid entries Usage network Provides a display of only 10-digit numbers. For internal calls, the ISDN numbering tables are used to create the calling number and DCS calls use the ISDN calling number if provided. The externally provided calling number is used when available for externally originated calls. pbx Provides a display of less than 10-digits.
Screen reference Post Connect Dialing Options Determines whether additional capabilities, beyond standard ISDN dialing, are available for those incoming ISDN trunk calls that are mapped into XMOBILE stations. These options come into effect after the call has entered the active state (the switch has sent a CONNECT message back to the network). 682 Valid entries Usage dtmf Expect digits from either in-band or out-of-band, but not simultaneously.
Console Parameters Console Parameters This screen administers attendant console group parameters. This includes basic parameters for Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) and Inter-PBX Attendant Service (IAS). A list of the administered attendant consoles also displays on this screen. Field descriptions for page 1 change console-parameters Page CONSOLE PARAMETERS Attendant Group Name: OPERATOR COS: 0 COR: Calls in Queue Warning: 5 Attendant Lockout? Ext Alert Port (TAAS): CAS: none Night Service Act. Ext.
Screen reference Attendant Lockout Attendant Lockout prevents an attendant from re-entering a multiple-party connection held on the console unless recalled by a telephone user. Attendant Lockout provides privacy for parties on a multiple-party call held on the console. The held parties can hold a private conversation without interruption by the attendant. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to activate Privacy — Attendant Lockout.
Console Parameters CAS The CAS Main or Branch features must be enabled on the System- Parameters Customer-Options screen for either of these features to be functional here. Valid entries Usage main branch none QSIG-main Can be used if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Centralized Attendant field is y. Indicates all attendants are located on the main PBX. QSIG-branch Can be used if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Centralized Attendant field is y.
Screen reference COS Enter a class of service (COS) number that reflects the desired features for all your attendant consoles. You can override this COS, by assigning a different COS on the individual Attendant screen. Valid entries Usage 1-15 DID-LDN Only to LDN Night Ext. Valid entries Usage y Enter y to allow only listed directory number (LDN) calls to go to the listed directory night service extension.
Console Parameters IAS (Branch) Enables or disables Inter-PBX Attendant Service (IAS) Branch feature. Does not appear if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Centralized Attendant field is y. NOTE: CAS and IAS cannot both be active at the same time. IAS Tie Trunk Group No. NOTE: Enter the number of the tie trunk group to the main for the IAS (Branch). This entry is required when IAS Branch is y.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 2 change console-parameters Page 2 of 4 CONSOLE PARAMETERS TIMING Time Reminder on Hold (sec): 10 Time in Queue Warning (sec): Return Call Timeout (sec): 10 INCOMING CALL REMINDERS No Answer Timeout (sec): 20 Alerting (sec): 40 Secondary Alert on Held Reminder Calls? y ABBREVIATED DIALING List1: group 1 List2: List3: SAC Notification? n COMMON SHARED EXTENSIONS Starting Extension: Count: Screen 76.
Console Parameters Time Reminder on Hold (sec) Enter the time in seconds that a call remains on hold at the console before the attendant is alerted. In a CAS arrangement, the main and the branch consoles (when administered) should be administered the same.
Screen reference ABBREVIATED DIALING List1, List2, List3 You can assign up to 3 abbreviated dialing lists to each attendant. However, you cannot assign a personal list to an attendant. Valid entries Usage enhanced Allows the attendant to access the enhanced system abbreviated dialing list. group Allows the attendant to access the specified group abbreviated dialing list. You also must enter a group number. system Allows the attendant to access the system abbreviated dialing list.
Console Parameters Field descriptions for page 3 change console-parameters Page 3 of 4 CONSOLE PARAMETERS QUEUE PRIORITIES Emergency Access:1_ Assistance Call:2_ CO Call:2_ DID to Attendant:2_ Tie Call:2_ Redirected DID Call:2_ Redirected Call:2_ Return Call:2_ Serial Call:2_ Individual Attendant Access:2_ Interpositional:2_ VIP Wakeup Reminder Call:2_ Miscellaneous Call:2_ Call-Type Ordering Within Priority Levels? n Screen 77.
Screen reference ■ Tie Call — An incoming TIE trunk call (dial-repeating or direct types) to an attendant group. This does not include trunk calls that return to the attendant group after a timeout or deferred attendant recall. ■ Redirected DID Call — A DID or ACD call that times out due to ring/no-answer, busy condition (if applicable), or Number Unobtainable and reroutes to the attendant group.
Console Parameters ■ Type 2 call: incoming external public-network calls before they receive answer supervision or before the Answer Supervision Timer of the trunk group expires ■ Type 3 call: all other calls (internal calls, conference calls, and tie-trunk calls of any type) Note that external public-network calls have priority over all other calls including conference calls. And, answered public-network calls have priority over those calls not yet answered.
Screen reference Coverage Answer Group This screen establishes Call Coverage Answer Groups. An answer group contains up to eight members who act as a coverage point for another user. For example, if several secretaries are responsible for answering a department’s redirected calls, all the secretaries could be assigned to an answer group. The answer group is assigned a group number, and that group number appears in the department’s coverage path. All phones in an answer group ring (alert) simultaneously.
Coverage Answer Group Group Name Enter the group name you want to use to identify this group. Tip: Enter the extension numbers that are group members. This allows a list coverage answer group command to be used to list the phones that will be alerted. The list command can be used in conjunction with the list station, list coverage path, and list hunt group commands to determine stations involved in call coverage.
Screen reference Coverage Path This screen implements Call Coverage Paths. The screen provides the means to specify the call coverage criteria, the points in the coverage path used to redirect calls, and the number of times a principal’s phone rings before the call redirects to coverage.
Coverage Path Linkage Display-only fields that show the (up to) two additional coverage paths in the coverage path chain. (See above.) Next Path Number Enter the next coverage path in a coverage path chain. See ‘‘Call coverage’’ on page 1532 for more information. If the coverage criteria of the current coverage path is not satisfied, the system steps down this chain until it finds a coverage path with redirection criteria that matches the call status.
Screen reference Number of Rings Enter the number of rings. Valid entries Usage 1 through 99 This is the number of rings a user’s phone rings before the system redirects the call to the first point in the coverage path. COVERAGE POINTS Point1, Point2, Point3, Point4, Point5, Point6 The alternate destinations that comprise a coverage path. Coverage points must be assigned sequentially beginning with Point 1 (do not leave gaps). Each path can have up to six coverage points.
Coverage Path Valid entries Usage r1 to r999 r1 to r1000 (For Redirects the call to the corresponding remote coverage point number. For example, enter “r27” if you want a coverage point routed to remote coverage point 27. (See ‘‘Remote Call Coverage Table’’ on page 1092 for more information.) S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) v + extension Redirects the call to the corresponding VDN extension.
Screen reference Crisis Alert System Parameters This screen allows you to define the system parameters associated with sending crisis alert messages.
Crisis Alert System Parameters ALERT PAGER Alert Pager Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to use Crisis Alert to a Digital Pager. Crisis Alert Code Displays when the Alert Pager field is y. This field requires an entry before submitting the screen. Valid entries Usage 1 through 3 digits The numbers in this field are the first 3 digits in the crisis alert pager message.
Screen reference Originating Extension Used as the extension originating the call to send a crisis alert message to a pager. Displays when the Alert Pager field is y. This field requires an entry before submitting the screen. Valid entries Usage 1 through 7 digits Requires a valid unassigned extension according to the dial plan. Pager Number Displays when the Alert Pager field is y. One of these fields must have a number or the screen cannot be submitted.
CTI Link Retries Displays when the Alert Pager field is y. Valid entries Usage 0 through 10 The number of times the system tries to send out the alert message in case of an unsuccessful attempt. This increases the chances that the pager receives a crisis alert message. Retry Interval (sec) Displays when the Alert Pager field is y. This field is not used unless the Retries field is 1-10. Valid entries Usage 30 through 60 The administrable time period (in seconds) between retries.
Screen reference add cti-link next Page 1 of 2 CTI LINK CTI Link: 1 Extension: 40001 Type: ASAI-IP COR: 1 Name: ASAI CTI Link 1 Screen 83. CTI Link screen when Type field is ASAI-IP or ADJ-IP CTI Link A display-only field indicating the CTI link number. Valid entries Usage 1-8 S8100 Media Server with a CMC1 Avaya MultiVantage on a DEFINITY CSI DEFINITY G3i 1-16 S8300 Media Server Avaya MultiVantage on a DEFINITY R S8700 Multi-Connect Extension This field displays the extension for this link.
CTI Link Port Appears when the Type field is ASAI or ADJLK. Enter 7 characters to specify a port, or an x. Valid entries Usage 01 through 44 (DEFINITY R) First and second numbers are the cabinet number 01 through 03 (DEFINITY SI) A through E Third character is the carrier 01 through 20 Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number 01 through 32 Sixth and seventh characters are the circuit number x Indicates that there is no hardware associated with the port assignment. Use for AWOH.
Screen reference The TEI identifies a unique access point within a service. You must administer TEIs for fixed TEI terminals. However, for terminals with the automatic TEI capability, the system dynamically assigns the TEI. Valid entries Usage y/n Entering y displays the TEI field. For ASAI, enter y. CRV Length Appears when the Type field is ASAI or ADJLK. Enter 1 or 2 to indicate the length of CRV for each interface.
Data modules Special Character for Restricted Number Enables an ASAI CTI link to indicate the calling number restricted presentation within an event report. For further information, see DEFINITY® Enterprise Communications Server CallVisor® ASAI Technical Reference. Valid entries Usage y/n When set to y and a calling number received in a SETUP message has the presentation indicator set (octet 3a in the calling number), then an “*” is appended to the calling party number in the ASAI message.
Screen reference Baud Rate Used with X.25 Data Modules. The maximum raw data transmission speed. Valid entries Usage 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 switched You can enter this if the Cable Type field is none on the PGATE screen. BCC (Bearer Capability Class) A display-only field used with Data Line, Netcon, Processor Interface, Point-to-Point Protocol, Processor/Trunk (pdm selection), and System Port Data Modules.
Data modules The five character announcement board number is comprised of: Characters Meaning Value 1-2 Cabinet Number 01 through 44 (DEFINITY R configurations) 1-64 (S8700 IP-Connect) 01 through 03 (DEFINITY SI configurations) 3 Carrier A through E 4-5 Slot Number or X 0 through 20 Broadcast Address Used with Ethernet data modules. See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information. Does not appear for S8700 IP-Connect.
Screen reference COS Does not appear for ethernet or x.25. Enter the desired class of service. Valid entries Usage 0 through 15 Select the allowed features. COR Does not appear for ethernet. Enter the desired class of restriction. Valid entries Usage 0 through 95 Select the allowed restriction. Data Extension A display-only field indicating the extension assigned to the data module. Destination Number Used with X.25 and Processor Interface data modules.
Data modules Endpoint Type Used with X.25 Data Modules. An endpoint type is a type of packet switched data endpoint that uses X.25 call control procedures. The X.25 Endpoint connects to external ports on the PGATE board and to the TDM bus via a DS1 trunk. Ports connected to the adjunct endpoint can be either DTEs or DCEs. The type of endpoint (DTE or DCE) is administrable on the “data-mod” screen. Valid entries Usage adjunct Mandatory entry Error Logging Used with X.25 Data Modules.
Screen reference ITC (Information Transfer Capability) Used with 7500, Announcement, data-line, Netcon, Processor/Trunk (pdm selection), Processor Interface, and System Port Data Modules. Appears only when, on the Trunk Group screen, the Comm Type field is 56k-data or 64k-data. Indicates type of transmission facilities to be used for ISDN calls originated from this endpoint. Does not display for voice-only or BRI stations.
Data modules MM Complex Voice Ext Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Does not appear on S8700 IP-Connect. This field contains the number of the associated phone in the multimedia complex. This field appears only after you set the Multimedia field to y. This field is left blank until you enter the data module extension in MM Complex Data Ext on the Station screen.
Screen reference PDATA Port Used with System Port Data Modules. Enter a seven-digit alphanumeric port location to which the data module is connected. Used to relate the physical PDATA port to which the mode 3 portion of the system port is connected. This entry must be assigned to a port on a PDATA Line Board.
Data modules Port Used with 7500, Data Line, Ethernet, Processor/Trunk, PPP, System Port, X.25, and World Class BRI Data Modules. Specifies a port location to which the data module is connected. Characters Meaning Value 1-2 Cabinet Number 01 through 44 (DEFINITY R configurations) 01 through 03 (DEFINITY SI configurations) 01 through 64 (S8700 IP-Connect) 3 Carrier A through E 4-5 Slot Number 0 through 20 6-7 Circuit Number 01 through 04 (x.
Screen reference Remote Loop-Around Test Used with Processor/Trunk and X.25 Data Modules. Appears when the Type field is pdm, tdm, or x.25. Valid entries Usage y/n For Processor/Trunk Data Modules, enter y if the data module supports a loop-back test at the EIA interface. In general, Avaya equipment supports this test but it is not required by Level 2 Digital Communications Protocol. Enter n to abort a request for this test. y/n For X.
Data modules TN Valid entries Usage 1 through 100 Enter the Tenant Partition number. Type Enter the type of data module. Valid entries Usage 7500 Assigns a 7500 Data Module. The 7500 data module supports automatic TEI, B-channel, maintenance and management messaging, and SPID initialization capabilities. BRI endpoints, both voice and/or data, are assigned to either the ISDN-BRI - 4-wire S/T-NT Interface circuit pack or the ISDN-BRI - 2-wire U circuit pack. Each can support up to 12 ports.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage data-line Assigns a Data Line Data Module. The Data Line Data Module (DLDM) screen assigns ports on the Data Line circuit pack (DLC) that allows EIA 232C devices to connect to the system. The DLC, with a companion Asynchronous Data Unit (ADU), provides a less expensive data interface to the system than other asynchronous DCP data modules.
Data modules Valid entries Usage netcon Assigns a Netcon Data Module. Netcon data modules are the Processor Data Modules (PDMs) that are integrated into the system’s network control ports that provide asynchronous circuit switched interfaces to the maintenance and administration terminals, Hospitality journal printers, and CDR digital output. They are characterized by their special locations, that is, special port identifications.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage pdm Assigns a DCE interface for Processor/Trunk Data Modules. These screens assign Modular Processor Data Modules (MPDMs) and Modular Trunk Data Modules (MTDMs). One screen is required for assigning MPDMs (700D), 7400B, 7400D or 8400B Data Module, and another screen for MTDMs (700B, 700C, 700E, 7400A). One screen must be completed for each MPDM, 7400B, 7400D, 8400B or MTDM.
Data modules Valid entries Usage procr-intf Assigns a Processor Interface Data Module. The Processor Interface data modules are the Processor Data Modules (PDMs) that are integrated into the system’s synchronous/asynchronous Processor Interface circuit pack ports. NOTE: The Processor Interface data module is applicable only to DEFINITY SI configurations.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage x.25 Assigns an X.25 Data Module in DEFINITY R configurations for communications to Adjuncts and other nodes in a DCS network. See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information on X.25 data modules. DESTINATION CHAP Appears when the Type field is ppp. Used with Point-to-Point data modules. See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information.
Data modules ABBREVIATED DIALING List1 Used with 7500, Data Line, Netcon, Processor/Trunk, Processor Interface, and World Class BRI Data Modules. Supports Data Hot Line. This field can be left blank. Valid entries Usage e Enhanced g Group. You also must enter a group list number. p Personal. You also must enter a personal list number. s System. SPECIAL DIALING OPTION Used with 7500, Data Line, Netcon, Processor/Trunk, Processor Interface, and World Class BRI Data Modules.
Screen reference DEFAULT DIALING Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code Used with 7500, Data Line, Netcon, Processor/Trunk, Processor Interface, and World Class BRI Data Modules. Only appears when the Special Dialing Option field is default. When the user goes off-hook and enters a carriage return following the DIAL prompt, the system dials the AD number. The data call originator can also perform data-terminal dialing by specifying a dial string that may or may not contain alphanumeric names.
Data modules Default Speed Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Used to identify the data rate. Valid entries Usage 1200 2400 4800 19200 56000 64000 Can be entered when the Default Mode field is sync. ASSIGNED MEMBER Ext and Name Used with Data Line, Announcement, Netcon, Processor/Trunk, Processor Interface, and System Port Data Modules. Displays the extension number and name of the user (previously administered) with associated Data Extension buttons who shares the module.
Screen reference Default ITC Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Valid entries Usage restricted For a WCBRI endpoint used as an administered connection. unrestricted MM Complex Voice Ext: Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. This display-only field contains the number of the associated phone in the multimedia complex. It only appears when the Multimedia field is y.
Data modules change data-module 30 CAPABILITIES DATA MODULE Page 2 of 2 KYBD Dialing? n Busy Out? n SPEEDS Low? y 300? y OPTIONS 1200? y 2400? y 4800? y 9600? y 19200? y Permit Mismatch? n Screen 87. Data Line Data Module — if KYBD Dialing is n See ‘‘DLC Option Settings’’ on page 732 for additional information when assigning entries for the remaining fields on the screen.
Screen reference a need to set up data calls. If this option is disabled, originations cannot be done at the DTE and text feedback does not occur at the DTE during call setup/take down. Data call answering is still allowed but without text feedback. NOTE: ADU-type hunt groups connecting the system to terminal servers on a host computer should have these hunt group extensions assigned as “no” keyboard dialing. Valid entries y/n Usage Enter y to allow keyboard dialing.
Data modules Answer Text Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y. This option enables text feedback that is normally delivered to the DTE when a call is answered or disconnected. The Answer Text option applies to DLC-generated text as well as text received from the system. If this option is disabled, the system still generates the text, but the DLC prevents it from being sent to the device.
Screen reference OPTIONS Answer Text Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y. This option enables text feedback that is normally delivered to the DTE when a call is answered or disconnected. The Answer Text option applies to DLC-generated text as well as text received from the system. If this option is disabled, the system still generates the text, but the DLC prevents it from being sent to the device.
Data modules Disconnect Sequence Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y. Selects the sequence for a disconnect. Valid entries Usage long-break A long-break is greater than 2 seconds. two-breaks Two-breaks is within 1 second. Parity Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y. Select the desired type of parity. The DLC generates the parities when call setup text is sent to the DTE. The DLC does not check the parity when receiving dialing characters.
Screen reference This option is intended to be used by a DTE device operating locally at a higher baud rate than that of its far-end connection but transmitting relatively low amounts of data (for example, a user typing at a terminal). Also, this option may be selected whether Keyboard Dialing is selected. NOTE: The Low speed setting is not reported as an available speed when the Permit Mismatch field is y.
Data modules Table 10.
Screen reference Table 11.
Data modules Table 12. DLDM screen settings for connection to data terminal or personal computer (Continued) Field on screen Option Comments Parity Same as DTE Dial Echoing no These devices can dial in the ASCII stream without human intervention Disconnect Sequence Long - Answer Text no These devices may not want to see any text Connected Indication - Don’t care Configuration yes Continued on next page Host computers A host computer may originate and terminate a data call.
Screen reference Table 13.
Data modules LAYER 2 PARAMETERS Frame Size (N1) Specifies the number of bytes in a frame. Valid entries Usage 135 If the value is 135, there can be up to 1080 bits within a frame. This value is suitable for all adjuncts and for DCS. 263 Idle (T4) Timer (1/10 seconds) The T4 timer is a system parameter that represents the time a DTE allows without frames being exchanged on the data link. Valid entries Usage 0 through 250 Number of Outstanding Frames (w) Specifies layer 2 window size.
Screen reference LAYER 3 PARAMETERS Number of Outstanding Packets Specifies the number of packets that can be sent without confirmation. Valid entries Usage 2 through 7 Reset (T22) Timer (seconds) The T22 timer is a DTE time-limit started when DTE issues a reset indication and terminated when the reset request is received or confirmed.
Data modules BRI LINK/MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS Country Protocol Used with World Class BRI Data Modules. Enter the protocol that corresponds to your supported initialization and codesets. The Country Protocol must match any previously-administered endpoint on the same port. The following table lists the valid protocol entries. Country/Area Protocol Australia 2 ETSI (Europe) etsi Japan 3 Singapore 6 United States (Bellcore National ISDN) 1 Endpt ID Used with World Class BRI Data Modules.
Screen reference SPID programmed into the ISDN-BRI terminal must be the same. This means that the SPID of the new or re-used terminals must be programmed to match the administered SPID value. Valid entries Usage y/n Indicates the terminal’s endpoint initialization capability. Fixed TEI Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Used to indicate whether the endpoint has Fixed Terminal Equipment Identifier (TEI) capability. TEI identifies a unique access point within a service.
Date and Time SPID Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Appears only if the Endpt Init field is y. The Service Profile Identifier (SPID) is a variable parameter of up to 10 digits. The SPID must be different for all terminals on the ISDN-BRI and from the Service SPID. The SPID should always be assigned. If the SPID is not assigned for the first ISDN-BRI on a port, any other ISDN-BRI assignment to that port is blocked.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 1 set time DATE AND TIME DATE Day of the Week: _______ Day of the Month: __ Month: ________ Year: ____ TIME Hour: __ Minute: __ Second: __ Type: ________________ Daylight Savings Rule: _ WARNING: Changing the date or time may impact BCMS, CDR, SCHEDULED EVENTS, and MEASUREMENTS Screen 90. Date and Time Day of the Month Valid entries Usage 1 to 31 Enter the current day of the month. The system clock uses this as the current date.
Date and Time Minute Valid entries 0 to 59 Usage Enter the current minute. The system clock uses this as the current minute. Month Valid entries Usage January through December Enter the current month. The system clock uses this as the current month. Second This display-only field shows the seconds and cannot be modified. It resets to zero when you save the information on this screen. Type Valid entries Usage daylight-savings Enter daylight-savings to indicate daylight savings time is in effect.
Screen reference Daylight Savings Rules Use this screen to enter up to 15 customized daylight savings rules. You can specify the day, month, date, time, and increment each daylight savings rule goes into effect and the day, month, date, and time it stops. Rule 0 makes no adjustment to the system clock for daylight savings and cannot be modified. Telephone displays are affected by these settings.
Daylight Savings Rules Date (Start) Valid entries 0 to 31 Usage Enter the day of the month you want the clock to move ahead to begin daylight savings. Date (Stop) Valid entries 0 to 31 Usage Enter the date you want the clock to move back to return to standard time. Increment (Start) Valid entries Usage 0 to 23 Enter the number of hours you want the clock to move ahead for daylight savings and to move back to return to standard time.
Screen reference Time (Start) The system uses a 24-hour clock. For example, 14:00 is the same as 2:00 p.m. Valid entries Usage 0 to 23 Enter the hour you want the clock to move ahead to begin daylight savings. 0 to 59 Enter the minute you want the clock to move ahead to begin daylight savings. Time (Stop) The system uses a 24-hour clock. For example, 14:00 is the same as 2:00 p.m. Valid entries Usage 0 to 23 Enter the hour you want the clock to move back to return to standard time.
DCS to QSIG TSC Gateway screen change isdn dcs-qsig-tsc-gateway Page 1 of 1 DCS TO QSIG TSC GATEWAY Mach ID __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ Sig Grp __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ TSC Index ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ Screen 92.
Screen reference TSC Index You must complete the TSC Index field for each machine ID. Valid entries Usage 1 through 64 Enter the assigned signaling group number for qsig-mwi application type on the Signaling Group screen. Voice Mail Number This field can be left blank. Valid entries Usage 0 through 9 Enter the complete Voice Mail Dial Up number up to 15 digits. Dial Plan Analysis Table The Dial Plan Analysis Table is the system’s guide to translating the digits dialed by users.
Dial Plan Analysis Table Call Type Valid entries Usage attd Attendant — Defines how users call an attendant. Attendant access numbers can start with any number from 0 – 9 and contain 1 or 2 digits. If a telephone’s COR restricts the user from originating calls, this user cannot access the attendant using this code. dac Dial access code — Allows you to use trunk access codes (TAC) and feature access codes (FAC) in the same range.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage fac Feature access code only — A FAC can be any number from 1–9 and contain up to 4 digits. You can use * or #, but only as a first digit. Avaya recommends that a FAC have the longest total length for a given dialed string when using mixed numbering. Otherwise, problems may occur when, for example, 3-digit FACs and 4-digit extensions begin with the same first digit and the FAC is an abbreviated dialing list access code.
Dial Plan Parameters Dialed String The dialed string contains the digits that the switch will analyze to determine how to process the call. Valid entries 0–9, * and # Usage Enter up to 2 characters for each call type. * and # can only be the first digit in a string. NOTE: For call type attd, if the total length is 2, the Dialed String must be 2 digits long.
Screen reference You are allowed, but not required, to use punctuation marks when entering an extension number on any form in the system. The punctuation marks need not match the format given in the system parameter. When the form redisplays, the format prescribed in the system parameter is used. You can enter the period (.
Dial Plan Parameters AAR/ARS Internal Call Prefix Appears if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ARS/AAR Dialing Without FAC field is y. Valid entries Usage 1–63 Enter the number of a specific node in a network. blank The field may be left blank if automatic restoration, DCS, and CDR are not used. AAR/ARS Internal Call Total Length Appears if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ARS/AAR Dialing Without FAC field is y.
Screen reference Local Node Number Enter a number to identify a specific node in a switch network. This entry must match the DCS switch node number and the CDR node number if they are specified. Valid entries Usage 1–63 Enter the number of a specific node in a network. blank The field may be left blank if automatic restoration, DCS, and CDR are not used. UDP Extension Search Order Appears if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Uniform Dialing Plan field is y.
Digit Absorption Field descriptions for page 1 change digit absorption Page 1 of 1 DIGIT ABSORPTION List Number: __ ABSORPTION TREATMENT INFORMATION (All selections must be from same group) Choice Meaning Group I. A Digit not absorbed. B Digit absorbed repeatedly. C Digit absorbed once with no further absorption. Group II. A Digit not absorbed. D Digit absorbed only if it is the first digit. E Digit absorbed only if it is the second digit and the first digit was already absorbed.
Screen reference DLG Administration This screen appears if, on the Station screen, the Service Type field is DLG. This screen includes all clients that are allowed to connect to the virtual DEFINITY LAN Gateway (DLG). Field descriptions for page 1 The following screen appears if the Service Type field is DLG and is administered. This screen includes all clients that are allowed to connect to the co-resident DEFINITY LAN Gateway (DLG). This page is always the last page on the IP Services screen.
DS1 Circuit Pack Enabled Controls whether the co-resident DLG will allow connections for the corresponding client. Valid entries Usage y Enter y to access DLG. n Will refuse connections for that Client Name/Client Link pair. DS1 Circuit Pack Use this screen to administer all DS1 circuit packs.
Screen reference add ds1 xxxxxx Page 1 of 2 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location: Bit Rate: Line Compensation: Signaling Mode: Connect: Interconnect: _____ _____ _ ___________ _________ ___ Interface Companding: _____ Idle Code: ________ MMI Cabling Board: _____ Name: Line Coding: Framing Mode: D-Channel: Interface: Peer Protocol: Country Protocol: Protocol Version: CRC? _______________ ____ ___ __ ___________ ________ ____ _ _ DCP/Analog Bearer Capability: ________ MMI Interface: ESM MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS S
DS1 Circuit Pack The following screen is valid only for the TN2242. add ds1 xxxxxx Page 1 of 2 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location: 01A13 Bit Rate: 2.048 Name: _______________ Line Coding: cmi Signaling Mode: CAS Interconnect: pbx Country Protocol: 3 Interface Companding: mulaw Idle Code: 11111111 MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS Slip Detection? n Screen 100.
Screen reference Channel Numbering The ETSI and ISO QSIG specifications require that B-channels on an E1 be encoded as 1-30 in the Channel ID IE. Prior to this field, Avaya MultiVantage only used this scheme for Country Protocols 2a (Australia) and 13a (Germany 1TR6). This field appears when the Signaling Mode field is isdn-pri, the Bit Rate field is 2.048, the Connect field is pbx, and the Interface field is peer-master or peer-slave.
DS1 Circuit Pack This field appears if the Signaling Mode field is CAS or isdn-pri. For the Japanese 2Mbit trunk circuit pack, this is a display-only field if the Signaling Mode field is CAS. Valid entries Usage 1 to 25 Enter the country protocol used by the central office at which this link terminates. etsi Enter etsi if your network service provider uses the protocol of the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). Enter etsi only if the Signaling Mode field is isdn-pri.
Screen reference DMI-BOS The DMI/BOS protocol is used for high-speed digital communications between a host computer and an Avaya MultiVantage. With this 24-channel protocol, channels 1–23 of the DS1 link carry data and channel 24 carries control signaling. DMI/BOS has greater capacity than a robbed-bit 24-channel facility. This field appears only when the Signaling Mode field is common-chan.
DS1 Circuit Pack Idle Code ! CAUTION: Customers: The entry in the Country Protocol field sets the default idle code. Do not change the default without assistance from Avaya or your network services provider. For some circuit packs, this is a display-only field. Valid entries Usage any 8-digit string of 0’s and 1’s This entry sets the signal sent out over idle DS0 channels. The string must be compatible with the protocol used by the far-end switch.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage Use the following values for private networks (including QSIG networks) outside the U.S. Entering either of these values causes the Peer Protocol and Side fields to appear. peer-master Enter peer-master if your switch overrides the other end when glare occurs. peer-slave Enter peer-slave if your switch releases the contested circuit and looks for another when glare occurs.
DS1 Circuit Pack Line Coding This field selects the type of line coding used on this facility. The setting in this field must match the setting on the far-end of the link, or you must have an intervening CSU to convert the line coding protocols. Voice calls will work even if line coding does not match, but a single data call will bring down the DS1 facility. For the TTC 2Mb CMI Trunk circuit pack, this is a display-only field showing cmi (coded mark inversion). The following information is for reference.
Screen reference Line Compensation The appropriate entry in this field varies with the type of cable used, so work with your network service provider to determine the correct setting in your situation. The following table shows the appropriate entries for different lengths of 22-gauge ABAM cable terminated on a DSX-1 cross-connect. Valid entries Usage 1 Length: 000–133 (ft), 000-40.5 (m) 2 Length: 133–266 (ft), 40.5–81.0 (m) 3 Length: 266–399 (ft), 81.
DS1 Circuit Pack MMI Interface This display-only field appears if the MMCH field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen and there is a value in the MMI Cabling Board field. Name Use this field to assign a significant, descriptive name to the DS1 link.
Screen reference ! WARNING: The AT&T Switched Network Protocol does not support restricted displays of connected numbers. Therefore, if you administer the 1a country-protocol/protocol-version combination on the DS1 screen, you cannot set the Send Connected Number field to r (restricted) on the ISDN-PRI Trunk Group screen, as this causes display problems.
DS1 Circuit Pack Admin value B-channel mtce msg Country Protocol supported 10-b United Kingdom, Ireland ETS 300 102 (Mercury); British Telecom ISDN 30; Telecom Eireann SWD 109 none 11 Spain Telefonica ISDN Specification Restart 12-a France VN4 (French National PRI) None 12-b France ETS 300 102 modified according to P10-20, called Euronumeris None 13-a Germany FTZ 1 TR 6 (German National PRI) None 13-b Germany ETS 300 102 Restart 14 Czech Republic, Slovakia ETS 300 102 Restart
Screen reference Received Digital Metering Pulse Maximum (ms) This field appears only when the Signal Mode field is cas (Channel Associated Signaling), the Interconnect field is co or pbx, and the Country Protocol field is administered for a protocol that uses periodic pulse metering (PPM) as defined in Table 14. The default value depends on the Country Protocol field’s entry. Valid entries Usage 20 to 1000 ms in increments of 10ms.
DS1 Circuit Pack Table 14. Incoming digital PPM signaling default (per Country Protocol code) Code Country PPM Min (ms) PPM Max (ms) PPM Value 0 null NA NA NA 1 U.S.
Screen reference Table 14. Incoming digital PPM signaling default (per Country Protocol code) (Continued) Code Country PPM Min (ms) PPM Max (ms) PPM Value 23 Brazil NA NA NA 24 Nordic NA NA NA 25 South Africa 160 240 0, 1 Continued on next page Side This field controls how your switch resolves glare at layer 3 over an ISDN-PRI link in QSIG private networks. It appears if the Interface field is peer-master or peer-slave.
DS1 Circuit Pack Signaling Mode This field selects the signaling method used for the DS1 link. This mode must match the method used on the other end of the link, so work with your network services provider to determine the appropriate entry for this field. Valid entries Usage CAS Enter CAS for out-of band signaling with E-1 service. This setting yields 30 64-kbps B-channels for voice or data transmission. Channel 0 is used for framing while channel 16 carries signaling.
Screen reference EC Configuration Appears when Echo Cancellation is y on the DS1 Circuit Pack screen. Valid entries Usage 1-15 Four default echo cancellation configurations are available: Enter 1, 5-15: provides the most rapid adaptation in detecting and correcting echo at the beginning of a call. Enter 2: slightly slower adaptation to echo, use if speech is clipped when both parties talk at the same time.
DS1 Circuit Pack Near-end CSU Type This field appears only when the DS1 circuit pack is a TN767D or TN464E or later suffix model, the Bit Rate field is 1.544 and the Country Protocol field is 1 (U.S.). This field does not display for all circuit packs. Valid entries Usage other Enter other if no channel service unit is attached to the DS1 facility or if the CSU is an external unit. No options are available on page 2 for administering an external CSU.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 2 add ds1 xxxxxx DS1 CIRCUIT PACK ESF DATA LINK OPTIONS Network Management Protocol: Send ANSI-T1.403 One-Second Performance Reports? Far-end CSU Address: INTEGRATED CSU OPTIONS Transmit LBO: Receive ALBO: Upon DTE LOS: CPE LOOPBACK JACK OPTIONS Supply CPE Loopback Jack Power? Screen 101. DS1 Circuit Pack ! CAUTION: Customers: Do not change fields on this page without assistance from Avaya or your network service provider.
DS1 Circuit Pack Send ANSI-T1.403 One-Second Performance Reports This field selects whether your DS1 circuit pack will send error reports to the far-end switch. These reports are useful for network management, and are sent at 1-second intervals when enabled. This field appears only if the Framing Mode field is esf. It is used only with circuit packs that have an integrated channel service unit (CSU). Valid entries Usage y/n Enter n.
Screen reference Upon DTE LOS DTE stands for “Data Terminal Equipment.” This field tells the switch what to do if the outgoing signal from the DS1 circuit pack (the data terminal equipment) to the network is lost. Valid entries Usage loopback Enter loopback to return the network signal to the network. This prevents any alarms at the far-end switch. ais Enter ais (Alarm Indicator Signal) to send an unframed all-ones signal (the AIS or Blue Alarm) to the far-end switch.
Extended Pickup Group Field descriptions change extended-pickup-group 1 Page 1 of 2 EXTENDED PICKUP GROUP Extended Group Number: 56 Pickup Number Pickup Group Number Pickup Number Pickup Group Number 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ Screen 102.
Screen reference Pickup Number This display-only field shows the pickup number assigned to the pickup group number. This is the number users dial after the feature access code (FAC) to pick up calls in their extended pickup group. Extensions Administered to have an MCT-Control Button This screen lists the extensions that can take control of a Malicious Call Trace (MCT) request.
Feature Access Code Feature Access Code This screen assigns feature access codes (FACs) that, when dialed, activate or cancel the system features. Each field on this screen has the same valid values, which must conform to feature access codes or dial access codes as defined by your dial plan. Valid entries Usage 1–4 digit number, * and # may be used as first digit. However, analog *# rotary dial phones cannot use the “*” and “#” symbols.
Screen reference Abbreviated Dial - Prgm Group List Access Code Used to enter a group list from a telephone. The user’s extension must be entered on the Abbreviated Dial Group List screen in order to program the group list. Announcement Access Code Used to record announcements. Answer Back Access Code Used to retrieve parked calls. Auto Alternate Routing (AAR) Access Code Used to access AAR. Auto Route Selection (ARS) Access Code1 Used to access ARS.
Feature Access Code Call Park Access Code Used to park an active call, which can then be retrieved from a different station using the answer back access code. Do not administer to have the same first digit as another feature access code that is longer in length. Call Pickup Access Code Used to answer a call directed to a pickup group. CAS Remote Hold/Answer Hold-Unhold Access Code Used by a Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) attendant to place calls on hold and answer calls held at a remote switch.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 2 change feature-access-codes FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC) Emergency Access to Attendant Access Code: Enhanced EC500 Activation: Extended Call Fwd Activate Busy D/A_ All: Extended Group Call Pickup Access Code: Facility Test Calls Access Code: Flash Access Code: Group Control Restrict Activation: Hunt Group Busy Activation: ISDN Access Code: Last Number Dialed Access Code: Leave Word Calling Message Retrieval Lock: Leave Word Calling Message Retrieval Unlock: Leav
Feature Access Code Extended Call Fwd Deactivation Used to deactivate call forwarding from a telephone or remote location. NOTE: An extension must have Station Security Codes administered to use the following FACs: ■ Extended Call Forward All Activate ■ Extended Call Forward Busy/Don’t Answer Activate ■ Extended Call Forward Deactivate ■ Change Coverage Extended Group Call Pickup Access Code The feature access code (FAC) users enter when a call directed to another pickup group is to be answered.
Screen reference Last Number Dialed Access Code Used to redial the last number dialed from this station. Leave Word Calling Message Retrieval Lock Used to lock the display module on telephones. The lock function activates at a telephone by dialing this system-wide lock access code. This prevents unauthorized users from displaying, canceling, or deleting messages associated with the telephone. The Lock Messages field on the Station screen also must be enabled.
Feature Access Code Personal Station Access (PSA) Dissociate Code Used to remove the association between a physical phone and an extension number. You cannot provide the code until Personal Station Access (PSA) on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen is y. Per Call CPN Blocking Code Access Code If CPN blocking is off for a trunk group, users can turn it on for a call by using this code. When they dial this code, the calling party number is not sent to the public network.
Screen reference Refresh Terminal Parameters Access Code Used to update terminal parameters on an individual phone when system settings have changed. Remote Send All Calls Activation/Deactivation Used to activate or deactivate the Send All Calls feature. Requires console permissions. Self Station Display Activation The self station field is not active. If set to a valid FAC, a digital station displays its primary extension number when the FAC is entered.
Feature Access Code Terminal Dial-Up Test Access Code Used to perform tests on digital telephones to make sure that the telephone and the buttons are communicating properly with the switch. See your Maintenance documentation for information about Digital Terminal Remote Looparound Test. Terminal Translation Initialization Merge Code Enter the digits that must be dialed to install (merge) a station without losing any of its previous feature settings.
Screen reference Voice Principal Message Retrieval Access Code Allows users to retrieve their own voice messages for another user via a digital display module. Field descriptions for page 4 change feature-access-codes Page 4 of 7 FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC) Whisper Page Activation Access Code: Screen 107. Feature Access Code (FAC) screen Whisper Page Activation Access Code Allows users to place a page to another user’s phone, when active on a call.
Feature Access Code Add Agent Skill Access Code Enter the digits an agent must dial to be able to add a skill to their current skill set. After Call Work Access Code Enter the code the agent must dial when the agent will be performing work-related ACD activities. Assist Access Code Enter the digit the agent must dial to request assistance from the split supervisor.
Screen reference Remove Agent Skill Access Code Enter the digits an agent must dial to be able to remove a skill from their current skill set. NOTE: The next field is available only if Vectoring (Basic) and Vectoring (Prompting) have been enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Remote Logout of Agent Access Code Enter the digits you need to dial to remotely logout an idle ACD or EAS agent.
Feature Access Code Field descriptions for page 6 The feature access codes on this page pertain only to Hospitality features.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 7 The feature access codes on this page pertain only to Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH). change feature-access-codes Page 7 of 7 FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC) Multimedia Features Basic Mode Activation: Enhanced Mode Activation: Multimedia Call Access Code: Multimedia Data Conference Activation: Multimedia Multi-Address Access Code: Multimedia Parameter Access Code: Deactivation: Screen 110.
Feature-Related System Parameters time, it will give denial treatment (since a collaboration session is already active). This FAC only applies to voice stations on an Avaya MultiVantage switch equipped with an ESM adjunct. Multimedia Data Conference Deactivation If you enter this FAC from the phone that enabled data collaboration on a multimedia mode call, it will deactivate the data session and revert to a voice and video call.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 1 change system-parameters features FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Self Station Display Enabled? n Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer? none Automatic Callback - No Answer Timeout Interval (rings): 4_ Call Park Timeout Interval (minutes): 10 Off-Premises Tone Detect Timeout Interval (seconds): 20_ AAR/ARS Dial Tone Required? y Music/Tone On Hold: music Music (or Silence) On Transferred Trunk Calls: all DID/Tie/ISDN Intercept Treatment: attd Internal Auto-Answer of Attd-
Feature-Related System Parameters ACA Referral Calls Indicates where ACA referral calls generate. This field only appears when the Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) Enabled field is y.) Valid entries Usage local Local referral calls generate on and for the local switch. primary Primary referral calls generate on the local switch for remote switches as well as the local switch. remote Remote referral calls generate at another switch in a DCS network.
Screen reference Auto Abbreviated/Delayed Transition Interval (rings) Valid entries Usage 1–16 Enter the number of rings before an automatic abbreviated/ delayed transition is triggered for a call Automatic Callback — No Answer Timeout Interval (rings) Valid entries Usage 2–9 Enter the number of times the callback call rings at the calling station before the callback call is canceled.
Feature-Related System Parameters DID/Tie/ISDN Intercept Treatment Valid entries Usage A recorded announcement extension Toll charges do not apply to DID and private network calls routed to an announcement. attd For system security, Avaya recommends entering attd in this field. This routes intercept calls to the attendant and, if the attendant receives several of these, they will know a problem exists.
Screen reference Music (or Silence) On Transferred Trunk Calls Valid entries Usage all Enter all to allow all transferred trunk calls to receive music until the call is answered if the Music-on-Hold feature is available. no Enter no if trunk callers are to hear music (or silence if Music-on-Hold is not administered) while waiting to be transferred, and then ringback as soon as the transfer is completed till the call is answered.
Feature-Related System Parameters Port Indicates the port number that provides Music-on-Hold access. This requires a port on a TN763 Auxiliary Trunk circuit pack or any supported Analog Line circuit pack. Appears when Music/Tone on Hold is music. Enter the necessary characters.
Screen reference Protocol for Caller ID Analog Terminals Determines the protocol/tones sent to a Caller ID phone. Valid entries Usage Bellcore Enter Bellcore for Bellcore protocol with 212 modem protocol tones. Used in the U.S. and similar countries. V23-Bell Enter V23-Bell for Bellcore protocol with V.23 modem tones. Used in Bahrain and similar countries. Self Station Display Enabled Use this field to control the use of the INSPECT button for digital display phones.
Feature-Related System Parameters Field descriptions for page 2 change system-parameters features FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS LEAVE WORD CALLING PARAMETERS Maximum Number of External Calls Logged Per Station: 0 Message Waiting Indication for External Calls? n Stations with System-wide Retrieval Permission (enter extension) 1: 34430 3: attd 5: 7: 9: 2: 34412 4: 6: 8: 10: WARNING! SEE USER DOCUMENTATION BEFORE CHANGING TTI STATE Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) Enabled? _ TTI State: _______ TT
Screen reference Message Waiting Indication for External Calls Provides a message waiting indication when external calls are logged. Valid entries Usage y The message waiting indication for a particular station is on whenever an external call is logged. n The log of external calls has no impact on the message waiting indication. COR for PSA Dissociated Sets Valid entries Usage 1-95 or blank Enter the class of restriction to apply to calls made from dissociated telephones.
Feature-Related System Parameters Default Multimedia Outgoing Trunk Parameter Selection Does not appear on S8700 IP-Connect. Valid entries Usage 2x56 Sets default parameter for bandwidth and bearer for all video calls. 2x64 Enhanced Abbreviated Dial Length (3 or 4) The administrator may not be able to use all entry slots because of system capacity constraints.
Screen reference Record IP Registrations in History Log Allows the logging of IP registrations in the history log. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to record IP registrations on the history log. Record PMS/AD Transactions in History Log Allows PMS and abbreviated dialing button transactions to be recorded on the history log. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to record PMS or abbreviated dialing button transactions on the history log.
Feature-Related System Parameters TTI Security Code (This is also known as the TTI authorization code but is not the same as system authorization codes.) This field appears when Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) Enabled is y. Valid entries Usage 1- to 7-digit code This is the code that TTI users must enter when accessing TTI from their telephones TTI State The value of this field determines what type of TTI default port translation is generated for unadministered digital ports.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 3 change system-parameters features page 3 FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Reserved Slots for Attendant Priority Queue: 5_ Time Before Off-Hook Alert: 10__ Emergency Access Redirection Extension: ________ Number of Emergency Calls Allowed in Attendant Queue: __ Call Pickup Alerting? n Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup? y Call Pickup on Intercom Calls? y Directed Call Pickup? n Extended Group Call Pickup: flexible Deluxe Paging and Call Park Timeout
Feature-Related System Parameters Controlled Outward Restriction Intercept Treatment Enter the type of intercept treatment the caller receives when the call is outward restricted. Valid entries Usage announcement Provides a recorded announcement to calls that cannot be completed as dialed. You select and record the message. The calling party receives indication that the call is receiving Intercept Treatment. Enter the extension number for the announcement in the associated field.
Screen reference Controlled Termination Restriction (Do Not Disturb) Enter the type of intercept treatment the caller receives when the call is placed to a termination restricted telephone. Valid entries Usage announcement If announcement is entered, complete an associated extension number field. attendant Redirects intercepted calls to the attendant. coverage Redirects intercepted calls to coverage. extension If extension is entered, complete an associated extension number field.
Feature-Related System Parameters Emergency Access Redirection Extension Valid entries Usage An assigned extension Enter the assigned extension number (can be a VDN) where emergency queue overflow will redirect. Extended Group Call Pickup Enables call pickup groups to answer calls directed to another call pickup group. Valid entries Usage flexible Flexible feature version supporting a one-to-n (pickup group-to-extended pickup group) mapping.
Screen reference Reserved Slots for Attendant Priority Queue Valid entries 2–75 Usage Enter the number of calls that can go in to the emergency queue Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup Valid entries Usage y Enter y to allow a temporary bridged appearance for calls answered with the Call Pickup or Directed Call Pickup features. This field controls this capability on a system-wide basis. n Enter n to prevent the temporary bridged appearance of calls answered with these features.
Feature-Related System Parameters AUTHORIZATION CODE PARAMETERS Attendant Time Out Flag If this field is not enabled, the caller receives Intercept tone. This flag affects only remote users or incoming calls over trunks requiring an authorization code. This field only appears if Authorization Codes Enabled is y. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if a call is to be routed to the attendant if the caller does not dial an authorization code within 10 seconds or dials an invalid authorization code.
Screen reference Authorization Codes Enabled This field cannot be administered if Authorization Codes is not enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. ! SECURITY ALERT: To maintain system security, Avaya recommends that Authorization Codes be used. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to enable Authorization Codes on a systemwide basis. Controlled Toll Restriction Intercept Treatment Appears when the Controlled Toll Restriction Replaces field is outward or station-to-station.
Feature-Related System Parameters Display Authorization Code This field applies only to DCP, not to BRI or hybrid sets. ! SECURITY ALERT: To enhance your system’s security, set Display Authorization Code to n. Valid entries Usage y Enter y to allow authorization code digits to display on the set during the dialing. n Enter n if these digits should not display.
Screen reference SYSTEM PRINTER PARAMETERS The system printer is the printer dedicated to support scheduled reports. EIA Device Bit Rate This field does not appear for DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect. Valid entries Usage 1200 2400 4800 9600 Enter the required printer speed setting. Lines Per Page Valid entries Usage 24 – 132 Enter the number of lines per page required for the report. System Printer Endpoint NOTE: The eia option is not available for DEFINITY R.
Feature-Related System Parameters SYSTEM-WIDE PARAMETERS Emergency Numbers - Internal Enter the phone number you want to use for emergency calls. If your system is in a No-License mode, these will be the only numbers that users can dial. The number may contain the feature access code for Emergency Access to the Attendant, trunk access codes, or any number or blank. Valid entries Usage Enter extension assigned to station or individual attendant or blank .
Screen reference MALICIOUS CALL TRACE PARAMETERS Apply MCT Warning Tone Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to provide an audible tone to the controlling station when an MCT recorder is actively recording a malicious call. Delay Sending RELease (seconds) This field specifies the amount of time DEFINITY waits before sending an ISDN release message in response to receiving an ISDN disconnect message.
Feature-Related System Parameters Send All Calls Applies to Valid entries Usage station If set to station, any call to that station, regardless of the number dialed, causes calls to that station’s own extension to be sent immediately to Coverage, or causes calls to different extensions assigned to the station as bridged appearances to become Ring-Ping notification if Redirect Notification field is y. extension When set to extension, only the calls sent to that extension are placed to coverage.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 5 change system-parameters features page FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Public Network Trunks on Conference Call: 5 Auto Start? Conference Parties with Public Network Trunks: 6 Auto Hold? Conference Parties without Public Network Trunks: 6 Attendant Tone? Night Service Disconnect Timer (seconds): 180 Bridging Tone? Short Interdigit Timer (seconds): 3 Conference Tone? Unanswered DID Call Timer (seconds): ____ Intrusion Tone? Line Intercept Tone Timer (seconds
Feature-Related System Parameters Allow AAR/ARS Access from DID/DIOD Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow calls for DID and DIOD type trunk groups to complete calls using ARS or AAR. Allow ANI Restriction on AAR/ARS (For Russia only) If a call is placed over a Russian shuttle trunk or a Russian rotary trunk via an AAR or ARS entry with the ANI Req field set to r, then ANI is requested just like a y entry. However, if the ANI request fails, the call immediately drops.
Screen reference Bridging Tone Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to apply a bridging tone when calls are bridged on primary extensions. Conference Parties with Public Network Trunks Specifies the maximum number of parties allowed in a conference call involving a public network subscriber. If the value of the Public Network Trunks on Conference Call field is 0, this field will not appear on the screen.
Feature-Related System Parameters Intrusion Tone Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to apply an intrusion tone (executive override) when an attendant intrudes on the call. Invalid Number Dialed Intercept Treatment Enter the type of intercept treatment the end-user hears after dialing an invalid number. Valid entries Usage announcement Provides a recorded announcement when the end-user dials an invalid number. You select and record the message.
Screen reference Mode Code Interface NOTE: If you make a change to this field, you must log off and log back on to effect the permission changes to get to the ‘‘Mode Code Related System Parameters’’ on page 1034. Allows you to use the Mode Code Voice Mail System Interface to connect the switch over a DTMF interface to INTUITY AUDIX or other vendors’ voice mail systems.
Feature-Related System Parameters Short Interdigit Timer (seconds) Enter a number to limit the time that digit analysis will wait for the next digit when it has predicted that all the digits have already been collected. Valid entries Usage 3 through 9 Special Dial Tone Special dial tone notifies an analog-phone user if certain features are still active when the user goes off-hook.
Screen reference Unanswered DID Call Timer (seconds) Enter number or blank to limit how long a DID call can remain unanswered before routing to the DID/TIE/ISDN Intercept Treatment feature. This timer interacts with the nonadministrable 50 second Wait for Answer Supervision Timer (WAST). The WAST timer overrides this field.
Feature-Related System Parameters DTMF Tone Feedback Signal to VRU Connection, Disconnection This field appears only if DTMF Feedback Signals for VRU on the Customer-Options System Parameters screen is y. Valid entries Usage 0 through 9, *, #, A, B, C, D Enter the code to connect or disconnect the VRU. This can be a single digit, or a combination such as *99 to connect, #99 to disconnect. The tones must be programmed at the VRU as well. blank Blank means that no tone is to be sent to the VRU.
Screen reference Abort Transfer Stops the transfer operation whenever a user presses a non-idle call appearance button in the middle of the transfer operation, or when they hang up. If both the Abort Transfer and Transfer Upon Hang-Up fields are y and you press the TRANSFER button and then dial the complete transfer-to number, hanging up the phone transfers the call. You must select another non-idle call appearance to abort the transfer.
Feature-Related System Parameters Transfer Upon Hang-Up Allows DCP, hybrid, IP, wireless, or ISDN-BRI phone users to complete a transfer operation by hanging up. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y so users may transfer a call by pressing the TRANSFER button, dialing the desired extension, and then hanging up. The user may also wait to hang up, speak with the other party, then press TRANSFER again to complete the process.
Screen reference Without Flash Provides automatic callback for analog stations without flashing the hook. It is applied only when the called station is busy and has no other coverage path or call forwarding. The caller can enable the automatic callback without flashing the hook or entering the feature access code. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to provide automatic callback for a calling analog station without flashing the hook.
Feature-Related System Parameters Feature Plus Ext Valid entries Usage A valid extension Administration of this field is required for proper termination of some Feature Plus signaling. For example, Message Waiting Indication (MWI) requires this extension in order to send the indication to the appropriate switch. Appears only if the ISDN Feature Plus field is y on the System Parameters Customer Options screen.
Screen reference MWI - Number of Digits Per Voice Mail Subscriber Appears only if the Basic Supplementary Services field or the ISDN Feature Plus field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y. This field provides an indication of the number of digits per AUDIX subscriber. NOTE: For QSIG-MWI only. These routing digits and inserted digits must screen a digit string that, when analyzed and processed, routes to a Signaling Group supporting QSIG-TSCs.
Feature-Related System Parameters National CPN Prefix Allows you to apply prefixes to national calling numbers for display at receiving phones. This is useful for those phones that use or implement call back features based on incoming call numbers. When an ISDN-PRI call arrives, the incoming call setup is analyzed for: (1) whether the Type of Address (TOA) is national or international, and (2) whether the Numbering Plan Identifier (NPI) is Unknown or ISDN/Telephony.
Screen reference QSIG Path Replacement Extension Enter the extension for the system to use as part of the complete number sent in the Path Replacement Propose message. Valid entries Usage Extension Enter an unused extension that conforms to your dial plan. QSIG TSC Extension Valid entries Usage Enter any valid, unassigned extension.
Feature-Related System Parameters Unknown Numbers Considered Internal for AUDIX Appears when, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, either the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y. This field controls the treatment of an ISDN number whose numbering plan identification is “unknown” in a QSIG centralized AUDIX arrangement. This field works in conjunction with the Calling Party Number to Intuity AUDIX field on the Hunt Group screen.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 8 change system-parameters features FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS page 8 CPN/ANI/ICLID PARAMETERS CPN/ANI/ICLID Replacement for Restricted Calls: CPN/ANI/ICLID Replacement for Unavailable Calls: Screen 118. Feature-Related System Parameters screen CPN/ANI/ICLID PARAMETERS CPN/ANI/ICLID Replacement for Restricted Calls Valid entries Usage up to 15 characters Enter a text string to replace the restricted numbers on the display.
Feature-Related System Parameters Field descriptions for page 9 change system-parameters features FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS page 9 Pull Transfer: n Update Transferred Ring Pattern? Outpulse Without Tone? y Wait Answer Supervision Timer? Misoperation Alerting? n Repetitive Call Waiting Tone? Allow Conference via Flash? y Repetitive Call Waiting Interval (sec): Vector Disconnect Timer (min): __ Network Feedback During Tone Detection? Hear Zip Tone Following VOA? y System Updates Time On Station Di
Screen reference Date Format on 607/2420/4600/6400 Terminals The format of the date as displayed on the telephones. Valid entries Usage mm/dd/yy month/day/year dd/mm/yy day/month/year yy/mm/dd year/month/day Hear Zip Tone Following VOA? This tone alerts a telephone user that the announcement has completed and a caller is now connected. CallMaster set and attendant console users hear double zip tone following the announcement. All other telephone users hear single zip tone.
Feature-Related System Parameters Level of Tone Detection For the most part, this option is no longer required in today’s switching environment. It may be useful if your users are having difficulty placing outgoing calls due to inaccurate detection of network dial tone. Valid entries Usage broadband This is the least exact of the levels of tone detection. If the switch detects any tone at all, it interprets this as dial tone.
Screen reference On-hook Dialing on 607/2420/4600/6400/8400 Terminals For 6400/8400, 607, 2420, and 4600 telephone users with speakerphones. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y allows users to dial without lifting the handset. If you enable this, users hear dial tone when they press the Speaker button, even if the handset is on-hook. The next four fields control station-to-switch recall signal timing.
Feature-Related System Parameters Repetitive Call Waiting Tone Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to indicate that a repetitive call waiting tone be provided to the called party for all types of call waiting access. Station Tone Forward Disconnect Tone Forward Disconnect applies to any station other than one administered as a data endpoint, an attendant console, a BRI phone, an auto answer, or as an Outgoing Call Management (OCM) agent.
Screen reference Vector Disconnect Timer (min) Enter the number of minutes, or blank that a trunk should remain connected to a vector. Valid entries Usage 1 to 240 The number of minutes that you enter determines when the trunk will be disconnected if the Disconnect Supervision-In or Disconnect Supervision-Out fields on the Trunk screen are n. blank Enter blank if you do not want Avaya MultiVantage to initiate a disconnect.
Feature-Related System Parameters Forward Disconnect Timer (msec) Specify the duration of a momentary disconnect sent by the switch to an analog station user when that user is the last party still off-hook on a call. Valid entries Usage 25 to 1500 (in increments of 25). Lower Bound (msec) The lower bound of the station-to-switch recall signal timing interval in milliseconds. Specifies the lower bound of the flashhook interval. Appears when the Flashhook Interval field is y.
Screen reference Enforce PNT-to-PNT Restrictions This field appears if the Italian Protocol Enabled field is y. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to indicate that restrictions and denial of PNT-to-PNT connections will be enforced when the EDCS message is unavailable. A y in this field means restrictions will be enforced. Italian Protocol Enabled Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to enable the Italian DCS feature on a systemwide basis.
Feature-Related System Parameters CALL CENTER SYSTEM PARAMETERS EAS Direct Agent Announcement Delay Only appears if Expert Agent Selection (EAS) or ASAI Link Core Capabilities on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y. Valid entries Usage 0–99 or blank Enter the number of seconds the caller will hear ringback before the Direct Agent Announcement is heard by the calling party.
Screen reference Minimum Agent-LoginID Password Length Enter the minimum number of digits that must be administered as an EAS Agent’s LoginID password. Only appears if Expert Agent Selection (EAS) on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y. Valid entries Usage 0–9 Entering a 0 or blank indicates no password is required. VECTORING Available Agent Adjustments for BSR Controls the use of BSR available agent adjustments.
Feature-Related System Parameters Converse Signaling Tone/Pause Only appears if Vectoring (Basic) and DTMF on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen are y. In the Signaling Tone field, enter the length in milliseconds of the digit tone for digits being passed to the CONVERSANT. In the Pause field, enter the length in milliseconds of the delay between digits being passed. The optimum timers for the CONVERSANT are a 100 msec tone and 70 msec pause.
Screen reference Prompting Timeout (secs) Enter the number of seconds before the Collect Digits command times out for callers using rotary dialing. Only appears if Vectoring (Prompting) on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y. Valid entries Usage 4 to 10 Reverse Star/Pound Digit for Collect Step The “*” is interpreted as a “caller end-of-dialing indicator and the “#” is an indicator to clear all digits previously entered by the caller for the current “collect” vector step.
Feature-Related System Parameters ASAI Call Classification After Answer Supervision? For use with ASAI Outbound Call Management (OCM). Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to force the switch to rely on the network to provide answer/busy/drop classification to the switch. After the call has been answered, a call classifier can be added to perform answering machine, modem and voice answering detection.
Screen reference AGENT AND CALL SELECTION ACW Agents Considered Idle Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to have agents who are in After Call Work included in the Most-Idle Agent queue. This means that ACW is counted as idle time. Enter n to exclude ACW agents from the queue. Auto Reserve Agents Valid entries Usage all none secondary-only Call Selection Measurement This field determines how Avaya MultiVantage selects a call for an agent when the agent becomes available and there are calls in queue.
Feature-Related System Parameters MIA Across Splits or Skills Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to remove an agent from the MIA queue for all the splits/skills/hunt groups that he or she is available in when the agent answers a call from any of his or her splits/skills/hunt groups. Service Level Supervisor Call Selection Override This field determines whether Avaya MultiVantage changes agents’ call handling preferences when a skill using Service Level Supervisor exceeds its Level 1 threshold.
Screen reference Logout Reason Code Type Valid entries Usage none Enter none if you do not want an agent to enter a Reason Code when logging out. requested Enter requested if you want an agent to enter a Reason Code when logging out but do not want to force the agent to do so. To enter requested the Reason Codes and EAS on the System-Parameters Customer-Option screen must be y. forced Enter forced to force an agent to enter a Reason Code when logging out.
Feature-Related System Parameters BCMS/VuStats Measurement Interval You can enter half-hour or hour for polling and reporting measurement data if the BCMS (Basic) and/or the VuStats on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y. Valid entries Usage half-hour There are a maximum of 25 time slots available for measurement intervals. If hour is specified, an entire day of traffic information will be available for history reports; otherwise, only half a day will be available.
Screen reference Remove Inactive BCMS/VuStats Agents Valid entries Usage y Agents are removed from reports when they have no staff time during the previous 7 days. n Agents remain on the report even if they have no staff time for any period of time. Validate BCMS/VuStats Login IDs Valid entries Usage y Enter y to allow entry only of login-IDs that have been entered on the BCMS Login-ID screen. n Enter n to allow entry of any ACD login of the proper length.
Feature-Related System Parameters AUTOMATIC EXCLUSION PARAMETERS Automatic Exclusion by COS Activates automatic exclusion automatically by class of service when a user goes off-hook on a station with an assigned EXCLUSION button. This works only for stations on the local switch. Valid entries Usage y Enables automatic exclusion by a class of service. n Exclusion operates normally. See Exclusion on ‘‘Telephone feature buttons’’ on page 131 for more information.
Screen reference Password to Change COR by FAC Appears if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Change COR by FAC field is y. Avaya recommends using this password option. Valid entries Usage 4 to 8 digits Requires the password option. blank Disables the password option. Recall Rotary Digit This establishes the digit to use for rotary phones to receive recall dial tone.
Feature-Related System Parameters IP PARAMETERS Direct IP-IP Audio Connections Allows direct audio connections between IP endpoints Valid entries y/n Usage Enter to y to save on bandwidth resources and improve sound quality of voice over IP transmissions. IP Audio Hairpinning Allows IP endpoints to be connected through the IP circuit pack on the switch.
Screen reference T2 (Backward Signal) Activation Timer (secs) The T2 (Backward Signal) Activation Timer (secs) field applies to outgoing Russian MFP trunks. This field sets the number of seconds the switch waits for confirmation after sending calling party number and dialed number information on outgoing Russian MFP trunks Valid entries Usage 5 through 20 Enter the number of seconds the system waits to receive confirmation after sending the address information on outgoing Russian MFP trunks.
Group Paging Using Speakerphone Ext Valid entries Usage An extension number Assign a phone to the group by entering its extension number in this field. Group Extension Valid entries Usage An extension number Assign the extension users will dial to page the members of this group. Group Name Valid entries Usage 1 to 27 characters Enter a name that’s informative to users, because it appears on callers’ phone displays when they page the group.
Screen reference Holiday Table Use this screen to define individual holidays or holiday ranges for use with Holiday Vectoring. To use and administer Holiday Vectoring, Vectoring (Holiday) must be y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Contact your Avaya representative for assistance.
Holiday Table End Month Valid entries Usage 1-12 Enter the ending month of the holiday. Name Display-only field identifying the name of the table. Valid entries Usage Up to 27 characters Enter a description of the holiday table. Number Display-only field identifying the holiday table number. Valid display Usage 1-10 Holiday table number. Start Day Valid entries Usage 1-31 Enter the starting day of the holiday.
Screen reference Hospitality This screen is used to implement the system parameters associated with the hospitality features. To use and administer the Hospitality-related features, Hospitality must be y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Contact your Avaya representative for assistance.
Hospitality Controlled Restrictions Configuration This indicates whether controlled restriction information is being exchanged between the server and the PMS. Valid entries Usage act-nopms The message is acknowledged (MESSAGE ACK), but no action is taken. act-pms The server and the PMS exchange and accept controlled restriction information. Default Coverage Path for Client Rooms This applies only to stations with a “client room” class of service in the “occupied” mode.
Screen reference Journal/Schedule Endpoint This is a valid data extension number that is assigned to the data module connected to the Journal/Schedule printer. Valid entries Usage Valid data extension number Cannot be a VDN extension. This extension can be the same as the PMS/Log printer and both sets of reports can be printed on the same printer. This extension is dialed by the server to send journal information or schedule reports to the printer.
Hospitality PMS Log Endpoint This is a valid data extension number that is assigned to the data module connected to the PMS/Log printer. Valid entries Usage Valid data extension Cannot be a VDN extension. This extension is dialed by the server to send housekeeping and PMS events to the printer. PMS_LOG Use this value if the printer is connected over a TCP/IP link, and this link is defined as PMS_LOG on the IP Services screen.
Screen reference PMS Link Maximum Retransmissions Valid entries 1 to 5 Usage Enter the number of times that the server retransmits a message to the PMS in response to a negative acknowledgment, or sends an inquiry for acknowledgment from the PMS before giving up on the message. PMS Log Endpoint Valid entries Usage Valid extension Enter the data extension number the server dials to access PMS. Cannot be a VDN extension.
Hospitality Field descriptions for page 2 change system-parameters hospitality Page HOSPITALITY Daily Wakeup? y VIP Wakeup? VIP Wakeup Per 5 Minutes: Room Activated Wakeup With Tones? Time of Scheduled Wakeup Activity Report: Time of Scheduled Wakeup Summary Report: Time of Scheduled Emergency Access Summary Report: Announcement Type: Integrated Announcement Extension: Length of Time To Remain Connected To Announcement: Extension To Receive Failed Wakeup LWC Messages: Routing Extension On Unavailable Vo
Screen reference Valid entries Usage 1 through 80 Gateway (DEFINITY R, CSI) or 1 through 10 (DEFINITY SI) or 1 through 250 (S8700 IP-Connect / S8700 Multi-Connect / S8300 Media Server) V1 through V9 Module 01 through 31 Circuit Announcement Type This indicates the type of automatic wakeup announcement the hotel guest will receive. Allowable entries are as follows: Valid entries Usage external Applicable when using an announcement adjunct.
Hospitality Automatic Selection of DID Numbers This field assigns a 2- to 5-digit number to a guest’s phone number that is not associated with the room number. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to use the Automatic Selection of DID Numbers for Guest Rooms feature. Auxiliary Board for Announcement This field appears only when the Announcement Type field is external. This indicates the equipment location of an auxiliary trunk circuit that connects to the external announcement equipment.
Screen reference Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers This field allows you to select the DID number assigned to a room when a guest checks in. This field can be accessed only if the Automatic Selection of DID Numbers field is y. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow you to select the DID number assigned to a room when a guest checks in. Daily Wakeup Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if each extension can request daily wakeup calls.
Hospitality Display Room Information in Call Display This indicates the type of guest room information displayed on phone displays. Valid entries Usage y If this field is set to y, the phones will display the name and room number. The extension number and room number are not always the same number. n If this field is set to n, the phones will display the name and extension number.
Screen reference Length of Time to Remain Connected to Announcement Enter the length of time in seconds that a hotel guest will be connected to an announcement. This applies only after the guest has heard the announcement completely one time, but continues to listen. Valid entries Usage 0 to 300 Number of Digits from PMS This indicates the number of digits being sent from the PMS to the server to identify room numbers.
Hospitality Room Activated Wakeup with Tones Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if wakeup calls can be activated via tones that prompt users for the time they wish to waken. This allows room activated wakeup calls without the use of a speech synthesizer or a display telephone. Routing Extension on Unavailable Voice Synthesis This indicates where a wakeup call will go to if both wakeup announcements on the Speech Synthesizer circuit pack are not available.
Screen reference Time of Scheduled Wakeup Summary Report This indicates the time of day that the Wakeup Summary Report will be printed on the Journal/Schedule printer. This report gives an hour-by-hour summary of the number of scheduled wakeup calls and a list of extensions to which wakeup calls were attempted but did not complete during the hour. Valid entries Usage hh:mm:am/pm Enter the time where hh=hour, mm=minute, am/pm=A.M. or P.M.
Hunt Group ROOM STATES Definition for Rooms in State 1 - 6 Enter up to a 30-character definition for each room status. For example, you could define state 1 as ‘clean, ready to use’ and state 2 as ‘occupied, needs cleaning.’ The definitions for room states (Field descriptions for page 3), are for Attendant Room Status only. If you are not using Attendant Room Status, you do not need to complete these fields.
Screen reference The System checks for the busy or idle status of extension numbers in the hunt group when answering calls. A Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) type hunt group selects the “most idle” extension in the group when answering a new call. A Direct Department Calling (DDC) type hunt group selects the first available extension (in the administered sequence) when answering a new call.
Hunt Group The two Extension fields display only when the Calls Warning Port and the Time Warning Port fields are x. change hunt-group x Page 1 of X HUNT GROUP Group Number: Group Name: Group Extension: Group Type: TN: COR: Security Code: ISDN Caller Display: ___ ____________________________ ____ ACD? n Queue? y Vector? y MM Early Answer? ____ ________ Queue Length: ___ Calls Warning Threshold: ___ Time Warning Threshold: ___ Port: x Port: x Extension: ____ Extension: ____ Screen 130.
Screen reference ACD Indicates whether Automatic Call distribution is used. This field cannot be set to y if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ACD field is n. Valid entries Usage y The hunt group will function as an ACD split/skill. AUDIX hunt groups can function as ACD splits/skills. n This feature is not desired, even if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ACD field is y.
Hunt Group (Calls Warning) Port Appears if the Queue field is y. Enter the seven-character port number assigned to connect the optional external Auxiliary Queue Call Warning Threshold lamp that will flash when the number of calls in queue has exceeded the queue warning threshold (assigned in Calls Warning Threshold). This port is assigned to an Analog Line circuit pack or given an “X” designation if an extension is used.Enter the necessary characters.
Screen reference Coverage Path Enter a coverage path number. This assigns a coverage path for the hunt group. The coverage path is assigned using the Coverage Path screen. Does not appear if the Vector field is y Valid entries Usage 1 to 999 t1 to t999 Time of day table blank Group Extension Enter an unused extension number to be assigned to the hunt group. The field may not be blank.
Hunt Group Table 15. Group Types ACD=n ACD, Split, Vector = n/y circ ddc x x x ucdmia eadmia ucdloa eadloa pad x ACD, Skill, Vector = n/y x x ACD, Skill, Vector = y x x x x x x x x Advocate or Elite ACD, Skill, Vector = y x Dynamic Advocate Continued on next page Valid entries Usage ddc Enter ddc when the call should be routed to the first extension or ACD agent assigned in the ACD split. Group type ddc is also known as “hot seat” distribution.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage ead-mia When ead-mia or ead-loa is entered, a call routes to the available agent with the highest skill level for the call. If two or more agents with equal skill levels are available, Avaya MultiVantage routes the call to the most-idle agent based on when the agent finished the most recent call (“ead-mia”), or the least occupied agent based on agent occupancy (“ead-loa”).
Hunt Group Night Service Destination Enter the destination where calls to this split will redirect when the split is in the night service mode. Not all features will work correctly if this is not a local extension. Does not appear if the Vector field is y. Valid entries Usage An assigned extension number (can be a VDN extension) attd An attendant group code. blank Queue Specifies a queue for the hunt group. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y so the hunt group will be served by a queue.
Screen reference Time Warning Threshold Appears if the Queue field is y and when the Calling Warning Port and the Time Warning Port fields are X. Enter the time in seconds that a call can remain in the queue before the System flashes the Queue status lamps (feature buttons assigned members phones) and the Auxiliary Queue Time Warning lamp assigned to this split/skill. Valid entries Usage 0 to 999 or An entry of 0 provides a warning whenever a call is queued.
Hunt Group Valid entries Usage 0 through 20 Fourth and fifth character are the slot number 01 through 04 Six and seventh characters are the circuit number (Analog TIE trunks) 01 through 31 For example, 01A0612 is in cabinet 01, carrier A, slot 06, and circuit number (port) 12. TN Enter the Tenant Partition number. Valid entries Usage 1 through 100 Vector See example screens for fields that display when this field is y.
Screen reference Field description for page 2 Page 2 of the Hunt group screen appears only when the ACD field on page 1 is y. If the ACD field is n, page 3 becomes page 2 and all subsequent page numbers are decreased by one. The Timed ACW Interval field appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Option screen, the Timed ACW field on page 3 is y.
Hunt Group AAS Appears when the ACD field is y. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if this hunt group is to serve as an Auto-Available Split. Acceptable Service Level (sec) Appears if the ACD field is y and the Measured field is internal or both. Enter the number of seconds within which calls to this hunt group should be answered. This allows BCMS and/or VuStats to report a percentage of calls that were answered within the specified time.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage adjlk Computer Telephony Adjunct Links Indicates ASAI links administered without hardware and used by the Co-Resident DLG application. You cannot use this selection unless, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Co-Res DEFINITY LAN Gateway field is y. Indicates ASAI adjunct links administered without hardware and used by the Co-Resident DLG application.
Hunt Group Expected Call Handling Time (sec) Appears if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, either the Vectoring (Advanced Routing) or Business Advocate field is y. and, on the Hunt Group screen, the ACD field is y. . Valid entries Usage 1 to 9999 in increments of 1 Establishes the number of seconds for expected call handling. This value is used to initialize Expected Wait Time and is also used by the CentreVu® Advocate Percent Allocation feature.
Screen reference Measured Provides measurement data for the ACD split/skill collected (internal to the switch) for VuStats or BCMS. This measurement data is collected for VuStats and BCMS only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, they are y and, on the Hunt Group screen, the ACD field is y.
Hunt Group Valid entries Usage one-forced An ACD call is delivered automatically to an idle line appearance if the agent has no other ACD call on the station, is in the Auto-In/Manual-In (MI/AI) work mode, and an unrestricted line appearance is available. one-per-skill An ACD call is delivered automatically to an idle line appearance if the agent has no other ACD call for that skill on the station, is in the Auto-In/Manual-In (MI/AI) work mode, and un unrestricted line appearance is available.
Screen reference Service Level Supervisor Appears if, on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Business Advocate field is y and, on the Hunt Group screen, the ACD and Skill fields are y. For information on CentreVu® Advocate, please contact your Avaya Account Executive or see the CentreVu® Advocate User Guide. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to use Service Level Supervisor for this skill.
Hunt Group Timed ACW Interval (sec) When a value is entered in this field, an agent in auto-in work mode who receives an ACD call from this hunt group is placed automatically into After Call Work (ACW) when the call drops. Enter the number of seconds the agent should remain in ACW following the call. When the administered time is over, the agent automatically becomes available.
Screen reference Field description for page 3 change hunt-group 4 Page 3 of x HUNT GROUP Message Center: Voice Mail Extension: Calling Party Number to INTUITY AUDIX? LWC Reception: rem-vm ____ n none Screen 134. Hunt Group screen AUDIX Name Enter the name of the AUDIX machine as it appears on the Node Names screen. Only appears on DEFINITY R. Add the AUDIX name to the Node Names screen before entering it in this field.
Hunt Group First Announcement Extension Appears when the ACD and Queue fields are y and the Vector field is n. Valid entries Usage Enter a recorded announcement extension number. This is the announcement the caller receives after being in the queue for the time interval specified in First Announcement Delay. If the call hasn’t been answered after the announcement, the caller hears music (only after the first announcement) if Music-on-Hold is provided, or ringing for as long as it remains in the queue.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage qsig-mwi QSIG network allowing voice mail to be located on another switch fp-mwi Public network allowing AUDIX to be located on another switch; administrable only when the ISDN Feature Plus field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y. none Indicates the hunt group does not serve as a message hunt group. Message Center AUDIX Name Enter the name of the Message Center AUDIX.
Hunt Group Second Announcement Extension Appears only when the ACD and Queue fields both are y and the Vector field is n. Valid entries Usage Enter the extension number assigned to a recorded announcement. blank Leaving the field blank indicates there is no second announcement. Second Announcement Delay (sec) Appears only when the ACD and Queue fields both are y and the Vector field is n.
Screen reference Field descriptions for Hunt group for MWI page change hunt-group 4 Page 3 of X HUNT GROUP Message Center: _________ Voicemail Number: _________________ Routing Digits (e.g. AAR/ARS Access Code): ____ LWC Reception: none AUDIX Name: _______ Messaging Server Name: _______ First Announcement Extension: ________ Delay (sec): __ Second Announcement Extension: ________ Delay (sec): __ Recurring? _ Screen 135.
Hunt Group First Announcement Delay (sec) Enter the number of seconds that a call remains in queue before the associated first announcement is given the calling party. The call retains its place in the queue while the caller is listening to the recorded announcement. If the call hasn’t been answered after the announcement, the caller hears music (for first announcement only) if Music-on-Hold is provided or ringing for as long as the call remains in queue.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage qsig-mwi QSIG network allowing AUDIX to be located on another switch fp-mwi Public network allowing AUDIX to be located on another switch; administrable only when the ISDN Feature Plus field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y none Indicates the hunt group does not serve as a message hunt group. Routing Digits (e.g. AAR/ARS Access Code) Appears only if the Message Center field is qsig-mwi or fp-mwi.
Hunt Group Second Announcement Recurring Appears only when the ACD and Queue fields both are y and the Vector field is n. Valid entries Usage y The second announcement can be repeated. blank Leave blank if there is no second announcement. Voicemail Number Appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Basic Call Setup and Basic Supplementary Services fields are y and the Message Center field on this screen is qsig-mwi or fp-mwi.
Screen reference Administered Members (min/max) Appears on all member pages. Indicates the minimum and maximum member number administered for this hunt group. At End of Member List This display-only field shows the current page is also the last page. Group Extension This display-only field shows the extension of the hunt group. Group Number This display-only field shows the number of a hunt group. Group Type This display-only field shows the type of the hunt group.
Intercom Group Name This display-only field shows the name assigned to the above extension number when it is administered in the System. Intercom Group This screen assigns extensions to intercom groups.
Screen reference Ext This field assigns an extension to the group. Valid entries Usage an extension number Enter a physical extension number. You may not enter a VDN in this field. Group Number This display-only field shows the group’s ID number. Length of Dial Code This field sets the number of digits that users must dial to access an extension in the group. (On Page 2, this is a display-only field.) Valid entries Usage 1 Enter 1 if there are 9 or fewer members.
Inter-Exchange Carrier (IXC) Codes Inter-Exchange Carrier (IXC) Codes This screen allows identification of the IXC in the CDR record.
Screen reference IXC Code Format Valid entries Usage 1 to 4 digit code format * x X xxxx For line 1 xxx For line 2 IXC Prefix Valid entries Usage 1 to 3 digit prefix * 101 For line 1 10 For line 2 Intra-Switch CDR This screen administers extensions for which Intra-Switch CDR is to be enabled. NOTE: Attendants are not allowed to be optioned for the Intra-Switch CDR feature.
Intra-Switch CDR Capacities The Intra-Switch CDR extension capacities vary from switch to switch. See the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide.
Screen reference IP Address Mapping NOTE: Enter data in either the To IP Address field or the Subnet Mask field. This screen administers regions and VLANs for a range of station IP addresses. Field descriptions for page 1 change ip-network-map Page 1 of x IP ADDRESS MAPPING From IP Address 255.255.255.0 ___.___.___._ ___.___.___._ ___.___.___._ ___.___.___._ ___.___.___._ ___.___.___._ ___.___.___._ ___.___.___._ ___.___.___._ ___.___.___._ ___.___.___._ ___.___.___._ ___.___.___._ ___.___.___._ ___.
IP Address Mapping To IP Address Defines the termination of the IP address. If this field and the Subnet Mask fields are blank when submitted, the address in the From IP Address field is copied into this field. The Subnet Mask field data is applied to the From field, created the converted To IP Address field information. Valid entries Usage 32-bit address (4 decimal numbers, each in the range 0-255) See the Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information.
Screen reference VLAN Sends VLAN instructions to IP endpoints such as IP telephones and softphones. This field does not send VLAN instructions to the PROCR (S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, and S8700 Multi-Connect), CLAN, and Media Processor boards. Valid entries Usage 0-4094 Specifies the virtual LAN value. n Disabled IP Codec Set The IP Codec Set screen allows you to specify the type of codec used for voice encoding and companding (compression/decompression).
IP Codec Set change ip-codec-set 1 Page 1 of 1 IP Codec Set Codec Set: 1 Audio Silence Codec Suppression 1: G.711MU_______ y 2:_______________ _ 3:_______________ _ 4:_______________ _ 5:_______________ _ Frames Per Pkt 3 _ _ _ _ Packet Size (ms) 30 Screen 142. IP Codec Set screen Audio Codec Specifies the audio codec used for this codec set. Valid entries Usage G.711A (a-law) G.711MU (mu-law) G.723-5.3 G.723-6.3 G.729 G.729A G.729B G.729AB Enter the codec used for this codec set.
Screen reference Silence Suppression Enables RTP-level silence suppression on the audio stream. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to enable RTP-level silence suppression on the audio stream. IP Interfaces Use this screen to assign a network region to each IP interface device. Use one line for each C-LAN, VAL, and IP interface circuit pack.
IP Interfaces Gateway Address Valid entries 0-255 Usage Enter the address of a network node that serves as the default gateway for the IP interface. Entering a value in this field poses a potential security risk. For more information on using a default gateway, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software. Net Rgn Identify the network region for the interface on this row. Valid entries Usage 1-250 Enter the network region number for this interface.
Screen reference Slot Describes the physical port location of the interface on your system. Enter the necessary characters.
IP Network Region VLAN This field sends VLAN instructions to the PROCR (S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, and S8700 Multi-Connect), CLAN, and Media Processor boards. It does not send VLAN instructions to IP endpoints such as IP telephones and softphones. This field cannot be administered for VAL boards. Valid entries Usage 0-4095 Specifies the virtual LAN value. n Disabled IP Network Region Use this screen to pool devices with LAN-like connectivity.
Screen reference Name Description of the region. Valid entries Usage Up to 20 characters Describes the region. Region A display-only field indicating the number of the region being administered. Audio Parameters Codec Set Specifies the codec assigned to the region. Valid entries Usage 1-7 Enter the number for the codec set for the region. Direct IP-IP Audio Connections Allows direct audio connections between IP endpoints.
IP Network Region Location Specifies the location by IP network region allowing correct date and time information and trunk routing based on IP network region. Valid entries Usage 1-44 (For DEFINITY R, CSI, SI only.) Enter the number for the location for the IP network region. The IP endpoint uses this as its location number. This applies to IP telephones and softphones. 1-64 (For Avaya S8300 Media Server, Avaya S8700 Multi-Connect, and Avaya S8700 IP-Connect only.
Screen reference UPD Port Range Min Specifies the minimum range of the UDP port number used for audio transport. Valid entries Usage 2-65534 Enter the lowest UDP port number to be used for audio transport. RTCP Monitor Server Parameters RTCP Report Period (secs) This field only appears when the Use Default Server Parameters field is set to n and the and the RTCP Enabled field is set to y. Valid entries Usage 5-30 Enter the report period for the RTCP Monitor server in seconds.
IP Network Region Use Default Server Parameters This field only appears when the RTCP Enabled field is set to y. Valid entries Usage y Enter y to use the default RTCP Monitor server parameters as defined on the IP Options System Parameters screen. If set to y, you must complete the Default Server IP Address field on the IP Options System Parameters screen. n If you enter n, you need to complete the Server IP Address, Server Port, and RTCP Report Period fields that appear.
Screen reference VoIP Media 802.1p Priority Provides Lay 2 priority for Layer 2 switches. Valid entries Usage 0-7 Specifies the Audio 802.1p priority value. VoIP Media PHB Value Provides scalable service discrimination in the Internet without per-flow state and signaling at every hop. Use the IP TOS field to support the Audio PHB codepoint. Valid entries Usage 0-63 Enter the decimal equivalent of the DiffServ Audio PHB value.
IP Network Region RSVP Refresh Rate (secs) This field only appears if the RSVP Enabled field is set to y. Valid entries Usage 1-99 Enter the RSVP refresh rate in seconds. Page 2 This page displays a matrix where each cell in the matrix represents a network region. If network region x is connected to network region 4, then when change ip-network-region x is run, 4’s cell contains the CODEC set for the connection between the two regions.
Screen reference Region (001-500) This screen does not appear unless the IP Stations, the IP Trunks, or the Remote Office fields on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen are y. Valid entries Usage blank Indicates there is no connectivity between these network regions. 1-7 Indicates the codec set that will be used between these network regions. IP Node Names change node-names ip Page 1 of X IP NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name 1. ______________ ___.___.___.___ 2. ______________ ___.___.___.
IP-Options System Parameters Name Identifies the name of the adjunct or switch node. Valid entries Usage 1-15 alpha-numeric characters Used as a label for the associated IP address. The node names must be unique on each switch.
Screen reference Packet Loss (%) Specifies thresholds to be applied to packet loss rates (as measured by ping) for determining activation/deactivation of signaling group bypass. High Valid entries Usage 0 through 100 This value cannot be less than the minimum value. Default is 40. Low Valid entries Usage 0 through 100 This value cannot be more than the maximum value. Default is 15. Ping Test Interval (sec) Specifies the time between performance test pings for each testable signaling group.
IP-Options System Parameters RTCP MONITOR SERVER Default RTCP Report Period(secs) In conjunction with the IP address and server port, this value tells the IP phones, IP softphones and VoIP media modules how often to send the information (RTCP packets) to the server. Valid entries Usage 5 through 99 Default Server IP Address The default server IP address that can be utilized by the IP Network Region screen for each administered region.
Screen reference Announcement Storage Path Name Indicates the path name on the Announcement Server where the announcements are stored. Valid entries Usage Up to 40 characters or blank Enter the directory path name where announcements are stored. Login Indicates the login to be used by the Media Gateway to access the Announcement Server. Valid entries Usage 1-10 characters or blank Enter a login up to 10 characters.
IP Routing Board Enter the necessary characters.
Screen reference Gateway The node name of the first intermediate node. Valid entries Usage A name previously entered on the Node Names screen and is either a port on the CLAN circuit pack or is identified as a Destination Node on another IP route. If there are one or more intermediate nodes, the first intermediate node is the Gateway. If there are no intermediate nodes between the local and remote CLAN ports for this connection, the Gateway is the local CLAN port.
IP Routing Subnet Mask Valid entries Usage 255, 254, 252, 248, 240, 224, 192, 128, 0 Enter the subnet mask associated with this IP route. If you enter a value in the Network Bits field, the system automatically completes this field with the corresponding Subnet Mask. For example, if you set this field to 255.255.255.0, then the system sets the Network Bits field to 24.
Screen reference Table 16. Network Bits and Subnet Mask fields (Continued) Network Bits Subnet Mask Number of Hosts Network Type 16 255.255.0.0 65,534 / 16 17 255.255.128.0 32,766 / 17 18 255.255.192.0 16,382 / 18 19 255.255.224.0 8,190 / 19 20 255.255.240.0 4,094 / 20 21 255.255.248.0 2,046 / 21 22 255.255.252.0 1,022 / 22 23 255.255.254.0 510 / 23 24 255.255.255.0 254 / 24 25 255.255.255.128 126 / 25 26 255.255.255.192 62 / 26 27 255.255.255.
IP Routing IP Services change ip-services Service Type DLG________ DLG________ DLG________ DLG________ DLG________ DLG________ DLG________ DLG________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ Enabled y y y y y y y y _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Page 1 of X IP SERVICES Local Local Remote Remote Node Port Node Port clan10 5678 ___________________ _____ clan2 5678 ___________________ _____ clan3 5678 ___________________ _____ clan4 5678 ______________
Screen reference Local Node Specify the node name for the port. When the Service Type field is DLG, there can be only one entry on this screen with a Service Type field of DLG and the same Local Node. Valid entries Usage Node names as defined on the Node Names screen. If the link is administered for services over the C-LAN circuit pack, enter a node name defined on the Node Name screen.
IP Routing Remote Port Specify the port number of the destination. When the Service Type field is DLG, this field is cleared and read-only. Valid entries Usage 5000 to 64500 Use if this service is a client application, such as CDR or PMS. This must match the port administered on the adjunct, PC or terminal server that is at the remote end of this connection. 0 Default for System Management applications. Service Type Defines the service provided.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage PMS_LOG Use this to connect the PMS log printer over a TCP/IP link. SAT System administration terminal. Not available on S8100 Media Server with a CMC1. SYS_PRINT Use this to connect the system printer over a TCP/IP link. IP Services screen (Session Layer Timers page) Use this screen to enable reliable protocol for TCP/IP links, and to establish other session-layer parameters.
IP Routing Reliable Protocol Indicates whether you want to use reliable protocol over this link. Valid entries Usage y/n Use reliable protocol if the adjunct on the far end of the link supports it. Service Type A display-only field that identifies the service type for which you are establishing parameters. Valid entries Usage CDR1, CDR2 Used to connect either the primary or secondary CDR device over a TCP/IP link. PMS_JOURNAL Used to connect the PMS journal printer over a TCP/IP link.
Screen reference ISDN trunk group This screen assigns an Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) trunk group that supports the ISDN and Call-by-Call Service Selection service selection features. The trunk group provides end-to-end digital connectivity and supports a wide range of services including voice and non-voice services, to which users have access by a limited set of CCITT-defined, standard multipurpose interfaces. The ISDN trunk group may contain ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI interfaces.
ISDN trunk group ■ The D-channel for ISDN-PRI interfaces switches through either the TN765 Processor Interface (PI) circuit pack or the TN778 Packet Control (PACCON) circuit pack. The D-channel for ISDN-BRI interfaces only switches through the TN778 Packet Control (PACCON) circuit pack. NOTE: You cannot use the TN765 circuit pack with ISDN-BRI interfaces. ■ For DEFINITY R configurations, the D-channel switches through the TN1655 Packet Interface (PKTINT) circuit pack.
Screen reference Screen Field Processor Channel Assignment for DEFINITY SI All Interface Links All Trunk Group (ISDN) All ISDN Numbering Public/Unknown All ISDN Numbering - Private All Route Pattern All Hunt Groups ISDN Caller Display Terminating Extension Group ISDN Caller Display Continued on next page The table below shows the screens used to administer the TN778 Packet Control (PACCON) for an DEFINITY SI configurations.
ISDN trunk group Screen Field ISDN-BRI Circuit Pack Screen (if using ISDN-BRI interfaces) or All DS1 Circuit Pack Screen (if using ISDN-PRI interfaces) All Route Pattern All Hunt Groups ISDN Caller Display Signaling Group (if using ISDN-PRI interfaces) All Terminating Extension Group ISDN Caller Display Continued on next page The table below shows the screens used to administer the TN778 Packet Control (PACCON) for DEFINITY R, S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, and S8700 Multi-Connect.
Screen reference Screen Field ISDN Numbering - Private All Route Pattern All Hunt Groups ISDN Caller Display Signaling Group (if using ISDN-PRI interfaces) All Terminating Extension Group ISDN Caller Display Continued on next page Notes for Above Tables ■ System-Parameters Customer-Options — Set the ISDN-BRI Trunks or ISDN-PRI fields to y. For a TN778 and if using ISDN-PRI interfaces, set the PRI Over PACCON field to y.
ISDN trunk group ■ ISDN Trunk Group — Enter information in all the fields except the trunk group members. When using ISDN-PRI interfaces, enter the members after you establish the signaling links. ■ Signaling Group — This screen is required if ISDN-PRI interfaces are used. Complete all fields.
Screen reference ■ ISDN Numbering - Public/Unknown — Complete all fields. This screen supports the ISDN Call Identification Display. ■ ISDN Numbering - Private — Complete all fields. This screen supports the ISDN Call Identification Display. ■ Routing Pattern — Complete all fields including the Supplemental ISDN Routing Information fields as required.
ISDN trunk group Field descriptions for page 1 Many of the fields on the following screens are described in ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233. If a field on this screen is unique, it is listed and defined.
Screen reference Calling Number – Numbering Format This field indicates the TON/NPI encoding applied to CPN information modified by the CLI Prefix feature. This encoding does not apply to calls originating locally. The Numbering Format field on page 2 of this screen applies to calls originated from this switch. If this field is blank, Avaya MultiVantage passes on the encoding received in the incoming setup message.
ISDN trunk group Carrier Medium This field lets you to specify the type of transport medium interface used for the ISDN trunk group. Appears only when the Group Type field is isdn and, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, either the Async. Transfer Mode (ATM) Trunking or H.323 field is y. Valid entries ATM IP PRI/BRI Usage The trunk is implemented via the ATM Interface circuit pack. The trunk is implemented via the LAN/WAN (C-LAN)/MedPro Interface circuit pack as an H.323 trunk group.
Screen reference Codeset to Send National IEs This field defines the codeset for sending the information element (IE) for national IEs. National IEs include all IEs previously sent only in code set 6 (such as DCS IE). Now these national IEs, including Traveling Class Marks (TCMs) and Lookahead Interflow (LAI), can be sent in code set 6 or 7. The value depends on the type of switch the user is connected to. Valid entries Usage 6 Other types.
ISDN trunk group Far End Test Line No. Specifies the number sent to the far-end’s ISDN test line extension. When the test trunk long command is issued, this exact number is sent to the far-end to establish a call that tests the integrity of the trunk member under test. The number does not pass through routing or undergo digit manipulation. The digits entered must be what the far-end expects.
Screen reference Service Type Indicates the service for which this trunk group is dedicated. The following table provides a listing of predefined entries. In addition to the Services/Features listed in this table, any user-defined Facility Type of 0 (feature) or 1 (service) on the Network Facilities screen is allowed. Up to 10 (DEFINITY SI, CSI) or 200 (DEFINITY R) ISDN trunk groups can have this field administered as cbc.
ISDN trunk group Valid entries Usage outwats-bnd OUTWATS Band — WATS is a voice-grade service providing both voice and low speed data transmission capabilities from the user location to defined service areas referred to as bands; the widest band is 5. public-ntwrk Public network calls — It is the equivalent of CO (outgoing), DID, or DIOD trunk groups. If Service Type is public-ntwrk, Dial Access can be set to y.
Screen reference Supplementary Service Protocol Indicates which supplementary service protocol to use for services over this trunk group. Supplementary Service protocols are mutually exclusive.
ISDN trunk group Testcall ITC Controls the encoding of the Information Transfer Capability (ITC) codepoint of the bearer capability Information Element (IE) in the SETUP message when generating an ISDN test call. Allowed values are rest (restricted) and unre (unrestricted). NOTE: ISDN Testcall feature has no routing, so a testcall is never blocked due to an incompatible ITC. Testcall Service Specifies the call-by-call selection for an ISDN test call. Only appears if the Service Type field is cbc.
Screen reference Usage Alloc Appears when the Service Type field is cbc. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allocate service provided by the trunk group. Use y to enhance Network Call Redirection. When you enter y, the CBC Trunk Group Usage Allocation Plans screen and the CBC Trunk Group Usage Allocation Plan Assignment Schedule appear.
ISDN trunk group add trunk-group next Page 2 of x TRUNK FEATURES ACA Assignment? n Measured: none____ Wideband Support? n Long Holding Time(hours: _ Internal Alert? _ Maintenance Tests? y Short Holding Time (sec): _ Data Restriction? n NCA-TSC Trunk Member: 7 Short Holding Threshold: __ Send Name: n Send Calling Number: n Used for DCS? n Hop Dgt: _ Send Connected Number: n Suppress # Outpulsing? n Numbering Format: ______ DCS Signaling: ____ Outgoing Channel ID Encoding: _________ Charge Conversion: 1____
Screen reference DCS Signaling Specifies the means used to send the DCS message. This field only appears if the Used for DCS field entry is y and the Service Type field is anything except dmi-mos or sddn. Valid entries Usage bx.25 Enter for the traditional DCS feature. d-chan Enter for the DCS over ISDN-PRI D-channel feature. DCS over D-channel is not supported on trunk groups containing ISDN-BRI interfaces.
ISDN trunk group Maximum Size of UUI IE Contents This field appears when the UUI IE Treatment field is shared. Enter the maximum number of bytes of user information that the network supports. Valid entries Usage 32-128 NCA-TSC Trunk Member Identifies the trunk member whose D-channel will be used to route tandem NCA-TSCs or QSIG CISCs. Value range for this field is from 1 to the maximum number of members per trunk group supported on the switch or blank.
Screen reference If the Group Type field is not isdn or it is isdn, but the Used for DCS field does not appear, default is preferred. Path Replacement Method Appears when either the ISDN-PRI trunk or the ISDN-BRI trunk fields and the Basic Call Setup and Supplementary Services with Rerouting fields are set to y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen and when the Supplementary Service Protocol is either b or e and the Group Type field is isdn on the ISDN trunk group screen.
ISDN trunk group If set to y, the ISDN Numbering - Public/Unknown Format screen is accessed to construct the actual number sent, or the ISDN Numbering-Private screen (based on Numbering Format) is used. If set to r, the connected number is sent “presentation restricted.” Send Calling Number Specifies whether the calling party’s number is sent on outgoing or tandemed ISDN calls. Valid entries are y, n, or r (restricted).
Screen reference Network Call Redirection Administrable if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y, the ISDN Network Call Redirection field is y, and on the ISDN Trunk Group screen, the Supplementary Service Protocol field is c or g. Whenever the Supplementary Service Protocol field is changed, this field resets to none to prevent an inadvertent incorrect value, Valid entries Usage ANSI-transfer Indicates standard ANSI encoding functionality.
ISDN trunk group US NI Delayed Calling Name Update Administrable if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ISDN-PRI field is y, and on the Trunk Group screen, the Carrier Medium field is either PRI/BRI or ATM, and the Supplementary Service Protocol field is a.
Screen reference Field descriptions for the Shared UUI Feature Priorities page The fields in this page show the priorities for each type of information to be forwarded in the Shared UUI. This page appears only on the ISDN trunk group screen when all of the following conditions are met: ■ The UUI IE Treatment field is shared. ■ The Supplementary Service Protocol field is set to anything except b.
ISDN trunk group Other LAI Information Includes the time stamp of when the call entered the current queue, the call’s priority level in its current queue, and the type of interflow. Valid entries are 1 to 6 (1 is high) and blank. If blank, that field’s information is not forwarded. Universal Call ID Unique tag to identify each call. Valid entries are 1 to 6 (1 is high) and blank. If blank, that field’s information is not forwarded. VDN Name Name of the active VDN (also called LAI DNIS).
Screen reference The Incoming Call Handling Treatment page can (optionally) provide unique call treatment for different incoming calls on any ISDN trunk group. The number of unique treatments that can be specified in this table and the number of pages vary depending on whether the Usage Allocation Enhancements feature is enabled and on the amount of available system memory.
ISDN trunk group The Incoming Call Handling Treatment Table always automatically rearranges to show the precedence order the system uses to pick an entry. Thus, you can easily predict the behavior of the Incoming Call Handling Treatment Table by noting the order in which the entries display. (The entries rearrange after submitting the trunk group screen. A subsequent change trunk-group or display trunk-group command then shows the rearranged order.
Screen reference Called Number Specifies the leading digits received for an incoming call. A blank entry is used as a “wild card” entry and, when used, means that any number associated with the specified Service/Feature can match in this field. Valid entries are up to 16 digits, or leave blank. Del Specifies the number of leading digits to be deleted from the incoming Called Party Number.
ISDN trunk group Night Serv Specifies a night service extension (can be a VDN extension) per Service/Feature. An entry other than blank overrides Night Service entry on page 1 of the screen. This entry can be overridden by the Trunk/Member Night Service entry when provided. Valid entries are an assigned extension, the attendant group access code (attd), or leave blank. Service/Feature Specifies the ISDN Services/Features for an incoming call type.
Screen reference Max# Chan Indicates the maximum number of members of a ISDN trunk group with a Service Type field of cbc that a particular Service/Feature can use at any given time. This field must be completed if a Service/Feature has been entered in the Incoming Call Handling Treatment Table screen. Valid values are 0 to 99 or blank. Min# Chan Indicates the minimum number of members of an ISDN trunk group with a Service Type field of cbc that a particular Service/Feature can use at any given time.
ISDN trunk group The CBC Service Trunk Group Allocation Plan Assignment Schedule screen provides for administering a fixed schedule or administering a schedule that can change up to 6 times a day for each day of the week. This screen determines which CBC Service Trunk Group Allocation Plan will be in use at any given time. Act Time Indicates the time the usage allocation plan administered in the next field (Plan #) will become effective. Enter the time in military time.
Screen reference Field descriptions for the Wideband Support Options page add trunk-group next Page y of x Wideband Support Options H0? H11? H12? NxDS0? n n n y Contiguous? n Screen 158. Wideband Support Options The Wideband Support Options screen appears immediately before the trunk group member pages. The actual page number will vary. NOTE: All B-channels that comprise the wideband call must reside on the same ISDN-PRI facility.
ISDN trunk group Contiguous Specifies whether or not to hunt contiguous NXDS0 channels. This field only appears if the NxDS0 field is y. The trunk/hunt algorithm to satisfy an NXDS0 call is as follows: — Enter y to specify the “floating” scheme. NXDS0 calls are placed on a contiguous group of B-channels large enough to satisfy the requested bandwidth without constraint on the starting channel (no fixed starting point trunk). NOTE: H0 and NXDS0 “floating” scheme cannot both be y.
Screen reference The total number of pages, and the first page of Group Member Assignments, will vary depending on whether the CBC and Wideband Support pages display. NOTE: When supporting DCS, Member Number Assignments must be the same between nodes (Member #1 must be Member #1 at the far-end trunk group). Port When using ISDN-BRI interfaces, B-channel 1 is the port number while B channel 2 is the port number plus 16.
ISDN Numbering — Private change isdn private-numbering Page 1 of 1 ISDN NUMBERING - PRIVATE FORMAT Network Level: _ Level 2 Code: _____ Level 1 Code: _____ PBX Identifier: ____ Deleted Digits: _ Screen 160. ISDN Number — Private Format Deleted Digits In some networks, the leading digits of the number you dial internally to reach any extension are not part of its longer private network number. For example, extension 35581 might have a private network number of 221-5581.
Screen reference Level 2 Code Enter the switch’s second level regional code in the network. Administer this field carefully. The system will not check to ensure you have entered a code that supports your entry in the Network Level field. You cannot enter anything in this field unless the Network Level field is set to 2. Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Enter up to 5 digits. blank Because blank regional codes are valid, an entry is not required if the Network Level field is 2.
ISDN Numbering — Public/ Unknown PBX Identifier Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 or blank Enter up to 5 digits. Digits entered in this field are added to the beginning of local extensions. The PBX identifier is added first, before Level 1 or Level 2 codes. For example, in private networks with a 7-digit numbering plan, the first 3 digits of the private-network number are often considered the PBX identifier. NOTE: The PBX identifier does not depend on the network level.
Screen reference change isdn public-unknown-numbering ISDN NUMBERING - PUBLIC/UNKNOWN FORMAT Ext Ext Len Code 5 7 Trk Grp(s) 4 3646180 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ CPN Prefix Total CPN Ext Ext Len Len Code 73283__________ 10 210 __________ 10 __________ __________ __________ ___________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ Trk Grp(s) Page 1 of 8 Total CPN Len CPN Prefix __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ _________
ISDN Numbering — Public/ Unknown Ext Code Allows for groups of extensions to be administered. NOTE: When 0 alone is entered, the Ext Len field must be 1 and the DDD number must be 10-digits. Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 or The Ext Code can be up to 7-digits long depending on the Ext Len field entry. The entry cannot be greater than the Ext Len field entry.
Screen reference ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack This screen administers an ISDN-BRI circuit pack. See Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for information on the maximum number of ISDN-BRI circuit packs that you can administer. change bri-trunk-board Page 1 of 1 ISDN-BRI TRUNK CIRCUIT PACK Location: 01A09 Interface Companding: a-law_ T3 Timer Length (sec): 15_ Port 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7.
ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack DCP/Analog Bearer Capability Valid entries Usage 3.1kHz Indicates how to encode the Bearer Capability IE for an outgoing call originated by a DCP or analog endpoint. speech Detect Slips Valid entries Usage y/n Tells maintenance software whether slips reported by the BRI port should be logged. Valid entries Usage network Tells call processing software whether a particular port is connected to a user/network or a peer interface. These entries are valid for the TN2185.
Screen reference Location This is a display-only field. It shows the TN2185 circuit pack location (PPCSS) Name Valid entries Usage 1–15 alpha-numeri c characters This name is used to identify the circuit pack. Port This is a display-only field. It shows the port number to which parameters administered on the row apply. Side Valid entries Usage a Determines how glare conditions are handled when Interface field is peer-slave.
ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack Time Fill The bit pattern sent on the D-channel between valid LAPD packets. Valid entries Usage flags ones Field descriptions for page 1 change bri-trunk-board Page 1 of 1 ISDN-BRI TRUNK CIRCUIT PACK Location: 01A09 Interface Companding: a-law_ Port 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7.
Screen reference Cntry/Peer Protocol Tells call processing software which ISDN protocol standard is applied. Valid entries Usage 1 to 25 When this field is 10, 12, or 13, the Protocol Version field is equivalent to b on the DS1 circuit pack screen. etsi When this field is etsi, the Protocol Version field is equivalent to b on the DS1 circuit pack screen. QSIG When the Interface field is peer-master, this field must be QSIG.
ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack Field descriptions for page 2 NOTE: If administering a TN2185 circuit pack, 8 ports appear; otherwise, 12 ports appear. change bri-trunk-board Page 2 of 2 ISDN-BRI TRUNK CIRCUIT PACK Port 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7.
Screen reference NOTE: You cannot change the Endpt Init, SPID, or Endpt ID port parameters unless that port is busied out or unadministered. It is possible to change all other fields on this page even if the corresponding port is active. NOTE: If the Interface field on page 1 contains a valid value when the screen is submitted, the contents of the fields on page 2 for that port are validated.
ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack Endpt Init Indicates whether the far end supports endpoint initialization. Avaya MultiVantage blocks you from changing this field unless the port is busied out or unadministered. Valid entries Usage y If set to y, the SPID field must not be blank. Avaya MultiVantage blocks you from changing this field and the SPID field unless that port is busied out or unadministered. If set to n, the SPID and Endpt ID fields must be blank.
Screen reference SPID A 12-digit field containing the SPID expected by the far end. Avaya MultiVantage blocks you from changing this field unless the port is busied out or unadministered. The only protocol supported for SPID initialization is Bellcore (Country Code 1). Trunks will not be put in service if SPID installation is not successful.
Language Translations Interactions The add bri-trunk board PPCSS command is rejected if PPCSS identifies a TN556B circuit pack, and a port on that circuit pack has already been assigned to a station or data-module. If a TN556B circuit pack has been administered as a BRI trunk circuit pack, any port on that circuit pack is prevented from being assigned to a station or data-module.
Screen reference change display-messages ad-programming LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Page 1 of 1 Translation Press button to program. 1. **************************************** Change program? 2. *********************** Yes = 1 No = 2 3. **************** Enter number: 4. **************************************** Press # to save. 5. **************** Number saved. 6. **************************************** Change label? 7. *********************** Enter label: 8.
Language Translations change display-messages auto-wakeup-dn-dst LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 7. English: DO NOT DIST - Ext: Translation: ********************: 8. English: DO NOT DIST - Group: Translation: ***********************: 9. English: DO NOT DIST ENTRY DENIED Translation: ************************ Page 10. English: THANK YOU - DO NOT DIST ENTRY CONFIRMED Translation: **************************************** 11.
Screen reference change display-messages button-labels LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Abr Mark Abr Pause Abr Program Abr Spec Char Abr Stop Abr Suppress AbRing Abr Wait Account AD AddBusyInd AdmConnAlarm AfterCall Alert Agent Page 1 of 10 Translation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Language Translations change display-messages button-labels LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Button Ring Button View Caller Info CFrwd Call Park Call Pickup Call Time CAS Backup Cancel LWC CDR1 Fail CDR2 Fail CFBDA Check In Check Out Page 3 of 10 Translation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Screen reference change display-messages button-labels LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Directory Dir Pickup Disp Charges DoNotDisturb Exclusion ExtDoNotDstrb Far End Mute Flash FTC Alarm Goto Cover GrpPg GrpDoNotDstrb Hunt NS InCalID Page 5 of 10 Translation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Language Translations change display-messages button-labels LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. MM Basic MM Call MM Call Fwd MM Data Conf MM Mult Nbr MM PC Audio Msg Msg Retrieve MsgW MsgWaitAct MsgWaitDeact MST Debug Next Night Service Page 7 of 10 Translation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Screen reference change display-messages button-labels LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. SendAllCalls Send TEG Service Obsrv Sgnl SSVN Halt Start Bill Station Lock Stored Number Store LWC Stroke Count System Alarm TermGroup Time/Date Timer Page 9 of 10 Translation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Language Translations change display-messages call identifiers LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English Term 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Screen reference change display-messages call identifiers LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English Term 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45.
Language Translations change display-messages date-time LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English Translation 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: *********** *********** *********** *********** *********** *********** *********** *********** *********** *********** Page English 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 1 of 1 Translation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Screen reference change display-messages leave-word-calling LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 7. English: NO MESSAGES Translation: **************************************** 8. English: IN PROGRESS Translation: **************************************** 9. English: DELETED Translation: **************************************** 10. English: GET DIAL TONE, PUSH Cover Msg Retrieval Translation: **************************************** 11.
Language Translations change display-messages mailcious-call-trace LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS Page 6. English: party : Translation: ******** : (EXTENSION) *********************** 7. English: party : Translation: ******** : (ISDN SID/CNI) **************** 8. English: party : Translation: ******** : (PORT ID) ******************* 9. English: party : Translation: ******** : (ISDN PORT ID) ******************* 2 of 2 Screen 188.
Screen reference change display-messages miscellaneous-features LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English Meaning of English term Term 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.
Language Translations change display-messages miscellaneous-features Page 4 of 8 LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 36. English: NO MATCH - TRY AGAIN Translation: **************************************** 37. English: NO NUMBER STORED Translation: **************************************** 38. English: TRY AGAIN Translation: **************************************** 39. English: Ext Translation: *** 40. English: HUNT GROUP Translation: **************** 41.
Screen reference change display-messages miscellaneous-features LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. English: Translation: English: Translation: English: Translation: English: Translation: English: Translation: English: Translation: Page 6 of 8 Station Security Code Violation *************************************** ENTER REASON CODE *************************************** Whisper From ******************** Whisper To ******************** Press button to remove.
Language Translations change display-messages property-management LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS Page 1. English: CHECK IN - Ext: Translation: *********************************: 2. English: CHECK-IN: ROOM ALREADY OCCUPIED Translation: **************************************** 3. English: CHECK IN COMPLETE Translation: **************************************** 4. English: CHECK IN FAILED Translation: **************************************** 5.
Screen reference change display-messages property-management LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 13. English: MESSAGE LAMP ON Translation: **************************************** 14. English: Translation: English: Translation: English: Translation: English: Translation: English: Translation: 15. 16. 17. 18.
Language Translations change display-messages property-management 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.
Screen reference change display-messages self-administration Page 1 of 3 LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Translation SECURITY CODE: INCORRECT SECURITY CODE SELECT FEATURE EXTENSION: OPTIONAL EXTENSION: TEL NUM: PRESS BUTTON TO PROGRAM BUTTON PROGRAMMED! INCORRECT BUTTON BUTTON LIMIT REACHED BUSY, TRY AGAIN LATER YOUR PHONE IS BUSY SECURITY CODE NEEDED BUTTON NOT CHANGED 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Language Translations change display-messages self-administration Page 3 of 3 LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Translation Whisper Page Off 1. ***** Blank Button 2. ***** Done 3. ***** Cont 4. ********** Expl? 5. ***** ShortMode? 6. ***** Next 7. ***** Selct 8. ***** Clear 9. ***** Cancel 10. ********** Delete 11. ***** Replace 12. ***** Bksp 13. ***** Screen 204.
Screen reference change display-messages view-buttons LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English Translation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Language Translations change display-messages view-buttons LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English Translation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Screen reference change display-messages view-buttons LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English Translation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Language Translations change display-messages view-buttons LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English Translation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Screen reference change display-messages vustats Page 1 of 1 LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English Translation 1. FORMAT 1. ******* 2. 3. NOT DEFINED DOES NOT ALLOW OR REQUIRE ID 2. ***************************** 3. ***************************** 4. 5. 6. 7. AGENT SPLIT/SKILL TRUNK GROUP VDN 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. NOT ADMINISTERED 9. NOT MEASURED ************ ************ ************ ************ 8. ***************** 9. ***************** 10. AGENT NOT LOGGED IN 10.
Language Translations change display-messages time-of-day-routing LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS Page 1. English: ENTER ACTIVATION ROUTE PLAN, DAY & TIME Translation: **************************************** 2. English: ENTER DEACTIVATION DAY AND TIME Translation: **************************************** 3. English: OLD ROUTE PLAN: Translation: *****************: ENTER NEW PLAN: *****************: 4. English: OLD ROUTE PLAN: Translation: *****************: NEW PLAN: **************: 5.
Screen reference Message 4 The character “^ “is a place holder. English Text Replacement Info ^-party conference in progress “^” is replaced with the number of parties currently on the conference call. Message 6 The character “^ “is a place holder. English Text Replacement Info Select line ^ to cancel or another line. “ ^ ” is replaced with the letter of the line that is on soft hold. change display-messages transfer-conference LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS Page 2 of 4 7. English: Dial number.
Language Translations change display-messages transfer-conference LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS Page 3 of 4 13. English: Select alerting line to answer call. Translation: **************************************** 14. English: Transfer canceled. Translation: **************************************** 15. English: Connecting to ^. Translation: **************************************** 16. English: Called party ^is busy. Translation: **************************************** 17.
Screen reference Message 12 The character “^ “is a place holder. English Text Replacement Info Select line ^ to add party. “ ^ ” is replaced with the letter of the line that is on soft hold. change display-messages vustats LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS Page 1 of English Translations 1. 2. 3. FORMAT NOT DEFINED DOES NOT ALLOW OR REQUIRE ID 1. 2. 3. ******* ******* ******* 4. 5. 6. 7. AGENT SPLIT/SKILL TRUNK GROUP VND 4. 5. 6. 7.
Listed Directory Numbers Listed Directory Numbers Allows Direct Inward Dialing (DID) numbers to be treated as public Listed Directory Numbers (LDNs). When one of these numbers is direct inward dialed, the calling party is routed to the attendant. The attendant display indicates a Listed Directory Number call and the name associated with the dialed extension. The number of Listed Directory Numbers that can be assigned varies depending on system configuration.
Screen reference Night Destination Enter the valid assigned extension number that will receive calls to these numbers when Night Service is active. Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 (1 to 8 digits) For DEFINITY CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect. Enter a night service extension, a recorded announcement extension, a Vector Directory Number, an individual attendant extension, or a hunt group extension. Valid entries Usage 1 to 100 Enter the Tenant Partition number.
List Usage Report for ip-address list usage node-name inde-e72 LIST USAGE REPORT Used By Processor Channel TFTP Server Channel Number 4 Destination Node Server Node Name Screen 224. List Usage Report for server node name The node name, inde-e72, displays as Server Node Name if it was defined as the server node name on the TFTP Server screen. Server Node Name Displays when the node name is used on the TFTP Server screen as the TFTP server node name.
Screen reference Local Node Name Displays when the IP address is used on the TFTP Server screen as the local node. TFTP Server Displays when the IP address is used on the TFTP Server screen as the local or server node name. list usage ip-address 135.9.76.72 LIST USAGE REPORT Used By IP Route Node Name Processor Channel IP Service TFTP Server Route Number IP Name Channel Number Service Type 2 inde-372 4 SAT Destination Node IP Address Destination Node Local Node Server Node Name Screen 226.
Locations change locations Page 1 of 3 LOCATIONS ARS Prefix 1 Required for 10-Digit NANP Calls? _ Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Name Timezone Offset Daylight-Savings Rule Number Plan Area Code ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ _ _ _
Screen reference Number Displays the location number (1 to 44). Corresponding entries in each row define the numbering plan and daylight savings rule for each location number. Number Plan Area Code Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Enter the 3-digit numbering plan area code for each location. Timezone Offest Timezone offset is actually 3 fields (+/-, hour, and minute) that specify how much time each location differs from the system time. This field must be completed for each administered location.
Login Administration Field descriptions for page 1 add login Page 1 of 2 LOGIN ADMINISTRATION Password of Login Making Change: LOGIN BEING ADMINISTERED Login’s Name:xxxxxxx Login Type: Service Level: Disable Following a Security Violation? Access to INADS Port? _ LOGIN’S PASSWORD INFORMATION Login’s Password: Reenter Login’s Password: Password Aging Cycle Length (Days): LOGOFF NOTIFICATION Facility Test Call Notification? Remote Access Notification? Acknowledgment Required? Acknowledgment Required? AC
Screen reference Disable Following a Security Violation This field only appears when the SVN Login Violation Notification field is set to y on the Security-Related System-Parameters screen. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to have the login disabled following a security violation. Login’s Name This display-only field shows the login name specified with the add command. Login Type Valid entries Usage Customer Enter customer to indicate the login belongs to a customer.
Login Administration Password Aging Cycle Length (Days) For security, you should assign password aging to all passwords. The system tracks a password from the day the login was created, or the day the user last changed the password. Valid entries Usage 1 through 99 Enter the number of days the password remains valid. Re-enter Login’s Password Passwords do not display as you type. Valid entries Usage A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and ! & * ? ; ’ ^ () , .
Screen reference Remote Access Notification — Acknowledgment Required Valid entries y/n Usage Enter y to require the user to acknowledge they want to logoff while remote access is still administered. ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY Access Security Gateway This field appears only if the Access Security Gateway (ASG) field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is set to y. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to have ASG administered for the login ID.
Login Administration Blocked Setting the Blocked field to y does not remove the login ID from the system. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to temporarily disable the login ID from accessing the system through the ASG interface. Expiration Date Expiration of the login ID occurs at 23:59:59 of the entered date. This field consists of three fields separated by forward slashes (for example, 01/01/1999). Expiration of a login ID does not remove the login ID from the system.
Screen reference Restrict From Time and Restrict to Time These two fields are separated by colons, for example, hh:mm where hh = hour and mm = minute. Periods that span an interval that crosses a day boundary are specified by setting the Restrict From Time field greater than the Restrict To Time field. For example, a Restriction From Time of 17:00 and a Restrict To Time of 08:00 limits access to the traditional working hours, 8 to 5.
Loudspeaker Paging Loudspeaker Paging The Loudspeaker Paging screen administers voice paging, deluxe voice paging, and chime paging.
Screen reference Code Calling Playing Cycles This field sets the number of times a chime code will play when a user makes a chime page. To determine the best setting, consider who your code calling users are and whether they are likely to hear the code chime the first time. Valid entries Usage 1 to 3 Enter the number of times you want the chime code to play when a user makes a page. blank The field may not be blank when you administer chime paging (code calling).
Loudspeaker Paging Location Valid entries Usage 1 to 27 characters Assign a descriptive name for the physical location corresponding to each zone. Typical entries might be “conference room A,” “warehouse,” or “storeroom.” Port This field assigns a port on an auxiliary trunk circuit pack to a paging zone. Enter the necessary characters.
Screen reference Voice Paging — COR This field assigns a Class of Restriction to a paging zone. Valid entries Usage 0 through 95. You can assign different classes of restriction to different zones. blank Leave this field blank for unused paging zones. Voice Paging — TAC This field assigns a Trunk Access Code (TAC) to a paging zone. Users dial this code to make a page to a specific zone. One TAC must be assigned to each zone you want to use. Two zones cannot have the same TAC.
Media-Gateway Voice Paging — TN Valid entries Usage 1 to 20 If your system uses Tenant Partitioning, you may use this field to assign a paging zone to a specific tenant partition. (DEFINITY SI, CSI) 1 to 100 (DEFINITY R, S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Related topics See ‘‘Setting up voice paging over loudspeakers’’ on page 473 or ‘‘Setting up chime paging over loudspeakers’’ on page 476 for instructions.
Screen reference Identifier This field is for the controller to identify the gateway. Valid entries Usage 1 to 20 characters or blank Enter the serial number or other alpha-numeric characters for identification. IP Address A display-only field containing the IP address of the media gateway. This field displays a blank until the media gateway registers for the first time. Location This field refers to a time-zone offset, daylight savings rule and number plan area code.
Media-Gateway Field V9 lists a “virtual” media modules (available in December). Valid entries Usage gateway-announcements Announcement will be administered in this slot. or blank Name This field is for customer naming of the gateway. Valid entries Usage 1- to 20-alphanumeric character string or blank Enter the alpha-numeric characters for identification. Network Region This field is used by the communications controller to allocate resources from the nearest media gateway.
Screen reference Site Data This field is for general site information. Valid entries Usage 2 lines of 20 characters or blank Enter the alpha-numeric characters for identification. Meet-me Vector Directory Numbers Field descriptions for page 1 list meet-me-vdn MEET-ME VECTOR DIRECTORY NUMBER Name Ext Access Code COR Secure Meet-me Conference 4000 Nonsecure Meet-me Conference 4006 * 1 1 TN 1 1 Vec Control Num Ext 1 2 84590 Screen 232.
Mode Code Related System Parameters Field descriptions for page 1 change system-parameters mode-code Page 1 MODE CODE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS MODE CODES (FROM SWITCH TO Direct Inside Access: Direct Dial Access - Trunk: Internal Coverage: External Coverage: VMS) __ __ __ __ Refresh MW Lamp: __ System In Day Service: __ System In Night Service: __ OTHER RELATED PARAMETERS DTMF Duration On (msec): __ Off (msec): __ Sending Delay (msec):__ VMS Hunt Group Extension : ____ Remote VMS Extensions - First:
Screen reference External Coverage This value defines a mode code that the switch sends when an external caller tries to reach a user at another extension and the call goes to the user’s voice mail coverage. Valid entries Usage 0 to 9, #, *, #00 Up to six digits that may include these characters Internal Coverage This value defines a mode code that the switch sends when an internal caller tries to reach a user at another extension and the call goes to the user’s voice mail coverage.
Mode Code Related System Parameters OTHER RELATED PARAMETERS DTMF Duration On Valid entries Usage Between 75 and 500 in multiples of 25 Define in milliseconds the length of mode code digits sent to the VMS. This field cannot be blank Off Valid entries Usage Between 75 and 200 in multiples of 25 Define in milliseconds the pause between mode code digits as they are sent to the VMS. This field cannot be blank.
Screen reference VMS Hunt Group Extension A check is made to verify that a valid hunt group extension is entered, but a check is not made to verify that the hunt group members are VMI extensions. Valid entries Usage Extension of a hunt group containing VMI extensions. Modem Pool Group There are two types of conversion resources for Modem Pooling. The first type, an integrated conversion resource, is a circuit pack that emulates a Trunk Data Module connected to a 212A-type modem.
Modem Pool Group change modem-pool num Page 1 of 1 Group Number: Modem Name: Time Delay: Answer Supervision Timeout(sec): Speed: LOW/300/1200___ PORT PAIR ASSIGNMENTS Analog Digital 1: _____ _____ 2: _____ _____ 3: _____ _____ 4: _____ _____ 5: _____ _____ 6: _____ _____ 7: _____ _____ 8: _____ _____ 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: Analog _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ MODEM POOL GROUP _ Group Type: combined ______ Hold Time (min): 5_ 0_ Direction: two-way _ Duplex: full Digital _____
Screen reference CF-CB Common This field appears only when the Group Type field is integrated. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to indicate that the CF and CB leads on the conversion resource are logically connected. Direction Enter the direction of the call for which modem pool will operate. This field appears only when the Group Type field is combined. Valid entries Usage incoming Converts an analog signal to digital for the data endpoint.
Modem Pool Group Hold Time (min) Enter the maximum number of minutes that a conversion resource in the group may be held while a call waits in a queue or reserved after Data Call Preindication. Valid entries Usage 1 through 99 Loss of Carrier Disconnect This field appears only when the Group Type field is integrated. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to permit conversion resource to disconnect if it detects a dropped carrier. Modem Name Indicates the name of the modem pool.
Screen reference Send Space Disconnect This field appears only when the Group Type field is integrated. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow the conversion resource to send 4 seconds of space before disconnecting. Speed Display-only when the Group Type field is integrated. When the Group Type field is combined, enter the communication speed in bits per second of the conversion resources in the group.
Modem Pool Group Time Delay Enter the time delay in seconds to insert between sending the ringing to the modem and the off-hook alert to the data module. This field appears only when the Group Type field is combined. Valid entries Usage 0 through 255 CIRCUIT PACK ASSIGNMENTS Circuit Pack Location Displays when the Group Type field is integrated. Enter the port associated with the conversion resource on the integrated modem pool circuit pack. Enter the necessary characters.
Screen reference For example, 01A0612 is in cabinet 01, carrier A, slot 06, and circuit number (port) 12. PORT PAIR ASSIGNMENTS are optional on “combined” pooled modem screens only. PORT PAIR ASSIGNMENTS Analog Digital Displays when the Group Type field is combined. Enter the port numbers of the modem/TDM pair in a conversion resource. Two port entries are required.Enter the necessary characters.
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters This screen sets the system parameters associated with multifrequency signaling. Screen 236 on page 1045 appears when Incoming Call Type is group-ii-mfc and Outgoing Call Type is none. Screen 237 on page 1054 appears when both Incoming Call Type and Outgoing Call Type are group-ii-mfc.
Screen reference ANI for PBX This field appears only when Outgoing Call Type is group-ii-mfc or mfe. Valid entries Usage 2 to 15 Enter the PBX identification number that is sent to the CO when ANI is requested (by the CO) on a particular call but is not available, such as on tandem tie trunk calls. blank Use for tandeming. If this field is blank, you must enter a value in the ANI-Not-Available field. ANI Prefix This field appears only when Outgoing Call Type is group-ii-mfc or mfe.
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters Convert First Digit End-of-Dial To Appears when the Private Group II Permissions and Public Interworking field is y. Valid entries 0 to 9, #, or blank Usage Enter the digit used when the incoming initial end-of-ani or end-of-dial MF signal is converted on a per-switch basis. Forward Cycle Timer (sec) Appears when the Incoming Call Type field is mfe.
Screen reference This field defines the signal type that a CO uses to place an incoming call to the PBX. Valid entries Usage group-ii-mfc If the value of this field is group-ii-mfc, the second page of the screen will display entries for all group-I, group-II, group-A, and group-B signal types with a set of default values (see page 2 of screen). non-group-ii-mfc If the value is non-group-ii-mfc, the second page displays only group-I and group-A signal types.
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters Maximum Resent Requests Valid entries Usage 1 to 99 Enter the threshold number of resend type MFC signals your switch accepts during an outgoing call. 1 The call is dropped if one resend signal is received. blank An unlimited number of resend requests is allowed. MF Signaling Intercept Treatment - Incoming Valid entries Usage y Send the group B signal for the intercept to the CO and play intercept tone on the trunk.
Screen reference Outgoing Call Type This field defines the signal type that the PBX uses to place an outgoing call into a CO. Valid entries Usage group-ii-mfc If the content of this field is group-ii-mfc, the system displays the third page of the screen. The third page displays entries for all group-I, group-II group-A, and group-B signal types with a set of default values.
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters Outgoing Start Timer (sec) Appears when the Incoming Call Type field is mfe. Valid entries 1 to 255 Usage Enter the number of seconds to time from seizure until the beginning of the first Group A signal from the receiving end, and from the end of the check frequency until the beginning receipt of the first digit following the Group II signal.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage y/n If y, Avaya MultiVantage: — Sends the category for MFC ANI for the COR of the originating party for non-private-MFC-trunk to MFC-private-trunk calls. — Sends the Group II category received over the incoming private trunk as the outgoing Group II category on tandem private MFC calls. — Applies MFC group II-CPC termination restrictions on incoming MFC private trunk calls. — Checks station permissions if you call forward off-net.
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters Transmitted Signal Gain (dB) Valid entries -15 to 3 Usage Enter the number for the loss/gain when the trunk port listens to the MFC port. The MFC port generates at -5 for MFC and -8 for MFE, and this field adds gain or loss to the starting value of -5. Use COR for All Group II Responses Appears if the Outgoing Call Type field is group-ii-mfc.
Screen reference Outgoing Appears when the Outgoing Call Type field is group-ii-mfc. Valid entries Usage next-digit next_ani_digit send-ani Enter a value to determine whether the Next ANI Digit signal will be the same as the “send-ani” signal or the “next-digit” signal or another signal defined as “next_ani_ digit.” Field descriptions for page 2 The fields on Page 2 define call category and ANI information. For India, the ANI can be requested without the call category information.
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters ANI Source for Forwarded & Covered Calls Valid entries Usage caller Send the calling party’s ANI when calls are redirected. forwarder Send the forwarding party’s ANI when calls are redirected. Call Category for Vector ii-digits Allows you to use the call category digit as the ii-digits on call vector steps. Valid entries y/n Usage If y, the call category digit, which is a part of ANI, is used as the ii-digits on call vector steps.
Screen reference Number of Outgoing ANI Digits This field applies to Russian shuttle trunks, and MFC and MFE trunks. Valid entries Usage 0 to 15 Enter the number of ANI digits for outgoing MFC calls. In India or any country where end-of-ani and end-of-digits are not defined for Tones to CO on Outgoing Forward Calls – Group I, Avaya MultiVantage appends ANI-Not-Available digits to ANI digits if the actual ANI length is less than the number entered in this field.
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters Valid entries Usage y/n If y, Avaya MultiVantage sends the caller-category signal later again when the signals for Caller-Category and ANI requests are the same and this signal is received after the Next-Digit forward signals have been received. Truncate Station Number in ANI This field applies to Russian shuttle trunks, and MFC and MFE trunks.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 3 The fields shown on Page 3 of the Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters screen define the meaning of MFC tones for calls originated at the CO. See ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page 1063 for more information. This screen appears only if the Incoming Call Type field is group-ii-mfc or non-group-ii-mfc. When the screen initially appears, either of two sets of default values is possible.
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters INCOMING FORWARD SIGNAL TYPES (Tones from CO) Group I Message codes 11 to 15 display. (Numbers 1 through 10 are assigned to the digits of the destination telephone number.) Assign a meaning to each code. See ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page 1063 for signal type.
Screen reference INCOMING BACKWARD SIGNAL TYPES (Tones to CO) Group A Message codes 11 to 15 display. (Numbers 1 through 10 are assigned to the digits of the destination telephone number.) Assign a meaning to each code. Valid entries Usage conjestion See ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page 1063 for signal type.
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters Group B This field does not appear if the Do Not Send Group B Signals to CO field is y. Message codes between 1 and 15 display. Assign a meaning to each code. Valid entries Usage busy See ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page 1063 for signal type. congestion free mct tariff-free tie-free toll-busy intercept Field descriptions for page 4 The fields shown on this page define the meaning of MFC tones for calls originated at the PBX.
Screen reference OUTGOING FORWARD SIGNAL TYPES (Tones to CO) Group I Message codes 11 to 15 appear. (Numbers 1 through 10 are assigned to the digits of the destination telephone number.) Valid entries Usage end-of-digits Assign a meaning to each code. See ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page 1063 for signal type. ani-avail end-of-ani ani-not-avail Group II Message codes between 1 and 15 display. Assign a meaning to each code.
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters Valid entries Usage last-2-digits last-3-digits last-digit next-ani-digit next-digit restart intercept resend-digit setup-sppath Group B Message codes between 1 and 15 display. Assign a meaning to each code. See ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page 1063 for signal type.
Screen reference ani-not-avail Used on DOD calls in Brazil and Columbia. The switch sends this signal to the CO when it receives an ANI request and the caller’s number is not available. digits 1 to 10 The signals from group I.1 to I.10 are reserved for address digits 0 to 9. drop When this signal is received from the CO, the switch starts the disconnect sequence and drops the call. end-of-ani This signal is used on DOD and DID calls.
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters send-congestion When the switch receives this signal from the CO on a DID call, it returns a congestion signal (group A), in compel (not pulse) mode, to the CO. Group II signals Group II signals are a more elaborate set of forward signals generated by the originating switch. attendant If the switch receives this signal on DID calls, the call terminates at an attendant regardless of the extension dialed.
Screen reference normal This signal indicates that the caller is a normal subscriber. If it is received on a DID call, the call is terminated at the called extension. For an outgoing MF signaling call that uses group II signaling, this signal is sent to the CO when the CO requests calling-category information and the originating extension is a station. This signal is used in both DID and DOD calls.
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters intercept The CO sends this signal to indicate the call has been terminated to an invalid destination. When the switch receives this signal on DOD calls, the switch drops the trunk and plays intercept tone to the calling party. This signal is used on DOD calls. resend-digit The switch sends this signal to adjust the outpulsing pointer so that the last digit can be resent again. This signal is used on DOD calls.
Screen reference Group B signals Group B signals enhance group A signals for backward signaling from the destination switch by providing the status of the called party. In addition, if the originating switch uses group II signals, the destination switch answers with group B signals. Group B signals are as follows: busy This signal is sent to indicate that the called party is busy. On DID calls, the signal is sent to the CO if there is no coverage point to terminate the call.
Music Sources tariff-free This signal is sent when the trunk group provides an “800” service. Avaya MultiVantage generates an MFC tariff-free backward signal (administered on the System-Parameters Multifrequency-Signaling screen) during call setup instead of the “free” signal, facilitating CO billing. NOTE: If the trunk is administered as a tariff-free trunk and the “tariff-free” signal is not defined, then the “free” signal is sent.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 1 change music-source Source 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Music Sources Type music tone music none none none music none none none music none none none none Page 1 of X Port Description 01A1003 01A1004 Easy listening Tone-on-Hold Rock 12B1301 Oldies 04C2003 Classical Screen 240. Music Sources Description Enter a description of the administered music source. This field appears only if you entered music or tone in Type.
Music Sources Port Enter the auxiliary trunk or analog port address of the music source. Duplicates are not allowed. This field appears only if you entered music in Type. Enter the necessary characters.
Screen reference Type If you entered a value in Music/Tone on Hold on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, that value will appear in this field. Valid entries Usage music Enter the type of treatment to be provided by the music source. tone Only one music source may use this value. none Packet Gateway Board Use this screen to administer the Packet Gateway (PGATE) circuit pack. NOTE: The PGATE screen is used with DEFINITY R configurations.
Partition Route Table External Cable Type Display-only field that shows the type of physical interface between the PGATE port and the adjunct. Name Valid entries Usage Up to 15 alphanumeric characters Enter the name of the adjunct with which the PGATE circuit pack communicates. Port Configuration Display-only field that shows that the port is configured for “rs232” communication. Partition Route Table Use this table to identify routing for partition groups associated with an ARS analysis entry.
Screen reference PGN 1 (through PGN 8) Enter the routing for each partition group associated with each route index number. Valid entries Usage 1 to 640 Specifies the route pattern used to route the call r1 to r32 Specifies the remote home numbering plan area table used to route the call node Designates node number routing deny Blocks the call Personal CO Line Group Use this screen to set up a personal central office line trunk group.
Personal CO Line Group Analog Loss Group This field determines which administered 2-party row in the loss plan applies to this trunk group if the call is carried over an analog signaling port in the trunk group. Valid entries Usage 1 to 17 Shows the values from the loss plan and tone plan. Coverage Path Valid entries Usage 1 to 9999 Enter the number of the call coverage path you want to use for incoming calls. t1 to t999 Enter the number of a time-of-day table.
Screen reference Trunk Direction Valid entries Usage incoming Enter the direction of the traffic on this trunk group. The entry in this field affects which timers appear on the Administrable Timers page. For WATS Group Types, only incoming or outgoing may be entered. outgoing two-way Trunk Name Valid entries Usage 1 to 10 characters Enter a descriptive name for this trunk. Don’t use the group type (CO, FX, WATS) here.
Personal CO Line Group Valid entries Usage 1 through 80 Gateway (DEFINITY R, CSI) or 1 through 10 (DEFINITY SI) or 1 through 250 (S8700 IP-Connect / S8700 Multi-Connect / S8300 Media Server) V1 through V9 Module 01 through 31 Circuit Field descriptions for page 2 add personal-CO-line Page 1 of x PERSONAL CO LINE GROUP ASSIGNED MEMBERS (Stations with a button for this PCOL Group) Ext Name 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: Ext Name 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: Screen 244.
Screen reference Related topics See ‘‘Adding a PCOL trunk group’’ on page 420 for instructions. See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for definitions of all trunk group fields that are not unique to the PCOL screen.
Pickup Group Pickup Group This screen implements call pickup groups with up to 50 extensions per group. A pickup group is a group of users authorized to answer calls to a phone extension within that group of users. A phone extension number can only belong to one pickup group.
Screen reference Extended Group Number This field appears only when the Group Call Pickup field is set to flexible on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. The extended group is a collection of pickup groups that can answer calls from other pickup groups in the same extended group. Valid entries Usage 1-100 Enter the extended group number or blank.
PRI Endpoint A PRI Endpoint is defined as 1–31 adjacent DS0s/B-channels, addressable via a single extension, and signaled via a D-channel (Signaling Group) over a standard T1 or E1 ISDN-PRI interface.
Screen reference Maintenance Tests Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to run hourly maintenance tests on this PRI Endpoint. Name Identifies the endpoint. Valid entries Usage Up to 27 alphanumeric characters. Originating Auto Restoration Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to automatically restore calls originating from this PRI Endpoint (while maintaining endpoint call status) in the case of network failure if the call is over SDDN network facilities.
PRI Endpoint (Starting) Port Enter the seven-character starting port of the PRI Endpoint. Enter the necessary characters.
Screen reference WIDEBAND SUPPORT OPTIONS Contiguous Specifies whether to hunt contiguous NXDS0 channels. This field only appears if y is entered in NXDS0. The hunt algorithm to satisfy an NXDS0 call is as follows: Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to specify the “floating” scheme. NXDS0 calls are placed on a contiguous group of B-channels large enough to satisfy the requested bandwidth without constraint on the starting channel (no fixed starting point trunk).
QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway H12 Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to specify the ISDN information transfer rate for 1920 Kbps data, which includes 30 B-channels. When a PE is administered to support H12, the hunt algorithm to satisfy a call requiring 1920 Kbps of bandwidth uses a fixed allocation scheme. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to specify the NXDS0 multi-rate service.
Screen reference Sig Grp Valid entries Usage 1 through 110 Enter the assigned signaling group number for DEFINITY CSI, SI. 1 through 416 Enter the assigned signaling group number for DEFINITY R. 1 through 650 Enter the assigned signaling group number for S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect. Subscriber Number You can enter up to 28 subscriber numbers. Valid entries Usage 0 through 9, *, ‘x’, Enter a subscriber number up to 20 characters in ‘X’ length.
Remote Access ! SECURITY ALERT: Avaya designed the Remote Access feature incorporated in this product that, when properly administered by the customer, enables the customer to minimize the ability of unauthorized persons to gain access to the network.
Screen reference ! CAUTION: Your attempt to disable the Remote Access feature will be lost if the switch is rebooted without saving translations. Therefore, execute a “save translation” command after permanently disabling the Remote Access feature. To assist you in maintaining the security of your system, Avaya MultiVantage provides the status remote access command, which provides status and information on each remote access barrier code and on the remote access feature.
Remote Access status remote-access REMOTE ACCESS STATUS Remote Access Status: enabled Date/Time Modified: 01/30/95 17:00 Barrier Code 1:2374745 2:3374837 3:3285038 4:5738557 5:7764884 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: Date Modified 01/30/95 01/30/95 01/30/95 01/30/95 01/30/95 / / / / / / / / / / Expiration Date 03/31/95 / / 01/31/96 07/31/95 05/20/95 / / / / / / / / / / No.
Screen reference Barrier Code Length Assign a barrier code length of 7 to provide maximum security. Valid entries Usage 4 to 7 or blank Enter a number to indicate the length of the barrier code. Calls Used This display-only field shows the number of calls placed using the corresponding barrier code. This field is incremented each time a barrier code is successfully used to access the Remote Access feature. A usage that exceeds the expected rate indicates improper use.
Remote Access Expiration Date Assign an expiration date based on the expected length of time the barrier code will be needed. If it is expected the barrier code is to be used for a 2-week period, assign a date two weeks from the current date. If the Expiration Date is assigned, a warning message is displayed on the system copyright screen seven days prior to the expiration date. The system administer can modify the expiration date to extend the time interval if needed.
Screen reference When a trunk group is dedicated to Remote Access, the remote access extension number is administered on the trunk group’s incoming destination field. Valid entries Extension number Usage Enter the extension number for Remote Access associated with each trunk that supports the Remote Access feature. You cannot assign a Vector Directory Number (VDN) extension as the remote access extension. May be blank if no barrier codes.
Remote Office Field descriptions for page 1 change coverage remote REMOTE CALL COVERAGE TABLE ENTRIES FROM 1 TO 1000 01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06: 07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 27: 28: 29: 30: _______________
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 1 change remote office x REMOTE OFFICE Node Name: Network Region: Location: Site Data: _______________ ___ __ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ Screen 251. Remote Office Location This field appears on the screen when the SVN Authorization Code Violation Notification Enabled field on the Security-Related System Parameters screen is set to y.
RHNPA Table Site Data This field appears on the screen when the SVN Authorization Code Violation Notification Enabled field on the Security-Related System Parameters screen is set to y. Valid entries Usage 30 characters or blank Any desired information. RHNPA Table The RHNPA Table defines route patterns for specific 3-digit codes, usually direct distance dialing (DDD) prefix numbers. The appearance of the screen is different slightly depending on the switch type.
Screen reference Pattern Choices There are 12 pattern choices for DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8100 Media Server with a G600, and S8100 Media Server with a CMC1; there are 24 pattern choices for the S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, and S8700 Multi-Connect. Enter the route pattern number you want associated with each code. The pattern choice you list on one screen automatically defaults to the other screens of the same table. If you use one pattern for most of the codes, assign that pattern to choice 1.
Route Pattern change route-pattern 1 Page 1 of X Pattern Number: 1_ 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: Grp. No. ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ No.
Screen reference The following table explains BCC values: BCC Value Description 0 Voice-Grade Data and Voice 1 56-kbps Data (Mode 1) 2 64-kbps Data (Mode 2) 3 64-kbps Data (Mode 3) 4 64-kbps Data (Mode 0) W 128 to 1984-kbps Data (Wideband) BCIE (Bearer Capability Information Element) Use BCIE to determine how to create the ITC codepoint in the setup message. This field applies to ISDN trunks and appears if ITC is both.
Route Pattern FRL Valid entries 0 to 7 Usage Enter the Facility Restriction Level (FRL) associated with the entries on this row (preference). 0 is the least restrictive and 7 is the most restrictive. The calling party’s FRL must be greater than or equal to this FRL to access the associated trunk-group. ! SECURITY ALERT: For system security reasons, Avaya recommends using the most restrictive FRL possible.
Screen reference Inserted Digits Enter the digits you want inserted for routing. The switch can send up to 52 digits. This includes up to 36 digits you may enter here plus up to 18-digits originally dialed. Special symbols count as two digits each. Valid entries Usage (0 to 9) Enter the digits you want inserted for routing. 0 to 36 digits * When * is in the route pattern and the outgoing trunk is signaling type “mf”, the MFC tone for the “end-of-digits” is sent out to the CO in place of the *.
Route Pattern IXC Inter-Exchange Carrier (IXC) identifies the carrier, such as AT&T, used for calls that route via an IXC, and for Call Detail Recording (CDR). This field appears when the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Valid entries Usage Valid carrier code Identifies the carrier for IXC calls user For presubscribed carrier. Used when an IXC is not specified.
Screen reference No. Dgts Subaddress Allows a caller to reach a number where switch digit processing deletes the dialed number and inserts the listed directory number (LDN). The LDN then is sent to the destination address and the dialed extension is sent in the calling party subaddress information element (IE). At the receiving end, the call terminates to the user indicated by the subaddress number instead of the attendant.
Route Pattern Valid entries Numbering Plan Identifier Type of Numbering pub-unk E.164(1) unknown(0) lev0-pvt Private Numbering Plan PNP(9) local(4) lev1-pvt Private Numbering Plan PNP(9) Regional Level 1(2) lev2-pvt Private Numbering Plan PNP(9) Regional Level 2(1) unk-unk unknown(0) unknown(0) levl0-pvt (enter to allow Network Call Redirection/ Transfer NOTE: To access Bellcore NI-2 Operator Service Access, the Inserted Digits field must be unk-unk.
Screen reference For a WATS trunk, the Prefix Mark is the same as the local CO trunk. Valid entries 0 Usage ■ Suppress a user-dialed prefix digit 1 for 10-digit FNPA calls. ■ Leave a user-dialed prefix digit 1 for 7-digit HNPA calls. ■ Leave a prefix digit 1 on 10-digit calls that are not FNPA or HNPA calls. Do not use Prefix Mark 0 in those areas where all long-distance calls must be dialed as 1+10 digits. Check with your local network provider.
Security-Related System Parameters Valid entries lds mega800 megacom oper-meg sub-op-meg (operator and megacon) (sub-operator and megacom) oper-sdn sub-op-sdn (operator and sdn) (sub-operator and sdn) outwats-bnd wats-max-bnd Toll List This entry is not required for AAR. Valid entries Usage 1 to 32 or blank For ARS, enter the number of the ARS Toll Table associated with the terminating NPA of the trunk group. You must complete this field if Prefix Mark is 2 or 3.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 1 change system-parameters security SECURITY-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Page 1 of 2 SECURITY VIOLATION NOTIFICATION PARAMETERS SVN Login Violation Notification Enabled? y Originating Extension: _____ Referral Destination: _____ Login Threshold: 5_ Time Interval: 0:03 Announcement Extension: _____ SVN Remote Access Originating Barrier Code Announcement Violation Notification Enabled? y Extension: _____ Referral Destination: _____ Threshold: 10 Time Interval: 0
Security-Related System Parameters Login (Barrier Code, Authorization Code) Threshold The value assigned to this field, in conjunction with Time Interval, determines whether a security violation has occurred. For example, if this field is 5, and time interval is 0:03, then five invalid access attempts within three minutes constitutes a security violation. Valid entries Usage 1–99, 1–255 Enter the number of access attempts that are permitted before a referral call is made.
Screen reference Time Interval The value of this field, in conjunction with Threshold, determines whether a security violation has occurred. Valid entries Usage 0:01 to 7:59 The range for the time interval is one minute to eight hours. Entered in the screen “x:xx.” For example, if you want the time interval to be one minute, you enter 0:01. If you want the time interval to be seven and one-half hours, you enter 7:30.
Security-Related System Parameters change system-parameters security SECURITY-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Page 2 of 2 SECURITY VIOLATION NOTIFICATION PARAMETERS SVN Station Security Code Violation Notification Enabled? y Originating Extension: _____ Referral Destination: _____ Station Security Code Threshold: 10 Time Interval: 0:03 Announcement Extension: _____ STATION SECURITY CODE VERIFICATION PARAMETERS Minimum Station Security Code Length: 4 Security Code for Terminal Self Administration Required? y AC
Screen reference Security Code for Terminal Self Administration Required Specifies if a Personal Station access code is required to enter the Self-Administration mode. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to indicate that a security code is required. ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY PARAMETERS These eight fields appear only if the Access Security Gateway (ASG) field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y.
Security-Related System Parameters SYSAM-RMT A dialed-in (or out) connection to the SYSAM-RMT port on the System Access and Maintenance circuit pack in the active DEFINITY R processor carrier. For more information on the circuit pack, see the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide. Valid entries Usage y/n Any entry attempt through this port receives a challenge response.
Screen reference NET A dialed-in (or out) connection to the Network Controller circuit pack. For more information on the circuit pack, see the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide. Valid entries Usage y/n Any entry attempt through this port receives a challenge response. Translation-ID Number Mismatch Interval (days) A display-only field for all logins except init; only init logins can change this field.
Signaling Group Field descriptions for page 1 Page 1 of 5 SIGNALING GROUP Group Number ___ Group Type: Associated Signaling? Primary D-Channel: atm___ Name: Max Number of NCA TSC: ___ Max number of CA TSC: ___ Trunk Group for NCA TSC: ___ Trunk Group for Channel Selection: ___ Supplementary Service Protocol: _ CIRCUIT PARAMETERS Virtual Path Identifier: 0 Virtual Channel Identifier: 0 Signaling Mode: Idle Code: Interface Companding: Country Protocol: Protocol Version: Network Call Transfer? n isdn-
Screen reference Appears when the Group Type field is isdn-pri. Valid entries Usage y Enter y to use associated signaling. n Enter n to use non-facility associated signaling. Remote Office Appears when the Group Type field is h.323. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if the signaling group serves a remote office. D Channel Appears when the Group Type field is atm. Enter the necessary characters.
Signaling Group Valid entries 0-256 Usage Maximum number of simultaneous non-call-associated Temporary Signaling Connections. The TSCs carry signaling for features not associated with a specific call, for example, signals to turn on Leave Word Calling. Max number of CA TSC Appears when the Group Type field is atm, h.323, or isdn-pri. Valid entries Usage 0-619 Maximum number of simultaneous call-associated Temporary Signaling Connections that can exist in the signaling group.
Screen reference Trunk Group for Channel Selection Valid entries 1-666 or blank Usage Enter the trunk group number. If there is more than one trunk group assigned to this signaling group, the group entered in this field will be the one that can accept incoming calls. For DEFINITY R. 1-99 or blank For DEFINITY SI only. 1-2000 For S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect. X-Mobility/Wireless Type Appears when the Group Type field is isdn-pri.
Signaling Group Valid entries e f g Usage Allows DCS with rerouting. DCS with Rerouting must be y, and the Used for DCS field on the trunk group screen must be y. Feature Plus ANSI. Available only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI field is y or the Used for DCS field is y. Network Call Transfer Appears when the Group Type field is atm. For more information, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Network Call Redirection.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage 32-1023 or Enter a number between 32-1023 or blank. blank Virtual Channel Identifier Appears when the Group Type field is atm. Valid entries Usage 32-1023 or Enter a number between 32-1023 or blank. blank Near-end Listen Port Appears when the Group Type field is h.323 or sip. Valid entries Usage 1719, 1720, or 5000-9999 Enter an unused port number. Avaya recommends 1720. Enter 1719 if LRQ is y. Far-end Listen Port Appears when the Group Type field is h.
Signaling Group LRQ Required Appears when the Group Type field is h.323. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter n if the far-end switch is an Avaya MultiVantage. Enter y if the far-end switch is a non-DEFINITY and requires a location request to obtain a signaling address in its signaling protocol. If y, “Calls Share IP Signaling Connection” must be n. Signaling Mode A display-only field that appears when the Group Type field is atm. This field always sets to isdn-pri.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage host network pbx Calls Share IP Signaling Connection Appears when the Group Type field is h.323 or sip. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y for inter-MultiVantage connections. If y, then “LRQ Required” must be n. Enter n if the local and/or remote switch is a non-MultiVantage switch. Interface Companding Appears when the Group Type field is atm. Valid entries Usage alaw mulaw Bypass If IP Threshold Exceeded Appears when the Group Type field is h.323 or sip.
Signaling Group Protocol Version Appears when the Group Type field is atm. Valid entries Usage a b c d Direct IP-IP Audio Connections Appears when the Group Type field is h.323. Allows direct audio connections between IP endpoints. Valid entries y/n Usage Enter to y to save on bandwidth resources and improve sound quality of voice over IP transmissions. IP Audio Hairpinning Appears when the Group Type field is h.323. Allows IP endpoints to be connected through the IP circuit pack on the switch.
Screen reference Interworking Message Appears when the Group Type field is atm, h.323, or sip. This field determines what message the switch sends when an incoming ISDN trunk call interworks (is routed over a non-ISDN trunk group). Valid entries Usage PROGress Normally select this value. PROGress asks the public network to cut through the B-channel and let the caller hear tones such as ringback or busy tone provided over the non-ISDN trunk.
Signaling Group ■ It allows you to define fractional T1 and fractional E1 facilities, specifying how many and which channels to use. ■ It allows you to choose the port numbers to use (port numbers must be unique for all signaling groups on the same ATM board). The signaling channel (port 16 for an E1 and port 24 for a T1) must be a port between 9 and 32. Any port number used on this screen may not be used on any other ATM signaling group on the same board.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 2 Service/Feature These are the encodings that are used in the SETUP messages for the Temporary Signaling Connections administered on pages 2-5 of this screen.
Signaling Group Enabled Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to enable the administered NCA-TSC. Established Used to indicate the strategy for establishing this administered NCA-TSC. Valid entries Usage permanent Use permanent so that the administered NCA-TSC can be established by either the near end or the far end. as-needed Use as-needed so that the administered NCA-TSC will be established the first time the administered NCA-TSC is needed; it can be set up either by the near end or far end switch.
Screen reference Mach ID You can enter up to 20 machine IDs. Valid entries Usage 1 through 20 Enter a unique machine ID. The system does not allow you to specify an ID that you already entered on the Processor Channel screen. 1 through 63 for For S8700 IP-Connect. DCS 1 through 99 for Audix 1 through 15 for MASI 1 through 20 for QSIG-MWI blank Site Data Use this screen to enter information about buildings, floors and telephone set colors.
Station Station This section provides descriptions of all of the fields that may appear on Station screens. Some of the fields are used for specific phone types; others are used for all phone types. To make it easier to find a specific field, they are listed in alphabetical order by field name.
Screen reference change station 75001 Page 2 of X STATION FEATURE OPTIONS LWC Reception? msa-spe LWC Activation? y LWC Log External Calls? n CDR Privacy? n Redirect Notification? y Per Button Ring Control? n Bridged Call Alerting? n Active Station Ringing: single H.
Station change station 1014 Page 4 0f 4 STATION FEATURE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: Screen 265. Station If the Expansion Module field is y, a fifth page appears. change station 1014 Page 5 of 5 STATION EXPANSION MODULE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: Screen 266.
Screen reference Abbreviated Dialing List1, List2, List3 You can assign up to 3 abbreviated dialing lists to each phone. Valid entries Usage enhanced Allows the phone user to access the enhanced system abbreviated dialing list. group Allows the phone user to access the specified group abbreviated dialing list. If you enter group, you also must enter a group number. personal Allows the phone user to access and program their personal abbreviated dialing list.
Station Adjunct Supervision Adjunct Supervision appears when the Type field is 500, 2500, k2500, 8110, ops, ds1fd, ds1sa, VRU, VRUFD, or VRUSA. Valid entries Usage y Enter y if an analog disconnect signal is sent automatically to the port after a call terminates. Analog devices (such as answering machines and speakerphones) use this signal to turn the devices off after a call terminates. n Set this field to n so hunt group agents are alerted to incoming calls.
Screen reference Audible Message Waiting The Audible Message Waiting tone indicates that the user has a waiting message. This field appears only if Audible Message Waiting is set to y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Note that this field does not control the Message Waiting lamp. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if you want the phone user to receive stutter dial tone when they have a waiting message and they go off-hook. Audix Name Specifies which AUDIX is associated with the station.
Station Automatic Moves Automatic Moves allows a phone to be unplugged from one location and moved to a new location without additional switch administration. The switch automatically associates the extension to the new port. ! CAUTION: When a phone is unplugged and moved to another physical location, the Emergency Location Extension field must be changed for that extension or the USA Automatic Location Identification data base must be manually updated.
Screen reference Automatic Selection of DID Numbers The switch chooses a 2- to 5-digit extension from a predetermined list of numbers and assigns the extension to a hotel room phone. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to use the Automatic Selection of DID Numbers for Guest Rooms feature. BCC Appears when ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks is enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Display-only field set to 0 for stations (that is, indicates voice or voice-grade data).
Station Button Assignments Enter the abbreviated software name to assign a feature button. For a list of feature buttons, see ‘‘Telephone feature buttons’’ on page 131. NOTE: If you want to use Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI), you must assign a call appearance (call-appr) to the first button position. TTI needs the button on the first call appearance to get dial tone. Cable You can use this field to identify the cable that connects the phone jack to the system.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage external Internal calls are blocked. External calls terminate to the XMOBILE station. all All calls terminate to the XMOBILE station. none Prevents calls from terminating to the XMOBILE station. Can be used to prevent business-related calls from accruing phone charges on cell phones that are lost, being transferred to a new user, or being disabled for other business reasons. NOTE: Interswitch calls on DCS trunks are treated as internal calls.
Station CDR Privacy This option allows digits in the called number field of an outgoing call record to be blanked, on a per-station basis. You administer the number of blocked digits system-wide in the Privacy - Digits to Hide field on the CDR System Parameters screen. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to enable Call Privacy for each station. Cell Phone Number Contains the unformatted cell phone’s published external number. This field may contain a 3-digit area code plus the 7-digit main number.
Screen reference Cord Length Enter a number to specify the length (in feet) of the cord attached to the receiver. COS Enter the desired Class of Service (COS) number to select allowed features. Country Protocol Enter the protocol that corresponds to your supported initialization and codesets. The Country Protocol must match any previously-administered endpoint on the same port.
Station Coverage Msg Retrieval Applies if the phone is enabled for LWC Reception. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow users in the phone’s Coverage Path to retrieve Leave Word Calling (LWC) messages for this phone. Coverage Module Valid entries Usage y Enter y to indicate that a coverage module is connected to the station. Once you enter y, the system displays an additional page that allows you to assign the buttons for the module.
Screen reference Data Option Valid entries Usage analog data module none Data Restriction Data restriction provides permanent protection and cannot be changed by the phone user. Do not assign a Data Restriction if Auto Answer is all or acd. If y, whisper page to this station is denied. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to prevent tones, such as call-waiting tones, from interrupting data calls.
Station Display Caller ID Appears when the Type field is CallrID. For CallrID type phones or analog phones with Caller ID adjuncts only. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow transmission of calling party information to the Caller ID phone or adjunct. Display Cartridge For 7404 D phones only. Enter y to indicate there is a display cartridge associated with the station. This displays an additional page to allow you to assign display buttons for the display cartridge.
Screen reference Display Language Specifies the display language. Valid entries Usage english Enter the language you want users to see on their displays. french italian spanish user-defined Display Module Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if this phone has a display module. Distinctive Audible Alert Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y so the phone can receive the 3 different types of ringing patterns which identify the type of incoming calls.
Station Endpt ID Appears only if Endpt Init is y. Enter a unique 2-digit number (00–62) for this endpoint. Each Endpt ID field must have a unique value for each endpoint on the same port. This field provides for multipoint configuration conformance to the Bellcore Terminal Initialization procedures. In these procedures, a multipoint configuration requires the last 2 digits of the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) be between 00 and 63 and be binary unique for each endpoint.
Screen reference Extension Displays the extension for this station—this is either the extension you specified in the station command or the next available extension (if you used add station next). For a virtual extension, enter a valid physical extension or a blank. Blank allows an incoming call to the virtual extension to be redirected to the virtual extension’s “busy” or “all” coverage path.
Station H.320 Conversion Allows H.320 compliant calls made to this phone to be converted to voice-only. Because the system can only handle a limited number of conversion calls, you may need to limit the number of telephones with H.320 conversion. Headset Enter y if the telephone has a headset. HOT LINE DESTINATION — Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code Appears only when Special Dialing Option is hot-line.
Screen reference Idle Appearance Preference Indicate which call appearance is selected when the user lifts the handset and there is an incoming call. Valid entries Usage y If you enter y, the user connects to an idle call appearance instead of the ringing call. n If you enter n, the Alerting Appearance Preference is set and the user connects to the ringing call appearance. Ignore Rotary Digits If this field is y, the short switch hook flash (50 -150) from a 2500-type set is ignored.
Station calls made from an Avaya endpoint. Your use of this product indicates that you have read this advisory and agree to use an alternative telephone to dial all emergency calls from remote locations. Valid entries Usage extension Enter extension to send the extension entered in the Emergency Location Extension field, to the Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP). block Enter block to prevent the completion of emergency calls.
Screen reference IP Softphone Appears only for DCP station types and IP Telephones. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y indicate that this extension is either a PC-based multifunction station or part of a telecommuter complex with a call-back audio connection. ITC (Information Transfer Capability) Indicates the type of transmission facilities to be used for ISDN calls originated from this endpoint. The field does not display for voice-only or BRI stations.
Station LWC Activation Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow internal telephone users to leave short LWC messages for this extension. If the system has hospitality, enter y for guest-room telephones if the extension designated to receive failed wakeup messages should receive LWC messages that indicate the wakeup calls failed. Enter y if LWC Reception is audix. LWC Log External Calls Appears only where the LWC Reception field is available.
Screen reference When a cell phone is mapped to more than one XMOBILE station, then only one of the mapped XMOBILE station may have origination or both as its Mapping Mode. Therefore, only one of the XMOBILE stations mapped to the cell phone number is permitted to originate calls. Valid entries Usage both The cell phone can be used to originate and terminate calls from its associated XMOBILE extension. This is the default when the XMOBILE Type field is PHS or DECT.
Station For an IP Telephone or an IP Softphone, this is the extension already administered as an H.323 station type. You can administer this field if the IP Station field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y. Valid entries Usage A valid BRI data For MMCH, enter the extension of the data module that is part of extension this multimedia complex. H.323 station extension For 4600 series IP Telephones, enter the corresponding H.323 station. For IP Softphone, enter the corresponding H.
Screen reference MIM Mtce/Mgt Indicates if the telephone supports MIM Maintenance and Management capabilities other then endpoint initialization. Appears only if MIM Support is y. MIM Support (Management Information Message Support) This field appears only for ISDN-BRI data modules and ASAI. This field supports MIM endpoint initialization (SPID support) and other Maintenance or Management capabilities. Valid entries Usage y Enter y to display Endpt Init and MIM Mtce/Mgt. n Enter n for ASAI.
Station Multimedia Early Answer Allows you to establish multimedia early answer on a station-by-station basis. Valid entries Usage y/n If this station will receive coverage calls for multimedia complexes, but is not multimedia-capable, enter y to ensure that calls are converted and talk path is established before ringing at this station. Mute Button Enabled Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow the user to use the Mute button on this phone.
Screen reference Off Premises Station Analog phones only. Valid entries Usage y Enter y if this phone is not located in the same building with the system. If you enter y, you must complete R Balance Network. n Enter n if the phone is located in the same building with the system. PCOL/TEG Call Alerting Appears only for 510 telephones. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to alert the station for Personal CO Line/Terminating Extension Group calls.
Station Personalized Ringing Pattern Personalized Ringing allows users of some telephones to have one of 8 ringing patterns for incoming calls. Users working closely in the same area can each specify a different ringing pattern. This enables the users to distinguish their own ringing telephone from other telephones in the same area. For virtual stations, this field dictates the ringing pattern on its mapped-to physical phone. Enter a Personalized Ringing Pattern.
Screen reference Port Enter 7 characters to specify a port, or an x. If this extension is registered as an IP endpoint, this field will display S00000.
Station R Balance Network Valid entries Usage y Enter y to select the R Balance Capacitor network. In all other cases except for those listed under n, enter y. n Enter n to select the standard resistor capacitor network. You must complete this field if Off-Premise Station is y.
Screen reference Restrict Last Appearance Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to restrict the last idle call appearance for incoming priority calls and outgoing call originations only. Valid entries Usage Up to 10 characters To identify the phone location. Up to 5 characters To identify the guest room number, if this station is one of several to be assigned a guest room and the Display Room Information in Call Display is y on the Hospitality-Related System Parameters screen.
Station Service Link Mode The service link is the combined hardware and software multimedia connection between an Enhanced mode complex’s H.320 DVC system and the Avaya MultiVantage which terminates the H.320 protocol. When the user receives or makes a call during a multimedia or IP Softphone or IP Telephone session, a “service link” is established. Valid entries Usage as-needed Use this setting for most multimedia, IP Softphone, or IP Telephone users.
Screen reference Speakerphone This field controls the behavior of speakerphones. Valid entries Usage 1-way Enter 1-way to indicate that you want the speakerphone to be listen-only. 2-way Enter 2-way to indicate that you want the speakerphone to be both talk and listen. grp-listen Group Listen works with only 6400-series and 2420 phones. Group Listen allows a phone user to talk and listen to another party with the handset or headset while the phone’s 2-way speakerphone is in the listen-only mode.
Station Station Lock Active Valid display Usage yes/no Shows the phone’s status of Station Lock. Switchhook Flash Valid entries Usage y Enter y to allow users to use the switchhook flash function to activate Conference/Transfer/Hold and Call Waiting. n Enter n to disable the flash function so that when the switchhook is pressed while active on a call, the call drops. If this field is n, you must set Call Waiting Indication to n. TEI Appears only when the Fixed TEI field is y.
Screen reference NOTE: You cannot change an analog phone administered with hardware to a virtual extension if TTI is y on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. Contact your Avaya representative for more information. Table 17.
Station Table 17.
Screen reference Table 17.
Station Table 17. Telephones (Continued) Telephone type Model Administer as 4620 4620 4624 4624 4630 4630 Road-warrior application H.323 or DCP type Native H.323 H.323 Single-connect H.323 or DCP type — asai 7505D 7505D 7506D 7506D 7507D 7507D 8503D 8503D 8510T 8510T 8520T 8520T Personal computer 6300/7300 PC (voice/data) 6538/9 Constellation Test Line ATMS 105TL IP SoftPhone ISDN-BRI station No hardware assigned at the time of administration.
Screen reference Table 17. Telephones (Continued) Telephone type Model Administer as ASAI asai link asai computer telephony adjunct link adjlk any digital set same as “Multiappearance Digital” see table above CTI station CTI CTI CTI station CTI XMOBILE EC500, DECT, PHS XMOBILE ISDN-BRI data module 7500 7500 AWOH Continued on next page XID Appears only for an ISDN-BRI data module or an ASAI link. Used to identify Layer 2 XID testing capability.
System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding This screen sets the system-wide parameters for call coverage and call forwarding.
Screen reference Local Cvg Subsequent Redirection/CFWD No Ans Interval (rings) This field specifies: ■ the number of rings applied at a local coverage point before a call redirects to the next coverage point ■ the number of rings applied at the principal before a call forwards when Call Forwarding Busy/Don’t Answer is activated. Valid entries Usage 1–99 See note below.
System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding Threshold for Blocking Off-Net Redirection of Incoming Trunk Calls This field applies for those occasions when an incoming call to a station redirects off-net. At that time, the Call Forward timer activates to block any further incoming calls to that station from being redirected off-net until the timer expires. Valid entries Usage 1-7 The number of allowed calls to be routed off-net before blocking commences.
Screen reference However, a PROGRESS message with a Progress Indicator of ‘inband information’ may be received for reasons other than an unavailable cellular phone. In this case, you probably do not want to redirect the call to the next coverage point. There is no way for the Avaya MultiVantage to know the actual intent of such a PROGRESS message, yet you may choose how the system should handle this message.
System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding Maintain SBA At Principal Allows a user to maintain a simulated bridged appearance when a call redirects to coverage. Valid entries Usage y Enter y to maintain a simulated bridged appearance (SBA) on the principal’s phone when a call redirects to coverage. DCS with rerouting will not be attempted after coverage. n When set to n, no SBA is maintained on the principal’s phone.
Screen reference Station Hunt Before Coverage This field allows you to choose whether a call to a busy station performs station hunting before going to coverage. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to use Station Hunt Before Coverage. FORWARDING Call Forward Override This field specifies how to treat a call from a forwarded-to party to the forwarded-from party.
System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding Field descriptions for page 2 change system-parameters coverage-forwarding page 2 SYSTEM PARAMETERS -- CALL COVERAGE / CALL FORWARDING COVERAGE OF CALLS REDIRECTED OFF-NET (CCRON) Coverage Of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled? Activate Answer Detection (Preserves SBA) On Final CCRON Cvg Point? Ignore Network Answer Supervision? Disable call classifier for CCRON over ISDN trunks? y y y n Screen 268.
Screen reference Coverage Of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled This field allows you to enable/disable the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net (CCRON) feature. This field provides a quick means of disabling this feature if the demand on the call classifier port resources degrades other services provided by the switch. To set this field to y, first set the Cvg Of Calls Redirected Off-net field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen to y.
System Parameters Country-Options provide network answer supervision on their trunks and desire that CCRON not discard that information. They may preserve this service by setting this field to n. On the other hand, beware when you tandem a call over a tie trunk through another switch node from where it redirects to the public network over non-ISDN facilities. If the trunk on the far-end node sends a timed answer supervision, that may get tandemed back to the originating switch as a network answer.
Screen reference Code Country 12 France 13 Germany 14 Czech Republic, Slovakia 15 Russia (CIS) 16 Argentina 17 Greece 18 China 19 Hong Kong 20 Thailand 21 Macedonia 22 Poland 23 Brazil 24 Nordic 25 South Africa Field descriptions for page 1 change system-parameters country-options Page 1 of 7 SYSTEM PARAMETERS COUNTRY-OPTIONS Companding Mode: 440Hz PBX-dial Tone? Analog Ringing Cadence: Analog Line Transmission: Display Character Set? Howler Tone After Busy: Enable Busy To
System Parameters Country-Options 440Hz PBX-dial Tone Specifies whether the switch (primary) dial tone will be changed to a continuous 440Hz/-17 tone. Valid entries Usage y/n A value of n implies the tone will either be administered on a later page of this screen or, if no individual definition is administered, as defined in Base Tone Generation Set. 440Hz Secondary-dial Tone Specifies whether the Secondary (CO) dial tone will be changed to a continuous 440Hz/-17 tone.
Screen reference A TN780 vintage 5 or greater or a TN2182 is required if Belgian Tones (Country code 8) are specified. Valid entries Usage 1–25 See the Country code table at the beginning of this screen description. Companding Mode Identifies the companding algorithm to be used by system hardware.
System Parameters Country-Options Howler After Busy Plays howler tone when users leave their analog phone off-hook too long. Valid entries Usage y/n Enables howler tone. Set Layer 1 timer T1 to 30 seconds Valid entries Usage y/n Specifies whether the Layer 1 timer is set to 30 seconds. TONE DETECTION PARAMETERS Dial Tone Validation Timer Displays number of milliseconds that the dial tone validation routine will use to sample transmissions.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage 4 Imprecise normal broadband filter algorithm (valid with TN420C or later Tone Detector circuit pack) 5 Imprecise wideband filter algorithm (valid with TN420C or later Tone Detector circuit pack) 6 Field descriptions for page 2 display system-parameters country-otpions OPTIONAL FEATURES 2 PARTY LOSS PLAN Page Page 1 of 2 of 57 G3 Version: Digital Loss Plan: 1 V6 MaximumCustomize? Ports: 300 n TO Abbreviated List? CAS 16 Main? 1 2 Dialing 3 4 Enhanced 5 6 7 8
System Parameters Country-Options Digital Loss Plan Provides the default values for digital loss plan and n-party conference loss. Valid entries Usage 1 through 25 See the Country code table at the beginning of this screen description. FROM / TO Display-only fields that identify the variable digital loss values. Valid entries Usage -3 through 15 An unsigned number is a loss, while a number preceded with a minus sign is a gain.
Screen reference Digital Tone Plan Provides the default values for tone loss for the selected country. Valid entries Usage 1 through 25 See the Country code table at the beginning of this screen description. End-to-End total loss (dB) in a n-party conference Provides total loss for a conference call with the designated number of parties.
System Parameters Country-Options Cadence Step Display-only fields that identify the number of each tone cadence step. Valid entries Usage 1–15 Identifies the number of each tone cadence step. Duration (msec) There is one dynamic Duration field associated with each of the 15 Tone (Frequency/Level) fields on each screen page. Initially, when Tone is blank, this field does not appear.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage blank If this field is blank, all entries in the corresponding Frequency and Duration fields are ignored.
System Parameters Country-Options Tone (Frequency/Level) Valid entries Usage silence An entry of silence means no tone. A final step of silence with an infinite duration will be added internally to any tone sequence that does not end in a goto. goto An entry of goto means to repeat all or part of the sequence, beginning at the specified cadence step. 350/-17.25 350+425/-4.0 350+440/-13.75 375+425/-15.0 404/-11.0 404/-16.0 404+425/-11.0 404+450/-11.0 425/-4.0 425/-11.0 425/-17.25 440/-17.
Screen reference System-Parameters Customer-Options This screen shows you which optional features are enabled for your system as determined by the installed license file. If you have any questions about disabling or enabling one of these features contact your Avaya representative.
System-Parameters Customer-Options Platform A display-only field that identifies, via a number mapping, the platform being used for a specific customer. IP PORT CAPACITIES Maximum Administered IP Trunks Defines limits of the number of IP trunks administered. Maximum Administered Remote Office Trunks Defines limits of the number of IP endpoints based on the endpoint. Use the smaller of this number or the number based on product ID on page 7 of this screen.
Screen reference Maximum VAL Boards Valid entries Usage This display-only field indicates the maximum number of (DEFINITY R TN2501AP (Voice Announcement over LAN) boards allowed in this system. and S8700 Media Servers) ■ For values greater than 1, the Val Full 1-Hour Capacity 0-5 field on page 4 of the System-Parameters (DEFINITY SI Customer-Options screen must be set to y. and CSI, S8100 Media Servers, ■ This field updates the System Limit field on the System Capacity report.
System-Parameters Customer-Options A/D Grp/Sys List Dialing Start at 01 Allows you to number Abbreviated Dialing group or system lists starting with 01, rather than simply 1. This allows Avaya MultiVantage Abbreviated Dialing to operate like it does with the DEFINITY G2 system. Analog Trunk Incoming Call ID This field allows collection and display the name and number of an incoming call information on analog trunks.
Screen reference ■ Domain Control ■ Event Notification ■ Single Step Conference ■ Request Feature ■ II Digits ■ Set Value ■ Value Query For more information, see the Avaya MultiVantage™ CallVisor® ASAI Technical Reference. ASAI Link Plus Capabilities Provides linkage between Avaya MultiVantage and adjuncts.
System-Parameters Customer-Options Asynch. Transfer Mode (ATM) Trunking If ATM trunking is enabled, multiple ISDN-PRI T1 or E1 trunks can be emulated on one ATM pipe. Can only be enabled if the ISDN-PRI field is set to y. Enables circuit emulation service (CES). ATM WAN Spare Processor Appears on DEFINITY R only. An ATM WAN spare processor acts as a PPN in the event of network failure, and can function as an SPE if the main PPN is not functional. Cannot be set to y if the Async.
Screen reference switch over the same RLT. When the call is answered, the trunks to the main switch are dropped and can be used for another call. Cannot be set to y if the Centralized Attendant and CAS Branch fields are y. Change COR by FAC Provides certain users the ability to change the class of restriction of local extensions and local attendants via a phone by using a feature access code (FAC). Cannot be set to y if the Tenant Partitioning field is y.
System-Parameters Customer-Options DCS Call Coverage Provides DCS-based transparency of the call coverage feature across a DCS network of switches. DCS with Rerouting Provides for rerouting calls transferred among DCS nodes, enabling rerouting of the call for more effective use of facilities. Cannot be set to y if the ISDN PRI field is n. Digital Loss Plan Modification Allows you to customize the digital loss and digital tone plans.
Screen reference Emergency Access to Attendant Provides for emergency calls to be placed to an attendant. These calls can be placed automatically by Avaya MultiVantage or dialed by users. Enable ‘dadmin’ Login Provides business partners the ability to install, administer, and maintain DEFINITY switches. Enhanced Conferencing Enhanced Conferencing allows the customer to use the Meet-me Conference, Selective Conference Party Display, Drop, and Mute, and No Hold Conference features.
System-Parameters Customer-Options Forced Entry of Account Codes Allows system administration to force account users to enter account codes based on user or trunk class of restriction, or by an option on the Toll Analysis table. FEAC provides an easy method of allocating the costs of specific calls to the correct project, department, etc. Global Call Classification Provides call classification outside of North America. Listens for tones and classifies tones detected.
Screen reference IP Stations Controls permission to administer H.323 and/or SoftPhone stations. Must be y for IP phones. ISDN Feature Plus Provides ISDN Feature Plus signaling. This option is enabled when either the ISDN-BRI Trunks field or the ISDN-PRI field is y. ISDN Network Call Redirection Administrable if the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunk field is y. Network Call Redirection (NCR) redirects an incoming ISDN call from an Avaya MultiVantage system to another PSTN endpoint.
System-Parameters Customer-Options Mode Code for Centralized Voice Mail This feature provides the ability to share a Voice Mail System among several switches using the Mode Code - Voice Mail System Interface. Multifrequency Signaling Provides for a screen of number signaling used between the switch and the central office. Multimedia Appl. Server Interface (MASI) Allows users of the Multimedia Communications Exchange (MMCX) to take advantage of certain Avaya MultiVantage telephony features.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 4 display system-parameters customer-options OPTIONAL FEATURES PNC Duplication? n Port Network Support? y Processor and System MSP? n Private Networking? y Remote Office? Restrict Call Forward Off Net? Secondary Data Module? Station and Trunk MSP? Station as Virtual Extension? Survivable Remote Processor? System Management Data Transfer? page 4 Tenant Partitioning? Terminal Trans. Init.
System-Parameters Customer-Options Processor Ethernet Appears only on S8100 Media Server with a CMC1, S8100 Media Server with a G600, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect, and S8300 Media Server. Used to enable use of the ethernet card resident in the processor cabinet for use by the DEFINITY Call Processing software in place of a C-LAN card (located in a port network).
Screen reference Tenant Partitioning Provides for partitioning of attendant groups and/or stations and trunk groups. Typically this is used for multiple tenants in a building or multiple departments within a company or organization. Terminal Trans. Init. (TTI) Allows administrators of Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) to merge an station administered with X in the Port field, to a valid port by dialing a system-wide TTI security code and the extension from a terminal connected to that port.
System-Parameters Customer-Options Field descriptions for Call Center Optional Features display system-parameters customer-options page 5 CALL CENTER OPTIONAL FEATURES Call Center Release: ACD? y BCMS (Basic)? y BCMS/VuStats Service Level? Business Advocate? Call Work Codes? DTMF Feedback Signals For VRU? Dynamic Advocate? Expert Agent Selection (EAS)? EAS-PHD? Forced ACD Calls? Least Occupied Agent? Lookahead Interflow (LAI)? Multiple Call Handling (On Request)? Multiple Call Handling (Forced)? n n y y
Screen reference Call Center Release Displays the call center release installed on the system. Call Work Codes Allows agents to enter digits for an ACD call to record customer-defined events such as account codes or social security numbers. Cannot be set to y if the ACD field is n. DTMF Feedback Signals For VRU Provides support for the use of C and D Tones to VRUs. Dynamic Advocate Software that provides an integrated set of advanced features to optimize call center performance.
System-Parameters Customer-Options Multiple Call Handling (Forced) Forces an agent to be interrupted with an additional ACD call while active on an ACD call. Splits or skills can be one forced, one per skill, or many forced. Cannot be set to y if the ACD field is n and the Forced ACD Calls field is y. PASTE (Display PBX Data on Phone) Provides an interface between the display of a DCP telephone set and PC-based applications.
Screen reference Vectoring (G3V4 Enhanced) Allows the use of enhanced comparators, wildcards in digit strings for matching on collected digits and ANI or II-digits, use of Vector Routing Tables, multiple audio/music sources for use with wait-time command and priority level with the oldest-call-wait conditional. Vectoring (ANI/II-Digits Routing) Provides for ANI and II-Digits vector routing.
System-Parameters Customer-Options Field descriptions for Call Center Optional Features display system-parameters customer-options CALL CENTER OPTIONAL FEATURES VDN of Origin Announcement? n VDN Return Destination? n Page 6 of X VuStats? n VuStats (G3V4 Enhanced)? n Used Logged-In ACD Agents: 500 Logged-In Advocate Agents: 500 Logged-In IP Softphone Agents: 500 Screen 278. Call Center Optional Features Logged-In ACD Agents Number of ACD Agents contracted for.
Screen reference Logged-In IP Softphone Agents Number of IP Softphone Agents contracted for. This field limits the number of logged-in IP Softphone agents to a number no more than the maximum purchased. The value of this field indicates the total of IP Softphone agents that can be logged-in simultaneously. VDN of Origin Announcement Provides a short voice message to an agent indicating the city of origin of the caller or the service requested by the caller based on the VDN used to process the call.
System-Parameters Customer-Options Basic Supplementary Services To use this enhancement, either the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks fields must be y. Provides the following QSIG Supplementary Services: ■ Name ID ■ Transit Capabilities; that is, the ability to tandem QSIG information elements ■ Support of Notification Information Elements for interworking between QSIG and non-QSIG tandemed connections ■ Call Forwarding (Diversion) by forward switching.
Screen reference Transfer Into QSIG Voice Mail Can be enabled only if the Basic Supplementary Services field is y and either the ISDN-PRI Trunk or ISDN-BRI Trunk field is y. Allows transfer directly into the voicemail box on the voicemail system when a QSIG link connects Avaya MultiVantage and the voice mail. Value Added (VALU) Provides additional QSIG functionality, including the ability to send and display calling party information during call alerting.
System-Parameters Customer-Options Phantom Calls Appears when the ASAI Link Plus Capabilities field is y. Enables phantom calls. The Phantom Calls field only applies to links administered as type ASAI. For more information see the Avaya MultiVantage™ CallVisor® ASAI Technical Reference. Field descriptions for Maximum IP Registrations by Product ID Page 8 of X MAXIMUM IP REGISTRATIONS BY PRODUCT ID Product ID_Rel. __________ ___. __________ ___. __________ ___. __________ ___. __________ ___.
Screen reference Valid displays Usage IP_Agent IP Agents IP_eCons SoftConsole IP attendant IP_ROMax R300 Remote Office phones Rel Release number of the IP endpoint. Valid displays 0 to 99 or blank Usage Release number of the IP endpoint System Parameters OCM Call Classification This screen enters the tone characteristics for your country for Outbound Call Management (OCM) applications. It is not required for United States OCM applications.
System Parameters OCM Call Classification Field descriptions for page 1 Page 1 of 2 SYSTEM PARAMETERS OCM CALL CLASSIFICATION TONE DETECTION PARAMETERS Global Classifier Adjustment (dB): ___ USA Default Algorithm? _n_ USA SIT Algorithm? ___ Screen 282. System Parameters OCM Call Classification screen Global Classifier Adjustment (dB) Enter a number to specify the dB loss adjustment. Valid entries Usage 0 to 15 0 is the least and 15 the most adjustment.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 2 Page 2 of 9 SYSTEM PARAMETERS OCM CALL CLASSIFICATION Tone Name _________ Instance Tone Continuous ___ _____ Cadence Step 1. on 2. off 3. on 4. off 5. on 6. off 7. on 8. off Duration Minimum _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ Duration Maximum _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ Screen 283.
Telecommuting Access Instance Enter the instance number of the tone. If the system identifies a tone that matches the characteristics defined on more than one page of this screen the system applies the tone definition from the earlier page. Valid entries Usage 1–8 The number distinguishes tones that have the same name but more than one definition of silence and tone-on characteristics. Tone Continuous Valid entries Usage y Indicates a continuous tone.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 1 add telecommuting-access TELECOMMUTING ACCESS Telecommuting Access Extension: ________ Screen 284. Telecommuting Access Telecommuting Access Extension This only allows remote access to the Telecommuting Access feature. Valid entries Usage Unassigned extension of 1-7 digits or blank Enter an extension that conforms to your system’s dial plan and is not assigned to any other system object.
Tenant Field descriptions for page 1 change tenant 18 Tenant 18 Tenant Description: ________________________________________ Attendant Group: 1 Ext Alert Port (TAAS): _______ Ext Alert (TAAS) Extension: ____ Night Destination: _____ Music Source: 1 Attendant Vectoring VDN: Emergency Number: Screen 285. Tenant screen Attendant Group This required information relates a tenant to an attendant group. NOTE: The default for the system is that all attendant groups exist.
Screen reference Ext Alert Port (TAAS) Enter the necessary characters. Enter Trunk Answer Any Station (TAAS) alert port information, if any. The port type and the object type must be consistent, and the port can be assigned to only one tenant.
Tenant Music Source Valid entries Usage 1–20 Enter the music/tone source for this partition. These sources are defined on the Music Sources screen. Night Destination Valid entries Usage A valid extension Enter the night service station extension, if you want night service for this tenant. Tenant This is a display only field. It contains the tenant number that you entered on the command line.
Screen reference Calling permissions The system default allows each tenant to call only itself and Tenant 1. If you want to change that, you can do that on this screen. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to establish calling permission between the tenant number that you entered on the command line and any other tenant. Tenant This is a display only field. It contains the tenant number that you entered on the command line.
Terminal Parameters * This field appears only if Customize Parameters is y. change terminal-parameters 302/603 302/603 TERMINAL PARAMETERS Default Parameter Set: __ Page 1 of 1 Customize Parameters? _ OPTIONS* Display Mode: _* PRIMARY LEVELS* Voice Transmit (dB): _____* Voice Receive (dB): _____* Touch Tone Transmit (dB): _____* DLI Voltage Level: _________* Voice Sidetone (dB): _____* Touch Tone Sidetone (dB): _____* Screen 288.
Screen reference Customize Parameters Indicates whether the administrator wishes to change one or more of the default parameters. Valid entries Usage y If this field is y (yes), the OPTION and LEVEL fields appear and all fields can be edited. n If this field is n (no), the system uses all default parameters associated with the Default Parameter Set field and all fields are display-only. OPTIONS Display Mode Determines how the #) and ~ characters appear on the phone’s display.
Terminal Parameters Volume for DCP Types This field allows the DCP phone volume to be adjusted while the call is in progress. Valid entries Usage default speaker, handset unchangeable The speaker resets to the default settings while the adjusted handset setting is retained. default settings used to begin each call No adjusted handset and speaker settings are retained. retain handset and speaker between calls The adjusted handset and speaker settings are retained.
Screen reference Voice Receive (dB) Determines the volume of voice inbound to the telephone. Voice Sidetone (dB) Determines the volume of voice fed back from the handset voice microphone to the user’s ear. Voice Transmit (dB) Determines the volume of voice outbound from the telephone. NOTE: You cannot administer all five of the Primary Level fields to +14.0 dB. If you attempt to submit the Terminal Parameters screen with all Primary Levels set to +14.0 dB, you receive an error message.
Terminating Extension Group Terminating Extension Group This screen defines a Terminating Extension Group (TEG). Any phone can be assigned as a TEG member; however, only a multi-appearance phone can be assigned a TEG button with associated status lamp. The TEG button allows the phone user to select a TEG call appearance for answering or for bridging onto an existing call. The TEG members are assigned on an extension number basis.
Screen reference COR Valid entries Usage 0 through 95 Enter the class of restriction (COR) number that reflects the desired restrictions. Coverage Path Enter a number for the call coverage path for this group. A TEG cannot serve as a coverage point; however, calls to a TEG can redirect to coverage. Valid entries Usage 1 to 9999 path number t1 to t999 time of day table blank Group Extension Enter the extension of the terminating extension group.
Terminating Extension Group ISDN Caller Disp This field is required if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y. Valid entries Usage grp-name Specify whether the TEG group name or member name (member of TEG where call terminated) will be sent to the originating user. mbr-name Specify whether the TEG group name or member name (member of TEG where call terminated) will be sent to the originating user.
Screen reference Name of the server as it appears in the Node Names screen. Only appears for DEFINITY R and S8700 IP-Connect configurations. Valid entries Usage Unique identifiers for messaging server equipment. Security Code Valid entries Usage 4-digit security code This code is used for the Demand Print feature. TN Valid entries Usage 1 to 100 Enter the Tenant Partition number. GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Ext Enter the extension number (may not be a VDN extension) assigned to a station.
TFTP Server TFTP Server The Trivial File Transfer Protocol screen allows specification of the TFTP server the Avaya Call Processing engine uses to get download files. change tftp-server Page 1 of 1 TFTP Server Configuration Local Node Name: TFTP Server Node Name: TFTP Server Port: 69 File to Retrieve: File Status: File Size: Filename in Memory: Screen 291. TFTP Server screen Filename in Memory A display-only field showing the name of the file currently in ACP memory.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage 1-15 characters procr Processor CLAN for S8300 Media Server, S8700 Multi-Connect, and S8700 IP-Connect. TFTP Server Node Name The TFTP server node name must be a valid entry from the IP Node Names screen. Valid entries Usage 1-15 characters TFTP Server Port Valid entries Usage 1-64500 Enter a number for the remote TCP port.
Time of Day Routing Plan Act Time Specify the activation time of the coverage path administered in the next CVG PATH field. Enter the information in 24-hour time format. Valid entries Usage 00:01 to 23:59 If there are time gaps in the table, there will be no coverage path in effect during those periods. The first activation time for a day is set to 00:00 and cannot be changed. Activation times for a day must be in ascending order from left to right. CVG Path Enter the coverage path number.
Screen reference System-Parameters Customer-Options screen before you can use Time of Day Routing.
Toll Analysis To maximize System security, Avaya recommends that toll calling areas be restricted as much as possible through the use of the RCL (Restricted Call List) and Toll List fields on this screen.
Screen reference Max Valid entries Usage Min to 28 Enter the maximum number of user-dialed digits the system collects to match to this dialed string. Valid entries Usage 1 to Max Enter the minimum number of user-dialed digits the system collects to match to this dialed string. Min Percent Full Display-only field showing the percentage (0 to 100) of the system’s memory resources that have been used by AAR/ARS. If the figure is close to 100%, you can free-up memory resources.
Trunk Group Dialed String Min Max Toll List 31 10 10 x 40 10 10 x 41 10 10 x 50 10 10 x 51 10 10 x 60 10 10 x 61 10 10 x 70 10 10 x 71 10 10 x 80 10 10 x 81 10 10 x 90 10 10 x 91 10 10 x Unrestricted Call List Valid entries Usage x Enter x to assign the dialed string to one of the system’s Unrestricted Call Lists (UCL).
Screen reference add trunk-group next Page 1 of x TRUNK GROUP Group Number: Group Name: Direction: Dial Access? Queue Length: Comm Type: ___ Group Type: ________ CDR Reports: _ ___________________________ COR: __ TN: ___ TAC: ____ ________ Outgoing Display? _ Trunk Signaling Type: ____ _ Busy Threshold: ___ Night Service: ________ ___ Incoming Destination: ________ _____ Auth Code? _ Trunk Flash? _ BCC: _ ITC? ____ TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type (in/out): ____________ Incoming Rotary Timeout(sec): __ Outgo
Trunk Group Answer Supervision Timeout If the Receive Answer Supervision field is n, use this field to set the answer supervision timer for outgoing and two-way trunks. During a cut-through operation, timing begins after each outgoing digit is sent by the switch and timing ceases after the far-end sends answer supervision. If the timer expires, the switch acts as if it had received answer supervision. On senderized operation, the timer begins after the last digit collected is sent by the switch.
Screen reference BCC Generalized Route Selection uses the BCC to select the appropriate facilities for routing voice and data calls. Far-end tandem switches also use the BCC to select outgoing routing facilities with equivalent BCC classes.The entry in the Bearer Capability Class field is used to select the appropriate facilities for incoming ISDN calls.
Trunk Group Busy Threshold Use this field if you want attendants to control access to outgoing and two-way trunk groups during periods of high use. When the threshold is reached and the warning lamp for that trunk group lights, the attendant can activate trunk group control: internal callers who dial out using a trunk access code will be connected to the attendant, and the attendant can prioritize outgoing calls for the last remaining trunks. Calls handled by AAR and ARS route patterns go out normally.
Screen reference CDR Reports Valid entries Usage y All outgoing calls on this trunk group will generate call detail records. If the Record Outgoing Calls Only field on the CDR System Parameters screen is n, then incoming calls on this trunk group will also generate call detail records. n Calls over this trunk group will not generate call detail records. r (ring-intvl) CDR records will be generated for both incoming and outgoing calls.
Trunk Group Comm Type Use this field to define whether the trunk group carries voice, data, or both. NOTE: Comm Types of avd, rbavd and data require trunk member ports on a DS1 circuit pack. Valid entries avd Usage Enter avd for applications that mix voice and Digital Communication Protocol data, such as video conferencing applications. The receiving switch discriminates voice calls from data calls and directs each to an appropriate endpoint.
Screen reference COR Valid entries Usage 0 to 95 Enter a class of restriction (COR). Classes of restriction control access to trunk groups, including trunk-to-trunk transfers. Tip: Remember that facility restriction levels (FRL) are assigned to classes of restriction. Even if 2 trunk groups have classes of restriction that allow a connection, different facility restriction levels may prevent operations such as off-net call forwarding or outgoing calls by remote access users.
Trunk Group Valid entriesUsage 15 If the Country field is 15, Avaya MultiVantage is administered for Public Network Call Priority (Intrusion and Rering). Also, the Protocol Type field appears for Group Type DID or DIOD. If the Country field is 18, Avaya MultiVantage can be administered for Public Network Call Priority (Mode of Release Control, Forced Disconnect, and Rering). If the Country field is 23 and the Group Type field is either CO or DID, Avaya MultiVantage is administered for Block Collect Calls.
Screen reference Dial Access This field controls whether users can route outgoing calls through an outgoing or two-way trunk group by dialing its trunk access code. Allowing dial access does not interfere with the operation of AAR/ARS. ! SECURITY ALERT: Calls dialed with a trunk access code over WATS trunks bypass AAR/ARS and aren’t restricted by facility restriction levels. For security, you may want to leave the field set to n unless you need dial access to test the trunk group.
Trunk Group Digits This field is used with the Digit Treatment field, and its meaning depends on the entry in that field. If the Digit Treatment field is absorption, this field specifies how many digits are deleted. If the Digit Treatment field is insertion, this field identifies the specific digits that are added. Valid entries Usage 1 to 5 Enter the number of digits to be deleted (absorbed). Up to 4 digits, including * and # Enter the actual digits to be added (inserted).
Screen reference Digital Loss Group This field determines which administered 2-party row in the loss plan applies to this trunk group if the call is carried over a digital signaling port in the trunk group. Valid entries Usage 1 to 17 Shows the index into the loss plan and tone plan. Direction Enter the direction of the traffic on this trunk group. The entry in this field affects which timers appear on the Administrable Timers page. This field appears for all trunk groups except DID and CPE.
Trunk Group Therefore, setting this field incorrectly may cause trunks to become unusable until the problem is detected and the trunks are reset. Valid entries Usage y Enter y to allow trunk-to-trunk transfers involving trunks in this group. Enter y if the far-end switch sends a release signal when the calling party releases an incoming call, and you want to make the far-end switch responsible for releasing the trunk. Enter y to enhance Network Call Redirection.
Screen reference Disconnect Supervision-Out This field indicates whether the switch receives disconnect supervision for outgoing calls over this trunk group. It appears when the Direction field is either outgoing or two-way. (If the Direction field is incoming, the switch internally sets this field to n.) The entry in this field is crucial if you allow trunk-to-trunk transfers.
Trunk Group Disconnect Timing (msec) This field specifies the minimum time in milliseconds that the central office or far-end switch requires to recognize that your switch has disconnected from a call. This timer does not affect ports on a circuit pack that uses the administrable Incoming Disconnect and Outgoing Disconnect timers; in fact, settings on those two timers override this field. Valid entries Usage 140 to 2550 The default of 500 is an industry standard and you shouldn’t change it.
Screen reference NOTE: Even if the trunk group supports full-duplex transmission, other equipment in a circuit may not. Valid entries Usage full Enter full in most cases: this allows simultaneous two-way transmission, which is most efficient. half Enter half to support only one transmission direction at a time. End-to-End Signaling Auxiliary equipment such as paging equipment and music sources may be connected to Avaya MultiVantage by auxiliary trunks.
Trunk Group Extended Loop Range This field appears only for a DID trunk group and is used only with the TN459A circuit pack. Enter y or n depending on the distance between the central office and the switch. If greater than the required distance, then the field should be y. Valid entries Usage y/n Group Name Valid entries Usage 1 to 27 characters Enter a unique name that provides information about the trunk group. Don’t use the default entry or the group type (DID, WATS) here.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage CO CO trunks typically connect your switch to the local central office, but they can also connect adjuncts such as external paging systems and data modules. CPE Use CPE trunks to connect adjuncts, such as paging systems and announcement or music sources, to the switch. DID Use DID trunks when you want people calling your organization to dial individual users directly without going through an attendant or some other central point. Allows Inband ANI.
Trunk Group Valid entries Usage Tandem Tandem trunks connect tandem nodes in a private network. Tandem trunks allow inband ANI. Tie Use tie trunks to connect a switch to a central office or to another switch in a private network. Tie trunks transmit dialed digits with both outgoing and incoming calls, and allow inband ANI. WATS Use WATS trunks to reduce long-distance bills when your organization regularly places many calls to a specific geographical area in North America.
Screen reference Incoming Dial Type Indicates the type of pulses required on an incoming trunk group. Usually, you should match what your central office provides. See ‘‘Types of address transmission’’ on page 1911 for more information. This field appears for Access, APLT, DID, DIOD, DMI-BOS, FX, RLT, Tandem, and WATS trunk groups. It also appears for Tie trunk groups when the Trunk Signaling Type field is blank, cont, or dis.
Trunk Group ITC The Generalized Route Selection feature, part of the automatic routing technology used in Avaya MultiVantage, compares the line coding of available digital facilities and selects appropriate routes for voice and data calls. The Information Transfer Capability field appears when the Comm Type field is data, avd, or rbavd and the BCC field is not 0. Valid entries Usage rest(ricted) Restricted trunks use ami-basic or ami-zcs line coding and can carry only restricted calls.
Screen reference Tip: Whenever possible, use a night service destination on your switch: otherwise some features won’t work correctly, even over a DCS network. Valid entries Usage blank Leave this field blank if the Trunk Type (in/out) field is not auto/…. An extension number (can be a VDN) Enter the extension of your night service destination. attd Calls go to the attendant and are recorded as Listed Directory Number (LDN) calls on call detail records.
Trunk Group Valid entries Usage mf Enter mf if the Trunk Signaling Type field is blank. The Multifrequency Signaling field must be enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen in order for you to enter mf here. You may not enter mf if the Used for DCS field (Field descriptions for page 2) is y. For pulsed and continuous E&M signaling in Brazil and for discontinuous E&M signaling in Hungary, use tone or mf. automatic Enter automatic for tie trunks if the Trunk Signaling Type field is blank.
Screen reference Protocol Type This field specifies the type of line signaling protocol used for DID and DIOD trunk groups. This field appears when the Country field is 15 and is used only by trunk group members administered on a TN2199 or TN464D vintage 3 or later circuit pack. Valid entries Usage inloc (Incoming local) Enter the protocol the central office is using for this trunk group. Only the inloc protocol provides ANI.
Trunk Group NOTE: When you set this field to y, the Outgoing End of Dial (sec) field is not displayed. The firmware timeout on circuit packs controlled by the Outgoing End of Dial (sec) field is automatically set to 0. Receive Release Ack This field appears when the Trunk Signaling Type field is cont or dis and only applies to TN2140 ports (used for Italian and Hungarian tie trunks).
Screen reference the default, you may need to invert one or both bits — to change “1” to “0” and vice-versa in the A-bit, for example. Valid entries Usage A For the TN464B and later circuit packs, indicate which bits, if any, should be inverted. B A&B none A and none For the Japanese 2Mbit trunk circuit pack, indicate which bits, if any, should be inverted. Supplementary Service Protocol Appears only when trunk group Type is ISDN. Valid entries Usage a Allows ASAI Flexible Billing.
Trunk Group Valid entries Usage e Allows ASAI Flexible Billing. Allows DCS with rerouting. DCS with Rerouting must be y, and the Used for DCS field on the trunk group screen must be y. f Feature Plus g ANSI. Available only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI field is y or the Used for DCS field is y. Use g protocol for Network Call Transfer. For more information, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Network Call Redirection.
Screen reference TN Valid entries Usage 1 to 20 Enter a Tenant Partition number to assign this trunk group to the partition. (DEFINITY SI, CSI) 1 to 100 (DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect) Tip: Double-check your entry. If you accidentally enter an unassigned tenant partition number, the system will accept the entry but no calls will go to the trunk group.
Trunk Group Trunk Gain This field specifies the amplification applied to the trunks in this group. With the values of the Trunk Termination and Country fields, the value in this field also determines the input and trans-hybrid balance impedance for TN465B, TN2146, TN2147, and TN2184 ports. All other CO and DID circuit packs are set automatically to high Valid entries Usage high Enter high if users complain of low volume. low Enter low if users complain of squeal or feedback.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage tgi Enter tgi at to administer a two-way tie trunk group between 2 satellites or between the main switch and a satellite. (This trunk group should be administered as tgi on both switches.) (for internal trunks) DIOD trunks support pulsed and continuous E&M signaling in Brazil and discontinuous E&M signaling in Hungary. Use the following entries for DIOD trunks.
Trunk Group See ‘‘Transmission and supervisory signaling’’ on page 1908 for more information. Procedures in ‘‘Managing trunks’’ on page 411 give specific suggestions for signaling to use with different types of trunk groups. Valid entries Usage ground-start Use ground-start signaling for two-way trunks whenever possible: ground-start signaling avoids glare and provides answer supervision from the far end. loop-start In general, try to use loop-start signaling only for one-way trunks.
Screen reference Trunk Type (in/out) Use this field to control the seizure and start-dial signaling used on this trunk group. The setting of the Trunk Signaling Type field can affect the entries allowed in this field. In addition, settings may differ for incoming and outgoing trunks. Valid entries Usage auto There are numerous valid entries for this field: use the online help in the switch administration software to view all the possible combinations.
Trunk Group NOTE: The value in this field affects the appearance of the Incoming Partial Dial (sec) field on the Administrable Timer Page. Version Use this field to adjust the signaling on multi-country CO trunk circuit packs. Entries in this field adjust signaling characteristics on these circuit packs to match the signaling characteristics of the public network in a specific country. The field appears only for CO, FX, and WATS trunk groups when the Country field is 5, 16, or 23.
Screen reference . Setting of the Trunk Type (in/out) field What the Wink Timer field sets …/wink Maximum duration of the wink signal (wait-for-wink-to-end) …/delay Maximum interval after trunk seizure for the wink to begin (wait-for-wink-to-start) This field appears when the “out” side of the entry in the Trunk Type (in/out) field is …/wink or …/delay and the Group Type is tie, access, aplt, dmi-bos, rlt, or tandem.
Trunk Group add trunk-group next Page 2 of x TRUNK FEATURES Measured: ____ ACA Assignment? _ Wideband Support? _ Long Holding Time(hours): _ Maintenance Tests? _ Short Holding Time(sec): _ Data Restriction? _ NCA-TSC Trunk Member: _ Short Holding Threshold: __ Send Name: _ Send Calling Number: _ Used for DCS? _ Suppress # Outpulsing? _ Numbering Format: _______ Outgoing Channel ID Encoding: _________ UUI IE Treatment: ______ Maximum Size of UUI IE Contents: ___ Replace Restricted Numbers? _ Replace Unava
Screen reference ACA Assignment Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if you want Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) measurements to be taken for this trunk group. If y is entered, complete the Long Holding Time, Short Holding Time, and Short Holding Threshold fields. Charge Conversion Avaya MultiVantage multiplies the number of charge units by the value of this field and displays it as a currency amount.
Trunk Group Currency Symbol This field appears for CO, DIOD, FX, and WATS trunk groups when the Direction field is outgoing or two-way. For ISDN trunk groups, it appears when the Charge Advice field is not none. Valid entries Usage 1–3 characters (leading and embedded spaces count as characters) or blank Enter the symbol you want to appear on phone displays before the charge amount. Data Restriction If y, whisper page is denied on this trunk.
Screen reference If you enter control or backoff, and ports for the trunk group are not capable of detecting glare, warnings are generated. The following circuit packs can detect glare: TN767 (all releases), TN760C (or later releases), and TN464C (or later releases). Valid entries Usage control Your switch will seize the trunk and proceed with call setup. The other switch will find another trunk. backoff The other switch will seize the trunk proceed with call setup.
Trunk Group Maintenance Tests Appears when the Group Type field is aplt or tie. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if hourly maintenance tests will be made on this trunk group. Your entry is not saved when the screen is submitted unless one or more trunk members are administered. Measured Indicates if the system will transmit data for this trunk group to the Call Management System (CMS).
Screen reference Network Call Redirection For more information, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Network Call Redirection. Valid entries Usage deflect Use to allow Network Call Deflection. ANSI-transfer Use to allow Network Call Transfer for MCI DEX 600 ISDN trunks. Nortel-transfer Use to allow Network Call Transfer for MCI DMS 250 switches. telcordia-tbct Use to allow Network Call Transfer for Lucent 5ESS or Nortel DMS100 switches.
Trunk Group Path Replacement with Retention Appears when the following fields are set on the Trunk Group screen: trunk group Type is ISDN, Supplementary Service Protocol is b or e, and the Supplementary Services with Rerouting field or the DCS with Rerouting field on the System Parameters Customer Options screen is y. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to retain the original trunk group. Set to n to allow path replacement according to setting on the Path Replacement Method field.
Screen reference Receive Analog Incoming Call ID Your switch stores and displays 15 characters of name and number information associated with an incoming call on analog trunks (ICLID, or incoming call line identification information). This field appears for CO, DID, and DIOD trunk groups when the Analog Trunk Incoming Call ID field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y and the Direction field is incoming or two-way.
Trunk Group For DIOD trunks using TN464F (or later release) or TN2464, displays only when the Group Type field is diod and the Trunk Signaling Type field is pulsed, cont, or dis. Valid entries Usage near-end Enter near-end if this switch generates an outgoing seizure when a trunk is maintenance busied but the far-end switch does not. The seizure is maintained until the maintenance busyout is released.
Screen reference Short Holding Time (seconds) This field appears when the ACA Assignment field is y. Valid entries Usage 0 to 160 Enter the length of time (in seconds) that the system considers as being a short holding time. If 0 is entered, the system will not consider short holding calls. Shuttle This field appears when the Group Type field is co, fx, or wats, the Country field is 15, and the Outgoing Dial Type field is rotary.
Trunk Group Suppress # Outpulsing Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if end-to-end signaling begins with (and includes) “#”. The final “#” is suppressed in cases where the system would normally outpulse it. This field should be y when the Central Office (for example, rotary) or any other facility treats “#” as an error.
Screen reference add trunk-group next Page 3 of x ADMINISTRABLE TIMERS Send Incoming/Outgoing Disconnect Timers to TN465 Ports? _ Outgoing Dial Guard(msec): _____ Incoming Glare Guard(msec): _____ Outgoing Glare Guard(msec): _____ Ringing Monitor(msec): Outgoing End of Dial(sec): Programmed Dial Pause(msec): Flash Length(msec): END TO END SIGNALING Tone (msec): ____ Outgoing Rotary Dial Interdigit (msec): _____ Incoming Seizure(msec): ___ Outgoing Seizure Response(sec): _____ Disconnect Signal Error(se
Trunk Group Cama Outgoing Dial Guard (msec) This field appears when Group Type is cama (the trunk group type used for emergency 911 service). Valid entries Usage 25 to 6375 in increments of 25 Enter the minimum interval between the receiving switch’s seizure acknowledgment and the outpulsing of digits by this switch. Cama Wink Start Time (msec) This field appears when Group Type is cama.
Screen reference Glare This field is only administrable if the Trunk Type field is cont and the trunk group Direction field is two-way or outgoing. Only TN2140 ports receive this timer. Valid entries Usage 40 to 100 in increments of 10 Enter the minimum acceptable interval (in msec) between the moment your switch sends an outgoing seizure and the moment it receives a seizure acknowledgment. If acknowledgment is received before the timer expires, glare is assumed.
Trunk Group Incoming Glare Guard (msec) This field only appears when the trunk group Direction field is two-way. Valid entries Usage 100 to 25500 Enter the minimum interval that must elapse between a trunk’s release from an incoming call and its seizure for an outgoing call. This field cannot be blank. This delay gives the far-end time to release all equipment after the trunk is released.
Screen reference Normal Outgoing Seize Send (msec) This field appears only if the Trunk Type field is dis and the trunk group Direction field is two-way or outgoing. Only TN2140 ports receive this timer. Valid entries Usage 10 to 990 in increments of 10 Enter the duration of the signal your switch sends for an outgoing seizure. Outgoing Dial Guard (msec) Valid entries Usage 100 to 25500 Enter the minimum interval between seizure acknowledgment of a trunk and the outpulsing of digits.
Trunk Group Outgoing End of Dial (sec) This field controls firmware answer supervision timers on circuit packs that have them. It appears when the Direction field is outgoing or two-way and the Receive Answer Supervision field is n. If the Receive Answer Supervision field is y, this field does not appear and the firmware timer on the appropriate circuit pack is automatically disabled.
Screen reference Outgoing Last Digit (sec) This field is only administrable if the Trunk Type field is dis or cont and the trunk group Direction field is two-way or outgoing. Only TN497 and TN2140 ports receive this timer. Valid entries Usage 1 to 40 in increments of 1 Enter the maximum time that the switch will wait for the next digit dialed. After the timer expires, no more digits are accepted by the circuit pack. Outgoing Rotary Dial Interdigit (msec) This field only appears when: 1.
Trunk Group Outgoing Seizure Response (sec) This timer is sent to the TN438B, TN439, TN447, TN458, TN464B (or later), TN465B (or later), TN767, TN2140, TN2147, TN2184, TN2199, and TN2242 circuit packs. Valid entries Usage 1 to 255 in increments of 1 Enter the maximum interval that the switch should wait after sending a seizure signal to receive seizure acknowledgment from the far-end. If the acknowledgment is not received in this time, a seizure failure response is uplinked.
Screen reference Ringing Monitor (msec) This timer is sent to TN464C (or later), TN767, TN438 (all), TN447, TN465 (all), TN2138, TN2147, TN2184, and TN2199 CO circuit packs. Valid entries Usage 200 to 51000 Enter the minimum time the switch requires to determine if a trunk disconnects. The field cannot be blank. If the ringing signal disappears for a duration longer than the time specified in this field, the switch assumes the call has been disconnected.
Trunk Group END TO END SIGNALING Pause (msec) THis field is administrable only if the Trunk Type field is blank. All CO, DIOD, and tie circuit packs that accept administrable timers accept this timer. However, this timer is sent only to the following circuit packs: TN464B (or later), TN767, TN436B, TN459B, TN2146, TN2199, and TN2242, and TN429 and TN2184 ports in a DID trunk group.
Screen reference Frequency This field identifies the PPM pulse frequency(ies) sent by the public network. It appears if the Direction field is outgoing or two-way and PPM is y. Circuit packs can detect up to three different frequencies, (12kHz, 16kHz, and 50Hz), plus two frequency combinations, (50Hz/12kHz and 50Hz/16kHz). This field controls TN465B, TN2138, and TN2184 circuit packs. Valid entries Usage 12k The TN465B (or later) and TN2184 can only detect 12k and 16kHz PPM.
Trunk Group PPM For CO, DIOD, FX, PCOL, and WATS trunks. This field appears when the Direction field is outgoing or two-way. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if Periodical Pulse Metering (PPM) pulses should be collected from the public network to determine call cost. If this field is y, the Frequency field appears. Valid entries Usage 10 Enter the rate (pulses per second) at which outgoing rotary pulses are sent over this trunk group.
Screen reference Field descriptions for page 4 This screen appears when the Direction field on Page 1 is outgoing or two-way and the ATMS field is y on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. The figure below shows a common configuration for page 4 of the Trunk Group screen when the Group Type field is co. This screen is only an example, and the fields shown below may change or disappear according to specific field settings.
Trunk Group Trunk Contact Valid entries Usage 0 to 25 alphanumeric characters Enter the name and/or telephone number of someone from the trunk vendor who can be contacted in the event of problems with the trunks. Trunk Length This field is not required. Since noise on a trunk increases with the length of the trunk, however, this information may be useful, Valid entries Usage Use this field to record the length of the trunk group in kilometers or miles.
Screen reference Valid entries Usage low-lts low-level tone source 100 type 102 type 100 102 The following table explains the differences between types of terminating test lines: Type TTL Description Example 105-w-rl Full range of 18 measurements or some defaults for return loss used (56A) TN771B, ZLC12 and SN261B circuit packs and new 56A mini-responder 105-wo-rl Cannot return default values for far-end return loss Older 56A mini-responder high-level-tone Sends a fixed sequence of tones at
Trunk Group Four different versions of the ATMS Threshold Administration page can appear depending upon the measurements allowed by the TTL type selected. The four possibilities are: 1. 105-w-rl and 105-wo-rl — All thresholds appear. 2. high-lts and low-lts — All thresholds (except maximum C-notched noise) appear. 3. 100 — All thresholds (except maximum c-notched noise, 404Hz loss, and 2804 Hz loss) appear. 4. 102 — Only 1004 Hz loss threshold appears.
Screen reference Marginal Threshold - +Dev - 404 Hz Loss Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Enter the maximum positive deviation of measured loss at 404 Hz from the 1004 Hz test tone loss level (in dB) allowed before reporting a trunk as out of tolerance. Smaller dB values are more restrictive.
Trunk Group Marginal Threshold - Minimum ERL Valid entries Usage 0 to 40 Enter the minimum low-frequency echo return loss in dB allowed before reporting a trunk as out of tolerance. Larger values are more restrictive. Marginal Threshold - Maximum C Message Noise Valid entries Usage 15 to 55 Enter the maximum C-message noise phone as measured within the voice band frequency range (500 to 2500 Hz) allowed before reporting a trunk as out of tolerance. Smaller values are more restrictive.
Screen reference Maximum Percentage of Trunks Which Can Be Removed From Service by ATMS Appears when the Allow ATMS Busyout, Error Logging and Alarming field is y. Valid entries Usage 0, 25, 50, 75, 100 Enter the highest percentage of trunks from the trunk group that can be removed from service at one time because of unacceptable transmission measurement results.
Trunk Group Unacceptable Threshold - Max - 1004 Hz Loss Valid entries Usage 0 to 21 Enter the maximum signal loss allowed for a 1004 Hz test tone (in dB) before a trunk is reported as unacceptable. A smaller dB value is more restrictive. Unacceptable Threshold - Min - 1004 Hz Loss Valid entries Usage -2 to 21 Enter the minimum signal loss allowed for a 1004 Hz test tone (in dB) before a trunk is reported as unacceptable. A larger dB value is more restrictive.
Screen reference Unacceptable Threshold - Minimum SRL-HI Valid entries Usage 0 to 40 Enter the minimum high-frequency signaling return loss in dB allowed before reporting a trunk as unacceptable. Larger values are more restrictive. Unacceptable Threshold - Minimum SRL-LO Valid entries Usage 0 to 40 Enter the minimum low-frequency signaling return loss in dB allowed before reporting a trunk as unacceptable. Larger values are more restrictive.
Trunk Group Ans Delay ! CAUTION: Customers should not attempt to administer this field. Please contact your Avaya representative for assistance Valid entries Usage 20 to 5100 in Specifies the length of time (in ms) your switch will wait before it sends answer supervision for incoming calls on tie trunks using the TN722A or later, TN760 (B, C, or D), TN767, TN464 (any suffix), TN437, TN439, TN458, or TN2140 circuit packs. increments of 20 blank Same as setting the field to zero.
Screen reference ! CAUTION: Customers should not attempt to administer this field. Please contact your Avaya representative for assistance. Valid entries Usage e&m Enter e&m for 6-wire connections that pair 2 signaling wires with 4 voice wires. You’ll use e&m in the vast majority of systems in the U.S. simplex Enter simplex for 4-wire connections that do not use an additional signaling pair. This configuration is very rare in the U.S.
Trunk Group Port If this trunk is registered as an endpoint in an IP application, this field will display T00000. Valid entries Usage 01 through 44 First and second characters are the cabinet number. (DEFINITY R) or 01 through 03 (DEFINITY CSI, SI) or 1 through 64 (S8700 IP-Connect / S8700 Multi-Connect / S8300 Media Server) A through E Third character is the carrier. 0 through 20 Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number. 01 through 04 Six and seventh characters are the circuit number.
Screen reference NOTE: Members assigned to IP trunk groups will display a value of “T00001.” Sfx This display-only field shows the model suffix for the type of circuit pack physically installed at the location to which this member is assigned. If no circuit pack is installed at the port address you enter, the field is blank. Total Administered Members This display-only field shows the total number of members administered in the trunk group.
Uniform Dial Plan Report See ‘‘ISDN service’’ on page 1730 for detailed information on Integrated Services Digital Network. Uniform Dial Plan Report . list uniform-dialplan UNIFORM DIAL PLAN REPORT Matching Pattern 2 4 43659 6 73012 74100 Len 4 5 5 6 5 5 Del 0 1 1 1 1 0 Insert Digits 817 334 928 81 Net aar aar aar ext enp ars Conv n n y n n y Node Num 31 Screen 300. Uniform Dial Plan Report screen Matching Pattern The number you want the switch to match to dialed numbers.
Screen reference Node Num The Extension Number Portability (ENP) node number. Uniform Dial Plan Table The Uniform Dialing Plan field must be y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen before you can administer this table. The UDP provides a common 3- to 7-digit dial plan length — or a combination of extension lengths — that can be shared among a group of switches.
Uniform Dial Plan Table Conv Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow additional digit conversion Valid entries Usage 0–3 Enter the number of digits to delete before routing the call. This number must be less than or equal to the number entered in the Len field. Del Insert Digits Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Enter the digits that replace the deleted portion of the dialed number. Leave this field blank to simply delete the digits.
Screen reference Net Enter the switch network used to analyze the converted number. Valid entries Usage aar, ars, enp, ext The converted digit-string will be routed either as an extension number or via its converted AAR address, its converted ARS address, or its ENP node number. If you enter enp, you must enter the ENP node number in the Node Num field. The Insert Digits field must be blank, and Conv must be n. Node Num This is the ENP (Extension Number Portability) Node Number.
Vector Directory Number Field descriptions for page 1 change vdn 5000 Page 1 of 1 VECTOR DIRECTORY NUMBER Extension: Name: Vector Number: Attendant Vectoring: Meet-me Conferencing? Allow VDN Override? COR: TN: Measured: Acceptable Service Level (sec): VDN of Origin Annc. Extension: 1st Skill: 2nd Skill: 3rd Skill: 5000 234 n n n 59 1 none 301 Screen 302.
Screen reference For Expert Agent Selection (EAS), if this field is y on the original VDN, the Skills of the new VDN will be used. If this field is n on the original VDN, the Skills of the original VDN will be used. For Best Service Routing (BSR), if this field is y on the original VDN, the BSR Application and Available Agent Strategy of the new VDN will be used. If this field is n on the original VDN, the BSR Application and Available Agent Strategy of the original VDN will be used.
Vector Directory Number Extension This is a display-only field when using an administration command such as add or change to access the screen. The extension is a 1- to 7-digit number that starts with a valid first digit and length as defined by the System’s dial plan. Measured This field appears if the Meet-me Conferencing field is n. Used to collect measurement data for this VDN. Data may be collected for reporting by BCMS or CMS.
Screen reference Meet-me Conference This field appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Enhanced Conferencing field is y. This field determines if the VDN is a Meet-me Conference VDN. NOTE: If the VDN extension is part of your DID block, external users will be able to access the conference VDN. If the VDN extension is not part of your DID block, only internal callers on the your network (including DCS or QSIG) or remote access callers can access the conference VDN.
Vector Directory Number TN Specifies the Tenant Partition number for this VDN. Valid entries Usage 1 to 20 For R servers. 1 to 100 For S8700 IP-Connect. VDN of Origin Annc. Extension Data for this field appears only when, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the VDN of Origin Announcement field is y and, on this screen, the Meet-me Conferencing field is n. Valid entries Usage VDN extension Enter the extension number of the VDN of Origin announcement.
Screen reference AUDIX Name Only appears for DEFINITY R and S8700 IP-Connect configurations. If this VDN is associated with the AUDIX vector, enter the name of the AUDIX machine as it appears in the Node Names screen. BSR Application To use multi-site Best Service Routing with this VDN, specify an application plan for the VDN. This field appears if, on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Lookahead Interflow (LAI) and Vectoring (Best Service Routing) fields are y.
Vector Directory Number ■ An adjunct routing step routes a direct agent call, with the coverage option set to y For more information, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide. Valid entries Usage y/n Messaging Server Name Only appears for R and S8700 IP-Connect configurations. Enter the name of the AUDIX machine as it appears on the Node Names screen.
Screen reference VDN Timed ACW Interval When a value is entered in this field, an agent in auto-in work mode who receives a call from this VDN is automatically placed into After Call Work (ACW) when the call drops. When the administered time is over, the agent automatically becomes available. This field has priority over the Timed ACW Interval field on the Hunt Group screen. Valid entries Usage 1-9999 or Enter the number of seconds the agent should remain in ACW following the call.
Vector Directory Number Conference Controller This field appears only if the Meet-me Conference field is y. This field controls which user is allowed to change the access code for a Meet-me Conference VDN using a feature access code. This can be a local user or someone dialing in via remote access trunks. Valid entries Usage extension number or blank If an extension number is entered, only a user at that extension can change the access code for that VDN using a feature access code.
Screen reference 1316 Issue 5 October 2002 555-233-506
Command reference Before you start MultiVantage software utilizes the following command syntax: action object qualifier Use the commands in the tables below to access each administration screen. Brackets [ ] indicate the qualifier is optional. Single quotes (‘ ’) indicate the text inside the quote must be entered exactly as shown or an abbreviated form of the word may be entered. MAX is the maximum number available in your system configuration. Some qualifiers aren’t available on all systems.
Command reference AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table 1318 Action Object Qualifier change aar analysis Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’ [‘min’(1-MAX)] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) change ars analysis Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’ [‘location’ (1-MAX or ‘all’)] [‘min’(1-MAX)] (DEFINITY R) display aar analysis Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’, [‘min’ (1-MAX)] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display ars analysis Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’
Before you start AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table Action Object Qualifier change aar digit-conversion Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’ or ‘X’ (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) change aar digit-conversion Enter [‘start’ matching pattern] [‘count’ (1-MAX)] [‘schedule’] (S8700 Multi-Connect, S8700 IP-Connect) change ars digit-conversion Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’ or ‘X’, [‘location’ (1-MAX or ‘all’)] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) change ars digit-conversion Enter digits between 0 to 9, [‘location’
Command reference Action Object Qualifier list aar digit-conversion Enter [‘start’ matching pattern] [‘count’ (1-MAX)] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) list ars digit-conversion Enter [‘start’ matching pattern] [‘count’ (1-MAX)], [‘location (1-MAX or ‘all’)], [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) list ars digit-conversion Enter [‘start’ matching pattern] [‘count’ (1-MAX)], [‘location (1-MAX or ‘all’)], [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Abbreviated Dialing
Before you start Action Object Qualifier display abbreviated-dialing enhanced Enter dial code first digit(s): (3 digit list) 0-9, (4 digit list) 00-99 [‘list’ 1-2] [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) remove abbreviated-dialing enhanced Enter dial code first digit(s): (3 digit list) 0-9, (4 digit list) 00-99 (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) remove abbreviated-dialing enhanced Enter dial code first digit(s): (3 digit list) 0-9, (4 digit list) 00-99 [‘list’ 1-2] [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect
Command reference 1322 Action Object Qualifier list abbreviated-dialing group [‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) list abbreviated-dialing group [‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n] [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) remove abbreviated-dialing group 1-MAX (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Action Object Qualifier change abbreviated-dialing personal Extension with personal list and ‘list’ (1-3) (
Before you start Action Object Qualifier display abbreviated-dialing system [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] display abbreviated-dialing system [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) remove abbreviated-dialing system Action Object Qualifier add abbreviated-dialing 7103A-buttons — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) change abbreviated-dialing 7103A-buttons — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display abbreviated-dialing 7103A-buttons [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display abbreviated-dialin
Command reference Access Endpoint 1324 Action Object Qualifier add access-endpoint xxxx (ext. or ‘next’) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change access-endpoint xxxx (assigned ext.) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) change access-endpoint xxxx (ext.) (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display access-endpoint xxxx (assigned ext.) [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display access-endpoint xxxx (ext.
Before you start Administered Connection Action Object Qualifier add administered-connection 1-MAX (or ‘next’) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change administered-connection 1-MAX (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display administered-connection 1-MAX (or ‘all’) [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display administered-connection 1-MAX (or ‘all’) [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) duplicate administered-conne
Command reference Alias Station Action Object Qualifier change alias station (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display alias station [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display alias station [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Alphanumeric Dialing Table 1326 Action Object Qualifier change alphanumeric-dial-table [‘entry ], [‘next’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display alphanumeric-dial-table [‘entry ], [‘print’ or
Before you start Announcements/Audio Sources Action Object Qualifier change announcements 1-MAX (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change integ-annc-brd-loc (DEFINITY CSI, SI) display announcements 1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display announcements 1-MAX [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display integrated-annc-boards [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display integrated-annc-boards [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Con
Command reference Action Object Qualifier copy announcements [‘SPE-A’, or ‘SPE-B’] [‘target device, [‘disk’ or ‘removable-media’]] (DEFINITY R) restore announcements [[‘to cabinet (1-44]; carrier (A-E); slot (0-20), [‘disk’ or ‘removable-media’]] (DEFINITY R) [[‘to cabinet (1-3]; carrier (A-E); slot (0-20)] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) save announcements [‘SPE-A’, ‘SPE-B’, ‘active’, ‘standby’, ‘either’, ‘both’] [‘disk’ or ‘removable-media’], [‘from’ [cabinet (1-44); carrier (A-E); slot (00-20)] (DEFINITY
Before you start ARS Toll Table Action Object Qualifier change ars toll n:xxx (1–MAX:office code) n:xyy: n(1-MAX); ‘:’; x(2-MAX;y(0-MAX);y(0-MAX) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display ars toll n:xxx (1–MAX:office code) n:xyy: n(1-MAX); ‘:’; x(2-MAX;y(0-MAX);y(0-MAX) [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display ars toll n:xxx (1–MAX:office code) n:xyy: n(1-MAX); ‘:’; x(2-MAX;y(0-MAX);y(0-MAX) [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) ATM Board A
Command reference Authorization Code — COR Mapping Action Object Qualifier change authorization-code auth (4-13 digit number) (DEFINITY R CSI, SI, S8700 Multi-Connect) display authorization-code auth (4-13 digit number), [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display authorization-code auth (4-13 digit number) [‘schedule’] (S8700 Multi-Connect) list authorization-code none (DEFINITY R) list authorization-code [‘start’ code], [‘count’ n], [‘cor’ x], [‘to-cor’ x], [‘print’ or ‘schedul
Before you start Boot Image Action Object Qualifier get boot-image The physical location of the circuit pack [cabinet (1-64); carrier (A-E); slot (0-20) (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) get boot-image Board location [cabinet (1-3); carrier (A-E); slot (0-20), [‘print’] DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) set boot-image Board [cabinet (1-3); carrier (A-E); slot (0-20), ‘image’ (1 or 2) (DEFINITY CSI, SI) set boot-image The physical location of the circuit pack [cabinet (1-64); carrier (A-E); slot (0-2
Command reference Button Type Action Object Qualifier list usage button-type [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R) list usage button-type crss-alert [‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) list usage button-type hunt-ns [hunt-grp’ x], [‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) list usage button-type night-serv [‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) list usage button-type trunk-ns [‘trunk-grp’ x], [‘sc
Before you start CAMA Numbering Format Action Object Qualifier change cama-numbering — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SIR, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display cama-numbering [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display cama-numbering [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) CDR System Parameters Action Object Qualifier change system-parameters cdr — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display system-parameters cdr [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFI
Command reference Class of Service Action Object Qualifier change cos — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display cos [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display cos [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect S8700 Multi-Connect) Code Calling IDs Action Object Qualifier change paging code-calling-ids (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect S8700 Multi-Connect) display paging code-calling-ids [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display paging code-call
Before you start Console-Parameters Action Object Qualifier change console-parameters — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display console-parameters [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display console-parameters [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Coverage Answer Group Action Object Qualifier add coverage answer-group 1-MAX (or ‘next’) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change coverage answer-group 1-MAX (DE
Command reference Coverage Path Action Object Qualifier add coverage path 1-MAX (or ‘next’) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect) change coverage path 1-MAX (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect) display coverage path 1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display coverage path 1-MAX [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect) list coverage path [‘path’ x] [‘to-path’ x][‘count’ n] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) list coverage path [‘path’ x] [‘to-path’ x][‘count’ n] [‘
Before you start CTI-Link Action Object Qualifier add cti-link (or ‘next’) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect) busyout cti-link (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) change cti-link (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect) display cti-link [‘count’ n] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R) display cti-link [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) list cti-link [cti-link number 1-MAX], [‘count’ n], [print or schedule] (DEFINITY R,
Command reference Data Modules Action Object Qualifier add data-module extension (or ‘next’) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change data-module extension (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display data-module extension [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display data-module extension [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) list data-module [‘ext’ x] [‘to-ext’ x][‘name’ x][‘count’ n] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFIN
Before you start Daylight Savings Rules Action Object Qualifier change daylight-savings-rules — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display daylight-savings-rules [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display daylight-savings-rules [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) DCS to QSIG TSC Gateway Action Object Qualifier change isdn dcs-qsig-tsc-gateway — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display isdn dcs-qsig-tsc-gate
Command reference Dial Plan Parameters Action Object Qualifier change dialplan parameters — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display dialplan parameters [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)* display dialplan parameters [‘schedule’]** S8700 IP-Connect), S8700 Multi-Connect *The print option is not valid on S8100, S8300, and S8700 Media Servers. **The schedule option is not valid on S8100 Media Servers.
Before you start Digit Absorption Action Object Qualifier change digit-absorption 0-4 (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect), S8700 Multi-Connect display digit-absorption 0-4 [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display digit-absorption 0-4 [‘schedule’] ( S8700 IP-Connect), S8700 Multi-Connect Digit String Action Object Qualifier list usage digit-string Enter string (0-9, +?*#~prwWms) [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) list usage digit-string Enter string (0-9, +?*#
Command reference DLG Interface Action Object Qualifier status dlg interface [‘print’] DS1 Circuit Pack 1342 Action Object Qualifier add ds1 [cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)]; module (V1-V9) (DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) add ds1 [cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)]; module (V1-V9) (DEFINITY CSI, SI) change ds1 [cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)]; module (V1-V9) (DEFINITY R,
Before you start Action Object Qualifier list measurements ds1 summary [cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)]; module (V1-V9), [‘local’, ‘carrier-local’, or ‘remote’], [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R) list measurements ds1 summary [cabinet (1-3)]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20); OR [gateway (1-10)]; module (V1-V9), [‘local’, ‘carrier-local’, or ‘remote’], [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) list measurements ds1 summary [cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot (0
Command reference 1344 Action Object Qualifier list measurements ds1 log [cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)]; module (V1-V9), [‘local’, ‘carrier-local’, or ‘remote’], [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) remove ds1 [cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)]; module (V1-V9) (DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) remove ds1 [cabinet (1-3)]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20); OR [gateway (1-10)]; module (V1-V9) (DEFINITY
Before you start Ethernet Option Action Object Qualifier get ethernet-option [cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20) (DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) get ethernet-option [cabinet (1-3)]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20), [‘print’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) set boot-image [cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20), ‘image’ (1 or 2) (DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Extended Pickup Group Action Object Qualifier change extended-pickup -group 1-MAX (DEFINITY R
Command reference Extension Action Object Qualifier list usage extension Assigned extension [‘vector’], [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) list usage extension Assigned extension [‘vector’], [‘schedule’] S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Extensions Administered to have an MCT-Control Button Action Object Qualifier change mct-group-extensions — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect) Action Object Qualifier list extension-type [extension (starting number)][‘type’ x] [‘cor
Before you start Feature Access Code Action Object Qualifier change feature-access-codes — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display feature-access-codes [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display feature-access-codes [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Feature-Related System Parameters Action Object Qualifier change system-parameters features — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display system-parameters fe
Command reference History Action Object Qualifier list history Enter [‘date’ MM or MM/DD][‘time’ HH or HH:MM][‘login’ x][‘action’ x][‘object’ x][‘qualifier’ x], [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) list history Enter [‘date’ MM or MM/DD][‘time’ HH or HH:MM][‘login’ x][‘action’ x][‘object’ x][‘qualifier’ x], [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Holiday Table 1348 Action Object Qualifier change holiday-table 1-MAX (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Co
Before you start Hospitality Action Object Qualifier change system-parameters hospitality — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display system-parameters hospitality [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display system-parameters hospitality [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Hunt Group Action Object Qualifier add hunt-group 1-MAX (or ‘next’) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change hunt-group 1-MAX (DEFINITY
Command reference 1350 Action Object Qualifier remove hunt-group 1-MAX (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) list usage hunt-group Assigned group (1-MAX), [‘vector’][‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) list usage hunt-group Assigned group (1-MAX), [‘vector’][‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) list members hunt-group Assigned hunt group number, [‘ext’ x], [‘to-ext’ x], [‘name’ x], [‘loginid’ x], [‘to-loginid’], [‘logname x], [‘count’ n], [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFIN
Before you start Intercom Group Action Object Qualifier add intercom-group 1-MAX (or ‘next’) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change intercom-group 1-MAX (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display intercom-group 1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) display intercom-group 1-MAX [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) list intercom-group [‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n][‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CS
Command reference Intra-Switch CDR Action Object Qualifier add intra-switch-cdr (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change intra-switch-cdr extension, (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display intra-switch-cdr extension, [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) display intra-switch-cdr extension, [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) list intra-switch-cdr extension, [‘count’ n] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI)
Before you start IP Interfaces Action Object Qualifier change ip-interfaces (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display ip-interfaces [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) display ip-interfaces [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) IP Network Map Action Object Qualifier change ip-network-map (DEFINITY CSI, SI) display ip-network-map [‘print’ or “schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) IP Network Regions Action Object Qualifier change ip-network -
Command reference IP Node Name Action Object Qualifier change node-name ip Enter [node-name (up to 15 characters)] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) list-usage node-name node name, [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) list-usage node-name node name, [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) IP Options System Parameters Action Object Qualifier display system-parameters ip-options 1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) display system
Before you start IP Services Action Object Qualifier change ip-services (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display ip-services [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display ip-services [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) ISDN Numbering — Private Action Object Qualifier change isdn private-numbering (DEFINITY R CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display isdn private-numbering [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) di
Command reference ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack 1356 Action Object Qualifier add bri-trunk-board [cabinet (1-44); carrier (A-E); slot (0-20) or [gateway (1-80)]; [module (V1-V9)] (DEFINITY R) add bri-trunk-board [cabinet (1-3); carrier (A-E); slot (0-20) or [gateway (1-10)]; [module (V1-V9)] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) add bri-trunk-board [cabinet (1-64); carrier (A-E); slot (0-20) or [gateway (1-250)]; [module (V1-V9)] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change bri-trunk-board [cabinet (1-44); ca
Before you start Action Object Qualifier remove bri-trunk-board [cabinet (1-44); carrier (A-E); slot (0-20) or [gateway (1-80)]; [module (V1-V9)] (DEFINITY R) remove bri-trunk-board [cabinet (1-3); carrier (A-E); slot (0-20) or [gateway (1-10)]; [module (V1-V9)] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) remove bri-trunk-board [cabinet (1-64); carrier (A-E); slot (0-20) or [gateway (1-250)]; [module (V1-V9)] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) 555-233-506 Issue 5 October 2002 1357
Command reference Language Translations (Display Messages) 1358 Action Object Qualifier change display-messages auto-wakeup-dn-dst — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display display-messages auto-wakeup-dn-dst [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display display-messages auto-wakeup-dn-dst [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change display-messages call-identifiers — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display
Before you start Action Object Qualifier change display-messages malicious-call-trace — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display display-messages malicious-call-trace [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display display-messages malicious-call-trace [‘schedule’] ( S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change display-messages miscellaneous-features — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display display-messages miscellaneous-featu
Command reference 1360 Action Object Qualifier change display-messages time-of-day-routing — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display display-messages time-of-day-routing [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display display-messages time-of-day-routing [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change display-messages transfer-conference — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display display-messages transfer-conference
Before you start Listed Directory Numbers Action Object Qualifier change listed-directory-numbers — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display listed-directory-numbers [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display listed-directory-numbers [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Action Object Qualifier change locations — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display locations [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, S
Command reference Login Administration Action Object Qualifier add login login-id (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) (not on S8700 Multi-Connect) change login login-id (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) (not on S8700 Multi-Connect) display login login-id [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) (not on S8700 Multi-Connect) Loudspeaker Paging Action Object Qualifier change paging loudspeaker — (DEFINITY R CSI, SI, S8700 Multi-Connect) display paging loudspeaker [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)
Before you start Action Object Qualifier list measurements announcements integ-all [‘yesterday-peak’, ‘today-peak’ or ‘last-hour’] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) list measurements-announcementsboard [‘to cabinet (1-44]; carrier (A-E); slot (0-20), or [‘disk’ or [gateway (1-80)]; V9 ‘yesterday-peak’, ‘today-peak’ or ‘last-hour’ [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R) list measurements-announcementsboard [‘to cabinet (1-3]; carrier (A-E); slot (0-20), or [‘disk’ or [gateway (1-10)]; V9 ‘y
Command reference Media Gateway Action Object Qualifier add media-gateway 1-MAX (or ‘next’) (S8700 Multi-Connect) list media-gateway 1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] list media-gateway [‘schedule’] (S8700 Multi-Connect) remove media-gateway 1-MAX (S8700 Multi-Connect) Mode Code Related System Parameters Action Object Qualifier change system-parameters mode-code — (DEFINITY R, S8700 Multi-Connect) display system-parameters mode-code [‘print’] (DEFINITY R, S8700 Multi-Connect) Modem Pool
Before you start Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters Action Object Qualifier change system-parameters multifrequency-signaling (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 Multi-Connect) display system-parameters multifrequency-signaling [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display system-parameters multifrequency-signaling [‘schedule’] (S8700 Multi-Connect) Music Sources Action Object Qualifier change music-sources [1-MAX] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 Multi-Connect) display music-
Command reference Packet Gateway Board Action Object Qualifier add pgate Enter the circuit pack cabinet, carrier, and slot (DEFINITY R only) change pgate Enter the circuit pack cabinet, carrier, and slot (DEFINITY R only) display pgate Enter the circuit pack cabinet, carrier, and slot (DEFINITY R only) remove pgate Enter the circuit pack cabinet, carrier, and slot (DEFINITY R only) Partition Route Table Action Object Qualifier change partition-route-table [‘index’ (1-MAX)] (DEFINITY R,
Before you start Action Object Qualifier display pickup-group [‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display pickup-group [‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n] [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) remove pickup-group 1-MAX (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) 555-233-506 Issue 5 October 2002 1367
Command reference Port Action Object Qualifier display port [[‘to cabinet (1-44]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20); port (pp or ppp)] (DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display port [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) PRI Endpoint 1368 Action Object Qualifier add pri-endpoint extension or ‘next’ (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change pri-endpoint extension (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display
Before you start QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway Action Object Qualifier change isdn qsig-dcs-tsc-gateway — (DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display isdn qsig-dcs-tsc-gateway [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R) display isdn qsig-dcs-tsc-gateway [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Remote Access Action Object Qualifier change remote-access 1-MAX (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display remote-access [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY
Command reference Remote Office 1370 Action Object Qualifier add remote-office 1-MAX or ‘next’ (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect) (not for S8700 Multi-Connect) change remote-office 1-MAX (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect) (not for S8700 Multi-Connect) display remote-office 1-MAX, [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display remote-office 1-MAX, [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect) (not for S8700 Multi-Connect) list remote-office [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)
Before you start RHNPA Table Action Object Qualifier change rhnpa Enter RHNPA and code n:xxx n(1-MAX) x(0-MAX) x(0-MAX) x(0-MAX) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display rhnpa Enter RHNPA and code n:xxx n(1-MAX) x(0-MAX) x(0-MAX) x(0-9) [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display rhnpa Enter RHNPA and code n:xxx n(1-MAX) x(0-MAX) x(0-MAX) x(0-9) [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Route Pattern Action Object Qualifier change route-patte
Command reference Security-Related System Parameters Action Object Qualifier change system-parameters security — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display system-parameters security [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display system-parameters security [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Signaling Group 1372 Action Object Qualifier add signaling-group 1-MAX or ‘next’ (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change
Before you start Site Data Action Object Qualifier change site-data — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display site-data [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display site-data [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Action Object Qualifier add station extension (or ‘next’) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change station extension (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display station [
Command reference Action Object Qualifier list station [‘ext’ x][‘to-ext’ x][‘port’ x][‘type’ x][‘movable’ x][‘count’ n], [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) status station extension [‘print’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) status station extension (S8700 Multi-Connect) System Parameters Call Coverage/Call Forwarding Action Object Qualifier change system-parameters coverage-forwarding — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display system-parameters coverag
Before you start System Parameters Crisis Alert Action Object Qualifier change system-parameters crisis-alert — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display system-parameters crisis-alert [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display system-parameters crisis-alert [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) System Parameters Customer-Options Action Object Qualifier display system-parameters customer-options [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI,
Command reference System Parameters IP Options Action Object Qualifier change system-parameters ip-options — (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display system-parameters ip-options [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display system-parameters ip-options [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) Telecommuting Access Action Object Qualifier change telecommuting-access (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display telecom
Before you start Terminal Parameters Action Object Qualifier change terminal-parameters 6400/607A1/4600/2420 (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change terminal-parameters 302/603/606 (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change terminal-parameters 8400 (S8700 IP-Connect) display terminal-parameters 302/603/606 [‘schedule’] (S8700 Multi-Connect) display terminal-parameters 6400/607A1/4600/2420 [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display terminal-parameters 8400 [‘
Command reference Terminating Extension Group 1378 Action Object Qualifier add term-ext-group 1-MAX (or ‘next’) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change term-ext-group 1-MAX (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display term-ext-group 1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display term-ext-group 1-MAX [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) list term-ext-group [‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x] [‘name’ x] [‘ext’ x][‘to-
Before you start TFTP Server Action Object Qualifier change tftp-server [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) change tftp-server [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display tftp-server [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display tftp-server [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) 555-233-506 Issue 5 October 2002 1379
Command reference Time of Day Routing Plan Action Object Qualifier add coverage time-of-day 1-MAX 9 (or ‘next’) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change coverage time-of-day 1-MAX (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display coverage time-of-day 1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display coverage time-of-day 1-MAX [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) remove coverage time-of-day 1-MAX (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S
Before you start Toll Analysis Action Object Qualifier change toll Enter digits between 0-9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’ [‘location’ (1-44 or ‘all’] [‘min’ 1-23] (DEFINITY R) change toll Enter digits between 0-9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’ [‘location’ (1-10 or ‘all’] [‘min’ 1-28] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) change toll Enter digits between 0-9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’ [‘location’ (1-64 or ‘all’] [‘min’ 1-23] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display toll Enter digits between 0-9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’ [‘location’ (1-44 or ‘all’
Command reference Action Object Qualifier list toll restricted-call [‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)] [‘location’ (1-44 or ‘all’] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R) list toll restricted-call [‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)] [‘location’ (1-10 or ‘all’] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSAI, SI) list toll restricted-call [‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)] [‘location’ (1-64 or ‘all’] [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) list toll unrestrictedcall [1-MAX
Before you start Trunk Groups Action Object Qualifier add trunk-group 1–MAX (or ‘next’) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change trunk-group 1–MAX or TAC X...
Command reference Action Object Qualifier list uniform-dialplan start , count [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]* list uniform-dialplan [‘start’ matching-pattern] [‘len’ (3-7)] [‘insert’ (0-MAX)] [‘net’ x] [‘node’ (1-MAX)] [‘to-node’ (1-MAX)] [‘count’ n], [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) list uniform-dialplan [‘start’ matching-pattern] [‘len’ (3-7)] [‘insert’ (0-MAX)] [‘net’ x] [‘node’ (1-MAX)] [‘to-node’ (1-MAX)] [‘count’ n], [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)
Before you start List Usage CTI-Link Action Object Qualifier list usage cti-link [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) List Usage Extension Action Object Qualifier list usage extension [‘vector’], [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI) Vector Action Object Qualifier change vector 1-MAX (DEFINITY CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) list usage vector 1-MAX (DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) 555-233-506 Issue 5 Octobe
Command reference Vector Directory Numbers Action Object Qualifier add vdn extension (or ‘next’) (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) change vdn extension (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) display vdn extension, [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) display vdn extension, [‘schedule’] (S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect) XMOBILE Configuration Set Action Object Qualifier change xmobile configuration-set Enter digits between 1
Phone reference This reference section describes many of the telephones and adjuncts that you can connect to Avaya MultiVantage systems.
Phone reference ■ 731x-series hybrid telephones (page 1403) ■ 7400-series telephones (page 1408) ■ ISDN telephones (7500-series & 8500-series) (page 1425) ■ 8110 telephones (page 1430) ■ 8400-series telephones (page 1430) ■ CALLMASTER telephones (page 1437) ■ Cordless telephones (page 1441) ■ Internet Protocol (IP) SoftPhones (page 1444) 500 telephones The 500 telephones are single appearance analog rotary-dial telephones which provides cost-effective service wherever it is located.
4600-series IP telephones 4600-series IP telephones The 4600-series telephones are DCP telephones that use Internet Protocol (IP) technology with Ethernet line interfaces. Firmware for these phones can be downloaded from the internet. The 4600 series includes a 2-button set, 6-button sets, a 12-button set, and a 24-button set.
Phone reference 4612 IP telephone The 4612 IP telephone is a multi-appearance digital telephone with 12 call appearance/feature buttons. With the 4612 IP telephone the end-user can access 12 features with the softkeys and display control buttons. 4620 IP telephone The 4620 IP telephone has an optional feature expansion module and downloadable call appearance/feature button information. It also includes features such as speed dial, call log, and Web browsing using the Wireless Markup Language (WML).
6200-series telephones Figure 18. The 4630 IP Screenphone 6200-series telephones 6210 telephone The 6210 telephones are single-line analog models. They have fixed Flash, Redial, and Hold feature buttons and a message waiting light. 6218 telephone The 6218 telephones are single-line analog models. They have 10 programmable dialing buttons. These phones also have fixed Flash, Redial, and Hold feature buttons and a message waiting light.
Phone reference 6220 telephone The 6220 telephones are single-line analog models. These phones also have fixed Flash, Redial, Hold, Mute, and Speakerphone (Spkr) feature buttons and a message waiting light. They also have handset volume control, ringer volume control, timed switch-hook disconnect, 10 programmable dialing buttons, repertory keylock, set personalized ring, and system hold.
6200-series telephones 1 10 2 11 12 6220 3 Program 13 Pause Tel.# 4 14 5 Mute Spkr 15 6 ABC 7 Flash 8 Redial 9 Hold DEF 1 2 3 GHI 4 JKL MNO 5 6 7 TUV WXYZ 8 9 0 # PQRS * 16 17 Figure Notes 1. Handset parking tab 9. Personalized ring 2. Handset 10. Ringer volume control 3. Program button 11. 10 programmable dialing buttons 4. Handset cord jack 12. Pause button 5. Flash button 13. Message light 6. Redial button 14. Handset/speakerphone volume control 7.
Phone reference 1 10 2 11 12 6220 3 Program 13 13 Pause Tel.# 4 14 5 Mute Spkr 15 6 ABC 7 Flash 8 Redial 9 Hold DEF 1 2 3 GHI 4 JKL MNO 5 6 7 TUV WXYZ 8 9 0 # PQRS * 16 17 Figure Notes 1. DATA jack 2. Handset 10. Personalized ring 3. Program button 11. Ringer volume control 4. Mute button 12. 10 programmable dialing buttons 5. Handset cord jack 13. Pause button 6. Handset/speakerphone volume control 14. Message light 7. Flash button 8.
6400-series telephones 6400-series telephones The 6400-series telephones are DCP 2-wire telephones that work with Avaya MultiVantage. The last two digits of the 6400-series model number identify the number of call appearances (2-lamp buttons) for that model. For example, the 6424D has 24 call appearances. The 6400 series includes two single-line sets (6402 and 6402D), 8-button sets, a 16-button set, a 24-button set, and a 24-button expansion module (for the 6416D+ and 6424D+ telephones).
Phone reference 6408 telephones The 6408 is a multi-appearance digital telephone with eight call appearance/feature buttons. The 6408 telephone is available in the following four models: ■ 6408 telephone—includes a 1-way, listen-only speaker, and no display ■ 6408+ telephone—includes a 2-way speakerphone, and no display ■ 6408D telephone—includes a 1-way, listen-only speaker, and a 2-line by 24-character display ■ 6408D+ telephone—includes a 2-way speakerphone, and a 2-line by 24-character display.
6400-series telephones The 6424D+ telephone can work in both 4-wire and 2-wire environments. NOTE: You can connect an XM24 expansion module to a 6424D+ phone to expand the number of buttons you can assign. However, when the expansion module is connected, you must connect an auxiliary power supply to the telephone.
Phone reference 1 2 14 Menu Exit 13 12 Tel # Spkr Mute Hold Redial Trnsfr Test Conf Ring 11 10 ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ * O # 1 4 9 7 8 Prev 2 5 8 Next 3 4 3 6 5 9 Volume 6 7 Figure Notes 1. Display 8. Volume control button 2. Softkeys 9. Dial pad 3. Display control buttons 10. Conf/Ring button 4. Hold 11. Redial button 5. Call appearance/feature buttons 12. Transfer/Test button 6. Message light 13. Speaker button 7.
7100-series telephones 7100-series telephones 7101A telephone The 7101A telephone is a single-line analog model that is equipped with a Message Waiting light and a handy Recall button for activating the system’s special features. It cannot be physically bridged to the same analog line port due to the message waiting and loop current circuitry. 7102A telephone The 7102A (7102A01A) and 7102+ (7102A01B), called the 7102 Plus. The front of the two sets is exactly the same in appearance.
Phone reference 7303H MERLIN telephone The 7303H is a 10-button telephone that can be desk or wall mounted. Administer 7303H telephones (10-Button) as a 7305S model. You can administer only the first 12 feature function buttons. Of these 12 buttons, 8 have two lamps and 4 have no lamps. However, the system treats the 8 double-lamp buttons as though they have a single (green) lamp. Administer the 4 buttons (with no lamps) with features that do not require status indications.
7300-series telephones Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad Figure 24.
Phone reference Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons Figure 25.
731x-series hybrid telephones 731x-series hybrid telephones You should note that the following restrictions apply to administering hybrid telephones in the system: 555-233-506 ■ Hybrid telephones equipped with displays cannot be used as Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agents and do not allow your end-users to access the Directory. ■ The following fixed feature buttons do not operate on Hybrid telephones: STOP, PAUSE, RECALL, MESSAGE, HFAI, and HFAI/MIC.
Phone reference Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad Figure 26.
731x-series hybrid telephones Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 12 feature buttons Figure 27.
Phone reference Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 12 feature buttons Figure 28.
731x-series hybrid telephones Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons Figure 29.
Phone reference Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons Figure 30. 7317H telephone (BIS 34D) 7400-series telephones 7401D telephone The 7401D (7401D01A) and the 7401+ (7401D02A) are both single appearance digital phones which have no call appearance buttons or lights, but have two virtual call appearances.
7400-series telephones 7403D telephone The 7403D is a multi-appearance digital telephone which has 10 buttons available for line appearances, one-touch feature access, or Speed Dialing. In addition, the 7403D telephone may be equipped with a Digital Terminal Data Module (DTDM) which attaches to the right side and allows the connection of a EIA RS-232C data terminal. 7404D telephone The 7404D is a multi-appearance digital telephone which provides simultaneous voice/asynchronous data transmission.
Phone reference The 7406+ telephone (7406D07A and 7406D08A models) has five call appearance/feature buttons, each with a red in-use light and a green status light, three shiftable (2-level) programmable feature buttons with a green light, six shiftable (2-level) programmable feature buttons without lights, four fixed feature buttons (CONFERENCE, TRANSFER, DROP, and HOLD), a SELECT button with a green light, a SPEAKER/RESET SPKR button with a green light, a MUTE button with a red light, a VOLUME “arrow” but
7400-series telephones speakerphone, a connection for an adjunct speakerphone or headset, a speakerphone with spokesman, and Mute option, and a 2-line by 40-character display. 7410D and 7410+ telephones The 7410D (7410D01A) and 7410+ (7410D02A) are both multi-appearance digital telephones with 10 line appearances, four standard fixed feature buttons and a Select Ring button. The 7410D and 7410+ telephones also provide a Message light, Ringer Volume control, a Speakerphone/headset adapter jack.
Phone reference Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. Access codes card 2. Dial pad Figure 31.
7400-series telephones Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 6 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad Figure 32.
Phone reference Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons Figure 33.
7400-series telephones Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons 5. Function key module with 24 feature module buttons Figure 34.
Phone reference Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. Digital display module with 7 display buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 10 programmable buttons 5. 24 feature buttons Figure 35.
7400-series telephones Figure Notes 1. Handset 2. Dial pad 3. Call coverage module with 20 coverage module buttons and status lamps 4. 10 programmable buttons 5. 24 feature buttons Figure 36.
Phone reference Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons 5. Digital terminal data module Figure 37.
7400-series telephones Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 5 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 18 feature buttons (feature buttons F2, F4, and F12 to F18 are enabled with the Shift key) Figure 38.
Phone reference Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 5 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 18 feature buttons (feature buttons F12 to F18 are enabled with the Shift key) Figure 39.
7400-series telephones Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 7 display buttons 5. 24 feature buttons Figure 40.
Phone reference Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons (11 to 34) Figure 41.
7400-series telephones Figure Notes 1. Handset 2. Dial pad 3. Call coverage module with 20 coverage module buttons and status lamps 4. 10 programmable buttons 5. 24 feature buttons (11 to 34) Figure 42.
Phone reference Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. Digital display module with 7 display buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 10 programmable buttons 5. 24 feature buttons (11 to 34) Figure 43.
ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s) ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s) The Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) phones include both the 7500-series and the 8500-series telephones. Each of these phones uses the ISDN communications through a 4-wire “T”-interface. 7505D ISDN-BRI telephone The 7505D telephone serves as a telephone if it is equipped with a Voice Only Module (VOM).
Phone reference 8503D ISDN-BRI telephones The 8503T telephone offers: four standard fixed feature buttons, a Message light, three call appearance/flexible feature buttons, each with a red and green light, 12 programmable memory-dialing locations on the dial pad keys, a PROGRAM button for storing numbers at the memory-dialing locations and a MEMORY button for dialing these programmed numbers or codes, the Redial feature, the Mute feature.
ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s) Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 3 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad Figure 44.
Phone reference Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad Figure 45.
ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s) Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 10 programmable buttons (11 to 20) Figure 46. 8520T telephone NOTE: The 8520T telephone supports 20 call appearances. The system maximum of 10 call appearance buttons still applies. You can administer the buttons that are not used as call appearance buttons as bridged appearances.
Phone reference 8110 telephones The basic 8110 (8110A01A, 8110A01B, and 811A01C) and the modified 8110M (8110A01D) telephones are single-line analog telephones. These telephones are exactly the same in appearance: each contains 12 programmable dialing buttons with PROGRAM and PAUSE buttons, automatic redial, a flashing red Message light, and a Hold button. They also have built-in speakerphones with Mute capability and the Automatic Answer feature.
8400-series telephones 8410B telephone The 8410 telephone is a multi-appearance digital telephone with 10 call appearance/feature buttons, four standard fixed feature buttons (CONFERENCE, DROP, HOLD, and TRANSFER), a MUTE button, a SPEAKER button which can access either a 2-way speakerphone or a 1-way, listen-only speaker, a TEST button, and a Volume control button. ■ The 8410B is the basic set, without a display. ■ The 8410D (8410D03A) has a built-in 2-line by 24-character display.
Phone reference 8434D telephone The basic 8434 (8434D01A) and the enhanced 8434DX (8434D02A) telephones are multi-appearance digital telephones which offer 34 call appearance/feature buttons, each with a red light and a green status light, four standard fixed feature buttons (CONFERENCE, DROP, HOLD, and TRANSFER), a MUTE button, a SPEAKER button which accesses either a 2-way speakerphone or a 1-way listen-only speaker, a TEST button, a SHIFT button (some 8434DX telephones will have a RING button instead),
8400-series telephones Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 3 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad Figure 47.
Phone reference Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad Figure 48. 8410B telephone NOTE: The 8405B and 8405B+ look like the 8410B with the exception that the 8405 series do not have the second column of line appearances.
8400-series telephones Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad Figure 49. 8410D telephone NOTE: The 8405D and 8405D+ look like the 8410D with the exception that the 8405 series do not have the second column of line appearances.
Phone reference Figure Notes Figure 50. 1436 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4.
CALLMASTER telephones CALLMASTER telephones There are several types of CALLMASTER telephones: ■ 602A and 602D CALLMASTER The 602 CALLMASTER models have a display, a Message light, a Mute button, and four fixed feature buttons: Conference, Drop, Hold, and Transfer. You can administer its 10 call appearance/feature (2-lamp) buttons and its 17 feature-only (1-lamp) buttons. ■ 603D (CALLMASTER II) The CALLMASTER II model has a display, a Message light, and the Mute, Select, Log In, and Release buttons.
Phone reference ■ 607A (CALLMASTER V) The CALLMASTER V model has a display, softkeys, and the display control buttons (Menu, Exit, Previous, and Next). This model does not have a standard handset, but you can connect a handset to one of its headset jacks. The CALLMASTER V has six fixed feature buttons: Speaker, Mute, Hold, Redial, Conference, and Transfer.
CALLMASTER telephones Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 6 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 15 feature buttons Figure 52.
Phone reference 2 3 Menu Exit Prev Next Tel # Speaker Mute Hold Redial Transfer Conf Test ABC 1 2 3 GHI JKL MNO 4 1 PQRS CALLMASTER V Ring DEF 5 TUV 6 WXYZ 7 8 9 * O # 4 Volume Figure Notes 1. Dial pad 3. 4 softkey buttons 2. Display 4. 16 call appearance/feature buttons Figure 53.
Cordless telephone Cordless telephone MDC9000 cordless telephone The MDC 9000 Cordless Telephone has two basic parts, the handset and the charging base. ■ The handset has line/programmable feature/intercom buttons, Conference, Drop, Hold, Transfer, Status, and Feature buttons, Headset On/Off and Handset On/Off buttons, a LCD display, an earpiece volume control switch, battery charging contacts, a directory card, and a headset jack.
Phone reference Figure Notes 1. 6 programmable buttons 1. 6 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 2. Dial pad Figure 54.
Cordless telephone Figure Notes 1. 6 programmable buttons 1. 6 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 2. Dial pad Figure 55.
Phone reference Internet Protocol (IP) Softphones IP Softphones extend the level of MultiVantage services. They turn a PC or a laptop into an advanced telephone. IP Softphones allow you to send voice and fax from the MultiVantage through an Internet Protocol (IP) network to other MultiVantage systems that have this feature. You can place calls, take calls, and handle multiple calls on your PC.
Internet Protocol (IP) Softphones Stand-alone H.323 The stand-alone H.323 application enables travelers to use some MultiVantage features from a remote location. This application uses a PC running an H.323 v2-compliant audio application, such as Microsoft NetMeeting. The H.323 application controls the call signaling and the voice path.
Phone reference 1446 Issue 5 October 2002 555-233-506
Features and technical reference AAR and ARS partitioning You can use Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR) and Automatic Route Selection (ARS) partitioning to change the call routing plan for up to 8 different user groups within a single MultiVantage system. You assign a Partition Group Number (PGN) to each user group and identify different call routing treatment for each PGN. For example, you can partition hotel employees and guests into separate groups (PGN) and route the calls differently.
Features and technical reference You can assign a route pattern to just one partitioned user group or you can assign a route pattern to all your partitioned user groups. You assign the PGN on the Class of Restriction (COR) screen, and then assign the COR on each station screen. When a user dials an AAR or ARS feature access code and a number, the switch uses the PGN of the caller’s COR to determine the route pattern.
Abbreviated dialing Abbreviated dialing Abbreviated Dialing (AD) provides easy access to selected numbers by reducing the number of digits users have to dial to place a call. Instead of dialing the entire number, the user dials a short code to access the number. The system then dials the stored number automatically. You can assign abbreviated dialing buttons to phones, so users can dial frequently-called numbers by pressing a single button.
Features and technical reference Group lists You can define group lists for groups or departments, such as purchasing or human resources, where members of the group have the need to frequently dial the same numbers. You determine which users have access to group lists and each user may have access to up to 3 group lists. You can program the list or you can designate a user in each group to program the list. You specify this designated user on the Abbreviated Dialing Group List screen.
Abbreviated dialing Interactions ■ Last Number Dialed The Last Number Dialed feature redials the same number a user just dialed, even if the user accessed an abbreviated dialing list for the previous call. However, if the last dialed string includes any special characters (such as indefinite wait, mark, pause, suppress, or wait) these characters are ignored by last-number-dialed call.
Features and technical reference Access Security Gateway Access Security Gateway (ASG) prevents unauthorized access by requiring the use of the ASG Key for logging into the system. The ASG Key can be: ■ a hand-held device, or ■ a software module you load on the PC you use for accessing the system. Detailed Description Authentication is successful only when MultiVantage and ASG communicate with a compatible key.
Access Security Gateway Interactions ■ Customer Access to Initialization and Administration System (INADS) Port If access to the INADS port is disabled on a system-wide basis, administering access to the SYSAM-RMT or INADS port, through ASG, does not override the INADS port restriction. Administration does not prohibit assignment of ASG to the SYSAM-RMT or INADS port.
Features and technical reference Administered connections An Administered Connection (AC) is a connection between 2 access or data endpoints. MultiVantage automatically establishes the connection based on the attributes you administer.
Administered connections Typical AC applications The following are typical AC applications: ■ A local data endpoint connection to a local or remote-access endpoint. Examples: a modular processor data module (MPDM) ACCUNET digital service connecting to SDDN via an ISDN trunk-group DS1 port; an MPDM ACCUNET digital service connecting to an ACCUNET Switched 56 Service via a DS1 port. ■ A local-access endpoint connecting to a local or remote-access endpoint.
Features and technical reference In the event of a failure, an error is entered into the error log, which generates an alarm, if it is warranted by your alarming strategy. You can display AC failures via the status administered-connection command. As long as an AC is due to be active, the originating switch continues to establish an AC unless the attempt fails because of an administrative error (for example, a wrong number) or service-blocking condition (for example, outgoing calls barred).
Administered connections Administered Connections failure: Auto Restoration and Fast Retry When an active AC drops prematurely, you must invoke either auto restoration or fast retry to determine whether auto restoration is attempted for an active AC. If you option AC for auto restoration and the connection was routed over SDDN trunks, auto restoration is attempted. During restoration, connections are maintained between the switch and both endpoints.
Features and technical reference ■ Class of Restriction Reserve a COR for AC endpoints and SDDN trunks. This restricts endpoints that are not involved in AC from connecting to SDDN trunks or endpoints involved in AC. ■ Class of Service/Call Forwarding Assign to an AC endpoint a COS that blocks Call Forwarding activation at the endpoint. ■ Data Call Setup Do not assign a default dialing destination to a data module when it is used in an AC.
Administration change notification ■ System Measurements Access endpoints are not measured. All other trunks in an AC are measured as usual. ■ Terminal Dialing Turn off terminal dialing for data modules involved in an AC. This prevents display of call-processing messages (INCOMING CALL,...) on the terminal. ■ Trunk Groups To invoke auto restoration, route an AC over SDDN trunks. Because a successful restoration depends on a SDDN path, keep some SDDN trunks idle.
Features and technical reference Administrable language displays You can display messages in English, French, Italian, Spanish, or a user-defined language on attendant consoles and phones that have 40-character displays. Detailed description You can select a language for messages that appear on phones and attendant consoles that have 40-character displays. You can choose one of five languages: English, French, Italian, Spanish, or “user-defined.
Alternate facility restriction levels ■ Miscellaneous Call Identifiers ■ Party Identifiers ■ Property Management Interface ■ Security Violation Notification ■ Stored numbers ■ Station hunting ■ Time-of-day Routing ■ Transfer messages Alternate facility restriction levels Alternate Facility Restriction Levels (AFRL) allows a second set of facility restriction levels within a route pattern or for lines or trunks.
Features and technical reference Authorization codes Authorization codes prevent unauthorized access to various facilities. When a user dials an authorization code, your system checks the code. If it is not valid, the call is intercepted. If the code is valid, the system determines an associated COR and FRL. If AFRL is activated, the AFRL level is used. For example, a user whose FRL is 1 attempts a long-distance call. AFRL is active and maps to AFRL 3.
Analog busy automatic callback without flash Analog busy automatic callback without flash This is an automatic callback for analog stations without flashing the hook. It will be applied only when the called station is busy and has no other coverage path or call forwarding. The caller can enable the automatic callback without flashing the hook or entering the feature access code.
Features and technical reference Announcements You can record announcements for people to hear when they call in to your office. For example, you can let callers know that their call cannot be completed as dialed, that their call is in queue, or that all the lines are busy. Announcements can be integrated or external. Integrated announcements reside on a circuit pack in the switch carrier. Your system can store multiple announcements on each circuit pack up to the system capacity.
Announcements Despite the name, announcements are not actually played over the LAN, but can be transferred to and from the TN2501AP circuit pack over the LAN. The TN2501AP ■ is available with both Offer Category A (ECS and ProLogix Solutions) and Category B (BCS and GuestWorks). ■ works with DEFINITY R, SI, CSI, S8100 Media Server with a CMC1, S8100 Media Server with a G600 platforms. ■ can be updated with firmware files downloaded directly over the LAN.
Features and technical reference See ‘‘Announcement file format requirements’’ on page 455 for more information about recording parameters. The following table shows the VAL administration tasks and which interface you can use to complete each task. The TN2501AP circuit pack was designed with your efficiency and flexibility in mind, so try combining methods to accommodate your particular installation.
Announcements The system automatically restores announcements to only one announcement circuit pack. The system does not restore to announcement circuit packs that have built-in memory. About barge-in You can allow callers to begin listening to an announcement after the system has begun playing the message. This is called “barge-in.” Use barge-in with auxiliary trunk announcements, DS1 announcements, and integrated announcements. With barge-in, only one port plays the announcement at any one time.
Features and technical reference Answer detection For proper CDR and accurate billing, you need to know when your outgoing calls are answered. Answer detection means the method a switch uses to determine whether an outgoing call has been answered. Brief description MultiVantage provides 3 ways to determine whether the called party has answered a call. Call classification A call-classifier circuit pack detects tones and voice-frequency signals on the line to determine whether a call has been answered.
Answer detection Network answer supervision The central office sends a signal to the originating switch to indicate that the far end has answered. If a call traveled over a private network before reaching the central office, the signal is transmitted back over the private network to the originating switch.
Features and technical reference Attendant Features This section describes the following MultiVantage features that you may want to administer for your console operators: ■ ‘‘Attendant Call Waiting’’ on page 1470 ■ ‘‘Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access’’ on page 1472 ■ ‘‘Attendant Direct Extension Selection’’ on page 1473 ■ ‘‘Attendant Intrusion’’ on page 1474 ■ ‘‘Attendant Override of Diversion Features’’ on page 1474 ■ ‘‘Attendant Serial Calling’’ on page 1475 ■ ‘‘Auto Start and Don’t Sp
Attendant Features Interactions ■ Automatic Callback Activating Automatic Callback at the called telephone denies Attendant Call Waiting. ■ Call Coverage Attendant Call Waiting calls redirect to coverage if the called phone has Data Privacy or Data Restriction activated. If one of these conditions exists, and you assign call coverage to a telephone, and the user activates Send All Calls or coverage criteria is met, the call redirects to coverage.
Features and technical reference Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access allows the attendant to control trunk groups, and prevents telephone users from directly accessing a controlled trunk group. The attendant gains direct access to an outgoing trunk group by pressing the button assigned to that trunk group. Each attendant console has 12 designated Trunk Hundreds Select buttons that can be administered for Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access.
Attendant Features Attendant Direct Extension Selection Attendant Direct Extension Selection (DXS) with busy lamp field allows the attendant to track extension status (idle or busy) and to place or extend calls to extension numbers without having to dial the extension. Standard DXS Tracking The basic selector console has 8 Hundreds Select buttons and 100 DXS buttons. The enhanced selector console has 20 Hundreds Select buttons and 100 DXS buttons.
Features and technical reference Attendant Intrusion The attendant intrusion (Call Offer) button allows an attendant to intrude on an existing call to offer a new call or message to the intruded party. When the attendant releases the intruded call, the source party waits at the intruded party’s analog telephone or holds on an available line appearance on a digital telephone.
Attendant Features Attendant Serial Calling Attendant Serial Calling enables the attendant to transfer trunk calls that return to the same attendant after the called party hangs up. Once outside callers reach an attendant, they can use the same line into the switch for multiple calls. Attendant Serial Calling is useful if trunks are scarce and Direct Inward Dialing services are unavailable. To allow your attendant to use serial calling, assign a serial-cal button on the Attendant Console screen.
Features and technical reference You can assign a dont-split button on the Attendant Console screen which allows attendants to deactivate Auto Start. To deactivate auto start, the attendant presses the Don’t Split button. When Don’t Split is active, keys pressed on the keypad are heard by the parties on the call. To reactivate Auto Start, and allow end-to-end signaling, the attendant again presses the Don’t Split button, presses Cancel, or lets the current call terminate.
Attendant Features ■ Attendant No-Answer Timer — Specifies how long a call that terminates at an attendant console can ring with primary alerting. When the call reaches this interval setting, it rings with a secondary, higher-pitch ring. A disabled Attendant No Answer Timer’s ringing pattern does not change over from the primary to the secondary pattern. If the call remains unanswered during this interval, it routes to the attendant group and console where the call was placed in a Position Busy state.
Features and technical reference Visually Impaired Attendant Service Visually Impaired Attendant Service (VIAS) allows a visually-impaired attendant to listen to an audio description of each feature button in Inspect mode. It provides the description in either British English or Italian. The attendant presses the Inspect mode to locate each button and then presses a feature button to determine the feature assigned to the button without actually executing the feature.
Authorization codes Audible Message Waiting requires a separate software right-to-use fee. Audible Message Waiting may not be applicable in countries that restrict the characteristics of dial tones provided to users. Related topics See ‘‘System-Parameters Customer-Options’’ on page 1186 for information about and fields descriptions on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen. Complete the Audible Message Waiting field on this screen to administer audible message waiting.
Features and technical reference More information When you dial an authorization code, the FRL assigned to the extension number, attendant console, incoming trunk group, or remote access trunk group being used for the call is replaced by the FRL assigned to the authorization code. The new FRL functions the same as the one it replaces; however, the new FRL may represent greater or lesser calling privileges than the FRL that it replaces.
Authorization codes A Cancellation of Authorization Code Request (CACR) digit may be administered. The CACR digit cancels the 10-second interval between dialing. When the CACR digit is dialed, the call immediately routes according to system administration. (Incoming trunk calls receive intercept treatment or go to the attendant.) Other calls receive intercept treatment unless the user’s FRL is high enough to route the call.
Features and technical reference When an authorization code is required on some, but not all, trunk groups, the system prompts for an authorization code when the originating FRL is not adequate to access the next available trunk group in the routing pattern. Considerations ■ From remote locations users typically access authorization from touch-tone stations.
Authorization codes Interactions ■ AAR/ARS Partitioning Partitioned group numbers are assigned by COR and Authorization Codes can change Classes of Restriction. Therefore, Partitioned Group Numbers can be changed on incoming remote access calls by authorization codes. For originating calls, user Classes of Restrictions determine Partitioned Group Numbers.
Features and technical reference See ‘‘QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen’’ on page 1085 to permit authorized callers from remote locations to access your system. See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 to require an authorization code be dialed to complete incoming calls on a trunk group. See ‘‘Setting up authorization codes’’ on page 404 for instructions. Automated attendant Automated Attendant uses vector commands to allow a caller to enter the extension of the party that he or she would like to reach.
Automated attendant ■ CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Application Interface (ASAI) ASAI-provided digits can be collected by the Call Vectoring feature via the collect vector command as dial-ahead digits. CINFO is passed to CallVisor ASAI. ■ Hold If a call is put on hold during the processing of a collect command, the command restarts, beginning with the announcement prompt, when the call is taken off hold. All dialed-ahead digits are lost.
Features and technical reference See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for information on button assignments. See ‘‘Attendant Console’’ on page 614 for information on button assignments. Automatic callback Automatic Callback allows internal users who placed a call to a busy or unanswered internal telephone to be called back automatically when the called telephone becomes available. When a user activates automatic callback, the system monitors the called telephone.
Automatic callback Automatic callback for busy trunks You can administer your system to call users back if they try to place an outgoing call over a trunk group where all trunks are busy. This is sometimes called Ringback Queueing. If a multiappearance telephone user has an idle Automatic Callback button and tries to access an all-trunks-busy trunk group, the call is queued automatically. The lamp associated with the Automatic Callback button lights and confirmation tone is heard.
Features and technical reference ■ automatic callback works differently depending on if the called party was busy or did not answer the call. For a busy call, automatic callback takes place as soon as the called party hangs up. If the called party did not answer, the telephone must be used for another call and then hung up before automatic callback is activated.
Automatic callback ■ Conference and Transfer A single-line telephone user cannot activate conference or transfer if automatic callback is active. ■ DCS Automatic callback operates over a DCS network as if it were on a local switch. ■ Expert Agent Selection Users can’t activate Automatic Callback to an EAS agent’s Login ID. They can activate Automatic CallBack to the phone where the agent is logged in.
Features and technical reference Automatic circuit assurance Automatic circuit assurance (ACA) helps you identify possible trunk malfunctions. With ACA enabled, the system measures the holding time of each trunk call. If the measurements show calls with either extremely long or extremely short holding times, MultiVantage places a referral call to an attendant or telephone. The system records holding time from when a trunk is accessed to when it is released.
Automatic circuit assurance The audit trail Each time a referral call is necessary, the system also adds a record to an audit trail. Audit trail records are available on the ACA Measurements Report. Each record contains the following information: ■ Time and date of referral ■ Trunk group number, trunk access code, and trunk group member ■ The type of referral (short or long holding time) ■ Administrable Language Displays Interactions You cannot administer languages for ACA messages.
Features and technical reference ■ Visually Impaired Attendant Service (VIAS) If the attendant presses the Display Status button and an ACA call has not been answered, then the words Automatic Circuit Assurance are voiced. If a visually-impaired attendant presses the Display Status button and the ACA call has been answered, then the words Automatic Circuit Assurance and the extension assigned to the ACA call are voiced.
Automatic customer telephone rearrangement Detailed description On the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, set the Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) Enabled field to y and the TTI State field to voice. NOTE: When a phone is moved, if there is any local auxiliary power (a power supply plugged into a local AC outlet), the phone must be plugged into an AC outlet at the phone’s new location. A phone with remote auxiliary power must be supplied remote auxiliary power at its new location.
Features and technical reference Considerations Unless you are careful, ACTR can get in the way of your troubleshooting of phone problems. Here is how to prevent that. You can unplug a movable 6400 Serialized phone and plug in a maintenance replacement that does not have move permission. If you are able to place and receive calls from the replacement phone, the problem could be with the original phone.
Automatic customer telephone rearrangement Interactions Attendant Console If the attendant console is unplugged and another Digital Communications Protocol (DCP) phone with move permissions is plugged into the port, the new DCP phone’s extension do not move to the port. The port keeps the attendant console’s extension. Backup Console Queue threshold warning tone signals every 10 seconds to certain stations.
Features and technical reference Person Station Access (PSA) If you use PSA to disassociate an extension that is on the move list, the extension stays on the move list, but the serial number for that set is removed the port is X-port. If you use PSA to associate an extension with a new set, and the extension is on the move list, the serial number on the move list changes to the serial number for the new set.
Automatic number identification Automatic number identification Inband Automatic Number Identification Your switch uses Inband Automatic Number Identification (ANI) to interpret calling party information, such as a calling party number or a billing number. Inband signaling is when information such as the address digits for the called party is delivered over the same trunk circuit used for the voice or data connection.
Features and technical reference Interactions ■ Attendant Console If an attendant extends a call, the attendant’s COR is used to select ANI. ■ Authorization Codes The authorization code COR is not used to select the ANI. The extension’s ANI is used if an extension originates the call, and the ANI for the switch is used if the originating endpoint is an incoming trunk. ■ Bridged Call Appearance A call from a bridged call appearance uses the ANI of the primary extension.
Automatic routing — general Related topics See ‘‘Displaying ANI calling party information’’ on page 181 for instructions on setting up ANI display in the U.S. See ‘‘Multifrequency signaling’’ on page 1772 for more information on signaling. See ‘‘CLAN and processor CLAN QoS and CIDR support’’ on page 1637 for more information on Class of Restriction.
Features and technical reference Figure Notes 1. Input from phone, public network trunk, or private network trunk 2. Analyze digits to determine address type (Dial Plan Analysis Table) 3. Direct to AAR/ARS 4. Direct to Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) 5. Analyze digits using UDP to determine route 6. Delete and insert digits (AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Tables) Figure 57. 1500 7. Terminate call at phone 8.
Automatic routing — general AAR AAR routes calls over private networks. When a user dials the AAR feature access code (normally 8 in North America) and phone number, AAR selects the least expensive route for the call in the private network and performs any digit conversion. If the first-choice route is not available, another route is chosen automatically.
Features and technical reference NOTE: For service outside of North America, these defaults should be deleted. You can delete the defaults by entering change ARS analysis 0. Then use spaces to blank out all of the Dialed String entries. Table 19. ARS digit analysis default translations Total Digits Dialed String Min. Max.
Automatic routing — general Table 19. ARS digit analysis default translations (Continued) Total Digits Dialed String Min. Max.
Features and technical reference Interactions ■ Abbreviated Dialing The switch does not check the FRL on an AAR or ARS call that uses a privileged Abbreviated Dialing Group List.
Bridged call appearance A barrier code automatically expires if an expiration date or number of accesses has exceeded the limits you set. If both a time interval and access limits are administered for a barrier code, the barrier code expires when one of the conditions is satisfied. You determine the barrier code length, the actual barrier code, and the barrier code expiration date on the Remote Access screen. You must administer expiration dates and access limits for each of the possible 10 barrier codes.
Features and technical reference On single-line telephones, Bridged Call Appearance is used by going off-hook. On multiappearance telephones, Bridged Call Appearance is used by going off-hook and pressing the bridged appearance button. In both cases, the user is then bridged onto the primary telephone’s extension number and can handle calls on that extension number.
Bridged call appearance Considerations for single-line telephones 555-233-506 ■ The number of bridged call appearances allowed varies by system. See Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for those numbers. A bridging user cannot have more than one bridged appearance for a particular primary telephone.
Features and technical reference Considerations for multiappearance telephones ■ The number of bridged call appearances allowed at each telephone is limited only by the number of 2-lamp buttons available on the telephone. The number of appearances per primary extension varies by system. See Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for this information. ■ Up to six parties can be off-hook and involved in a conversation on a bridged appearance of an extension.
Bridged call appearance ■ Adjunct Switch Applications Interface (ASAI) If you are using ASAI, do not administer more than 16 bridged appearances. ■ Attendant Display and telephone Display A call from the primary extension number or from a bridged call appearance of the primary extension number is displayed as a call from the primary extension number (the call is displayed as coming from the primary extension number regardless of which appearance placed the call).
Features and technical reference — Multiappearance telephones Coverage criteria for bridged call appearances is based entirely on the criteria of the primary extension associated with bridged appearance. A call to the primary extension that requires call coverage treatment follows the coverage path of the primary extension and not the path of any of the bridged appearances. Bridged call appearances do not receive redirection notification.
Bridged call appearance ■ Call Forwarding All Calls, Call Forward Busy/Don’t Answer Call Forwarding can be activated or canceled for the primary extension number from any bridged call appearance of that number. When activated, calls to the primary extension number do not terminate at the bridged call appearances, but go to the designated forwarding destination.
Features and technical reference — Multiappearance telephones If a telephone receives ringing on a bridged call appearance, the incoming call can be picked up by members of that telephone’s call pickup group. This causes all bridged call appearances to be dropped. Calls ringing at a primary telephone can be picked up by members of the telephone’s call pickup group.
Bridged call appearance ■ Conference — Attendant, Conference — Single-line telephones A bridged call cannot be conferenced if more than one user is active on that call. This is because the bridging user has no access to the call after the primary telephone user places the call on soft hold, and the primary telephone user has no access to the bridging user’s call appearance used for conference/transfer attempts.
Features and technical reference — Multiappearance telephones Call Waiting Termination applies only to an active call on the primary telephone that has no one else bridged on. If one or more bridging users are active on a call, Call Waiting calls are denied whether or not the primary user is also off-hook on the call. A bridging user cannot bridge onto a call with the primary user if there is also a call waiting. Conferences can be set up on bridged appearances using the usual conference operations.
Bridged call appearance If the primary user and the bridged user are both on the call when one user transfers the call, the user performing the transfer becomes the controlling user for the participation of both users on the conference. To disassociate the appearance from the call, the controlling user must be the latter of the two users to hang up from the call. If the controlling user hangs up first, the appearance goes on soft hold when the noncontrolling party hangs up.
Features and technical reference ■ Emergency calls If a user dials an emergency call from a bridged appearance, the Calling Party Number that is sent to the public safety answering point for US E911 location is the bridged extension, not the extension of the physical phone from which the call is made. If the physical phone is located far from the phone to which it is bridged, the emergency response team may not be able to locate the caller.
Bridged call appearance ■ Hotline Service (single-line telephones) If a single-line telephone is administered for Hotline Service, bridged appearances of that telephone’s extension also places a hot line call automatically when a user goes off-hook on that bridged appearance. ■ Hunt Group (DDC or UCD) Bridged call appearances cannot be used in conjunction with DDC or UCD hunt groups.
Features and technical reference ■ Personal Central Office Line — Single-line telephones A single-line primary telephone cannot be a member of a Personal Central Office Line (PCOL) group. — Multiappearance telephones If a user is active on his or her primary extension number on a PCOL call, bridged call appearances of that extension number cannot be used to bridge onto the call. The call can only be bridged onto the call if another telephone is a member of the same PCOL group and has a PCOL button.
Bridged call appearance ■ Ringer Cutoff (multiappearance telephones only) Ringer Cutoff prevents any nonpriority (or nonintercom) incoming call from ringing at that telephone. This is independent of whether the call is to the telephone’s primary extension or to any of the bridged appearance’s’ extensions. ■ Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed See Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed, for other bridged appearance alerting options.
Features and technical reference If the bridging user has no other available bridged appearances of the primary extension (other than the one he or she is currently on), the bridging user, after pressing the conference/transfer button, must select a call appearance to be used for the transfer, before dialing the number.
Busy indicator Busy indicator The Busy Indicator button provides multiappearance telephone users and attendants with a visual indicator of the busy or idle status of one of the following system resources: ■ An extension number ■ A trunk group ■ A terminating extension group ■ A hunt group—either DDC or UCD ■ Any loudspeaker paging zone, including all zones The Busy Indicator button provides the attendant or user with direct access to the extension number, trunk group, or paging zone.
Features and technical reference Busy verification Busy Verification (Verify button) allows attendants and specified multiappearance telephone users to make test calls to trunks, telephones, and hunt DDC and UCD groups. Attendants and multiappearance telephone users can distinguish between a telephone that is truly busy and one that only appears busy because of some trouble condition. They can also use this feature to quickly identify faulty trunks.
Busy verification Table 20.
Features and technical reference Table 21. Verification of an ACD Split, UCD Group, or DDC Group r Split or Group Member Status Available for an incoming call System Response ■ Generates priority ringing at the member’s telephone ■ Processes the call as a normal attendant-originated call All activated Make Busy ■ Not available for incoming calls Result ■ Verification is complete. ■ Anyone can place a call to the member’s telephone. Generates reorder tone ■ Verification is denied.
Busy verification Considerations ■ A busy verification cannot be made to an analog extension that is waiting to be answered at another extension. A call must be answered before it can be verified. ■ If your country requires a tone other than 440 Hz, use the Intrusion feature rather than Verify to verify telephones. ■ The system does not provide bridging when you verify UCD and DDC groups or RLTs. ■ You cannot make outgoing test calls on DID trunks.
Features and technical reference ■ Data Privacy Busy verification is denied if it would cause a bridging attempt on a telephone that has activated Data Privacy. ■ Data Restriction The system denies Verify if Data Restriction is active on a call, and a busy verification bridging attempt is made on that call. ■ Hold Busy verification of a multiappearance telephone is denied if all call appearances have calls on hold.
Call charge information Call charge information Avaya MultiVantage provides two ways to know the approximate charge for calls made on outgoing trunks: ■ Advice of Charge — for ISDN trunks Advice of Charge (AOC) collects charge information from the public network for each outgoing call. Charge advice is a number representing the cost of a call; it is recorded as either a charging or currency unit.
Features and technical reference CDR Output The ISDN Call Charge or PPM field contains the last cumulative charge received from the network. If Call Splitting or Attendant Call Recording is enabled, and a call has been transferred for the first time, the ISDN Call Charge field contains the cumulative charge most recently received from the network.
Call charge information Attendant consoles Automatic Charge Display Mode does not apply to attendant consoles. The attendant must always press a button to enter display mode. Performance impact Call Charge Information can impact system performance in several ways. The information coming in over ISDN trunks takes up bandwidth, and reduces the maximum amount of traffic the ISDN D-channel can handle.
Features and technical reference Interactions ■ Attendant Features Attendant consoles cannot have automatic charge display. If you want the attendant to see call charges, you must assign a disp-chrg button to the attendant console. If the attendant moves to transfer an outgoing call, the display returns to normal mode. If the transfer does not complete, or the call remains at the attendant console for whatever reason, the attendant must press the disp-chrg button again to view call charges.
Call charge information ■ Call Transfer For Advice of Charge, if a transferred call is routed over a public-network ISDN-PRI trunk group, AOC administration for the outgoing trunk group controls whether AOC information is requested or recorded for the call. If two or more outgoing trunks are connected together via trunk-to-trunk transfer, the Avaya MultiVantage may receive AOC information from the network for each outgoing trunk involved in the call.
Features and technical reference ■ Electronic Tandem Network (ETN) In any configuration where a branch system has no direct connection to the public network, the private network does not pass call-charge information to these branches. ■ Hold If a user places a call on hold, the display returns to normal mode. The user must press disp-chrg again to view call charges, or if automatic charge display is enabled, must wait for the display to refresh.
Call coverage Hardware requirement The Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net (CCRON) generally requires call classification hardware. Both the Call Classifier - Detector and Tone Clock/Call Classifier - Detector circuit packs provide tone detection ports including the capability to do call classification. There are 8 ports on each circuit pack.
Features and technical reference Call Classification Classifying a call means determining the state of the call at its final destination. That means whether the call was answered, received busy, reorder, intercept, special information tone (SIT), or other treatment.
Call coverage Avaya MultiVantage allows for multiple coverage paths. However, for any particular call only one coverage path is used. The “lead” coverage path is the first coverage path in a chain that is considered when a call redirects to coverage. The chain is defined in the Next Path Name field on the Coverage Path screen. When a call redirects to coverage, the lead coverage path at that time is checked to determine whether its coverage redirection criteria match the call status.
Features and technical reference Call redirection criteria Redirection criteria determine the conditions under which a call redirects from the principal (called) extension to the first position in the coverage path. The criteria and conditions that apply are as follows: ■ Active Redirects calls to coverage immediately when the principal is active on at least one call appearance.
Call coverage ■ No Coverage Occurs when none of the above criteria are assigned. Calls redirect to coverage only when the principal has activated Send All Calls or the caller has activated Go to Cover. Both of these overriding criteria are discussed later. Redirection criteria can be assigned in combinations. For example, you can combine Active/Don’t Answer and Busy/Don’t Answer. Other combinations are not possible or do not provide any useful function.
Features and technical reference ■ Send All Calls Send All Calls allows principals to temporarily direct all incoming calls to coverage regardless of the assigned redirection criteria. For example, if the redirection criteria are administered so that no calls redirect, all incoming calls terminate at the principal’s phone unless Send All Calls is activated. Also, Send All Calls allows covering users to temporarily remove their phones from another user’s coverage path.
Call coverage Conditions that override Call Coverage Call Coverage provides redirection of calls from the called principal or group to alternate answering positions when certain criteria are met. Certain provisions allow calls to direct to and/or be answered by the principal even though the redirection or overriding criteria are met.
Features and technical reference An internal calling party is informed that a call is redirecting to coverage by a single, short burst of ringing, called a Call Coverage tone. This tone is followed by an optional period of silence, called a Caller Response Interval (administered on the System-Parameters Call Coverage/Call Forwarding screen). This interval allows the calling party time to decide what to do: hang up or activate Leave Word Calling, Automatic Callback, or Go to Cover.
Call coverage ■ Coverage Answer Group A Coverage Answer Group can have up to eight members. When a call is redirected to a Coverage Answer Group, all phones in the group ring simultaneously. Anyone in the group can answer the call. Note that a bridged appearance of a coverage answer group member does not ring when calls cover to the group. A Coverage Answer Group member already handling a group call is rung when another call is redirected to that Coverage Answer Group.
Features and technical reference Day of the Week Time 1 Directed To Time 2 Directed To Time 3 Directed To Time 4 Directed To Monday 00:00 CovPath3 (AUDIX) 08:00 CovPath1 (Office) 17:30 CovPath2 (Home) 20:00 CovPath3 (AUDIX) Tuesday 00:00 CovPath3 (AUDIX) 08:00 CovPath1 (Office) 17:30 CovPath2 (Home) 20:00 CovPath3 (AUDIX) Wednesday 00:00 CovPath3 (AUDIX) 08:00 CovPath1 (Office) 17:30 CovPath2 (Home) 20:00 CovPath3 (AUDIX) Thursday 00:00 CovPath3 (AUDIX) 08:00 CovPath1 (Office) 17:30
Call coverage Whenever an incoming trunk call is redirected off-net (coverage or forwarded), a timer is set that precludes any other incoming trunk call from redirecting off-net until the timer either expires or is cancelled. The rationale for this mechanism is to prevent calls that were redirected off-net from being re-routed back to the original principal from the off-net destination, effectively creating a round-robin loop that continuously seizes trunks until they are exhausted.
Features and technical reference ■ While an off-net call is undergoing call classification, any party who is not already on the call will be unable to bridge onto the call. Also, the originating party cannot release the call, conference anyone else onto the call, or transfer the call to a new party. Once the call is answered off-net or the call is returned to the switch for further call processing, then these restrictions are removed.
Call coverage Use of a VDN as a coverage point provides integration to Centralized Messaging. That is, the DCS message sent to the remote switch with AUDIX includes the original reason for redirection and called principal. An administration change is required to allow an extension that is assigned as a VDN to be entered as the last point in the coverage path. See Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide for more information.
Features and technical reference Guidelines and examples of Call Coverage Call Coverage is an extremely flexible feature and allows several combinations of coverage points. To illustrate the usefulness of Call Coverage, three typical coverage arrangements are given below. ■ Executive Coverage Provides a principal with call redirection to covering users having a close working relationship with the principal. Because of the status of the principal, personalized answering should be provided.
Call coverage 2. If a Coverage Answer Group has been chosen as a coverage point, expect the following behavior: — Note that, if the secretary and/or backup answering position are in a Coverage Answer Group, each receives only one redirected call for the executive at any given time. — Only one call may cover and ring at a time. — Calls do ring a Coverage Answer Group member already busy on a call to the group. 3. Optionally, specify a Send All Calls button on the executive’s phone.
Features and technical reference ■ Automatic Intercom, Dial Intercom, and Priority Calling Calls using these features are not redirected to coverage unless the caller presses the Go to Cover button. ■ Bridged Call Appearance Coverage criteria for bridged call appearances are based entirely on the criteria of the primary extension associated with the bridged call appearance.
Call coverage ■ Call Pickup Any call redirected to a covering user who is a member of a Call Pickup group can be answered by other members of the group. ■ Call Prompting Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net competes with the Call Prompting feature for call classifier ports. ■ CallVisor ASAI Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net competes with CallVisor for call classifier ports.
Features and technical reference ■ Direct Outward Dialing (DOD) Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net competes with DOD for call classifier ports when DOD uses MFC signaling. The Call Classifier Detector port provides the MFC tones. Non-MFC DOD calls do not need the Call Classifier - Detector port for this purpose.
Call coverage ■ Night Service Calls routed to the night station via Night Service follow the coverage path of the night extension under all coverage criteria except Send All Calls. ■ Privacy — Manual Exclusion When the primary or principal user bridges onto a call that went to coverage and has been answered at the coverage point, the user is not dropped when Privacy — Manual Exclusion is activated.
Features and technical reference Transfers with Call Coverage as listed in the following table.
Call detail recording See ‘‘Terminating Extension Group’’ on page 1223 for information on assigning a coverage path to a Terminating Extension Group. See ‘‘Time of Day Coverage Table’’ on page 1228 for information about and field descriptions on the Time of Day Coverage Table screen. See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for information on specifying internal ringing and coverage for incoming calls. See ‘‘Setting up basic call coverage’’ on page 189 for instructions on administering basic call coverage.
Features and technical reference Account Code Dialing Account Code Dialing allows certain calls to be associated with a particular project or account number. To do this, users enter account codes when they place certain types of outgoing calls. These account codes then appear on the call record, which you can use for accounting or billing purposes. Account code dialing can be optional or mandatory (forced).
Call detail recording ■ All calls made over a trunk group with FEAC in COR (TAC calls) Users cannot access a trunk group that is assigned a COR with FEAC until they dial an account code. If a call is routed via ARS, the system does not check for FEAC in the trunk group’s COR. Therefore, if you want your users to enter account codes for ARS calls, you must administer this in the Toll Analysis table.
Features and technical reference If ITCS is enabled and an incoming trunk call is conferenced or transferred to a local extension that is optioned for Intraswitch CDR, the call produces an incoming trunk call record. It does not produce an Intraswitch record. To enable this option, set the Incoming Call Splitting field to y on the CDR System Parameters screen, and make sure that Record Outgoing Calls Only = n. ITCS examples The following scenarios depict calls made with ITCS active.
Call detail recording A (TAC 123) calls switch party B (5657890), they talk for one minute. B transfers the call to public-network party C (5665555), they talk for 4 minutes. Note that the duration of the original incoming trunk call includes the time after the call was transferred to an outgoing trunk, until all trunk parties drop. Table 25.
Features and technical reference Switch party A (51234) calls public-network party B (5659999). They talk for 5 minutes. A then transfers the call to switch party C (54444). Table 27. OTCS transfer Segment Duration Condition Code Access Code Used Calling Number Dialed Number A–B 0:01:0 A 345 51234 5659999 C–B 0:05:0 A 345 54444 5659999 Attendant call recording Both incoming and outgoing call splitting give you the option of recording the attendant portion of calls that are transferred.
Call detail recording Intraswitch CDR Intraswitch CDR generates call records for calls to and from users on the local switch. For the system to generate an intraswitch CDR record, one of the extensions involved in a call must have intraswitch CDR assigned. If a station is optioned for Intraswitch CDR, and ITCS is also enabled, ITCS overrides Intraswitch CDR. That is, incoming trunk calls involving the station produce trunk call records, not Intraswitch CDR records.
Features and technical reference When an adjunct-originated call is made on behalf of a hunt group and the CDR system parameter option is set to group-ext, then CDR privacy does not apply. If this field is set to member-ext, privacy does apply. NOTE: Certain countries have requirements that a certain number of digits must be blanked from every call. Also, certain report processors do not support this option.
Call detail recording CDR Record formats Two types of formats are sent to the CDR output device, date record and call detail formats. Date record format CDR sends date information to the CDR device once a day (at midnight), or when the device is connected. This is a non-call record, and contains only the information shown in the date record formats below. Several formats are available for date records: one for CDRUs, one for the printer, and one for the TELESEER.
Features and technical reference Table 31. Date record format for Printer and Expanded Position Data Field Description 1–2 Month (leading 0 added if needed) 3 Space 4–5 Day (leading 0 added if needed) 6 Carriage return 7 Line feed 8–10 Null Table 32.
Call detail recording However, whatever device you use to interpret the CDR data needs to be programmed to accept these formats. Consult your Avaya representative before using a custom record format. Table 33.
Features and technical reference Table 34.
Call detail recording Table 35.
Features and technical reference Table 36.
Call detail recording Table 37.
Features and technical reference Table 37. CDR data format — printer (Continued) Position Data Field Description 78–80 Outgoing circuit ID 81 Space 82 Feature flag 83 Carriage return 84 Line feed Continued on next page Table 38.
Call detail recording Table 38. CDR data format — ISDN printer (Continued) Position Data Field Description 43–57 Account code 58 Space 59–65 Authorization code 66 Space 67–68 INS (hundreds, tens) 69 Space 70 INS (units) 71 Space 72 FRL 73 Space 74–76 Incoming circuit ID 77 Space 78–80 Outgoing circuit ID 81 Space 82 Feature flag 83 Carriage return 84 Line feed Continued on next page Table 39.
Features and technical reference Table 39.
Call detail recording Table 40.
Features and technical reference Table 40. CDR data format — LSU-Expand (Continued) Position Data Field Description 66 Space 67–68 Outgoing circuit ID (tens, units) 69 Space 70 Outgoing circuit ID (hundreds) 71 Space 72 Incoming circuit ID (hundreds) 73 IXC 74 Carriage return 75 Line feed 76–78 Null Continued on next page Table 41.
Call detail recording Table 41. CDR data format — LSU (Continued) Position Data Field Description 46 Calling number (1st digit) 47–48 Incoming circuit ID (tens, units) 49 Feature flag 50–52 Outgoing circuit ID (tens, units, hundreds) 53 Incoming circuit ID (hundreds) 54 IXC 55 Carriage return 56 Line feed 57–59 Null Continued on next page Table 42.
Features and technical reference Table 42. CDR data format — ISDN LSU (Continued) Position Data Field Description 47–48 Incoming circuit ID (tens, units) 49 Feature flag 50–52 Outgoing circuit ID (tens, units, hundreds) 53 Incoming circuit ID (hundreds) 54 FRL 55 Carriage return 56 Line feed 57–59 Null Continued on next page Table 43.
Call detail recording Table 43. CDR data format — Enhanced LSU (Continued) Position Data Field Description 49 Feature flag 50–52 Outgoing circuit ID (tens, units, hundreds) 53 Incoming circuit ID (hundreds) 54 FRL 55 Carriage return 56 Line feed 57–59 Null Continued on next page Table 44.
Features and technical reference Table 44.
Call detail recording Table 44. CDR data format — Expanded (Continued) Position Data Field Description 114–117 Packet count 118 Space 119 TSC flag 120 Space 121–129 Reserved 130 Space 131 Carriage return 132 Line feed 133–135 Null Continued on next page Table 45.
Features and technical reference Table 45.
Call detail recording Table 45. CDR data format — Enhanced Expanded (Continued) Position Data Field Description 108 Space 109 BCC 110 Space 111 MA-UUI 112 Space 113 Resource flag 114 Space 115–118 Packet count 119 Space 120 TSC flag 121 Space 122–123 Bandwidth 124 Space 125–130 ISDN CC (digits 1–6) 131–135 ISDN CC (digits 7–11)/PPM count (1–5) 136–146 Reserved for future use 147 Carriage return 148 Line feed 149–151 Null Continued on next page Table 46.
Features and technical reference Table 46.
Call detail recording Table 46. CDR data format — Unformatted (Continued) Position Data Field Description 101 Carriage return 102 Line feed 103–105 Null Continued on next page Table 47.
Features and technical reference Table 47. CDR data format — Enhanced Unformatted (Continued) Position Data Field Description 77–80 Incoming TAC 81–82 Node number 83–87 ISDN NSV 88–89 IXC code 90 BCC 91 MA-UUI 92 Resource flag 93–96 Packet count 97 TSC flag 98–99 Bandwidth 100–105 ISDN CC (digits 1–6) 106–110 ISDN CC (digits 7–11)/PPM count (1–5) 111–114 Reserved for future use 115 Carriage return 116 Line feed 117–119 Null Continued on next page Table 48.
Call detail recording Table 48.
Features and technical reference Table 49.
Call detail recording Table 49. CDR data format — Int-Direct (Continued) Position Data Field Description 77–78 Outgoing circuit ID 79 Carriage return 80 Line feed Continued on next page Table 50.
Features and technical reference Table 50.
Call detail recording Table 50. CDR data format — Int-ISDN (Continued) Position Data Field Description 110 MA-UUI 111 Space 112 Resource flag 113 Space 114–119 Reserved 120–124 PPM or reserved 125–131 Space 132 Carriage return 133 Line feed 134–136 Null Continued on next page Call detail record field descriptions The following list describes the CDR data collected for each call and the number of digits in each field.
Features and technical reference ■ Account Code (acct-code) — up to 15 digits This field may contain a number to associate call information with projects or account numbers. For some formats, a long account code overwrites spaces on the record that are assigned to other fields. ■ Attendant Console (attd-console) — 2 digits This field contains the attendant console number of the attendant that handled the call in a record that is marked as being attendant handled.
Call detail recording ■ Calling Number (calling-num) — up to 10 digits (15 for customized records) For outgoing or intraswitch calls, this field contains the extension number of the originating telephone user. For incoming and tandem calls, this field contains the TAC in standard formats. The fifth digit is the first digit of a 5-digit dialing plan. In formats where the field is less than 7 digits, this also shows the TAC of the incoming call.
Features and technical reference Table 51. Condition codes Condition Codes Description 0 Identifies an intraswitch call (a call that originates and terminates on the switch). 1 (A) Identifies an attendant-handled call or an attendant-assisted call (except conference calls). 4 (D) Identifies an extremely long call (10 hours or more) or an extremely high message count TSC (9999 messages or more).
Call detail recording Table 51. Condition codes (Continued) Condition Codes Description E (N) An ineffective call attempt due to facilities not being available, such as all trunks are busy and either no queuing exists or the queue is full on an outgoing call, or the called extension is busy or unassigned for an incoming call attempt. This also means an ISDN Call By Call Service Selection call was unsuccessful because of an administered trunk usage allocation plan.
Features and technical reference ■ Condition Code overrides If two condition codes apply to the same call, one code overrides the other. The matrix below, Table 52 on page 1592, defines the overrides. To use this matrix, assume that condition codes 7 and A apply to the same call. To find the condition code that overrides, look at the point of where row 7 intersects column A (or where row A intersects column 7). In this case, condition code 7 overrides. Table 52.
Call detail recording ■ Date You can include the date in customized records only. The format is based on the value of the CDR Date Format field on the CDR System Parameters screen. ■ Dialed Number (dialed-num) — up to 23 digits This field contains the number dialed. If it is an outgoing call, the field contains the number dialed by a system user. If it is an incoming call, the field contains the extension that was dialed (or implied, as in Dialed Number Identification System).
Features and technical reference ■ Feature Flag (feat-flag) — 1 digit The feature flag indicates whether a call received network answer supervision, and if the call was interworked in the network. The call duration starts at the point of receiving the network answer. You can administer the feature flag (on the CDR System Parameters screen) to reflect whether an outgoing ISDN call was reported as interworked by the network.
Call detail recording — If the call is an outgoing call and an authorization code is used to make the call, this field contains the FRL associated with the dialed authorization code. — If the call is an incoming or tandem call, this field contains the FRL assigned to the incoming trunk group. — If the call is an incoming tandem tie trunk call, this field contains either the FRL assigned to the tandem tie trunk or the TCM sent with the tandem tie trunk call, depending on which was used to complete the call.
Features and technical reference ■ INS (3 digits) This field specifies the ISDN Network Service requested for a call. This field applies only to ISDN calls. Each Network Specific Facility has a corresponding INS value, shown in Table 53. This field also appears as ISDN NSV (Network Service Value). Table 53.
Call detail recording Users must dial an IXC access number to access a specific common carrier for a call. In the US, this number is in the form 10XXX, 950 — 1XXX, or any 8–11 digit number. The IXC access numbers applicable at a given location are associated with an IXC code on the Inter-Exchange Carrier Codes screen. When ARS is used, and a route pattern inserts one of the administered IXC codes, the report contains the associated IXC code.
Features and technical reference The format of this field varies from record to record. For printer, Teleseer and 59-character formats, and the ISDN and enhanced forms of those records, the numbers appear inverted on the record. For example, the circuit ID 123 appears as 231 (tens, units, hundreds). If you want to change this to appear in hundreds, tens, units format (123), use the Modified Circuit ID Display field on the CDR System Parameters screen.
Call detail recording Table 54. Encoding for TSC flag Encoding Meaning 0 Circuit-switched call without TSC requests 1–3 Reserved 4 Call Associated TSC requested and accepted in response to SETUP, no congestion control (applicable to originating node). Call Associated TSC received and accepted via SETUP, no congestion control (applicable to terminating node). 5 Call Associated TSC received and accepted via SETUP, congestion control (applicable to terminating node).
Features and technical reference ■ Time This fields contains the time that the call ended, or the time that a user dropped from a multiparty call, if Call Splitting is active. ■ VDN (vdn) — 5 digits This field is only available on customized records. The call record contains the VDN extension number. If VDN Return Destination is active, this field contains the first VDN the caller accessed.
Call detail recording ■ Attendant Console If an attendant-assisted call involves an outgoing trunk, the primary extension of the user who requests attendant service is recorded as the calling number, even if the attendant dialed the outside number. Condition Code 1 indicates the call was assisted by the attendant. If the attendant allows through dialing, the primary extension of the user who dialed the number is recorded as the calling party.
Features and technical reference ■ AUDIX - Transfer out of If Incoming Trunk Call Splitting is enabled, and Transfer out of AUDIX is used, CDR generates two records. The first contains the AUDIX, the second contains the transferred-to party. ■ Authorization Codes Authorization codes are recorded on CDR records provided account codes do not exceed 5 digits for non-ISDN and ISDN LSU formats, or 4 digits for Enhanced LSU formats.
Call detail recording If an ARS call is an attendant-assisted call, the CDR record shows the call with a Condition Code of 7 (ARS call) instead of a Condition Code of 1 (attendant-assisted call). This occurs because CDR is not notified until after the trunk is seized and, in this case, the trunk is not seized until the user dials the number. For FEAC, if a trunk group is accessed via ARS, the trunk group’s COR is not used to determine if an account code needs to be entered.
Features and technical reference ■ Call Coverage When an incoming or intraswitch call is answered by a covering extension, the extension number dialed by the originating party is recorded as the dialed number. If a call is covered to an off-net location, the dialed number is the number of the off-net location, the calling number is the number of the station that is covered to the remote location.
Call detail recording For incoming calls to a VDN, the duration of the call is recorded from the time answer supervision is returned. — If answer supervision is returned by the vector (via an announcement, collect, disconnect, or wait with music command), and the call never goes to another extension, the VDN extension is recorded as the called number in the CDR record.
Features and technical reference ■ CO Trunks All incoming and outgoing calls on a CO trunk group are recorded, if CDR is assigned to the trunk group and CDR is administered to record incoming calls. ■ Conference For the purpose of CDR, a call is considered a conference call if it contains at least one trunk that is eligible for CDR plus two or more parties, or if it contains at least one party optioned for intraswitch CDR. Condition Code C applies to each CDR record made for a conference call.
Call detail recording ■ DCS Station information is not passed throughout the DCS network for CDR purposes. ■ DID trunks All incoming calls on the DID trunk group will be recorded if administered to record incoming CDR and if CDR is administered for this trunk group. ■ Emergency Access to the Attendant CDR does not generate intraswitch records for Emergency Access calls. ■ Expert Agent Selection A logical extension can be assigned to an agent who can log into a phone using that extension number.
Features and technical reference ■ ISDN When true answer supervision is received from the network, an indication is sent to the CDR device to this effect. If an ISDN call has been interworked, the call record shows this, and answer supervision may or may not be accurate. If you use unformatted or expanded record formats, the SID/ANI appears in the record, if sent. ■ Last Number Dialed The CDR access code and account code dialed are stored as part of the Last Number Dialed.
Call detail recording ■ Planned Interchange When a planned interchange occurs (either demand or scheduled), it is possible for the CDR records on calls ending within 10–20 seconds after the interchange to report as “invalid long duration calls” (duration of 9:59:9 and Condition Code other than 4). This is caused by deviations in the clocks between the two processors and the short duration of the calls. Consider these records invalid.
Features and technical reference ■ Temporary Signaling Connections (TSCs) Call-associated TSCs and TSC requests appear in the call record, provided the switch is administered to use ISDN layouts. Non-call-associated TSCs and TSC requests generate separate CDR records if the switch is administered to record them. In either case, the TSC Flag and Packet Count fields of the call record contain TSC data.
Call detail recording ■ Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Although they are not really conference calls, Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer connections are treated as such for CDR purposes. A separate CDR record is generated for each trunk in the connection. Unanswered Trunk Calls may or may not be recorded depending on administration. You can administer each trunk group so that unanswered calls are recorded if they remain unanswered for a specified period of time.
Features and technical reference Call forwarding Call Forwarding allows users to redirect calls to designated destinations. The forwarded-to destination can be an internal extension, external (off-net) number, an attendant group, or a specific attendant. Call Forwarding provides five functions: ■ Call Forwarding-All Calls — Allows a user to redirect every incoming call to the forwarded-to destination.
Call forwarding Call Forwarding Busy/Don’t Answer The feature is activated or deactivated with a feature-access code or Call Forward Busy/Don’t Answer feature button. An attendant or phone with console permission can also activate or deactivate the feature for another extension by using a feature-access code. Virtual extension users cannot activate or deactivate Call Forwarding Busy/Don’t Answer. Call Forward Busy/Don't Answer cannot be activated for hunt groups, data extensions, or TEG.
Features and technical reference Whenever an incoming trunk call is redirected off-net, a timer is set that precludes any other incoming trunk call from redirecting off-net until the timer either expires or is cancelled. The rationale for this mechanism is to prevent calls that were redirected off-net from being re-routed back to the original principal from the off-net destination, effectively creating a round-robin loop that continuously seizes trunks until they are exhausted.
Call forwarding Considerations Calls can be forwarded only once. Consider the following scenario. Extension A forwards its calls to extension B. Extension B forwards its calls to extension C. Calls made to extension A: ■ Ring at A, if possible ■ Ring at B, if possible ■ Redirect to extension A’s coverage path, if available and A’s coverage criteria are satisfied when applied at B ■ Are not forwarded to extension C There is no maximum number of calls that can be forwarded simultaneously.
Features and technical reference Type of Forwarding Forwarding All Forwarding Busy/Don’t Answer CCRON off-net off-net DCS (CCRON off) coverage path local DCS (CCRON on) off-net off-net ■ Coverage path —- On the Coverage Path screen, the Number of Rings field. ■ Local — On the System-Parameters Coverage/Forwarding screen, the Local Subsequent Redirection/CFWD Don’t Answer Interval field.
Call forwarding ■ Bridging Calls do not terminate to bridged appearances when Call Forward Busy/Don’t Answer is active. The switch blocks users from bridging onto a call that has routed off net while the call is undergoing call classification.
Features and technical reference ■ Call Pickup/Directed Call Pickup If the Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup field is set to y on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, a Temporary Bridged Appearance is maintained if the forwarded-to destination is a member of the same call pickup group as that of the forwarded from station. If the Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup field is set to n, a Temporary Bridged Appearance is not maintained.
Call forwarding ■ Intraflow Call forwarding can be used to unconditionally redirect ACD calls from a split to another destination on the same switch. ■ Leave Word Calling (LWC) LWC cannot be activated toward a phone that has Call Forwarding activated. If LWC was activated before the called phone user activated Call Forwarding, the callback call attempt is redirected to the forwarded-to party.
Features and technical reference Related topics See ‘‘System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding’’ on page 1167 for information on setting the number of times an extension rings before the system redirects the call or to determine whether the forwarded-to phone can override call forwarding to allow calls to the forwarded-from phone. See ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781 for information on forwarding calls to an administered number.
Call park Call Park allows telephone users to answer a call at one extension, but complete the call at another extension. Call Park also allows users to answer a call at any telephone after being paged by a telephone user or an attendant.
Features and technical reference ■ Call Vectoring A call cannot be parked on a vector directory number (VDN) extension. Also, a call that is undergoing vector processing cannot be parked. ■ Code Calling Access When a paging party dials the Code Calling Access code and the paged user’s extension, the paging party is automatically parked on the paged party’s extension.
Call Pickup Related topics ■ Feature Access Code (FAC) screen ■ Feature-Related System Parameters screen ■ Station screen (multiappearance phones) ■ Console-Parameters screen Call Pickup Call Pickup and Directed Call Pickup allow a telephone user to answer calls that alert at other extension numbers within the user’s specified call pickup group. Directed Call Pickup allows telephone users to pick up any call on the Avaya MultiVantage system.
Features and technical reference If calls ring at 2 or more telephones in a call pickup group and a group member presses the Call Pickup button, a distribution algorithm determines which call is answered. Thus, all call pickup group members are treated equally. Specifically, when a Call Pickup button is pressed, the system searches the group extension numbers until reaching an extension with a call eligible for Call Pickup.
Call Pickup Interactions ■ Abbreviated Dialing A user can store: — The Directed Call Pickup feature access code (FAC) plus a telephone address in an Abbreviated Dial button — The Directed Call Pickup FAC. (The user then dials each extension.) ■ Attendant Attendant can use Directed Call Pickup, but other users cannot use the feature to answer a call alerting at an attendant’s telephone.
Features and technical reference ■ Call Forwarding If Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup is enabled, a temporary bridged appearance is maintained if the forwarded-to telephone belongs to the same call pickup group as the forwarded-from telephone. If Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup is not enabled, a temporary bridged appearance is not maintained.
Call Pickup ■ Hold If the Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup field is not enabled and a user puts a call answered with Directed Call Pickup on hold, the called party cannot answer the call because a temporary bridged appearance is maintained. If the Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup field is enabled, then: — A call picked up and placed on hold at an extension remains on that extension, even if the called party answers the call.
Features and technical reference ■ Privacy — Manual Exclusion In the following case, the called party is not dropped when Privacy — Manual Exclusion is activated. A call is made to Station A and Station B picks it up using Call Pickup. Station A bridges onto the call by going off-hook on its call appearance. Station B activates Privacy — Manual Exclusion. ■ Tenant Partitioning Directed Call Pickup follows existing Tenant Partitioning.
Call-by-call service selection Considerations ■ An analog telephone user must place the active call on soft hold and dial the Answer Hold-Unhold feature access code to answer the waiting call. ■ If an analog single-line telephone has Call Waiting enabled and has initiated a conference call, Call Waiting is denied. For example, caller A (on an analog telephone) is talking to caller B, then flashes and is talking to caller C, and then flashes to conference B and C.
Features and technical reference Brief description Call-by-Call Service Selection uses the same route patterns and route preferences that are used by AAR, ARS, and GRS. The service or facility used on an outgoing Call-by-Call Service Selection call is determined by information assigned in the AAR/ARS/GRS route patterns. You can allow a variety of services to use a single trunk group. The system obtains trunking efficiency by distributing traffic over all the available trunks.
Call-by-call service selection Using Country Protocol 1, you integrate services and features such as MEGACOM, ACCUNET, and INWATS onto a single ISDN-PRI trunk group with flexible assignment of trunks to each service or feature. Calls such as an incoming 800 Service call that requires through-switching as an Outgoing WATS call can be routed via the same facility. See the ISDN trunk group screen on page ‘‘ISDN trunk group’’ on page 936 for a listing of available services.
Features and technical reference ■ Network-Facilities (See the DEFINTY services documentation for information about the Network Facilities screen.) — All ISDN messages and information elements for usage allocation Understanding the technical details of ISDN messages and information elements may help you implement ISDN. Call-by-Call Service Selection allows the system to specify one of the preceding service types on a call-by-call basis.
Call-by-call service selection Usage allocation plans Optional UAPs may be assigned to provide more control over a Call-by-Call Service Selection trunk group. You can allocate a minimum and maximum number of channels for incoming and outgoing called numbers, privileged users, and voice and data calls. A UAP allows the customer to set the following options: ■ Maximum number of trunks that each service can use at any given time.The sum for all services may exceed the total number of trunk-group members.
Features and technical reference The treatment for an incoming call is selected based on the first 3 columns in the ICHT on the ISDN Trunk Group screen. When the attributes of an incoming call match these specifications, the call is treated according to the corresponding following 4 columns. If an incoming call matches more than one set of specifications, the most restrictive case applies. The following table lists the possible cases from most restrictive to least restrictive.
Calling party/billing number Interactions ■ Multiquest Flexible Billing Do not use a Service/Facility with the Facility Type field set to 2 or 3. NSF processing is not performed for Facility Type 2. An NSF is not included in the outgoing SETUP message for Facility Type 3. ■ Time-of-Day Routing Any Time-of-Day Routing administration that affects routing preference also affects Call-by-Call Service Selection. Use Time-of-Day Routing to vary the IXC based on the time of day and day of the week.
Features and technical reference Related topics See ‘‘ISDN service’’ on page 1730 for an overview of ISDN capabilities. See the Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD Call Centers for information on using Calling Party Number and Billing Number with Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Inbound Call Management. Complete all screens required to administer ACD. See the DEFINTY services documentation for information about the Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System parameters screen.
CLAN and processor CLAN QoS and CIDR support CLAN and processor CLAN QoS and CIDR support Previous IP packet addressing and routing procedures for the TN799 Control-LAN circuit pack have not always been compatible with Avaya MultiVantage customers’ evolved networks. Quality of Service (QoS) features are necessary to provide superior call quality for voice-over-IP (VoIP) signaling.
Features and technical reference Windows Operating System Whether the TN799 Control-LAN circuit pack tags frames with VLAN and user-priority values is administered on the IP Network Region screen. However, for the processor CLAN function on S8100 Media Server with a CMC1 and S8100 Media Server with a G600, the operating system also controls tagging. ■ If the IP Network Region screen is administered to tag, but the Windows operating system is set to not tag, then the processor CLAN function will not tag.
CLAN and processor CLAN QoS and CIDR support Linux Operating System Whether the TN799 Control-LAN circuit pack tags frames with VLAN and user-priority values is administered on the IP Network Region screen. However, for the processor CLAN function on the S8300 Media Server with a G700, the operating system also controls tagging. The IP Network Region screen and the bash command under the Linux operating system both set the same entries in a configuration file.
Features and technical reference Interactions Signaling to other switches or adjuncts can be done through the CLAN and the processor CLAN function. If you have an R11 connected to an older system that does not support 802.1p and 802.1Q VLANs on their signaling channels, you can administer it to be in a network region where these things are administered to no. If you decide to ignore the above advice and attempt signaling from a new system that is using 802.1p and 802.
Class of restriction Class of restriction You use COR to define the types of calls your users can place and receive. Your system may have only a single COR, a COR with no restrictions, or as many CORs as necessary to effect the desired restrictions. You will see the COR field in many different places throughout the MultiVantage System - when administering phones, trunks, agent logins, and data modules, to name a few.
Features and technical reference Called-party and calling-party restrictions Called-party and calling-party restrictions are the basis for all CORs. When no restrictions are needed, assign a single COR with called-party and calling-party restrictions set to none. You can use this COR for unrestricted telephones, trunk groups, TEGs, UCD groups, DDC groups, data modules, attendant groups, and individual attendant extensions.
Class of restriction Outward restrictions You can use outward restrictions to prevent users from placing calls to the public network. These users can still place calls to other telephone users, to the attendant, and over tie trunks. If necessary, an attendant or an unrestricted telephone user can extend a call to an outside number for an outward-restricted telephone user.
Features and technical reference Miscellaneous trunk restrictions You can use miscellaneous trunk restrictions to prohibit users from accessing specific trunk groups, such as WATS or CO trunk groups. Any or all trunk groups can be in a miscellaneous-trunk-restriction group. Restricted calls are routed to intercept tone. Toll and TAC-Toll restrictions Toll restrictions prevent users from placing public-network calls to certain toll-call numbers.
Class of restriction ■ Class of Service (COS) In some cases, the COR can be overridden by the COS. See the Trk-to-Trk Restriction Override field documented with the ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672. ■ Controlled Restriction Restrictions assigned via Controlled Restriction override COR restriction. ■ Emergency Access to Attendant Emergency Access to Attendant calls are not restricted by COR.
Features and technical reference ■ Hunt Group The COR assigned to the Hunt Group is checked on calls redirected by the DDC or UCD of the hunt group. Extensions in the hunt group that have Fully Restricted Service can receive calls from the public network (via the hunt group) if the COR of the Hunt Group does not have Fully Restricted Service. ■ Personal Central Office Line Do not assign fully restricted service to users who have a personal CO line.
Conference Conference The Conference button allows multiappearance telephone users to make up to six party conference calls without attendant assistance. This button also allows single-line telephone users to make up to three party conference calls without attendant assistance. Considerations ■ A single-line telephone can have up to 6 parties on a conference call, if each conferee adds another conferee. For example, one user can add a party, who then adds a third party, and so on.
Features and technical reference Conference/Transfer Toggle/Swap Conference/Transfer Toggle/Swap allows users to toggle between two parties in the middle of setting up a conference prior to connecting all parties together or to consult with both parties prior to transferring a call. The display also toggles between the two parties. This is not available on attendant consoles.
Conference No Hold Conference No Hold Conference allows a user that is actively on a call to call another party and set up a conference call without interrupting the current call. The called party is added to the conference call as soon as they answer. Once the conference call is established, the call proceeds like a normal conference call. This feature can be used on a multiple-line digital telephones. Interactions ■ Bridged Call Appearance A bridged call appearance can be used to make conference calls.
Features and technical reference Related Topics See the ‘‘Feature-Related System Parameters’’ on page 795 screen for the following conference-related fields: Public Network Trunks on Conference Call Conference Parties With Public Network Trunks Conference Parties Without Public Network Trunks Conference Tone Abort Conference Upon Hang-Up Co-Resident DEFINITY Local Area Network Gateway Co-Resident DEFINITY Local Area Network (LAN) Gateway (DLG) is application software that is part of the MultiVantage soft
Co-Resident DEFINITY Local Area Network Gateway Hardware specifications CallVisor ASAI The CallVisor ASAI CTI link requires the following hardware components: ■ An Ethernet interface for connectivity to adjunct. The platform configuration determines the Ethernet interface. — The following platforms rely on the TN801B MAPD-based DEFINITY LAN Gateway (DLG) as the Ethernet interface.
Features and technical reference Restriction — controlled Controlled Restrictions allow a telephone user with console permission to activate or deactivate specific restrictions. Detailed description Use Controlled Restriction to administer the following restrictions: ■ Outward — The telephone cannot place calls to the public network. ■ Total — The telephone cannot place or receive calls.
Crisis Alert Interactions ■ Call Coverage Controlled Restrictions are not checked for covering users. ■ Call Forwarding Controlled Restrictions for the forwarded-to extension are checked when Call Forwarding All Calls is active. ■ Class of Restriction All telephones with the same COR are affected by a group restriction. When a call is placed, both individual and group restrictions are checked.
Features and technical reference Multiple emergency calls If an emergency call is made while another crisis alert is still active, the call will be placed in queue. If you have administered the system so that all users must respond, then every user must respond to every call. The calls may not necessarily queue in the order in which they were made. If you have administered the system so that only one user must respond, the first crisis alert remains active at the phone where it was acknowledged.
Crisis Alert Interactions ■ Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) If CAS is enabled, the alert still goes to the local attendant. ■ Phone Display When an emergency call is made and a crisis alert station with a 27-character display is notified, only 17 characters of the name field appear on the first display line, followed by the extension. The second line contains the last 3 characters of the name field, followed by the word “EMERGENCY.” Characters 18 through 24 of the name field do not appear at all.
Features and technical reference Dial plan The dial plan provides information to the switch on what to do with dialed digits. A table defines the intended use of a code beginning with a specific first digit or pair of digits. These digits tell the system how many digits to collect before processing the full digit string. For example, a digit string beginning with 8 may tell the system to wait for 4 more digits because this is the first digit of a 5-digit internal extension.
Dial plan Considerations ■ You cannot assign prefixed extensions longer than five digits (including prefix) to intercom lists. ■ A TAC and an extension can share a first digit only if the extension is shorter than the TAC. ■ Although extensions with the same first digit can have different lengths, data-channel extensions must have the maximum number of digits to avoid timeout problems for data calls that the switch automatically sets up, for example, the CDR link.
Features and technical reference ■ Property Management System (PMS) PMS products accept only extensions of 5 digits or shorter. Therefore, a customer using PMS cannot use 6/7-digit extensions. ■ Uniform Dial Plan The following limitations apply to a DCS environment: — Extensions that differ in length from the UDP do not distribute to other switches. — You can use only a single length in your UDP.
DS1 trunk service Considerations ■ If Distinctive Ringing is disabled, the system generates a 1-burst repetitive tone for all incoming calls. This is useful for equipment interfaced by analog lines, especially if you use off-premises station. ■ A single distinctive ring cycle is used for each new incoming call to an off-hook telephone or headset. The system alerts a CALLMASTER terminal with a single ring cycle whenever either the headset or the handset is plugged into the headset jack.
Features and technical reference ■ Wide Area Telecommunications Service (WATS) trunks ■ Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks ■ Main/Satellite tie trunks ■ Tie trunks that link Common-Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA) or Enhanced Private Switched Communications Service (EPSCS) networks ■ Release-link trunks for Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) ■ Access trunks ■ Off-premises stations (also known as station-side DS1) ■ Access endpoints DS1 also provides the following functions in public an
DS1 trunk service DS1 Circuit Packs # Trunk Members Bit Rate Mbps Companding Signaling Mode Trunk Type1 TN464B5 1-30 2.048 alaw/mulaw6 CAS CO/DID/Tie alaw isdn-pri4 ISDN isdn-ext4 ISDN common-chan Tie, DMI-BOS, CO2 robbed-bit CO/DID/Tie isdn-pri4 ISDN 1-31 1-31 1-23 TN464C, D, E, F3, and TN2464 TN2242 1.544 mulaw 1-24 1-23 (24th is D-chan) 1.5444 1-31 (16th is D-chan) 2.048 1-24 1.5444 1-31 2.048 1-30 alaw/mulaw ISDN alaw/mulaw isdn-ext4 ISDN 2.
Features and technical reference Signaling modes Common-channel signaling (CCS) is an industry-standard technique where any one of a group of channels carries the signals for the other channels. Avaya uses the 24th channel of a group for signaling. This signaling technique differs from 24-channel signaling. When the system is configured for Facility-Associated Signaling, 24-channel signaling uses the 24th channel in a DS1 facility to carry signals.
DS1 trunk service Admin value Country Protocol supported B-channel mtce msg 2a Australia AUSTEL TS014.
Features and technical reference Admin value Country Protocol supported B-channel mtce msg 23 Brazil ETS 300 102 Restart 24 Nordic ETS 300 102 Restart 25 South Africa ETS 300 102 Restart ETSI - a Europe, New Zealand, etc. ETS 300 102 Restart ETS 300 102 None ETSI - b Continued on next page EC500 Extension to Cellular EC500 is an integrated mobility solution that offers users the freedom to work anywhere, anytime, using any type of cellular or wireless phone.
EC500 Extension to Cellular Call Waiting, Call Identification, and Voice Mail EC500 allows use of standard cellular features such as incoming call waiting and caller identification. ■ If the cell phone (and network) supports calling number identification, the Avaya Communications Server delivers the calling number to it. For internally originated calls, the calling number may be presented in either the national numbering plan format (i.e.
Features and technical reference ■ Any other station linked to the call as part of a bridge or temporary bridge is able to bridge on to that call. Making Calls Calls can be made to any number from the EC500 cell phone. Depending on how the EC500 XMOBILE stations are administered, the EC500 cell phone can function both as a standard cell phone and as an office extension when the calls are made into the user’s office switch.
EC500 Extension to Cellular Additional information For additional information, see the EC500 documentation: 1. Access the Avaya website at http://avaya.com 2. Click Support. 3. Click Online Services. 4. Click Documentation. 5. Click Recent Documents. 6. Scroll down to the Wireless section. 7. Select EC500 Extension to Cellular.
Features and technical reference Emergency Access to the Attendant Emergency Access to the Attendant alerts an attendant if a telephone remains off-hook for more than the administered period of time. It also enables a user to place an emergency call to an attendant. Detailed description Emergency calls can be placed automatically by the system or dialed by system users. Such calls can receive priority handling by the attendant.
Emergency Access to the Attendant ■ Time of the call ■ The following known call results: — Call Completed — Call answered at attendant or listed directory number (LDN) night extension. — Queue Full — Emergency-access queue is full; tries to redirect the call to an emergency-access redirection extension. — No Attd — No active attendants are available to receive the call; tries to redirect the call to an emergency-access redirection extension.
Features and technical reference Interactions ■ Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) For a branch with CAS in effect, an emergency call reroutes to the branch attendant group. If the branch does not have an attendant or if the branch is not in CAS Backup Service, the call is denied. If the branch PBX is in CAS Backup Service, an emergency call routes to the backup position and is handled as any other non-emergency call.
Emergency calls Related screens ■ Class of Service (Off-Hook Alert) ■ Console Parameters — Queue Priorities ■ Feature-Related System Parameters — Reserved Slots for Attendant Priority Queue — Time before Off-Hook Alert — Emergency Access Redirection Extension ■ Hospitality — Extension of Journal/Schedule Printer — Time of Scheduled Emergency Access Summary Report ■ Attendant Console - Feature Button Assignments — em-acc-att ■ Feature Access Code (FAC) — Emergency Access To Attendant Access Code
Features and technical reference calls from a station on a PBX not equipped with CAMA trunks (or an adjunct computer system associated with CAMA trunks) will not provide the E911 system with the information required to identify the location of the person placing the call. Instead, the E911 system will only be able to identify the location of the trunk termination at the PBX.
Extended user administration of redirected calls Detailed description Emergency Transfer allows analog telephones (500- or 2500-type) to access the local CO and to answer incoming calls during a power failure. Each DEFINITY server cabinet supports Emergency Transfer panels via the AUX connectors on the rear panel. The transfer is initiated when: ■ a transfer panel or associated cabinet loses power.
Features and technical reference Detailed description This feature does not change Call Coverage, nor does it change Call Forwarding All Calls or the Call Forwarding Busy/Don’t Answer. It merely allows you to select between one of two previously administered coverage paths or to change your forwarding from any on-site or off-site location. Telecommuting access extension The telecommuting access extension allows you to use Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls from off-site.
Extended user administration of redirected calls COR The COR controls the use of the change coverage option of Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls. This means that, if the Can Change Coverage field on the COR screen is set to y, you can use the Change Coverage FAC to change your coverage option.
Features and technical reference Interactions ■ Bridged Appearance When the pound key (#) is pressed from a bridged appearance immediately following any of this feature’s four FACs, the system assumes the currently active bridged extension will be administered. The station security code of the currently active bridged extension must be entered after the initial # to successfully complete the command sequence.
Extended user administration of redirected calls ■ Tenant Partitioning The telecommuting access extension is always automatically assigned to Tenant Partition 1, so it can be accessed by all tenants. The tenant number of the extension administered must be accessible by the tenant number from which the Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls FAC is dialed or the request is denied.
Features and technical reference Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling Facility Associated Signaling (FAS) allows an ISDN-PRI T1/E1 interface D-channel to carry signaling information for all the bearer (B) channels on its associated span. Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS) allows 1 ISDN-PRI T1/E1 interface D-channel to carry signaling information for up to 300 bearer (B) channels on its associated spans.
Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling r781799 CJL 060996 Figure Notes 1. Avaya Media Server 4. ISDN-PRI controlled by D-Channel 2. Secondary D-Channel 5. Network Far-End Switch DEFINITY Server 3. Primary D-Channel Figure 58. ISDN-PRI Configuration With T1 (24 channel) interfaces, 2 of the ISDN-PRIs contain a D-channel and 23 B-channels, while the other ISDN-PRI contains 24 B-channels. One of the D-channels is the Primary D-channel, and the other is the Secondary D-channel.
Features and technical reference D-Channel Backup activation ■ D-Channel Failure If the signaling link fails on the active D-channel (D1) or the hardware carrying D1 fails, the system sends a message over the standby D-channel (D2). D2 then becomes the active D-channel and carries all subsequent signaling messages. When the signaling link or hardware on D1 recovers from the failure, D1 becomes the standby D-channel.
Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling ■ Define Signaling Groups. A Signaling Group is a group of B-channels for which a given D-channel (or D-channel pair) carries the signaling information. Each Signaling Group must be designated as either a FAS or NFAS Signaling Group. — A FAS Signaling Group must contain all the ISDN B-Channels on the T1/E1 interface associated with the group’s D-channel, and cannot contain B-channels from any other DS1 circuit pack.
Features and technical reference The Signaling Mode field must be specified for each DS1 circuit pack. Because this circuit pack has the Signaling Mode field set to isdn-ext, all trunks on this circuit pack are signaled using either inband robbed-bit signaling or a D-channel on another DS1 circuit pack. DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location: 1B17 Bit Rate: 2.
Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling SIGNALING GROUP Associated Signaling? y Max number of NCA TSC: 0 Primary D-Channel: 1B1924 Max number of CA TSC: 0 Trunk Group for NCA TSC: __ Trunk Group for Channel Selection: _____ Group Number : 3 Screen 308.
Features and technical reference .
Facility restriction levels and traveling class marks Detailed Description FRL The switch compares the FRL of the outgoing phone to the FRL of either the terminating trunk group or, for AAR and ARS, the routing preference specified on the Routing Pattern Table. If the FRL of the originator is equal to or greater than the terminating or route pattern FRL, the call continues. Otherwise, the call is blocked. TCM If an intertandem tie-trunk group is used for a call, then a TCM is outpulsed as the last digit.
Features and technical reference Call terminating facilities Any of the following trunk types can serve as the termination point for an AAR or ARS call: ■ Tie trunk — excluding RLT, but including CCSA and Enhanced Private Switched Communications Services (EPSCS) access trunks ■ WATS ■ CO ■ FX ■ ISDN-PRI Each of these outgoing trunk groups has an assigned COR that contains an FRL. However, this FRL is never used in an AAR or ARS call.
Generalized route selection Example The following is an example of how FRLs can be assigned in a COR: ■ FRL0 — 911 access only ■ FRL1 — Local calls only ■ FRL2 — FRL1 plus home area-code calls using WATS ■ FRL3 — FRL2 plus use of local lines for all calls in the home area code ■ FRL4 — FRL3 plus calls to all the USA, using WATS only ■ FRL5 — FRL4 plus calls to all the USA, using local lines ■ FRL6 — FRL5 plus international calls ■ FRL7 — Reserved ■ Call Detail Recording Interactions If
Features and technical reference Detailed description GRS recognizes one or more BCC for each trunk group preference in the route pattern. BCC defines the type of information being sent as voice or data. The switch checks the BCC for all trunk groups to see if the route selected and type of call are compatible. The BCC is assigned to the route preference on the Route Pattern screen. GRS chooses a preference with BCC set to yes in this order: BCC 2, BCC 1, BCC 3, BCC 4.
Generalized route selection Example Assume a route pattern is set up with BCC 0 and BCC 2 set to yes in preference 1, and BCC 1, BCC 3, and BCC 4 set to yes in preference 2. A voice or Mode 2 data call accessing this pattern uses preference 1. A Mode 1, Mode 3, or Mode 0 data call uses preference 2, regardless of what trunks are available in the first preference. Data modules and GRS For all endpoints, the switch automatically determines its current operating mode when a data module begins operations.
Features and technical reference Legend BCC Type DCP/DM I Mode 0 Voice-Grade Data and Voice None 1 56 kbps Data (Mode 1) 1 2 64 kbps Data (Mode 2) 2 3 64 kbps Data (Mode 3) 3 4 64 kbps Data (Mode 0) 0 Related topics See ‘‘Route Pattern’’ on page 1096 for information on how to set up route patterns. Group paging Group paging allows users to make an announcement over a group of digital speakerphones. ■ You can create up to 32 paging groups on one DEFINITY server.
Group paging Controlling access to paging groups Each paging group is assigned a class of restriction, so you can provide or deny access to different classes of users by setting calling permissions appropriately. Note that you can administer classes of restriction so remote callers can make speakerphone pages. If you don’t want to allow remote users to page, you may want to set calling permissions (on the Class of Restriction screen) for VDNs and trunk groups so that neither can initiate pages.
Features and technical reference ■ Call Forwarding Group pages cannot be forwarded. ■ Conference Neither group members receiving a page nor the originator of the page can conference the page to other extensions. ■ Distributed Communications System (DCS) Page groups cannot be administered across DCS switches. DCS is not supported. ■ Do Not Disturb If a member of a page group activates Do Not Disturb, that member does not receive pages.
Hospitality features Vectoring ■ Paging groups cannot be explicitly added to a vector path. NOTE: If a vector has a collect digits step and a route-to digits step, a person who uses the vector can enter a page group extension. Ensure that the COR of the vector restricts the vector from calling the page group if this action is not desired. Related topics See ‘‘Paging over speakerphones’’ on page 479 to administer group paging.
Features and technical reference Check In/Check Out Status You can allow the attendant to review the check-in/check-out status by assigning an occ-rooms (occupied rooms) button on the Attendant Console screen. When the attendant activates check-in/check-out mode, the DXS lamps light for every occupied room. Maid Status You can allow the attendant to review the maid status by assigning a maid-stat button on the Attendant Console screen.
Hospitality features Interactions ■ Coverage XDID ports perform hunt-to before coverage. After hunting, coverage criteria for these calls is based upon the DID, but the coverage points are based upon the hunted-to phone (room). ■ Coverage Do not assign a Class of Service (COS) with Client Room enabled for the XDID station types. Automatic Wakeup Automatic Wakeup allows attendants, front desk users, and guests to request an automatic wakeup call at a later time.
Features and technical reference If a wakeup-call attempt is not answered or if the extension is busy, the system tries two more times at 5-minute intervals. If the call does not complete after 3 attempts, the switch leaves an LWC message for a designated extension (usually assigned to a button on the attendant console or backup phone). The system maintains a complete record of all wakeup-call activity for the past 24 hours.
Hospitality features The attendant presses the automatic wakeup entry button to activate the feature. If the attendant is on an active call with a system user, the user’s extension displays as the default extension after pressing the pound sign (#). If the displayed extension is not the extension of the user requesting the wakeup call, the attendant can change it. Display prompting continues until the attendant enters all necessary information and the request for the wakeup call is confirmed.
Features and technical reference If a wakeup call is incomplete because of a busy, no answer, ringing blockage, or system reset, the system attempts to place the call 2 more times at 5-minute intervals. If the call is not completed after 3 attempts, the system leaves an LWC message to account for the failed attempt. A special extension, called the Extension to Receive Failed Wakeup LWC Messages, is administered exclusively for receiving failed wakeup-call LWC messages.
Hospitality features — Swap — A room swap occurs and at least one of the rooms has a wakeup request. Wakeup calls swap when a room swap is performed. A journal entry is made for each room. If the room receives a wakeup call as the result of the swap, the time of the call is provided in the entry. If the room loses a wakeup call as the result of the swap (and has not received another), the time is not present in the entry. — Completed — The wakeup call completes successfully.
Features and technical reference You can administer a multiple announcement to repeat. To enable repeating announcements, enter announcement type integ-rep command on the Recorded Announcement screen. With repeating integrated-message functionality, the announcement keeps repeating from when the first guest (of a group of guests receiving the same wakeup announcement at the same time) goes off-hook until the last guest goes on-hook.
Hospitality features Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers Custom Selection of VIP DID numbers allows you to select the DID number assigned to a room when a guest checks in. It also provides buttons on display sets that allow you to check-in a VIP (the vip-chkin button), to view and change XDID and XDIDVIP numbers (the did-view button), and to disassociate XDID and XDIDVIP numbers outside of the normal guest check-out procedure (the did-remove button).
Features and technical reference Phone users with touch-tone dialing can activate this feature themselves or ask the front desk to do it for them. Users with rotary-dial phones must call the attendant or front-desk user to request Do Not Disturb. Activation by phone users Phone users can activate Do Not Disturb by dial access or by button access. If users have a speech-synthesizer circuit pack, they can activate Do Not Disturb themselves, without attendant assistance.
Hospitality features Audit Trail Reports The system keeps a record of all phones that are in Do Not Disturb mode. You can display or print this information. Administer the following reports for printing on a daily basis: ■ Do Not Disturb Status Report — This report lists all extensions with Do Not Disturb active and the specified deactivate time for each. ■ Do Not Disturb Plus COR Status Report — This report lists all extensions, plus those whose controlled-restriction level is termination restriction.
Features and technical reference ■ Call Forwarding All Calls If Do Not Disturb is active at the forwarding extension, the caller receives intercept treatment. If Do Not Disturb is active at the forwarded-to extension, the call alerts the forwarded-to extension. ■ Controlled Restriction When a phone has total-controlled restriction, it cannot receive or place any calls. However, it can receive a call if another station has an auto-icom button pointing to the controlled-restriction station.
Hospitality features 3. The switch stores the guest’s name and coverage path. 4. The switch removes the outward restriction on the telephone in the guest room. The switch removes all LWC messages. 5. The switch changes the status of the room from unoccupied to occupied. At check-in, update the PBX names internal table and the call-coverage path for the guest phone. Name Registration automatically sends a guest’s name, extension (room), and preferred call-coverage path to the switch. Check Out 1.
Features and technical reference Call Coverage Both Names Registration and Guest Information Input/Change messages contain call-coverage path numbers. These numbers do not display but are used to configure the appropriate call-coverage arrangements for guest extensions. Arrangements can be for voice mail, text messages, any available coverage point, or no coverage at all. Administer call-coverage paths on the switch, and use the associated path numbers to establish coverage arrangements at check-in.
Hospitality features ■ PMS Interface During a Room Change/Room Swap, the name originally associated with the first terminal is changed or swapped to the second terminal along with call-coverage path, automatic wake-up entries, message-waiting status, and controlled restrictions. Property Management System Interface Property Management System (PMS) Interface provides a communications link between the switch and a customer-owned PMS.
Features and technical reference Table 58.
Hospitality features The application module of the PMS Interface implements requested features and provides backup if the PMS link is down.
Features and technical reference A supporting function called Room Data Image synchronizes the switch and PMS databases after a PMS link goes down and comes back up. Information exchanged includes: ■ Room extension ■ Whether the room is occupied or vacant ■ Message Waiting lamp status ■ Controlled Restriction status ■ Guest’s name ■ Call Coverage path Message Waiting Notification Message Waiting Notification requests originate from attendant consoles, front-desk terminals, or PMS terminals.
Hospitality features PMS-Down Log The pms-down log records only those User Controller Restriction events that are for stations having a COS where: ■ the Client Room field is y ■ the Controlled Restriction Configuration field is act-pms ■ the pms link is not up ■ the pms log extension is valid Housekeeping Status Your housekeeping staff enters status information from phones in guest/patient rooms or from designated terminals.
Features and technical reference A Check-In/Check-Out request sends information for Names Registration to the switch. This information includes the guest’s name, room extension, and call-coverage path. If the PMS link is down and check-in is done from an attendant console or display-equipped front-desk phone, the guest’s name and coverage-path information is not automatically updated. If a guest/patient room has both a voice and a data extension, the checkout request applies only to the voice extension.
Hospitality features When the messaging link is down and the PMS/MultiVantage link is up, the switch buffer holds up to 100 PMS messages. The switch updates the Intuity Lodging adjunct once the link is up. If the buffer overflows before the link is up, the database resync among PMS/MultiVantage/Intuity initiates by demand or by a routine database update from PMS.
Features and technical reference ■ Do Not Disturb Set or cancel a Do Not Disturb request for a guest room as a result of a different Controlled Restriction, Room Change/Room Swap, or Check-Out. ■ Leave Word Calling (LWC) Message lamps activated by this feature cannot deactivate with Manual Message Waiting feature buttons. If Room Change is active, LWC messages for the old room do not move to the new room. If Room Swap is active, LWC messages for the two rooms do not swap.
Hunt groups Interactions ■ Automatic Selection of DID Numbers for Guest Rooms If Automatic Selection of DID numbers is active, then a DID number is assigned only to the initial extension (the one that appears in the check-in message), not to all of the hunt-to extensions. ■ Dial By Name Since the secondary phones that are checked-in insert a "*" before the name, they do not appear when Dial By Name is used.
Features and technical reference In addition, a hunt group might consist of a group of shared telecommunications facilities. For example, the group might be: ■ A modem pool ■ A group of data-line circuit ports ■ A group of data modules NOTE: You may also assign ACD to a hunt group. In this case, the hunt group is known as an ACD split. See Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD Call Centers for more details about ACD splits.
Hunt groups Hunt group queues You can set up a queue for a hunt group. When all extensions in the group are busy, calls wait in queue for the next available extension. You determine how many calls can wait in queue by setting the queue length. If all hunt-group members are unavailable or the queue is full, the system treats the call as follows: ■ If the call is internal or is carried on a DID, DS1, or tie trunk, the caller hears busy tone.
Features and technical reference Delay announcement interval You also define for each hunt group a delay announcement interval. When a call enters the queue, the interval starts. This interval (0 to 99 seconds) indicates how long a call remains in queue before the call connects to a recorded announcement. If Call Coverage is provided, the Don’t Answer interval (one to 99 ringing cycles) may also begin when the call enters the queue.
Hunt groups All hunt-group members are busy. A call enters the queue as the fifth call, which causes the queue warning level lamp to light. Hunt-group members see the lamp and try to quickly complete their present calls. Meanwhile, the call waits in the queue for 20 seconds and hears the recorded announcement. When a hunt-group member becomes available, the first call in queue connects to that group member. The queue warning-level lamp turns off because the number of calls in queue fell to four.
Features and technical reference ■ When the queue is empty, Hunt Group Busy activates. At the last available extension, the status lamp associated with the AUXILIARY WORK button, if provided, flashes until the queue is empty. When no more calls remain in the queue, Hunt Group Busy activates and the status lamp, if provided, lights steadily.
Hunt groups ■ ACD agents as hunt group members Do not include ACD split agents in non-ACD hunt groups if they also receive ACD split calls. The system distributes all ACD calls to split agents before it distributes hunt-group calls. When you change an ACD split to a non-ACD hunt group, each split agent must enter the Hunt Group Busy deactivation code in order to receive calls in that hunt group. If the agent has an AUX-WORK button, the button lamp lights when you make the change.
Features and technical reference ■ Answer supervision The switch sends answer supervision to the central office when a call connects to an extension in the hunt group or an announcement. Charging for the call, if applicable, then begins. Interactions ■ Attendant Call Waiting Attendant Call Waiting does not work for calls that the attendant sends to a hunt group. It does work for calls to individual hunt-group members.
Incoming Call Line Identification When Night Service is active for a hunt group and the night service destination is another hunt group, the caller hears the forced announcement of the first hunt group, if administered. The system then redirects the call to the night-service hunt group. ■ Priority Calling The system treats a priority call to a hunt group the same as a nonpriority call, except that the extension receives a distinctive 3-burst ring.
Features and technical reference Detailed description Your switch stores and displays up to 15 characters of ICLID information received on analog trunks. If the information is longer than 15 characters, it truncates to 15 characters. If the caller ID information is not received, the trunk group name and trunk access code appear on the display. Calling party information appears on all Avaya MultiVantage digital phones with 40-character or 32-character displays.
Intercom Intercom groups ■ You can create up to 32 intercom groups on one DEFINITY server. ■ Each group can have up to 32 extensions in it. ■ It’s OK to assign the same extension to different groups. ■ Intercom calls are only possible between extensions in the same group. ■ Any group member with a feature button for dial intercom can make an intercom call to any other member in the group. ■ You can assign any type of phone to an intercom group.
Features and technical reference Internal Automatic Answer Internal Automatic Answer (IAA) provides convenient hands-free answering of internal calls to users on multifunction stations with a speakerphone or a headphone. Detailed description An eligible call can be answered automatically via IAA if the user activates IAA at the answering telephone and the user is able to accept an incoming call.
Internal Automatic Answer IAA Feature Operations With IAA, you can assign a single programmable feature button (IAA) to telephones. When the user presses the IAA feature button, the button lamp lights and the system activates IAA. Pressing the same button again deactivates IAA and turns off the status lamp. (Pressing the feature button has no effect on a currently-active call or a ringing call.) The IAA button may be toggled on or off at any time, regardless of the state of the telephone.
Features and technical reference ■ Bridged Call Appearance — Multiappearance Telephone Calls terminating on a bridged call appearance are not eligible for IAA at the bridged station, even if the bridged station has IAA active. (IAA can be used by the principal station to answer the call.) ■ Bridged Call Appearance — Single-Line Telephone Calls terminating to a bridged call appearance are not eligible for IAA at the bridged station, even if the bridged station has IAA active.
Internal Automatic Answer ■ Conference Internal conference calls can be answered automatically via IAA. If more than one party has joined a conference call through automatic answer, the parties remain connected until they disconnect or the controlling party drops the call. ■ Data Call Setup Data calls are not eligible for IAA. ■ Direct Department Calling (DDC) and Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Internal calls to a DDC or UCD group member are eligible for IAA.
Features and technical reference ISDN service The Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) provides a message-oriented signaling method that allows information to be sent along with a call and gives you access to a variety of public and private network services and facilities. The ISDN standard consists of layers 1, 2, and 3 of the Open System Interconnect (OSI) model.
ISDN service ■ Lookahead Inteflow ■ Lookahead Routing ■ Usage Allocation Screens used to administer ISDN See Access Endpoint to administer Access Endpoints and Wideband Access endpoints.
Features and technical reference Avaya MultiVantage offers several administrable protocols, each of which provides a different set of ISDN services. See ‘‘DS1 trunk service’’ on page 1659 for more information. These protocols are discussed in detail later in this section. The following combination of services, including but not limited to Basic Call, Basic Supplementary Services, Supplementary Services with Rerouting, Display, and QSIG Networking are supported on the ISDN-PRI interface.
ISDN service AT&T Switched Network Protocol Avaya MultiVantage supports the AT&T Switched Network Protocol described in the TR41449 (for 4ESS to common carrier) and TR41459 (for 5ESS to CO) ISDN protocol standards as defined by AT&T. This protocol is used when the DS1 circuit pack is administered for Country Code 1, Protocol Version a. The AT&T Switched Network provides you with the following services. Access to AT&T Switched Network Services ISDN provides access to AT&T Switched Network Services.
Features and technical reference The figure below shows a simplified diagram of a CPN- and BN-to-host arrangement. The ISDN Gateway is a UNIX or MSDOS computer connected to the switch on one side and to a host computer on the other side. The connection to the switch is over a synchronous interface with BX.25 protocol. r781861 CJL 060996 Figure Notes 1. ISDN trunk 6. Existing interface 2. SID/ANI 7. Host computer 3. Avaya Media Server 8. Telephone 4. BX.25 9. ACD agent position 5.
ISDN service The ISDN can also be used to connect ETN tandem and main switches. In this case, the main switch collects all of the address digits from local users as well as users at other satellite and tributary switches, and originates a call over ISDN to the tandem switch. Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR) and Automatic Route Selection (ARS) are used with ISDN and DS1 trunking facilities to access ETN facilities.
Features and technical reference Access to Switched Digital International Switched Digital International (SDI) provides 64 kbps of unrestricted connectivity to international locations via the AT&T Switched Network. It is also the backbone for the AT&T International ISDN network. SDI complements the ACCUNET digital service already available to United States locations. This service can be accessed using Call-by-Call Service Selection.
ISDN service Call-by-Call Service Selection Call-by-Call Service Selection for NI-2 is essentially the same as that for the AT&T Switched Network ISDN-PRI protocol. ISDN interworking ISDN interworking allows calls to use a combination of both ISDN and non-ISDN trunking and station facilities. A non-ISDN trunking facility is any trunk facility supported by the system that does not use the ITU-T recommended Q.931 message set for signaling.
Features and technical reference Avaya MultiVantage supports sending a non-ISDN trunk name as the connected name. Therefore, a non-ISDN trunk name can be sent as the connected name even when a call starts out as an ISDN call but is interworked over non-ISDN trunks. Call Identification Display Two types of identification numbers are provided with ISDN and may be used in the various types of displays used with ISDN.
ISDN service ■ Calling Party’s Name The calling party’s name appears on the called party’s display. On calls generated from a DEFINITY server, the caller’s name is provided if the ISDN trunk group is administered to send the name to the network. On calls incoming to a DEFINITY server, the (public or private) network may provide the caller’s name. If the caller’s name is not available, the called party’s display shows “CALL FROM” instead, followed by the calling party’s number (if available).
Features and technical reference Displays for redirected calls Features such as Call Coverage, Call Forwarding All Calls, Bridged Call Appearance, or Call Pickup redirect calls from the called party’s extension to some other destination.
ISDN service Caller Information Forwarding With CINFO you can use a vector collect digits step to retrieve caller entered digits (ced) and customer database-provided digits (cdpd) supplied by the network in an incoming call’s ISDN SET UP message. ISDN is required if the CINFO comes from the network.
Features and technical reference Interactions ■ Australia Malicious Call Trace Avaya MultiVantage with a BRI connection to the Australian public network is able to notify the network if a user in a private network invokes the Malicious Call Trace feature. This works on Australian national connections. ■ Direct Inward Dialing Some public network operators may not offer full DID service on BRI trunks, but instead may offer the BRI equivalent, which typically is called MSN.
ISDN service ■ Message Sequence Tracer ISDN-BRI trunks support Message Sequence Tracer. However, certain filtering capabilities available for PRI trunks are not available. Specifically, it is not possible to filter BRI trunk messages based on incoming/outgoing calling/called number. ■ Network Access - Public (LEC/AT&T/Other Carriers) Public-network access using BRI trunks is available but only in those countries that support point-to-point BRI connections. In the U.S.
Features and technical reference See ‘‘Generalized route selection’’ on page 1687 for information on this feature that matches calls to appropriate transmission facilities based on the endpoints and the type of call (for example, voice or data). See ‘‘Look-ahead routing’’ on page 1750 for information on balancing call volume across a network by automatically rerouting ISDN calls to other switches in the network.
Leave Word Calling Leave Word Calling Log External Calls allows the switch to monitor when an external call is not answered. The switch keeps a record of up to 15 calls, provided information on the caller identification is available, and the phone’s message lamp lights. The phone set displays the names and numbers of unsuccessful callers. Considerations ■ You can administer up to 10 telephones (or nine telephones and the attendant console group) as system-wide message retrievers.
Features and technical reference ■ Conference A member of a conference call cannot activate LWC because the user cannot be uniquely identified. After LWC has been activated for a party on a conference or transfer, the conference or transfer originator cannot press Conference/Transfer a second time to return to the original call. The originator must select the call appearance button to return to the previously-held call.
Listed Directory Numbers Line Lockout occurs when: ■ A user does not hang up after the other party on a call is disconnected. The user receives the dial tone for 10 seconds and then receives the intercept tone for the length of time administered in Line Intercept Tone Timer on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. If the handset remains off-hook, the telephone is taken out of service. ■ A user pauses for 10 seconds between digits while dialing. The user receives intercept tone for 30 seconds.
Features and technical reference How the system routes incoming DID trunk calls to the attendant group Incoming DID calls route only to an extension. The LDN feature allows you to assign one or more extensions to an attendant group. The system uses the LDN extension, or extensions, to route calls to an attendant group.
Location by region Location by region Location by Region provides a way to administer location by IP network region. This allows for the correct date and time information and trunk routing based on the IP network region. Detailed description Location by Region allows you the ability to have an IP phone registered with a DEFINITY server, but located at a site with a S8300 Media Server with a G700 or Remote Office endpoints, to display the correct time and date worldwide.
Features and technical reference Look-ahead routing Look-Ahead Routing (LAR) allows the switch to reroute an outgoing ISDN call that is not completing. The switch attempts to complete the call along a different routing preference, or it tries the current routing preference a second time. If the current preference fails twice, the next routing preference is tried. LAR can be administered at an origination switch or a tandem switch.
Look-ahead routing LAR activation LAR is active when a call is rejected with a cause value in the range of #34–#47 and #3 (no route to destination). The range of #34–#47 indicates congestion and that resources are unavailable.
Features and technical reference Interactions ■ Automatic Circuit Assurance LAR rerouting attempts are recorded as short holding time calls. ■ Distributed Communications Systems (DCS) If a non-DCS trunk preference is selected for rerouting a DCS call, DCS feature transparency is lost. If LAR for a DCS call is done within the same DCS trunk group, feature transparency is not lost.
Loss plans Loss plans Loss plans determine the amount of loss (quieter) or gain (louder) applied on calls. Usually, your system uses a pre-defined loss plan that is based on the administered country code. In some circumstances, you may be able to change the loss plan used by your system on a per trunk or per phone basis. ! CAUTION: The values in the loss plan can significantly affect the quality of service that your users experience.
Features and technical reference Brief description Avaya MultiVantage offers 2 types of loudspeaker paging. You can use each separately, and you can also use both together. Voice paging Voice paging allows users to make announcements over a loudspeaker system from their phones. You can integrate voice paging and Call Park by enabling deluxe paging. Chime paging If frequent voice pages are undesirable, you can assign a unique series of chimes (a chime code) to each extension.
Loudspeaker paging Users with single-line phones This description only applies to systems with deluxe paging. To page and park an active call simultaneously, users with a single-line phone press Recall or flash the switch hook, dial the trunk access code + an extension where the call will be parked, and press Recall again. The paging user is conferenced with the parked caller and both are connected in a 3-way conference with the paged user when he or she responds.
Features and technical reference Restrictions on loudspeaker paging These restrictions apply to both voice, deluxe voice, and chime paging: ■ A paging call can’t be placed on hold, included in a conference call, or transferred. Ringback queuing doesn’t work with loudspeaker paging calls either.
Loudspeaker paging ■ Conference — Attendant and Terminal Paging calls cannot be conferenced. ■ Data Call Setup If the Data button has been pressed for modem pooling, access to paging is denied. ■ Data Privacy If a call has Data Privacy activated and you park it by deluxe paging, Data Privacy for that call is automatically deactivated. ■ Hunt Groups If a hunt-group member parks a call using deluxe paging, the call is parked on the member’s own extension, not the hunt-group extension.
Features and technical reference ■ Conference — Terminal A call cannot be conferenced while the user is accessing paging equipment. ■ PagePac Paging Systems If you use chime code paging with a PagePac system, you can only page one zone at a time. PagePac systems expect a 2-digit code to access a particular zone. The system, however, immediately plays the chime code once a connection is established. ■ Transfer A call cannot be transferred while the attendant is accessing paging equipment.
Malicious Call Trace Malicious Call Trace Malicious Call Trace (MCT) allows you to trace malicious calls. MCT allows you to define a group of telephone users who can notify others in the group when they receive a malicious call. These users then can retrieve information related to the call. Using this information, you can identify the malicious call source or provide information to personnel at an adjacent switch to complete the trace. MCT also allows you to record the malicious call.
Features and technical reference Once MCT is activated, information on the call is collected and alerts users in the group. The alert is not a call, so it is not affected by queues at the user’s terminal. If an MCT Voice Recorder is connected, it begins recording the conversation. NOTE: Any Bridging, Conference, or Intrusion tone connected to parties on the connection are temporarily removed while the MCT Voice Recorder connects.
Malicious Call Trace Administering MCT for ISDN notification The following describes how to administer the ISDN MCT notification for an ISDN trunk group (public-ntwrk, tandem, tie, or access). Display the System-Parameter Customer-Options screen and ensure that ISDN is enabled. One of the following must be set on the DS1 screen: ■ If the DS1 is connected to the public network in Australia, set Country Protocol field to 2.
Features and technical reference ■ If a malicious call comes in on a non-ISDN trunk, the controller needs the telephone number for the connecting switch and a cross-reference of system-trunk port numbers (including DS1 channel number, if appropriate) not the trunk equipment locations at the connecting switch. Be sure that they have this information.
Malicious Call Trace ■ Distributed Communications System (DCS) If a telephone in a DCS network is involved in a malicious call, the extension is recorded and displayed with the MCT information. MCT notification passes over ISDN-PRI DCS trunks but MCT-Activate, MCT-Control, and MCT-Deactivate must be performed by telephones within the same DCS node. ■ Emergency Access to the Attendant Ordinarily, during MCT-Control no other feature can access the controlling telephone’s display.
Features and technical reference ■ Transfer If a user transfers a malicious call, the MCT information displayed on the controlling telephone identifies the transferring party as the MCT recipient. A user transfers a malicious caller to hold. The user initiates a Transfer, receives the second dial tone, enters the MCT-Activate FAC, then halts the remainder of the Transfer operation and returns to the malicious caller’s appearance.
Misoperation Handling Standard operation Standard misoperation handling is in effect when you set the Intercept Treatment on Failed Trunk Transfers field to y and set the Misoperation Alerting field to n. The type of telephone that is in use when the misoperation occurs (analog single-line or digital multiappearance) affects standard misoperation handling. The following scenario describes a typical misoperation on an analog terminal. 1.
Features and technical reference Analog terminal misoperation The following 2 scenarios describe typical misoperations on an analog terminal. Scenario 1. 1. While connected to an incoming external call (Type 1), an analog-terminal user flashes to transfer the call to another terminal. 2. The user hears dial tone, dials an invalid extension, then hears intercept tone. 3. When the user hangs up, the call re-alerts the user for 15 seconds and eventually routes to the attendant. Scenario 2. 1.
Modem pooling 3. When the calls start re-alerting, a timer starts. The timer is set to the value assigned in the Alerting (sec) field on the Console-Parameters screen. 4. If the attendant does not answer the calls before the timer expires, calls route to the system Night Service destination. Calls that are not answered at the night service destination before the night-service-disconnect timer expires are dropped.
Features and technical reference Combined-conversion modem pools are TDMs cabled to any TDM-compatible modem. Combined-conversion modem pools can be used with all systems. When the system needs a modem, it queries the digital-data module associated with the call to determine if the module’s options are compatible with those supported by the modem pools. If the options are not compatible, the originating user receives intercept treatment.
Modem pooling Considerations ■ On data calls between a data module and an analog-data endpoint, Return-to-Voice releases the modem and returns it to the pool. The phone user connects to the analog-data endpoint. ■ For traffic purposes, the system accumulates data on modem-pooling calls separate from voice calls. Measurements on the pools also accumulate.
Features and technical reference ■ Digital-multiplexed Interface Trunks If you place a data call from a local analog-data endpoint to a DMI trunk, you must dial the data-origination access code to obtain a modem. Data calls on DMI trunks to local analog-data endpoints automatically obtain modems. ■ DS1 Tie Trunk Service Connect modems used for Modem Pooling to AVD DS1 tie trunks via Data Terminal Dialing or by dialing the feature-access code for data origination.
Multiappearance Preselection and Preference ■ Idle Appearance Preference When a user lifts the handset to place a call, the system automatically connects them to an idle appearance even if an incoming call is ringing at another appearance. The in-use (red) lamp tracks an idle appearance when the user lifts the handset.
Features and technical reference Interactions ■ Automatic Incoming Call Display Incoming calls are not displayed if Idle Appearance Preference is activated. ■ Call Coverage If you administer Cover All Calls as the redirection criterion for a telephone, administer Idle Appearance Preference for the telephone. The called party can then lift the handset without accidentally connecting to a call that should be screened.
Multifrequency signaling R2-MFC is a version of MFC recommended by the International Telecommunication Union (ITU). It provides signaling between a CO and a switch over analog or digital CO, DID, or DIOD trunks. It also provides signaling between 2 MultiVantage switches. Avaya MultiVantage provides MF signaling that complies with ITU regulations and national regulations for specific countries. It provides these types of MF signaling: MFE) MF Shuttle, and multifrequency compelled (R2-MFC).
Features and technical reference R2-MFC R2-MFC permits each country to define the meanings of the R2 frequency combinations. R2-MFC Considerations 1774 ■ Both non-group II signaling and group II signaling are supported on incoming MF signaling calls. The group II signaling protocol has an extra signal that provides caller-category information. Only group II signaling is supported on outgoing MF signaling calls. ■ MF signaling also can be used in tandem trunk groups.
Multifrequency signaling Guidelines for administering MF signaling To administer MF signaling, first you identify the origination switch and the destination switch. (The switch making the call is the origination switch; the switch answering the call is the destination switch.) ■ The origination switch creates forward signals, classified as group I and group II signals. ■ The destination switch creates backward signals, classified as group A and group B signals.
Features and technical reference Second, you assign the correlation between signal codes and their meanings. 1. Assign a code to every message. The code consists of a group category, like group II or A, and a number. ■ For example, you might assign code A.1 to the message “next-digit.” 2. Assign a signal to each identifying code. ■ In every country, the frequencies (levels may differ by country) assigned to the identifying codes are the same.
Multifrequency signaling ■ Authorization Codes The COR of the authorization code as administered on the authorization-code screen is not used for ANI prefix determination, even if the originating endpoint enters an authorization code before call processing for an outgoing call seizes an outgoing trunk. If the originating endpoint is an extension, the extension’s ANI is used. If the originating endpoint is an incoming trunk, the ANI for PBX is used.
Features and technical reference ■ Hunt Groups and Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Splits For ANI, a physical terminal’s extension number and COR overrides the extension number and COR of the hunt group or ACD split that the terminal is a member of or logged into. ANI prefix and ANI truncation apply to terminals that are members of hunt groups or logged into ACD splits. ■ Intercept treatment For DID MF signaling calls that are denied, you can administer whether the corresponding B.
Night Service ■ Station Set Displays When no ANI is possible, if station sets are equipped with display option, they do not display the ANI digits. Instead, the trunk group name displays. When ANI is possible, ANI displays on the station set. For India Only. If ANI digits are padded with “zero,” then zeroes also are displayed along with ANI digits. ■ Tandem / Offnet Calls If ANI digits are received on incoming MFC calls, the ANI digits are sent to outgoing tandem/off-net calls. For Russia Only.
Features and technical reference Hunt Group Night Service Hunt Group Night Service allows an attendant or a split supervisor to assign a hunt group or split to Night Service mode. All calls for the hunt group then are redirected to the hunt group’s designated Night Service extension (NSE). When a user activates Hunt Group Night Service, the associated button lamp lights. Night Console Service Night Console Service directs all calls for primary and daytime attendant consoles to a night console.
Night Service Trunk Answer from Any Station Trunk Answer from Any Station (TAAS) allows phone users to answer all incoming calls to the attendant when the attendant is not on duty and when other phones have not been designated to answer the calls. The incoming call activates a gong, bell, or chime and a phone user dials an access code to answer the call.
Features and technical reference Considerations Considerations for Hunt Group Night Service ■ Both Hunt Group Night Service and Trunk Group Night Service can be active at the same time. An incoming trunk call is redirected to the trunk group’s designated NSE. If this NSE is a hunt group or split that is in Hunt Group Night Service mode, the call is redirected to the Hunt Group NSE.
Night Service ■ If a trunk without disconnect supervision goes to Night Service, the system drops the trunk after a period of time to avoid locking up the trunk. The call is not routed to the DID-LDN night extension. Considerations for TAAS ■ If Night Service is active and a power failure occurs, the system, when brought back up, automatically returns to Night Service mode.
Features and technical reference ■ If for some reason, a phone with a trunk-ns button remains out-of-service after a system reboot and later comes back in service, the trunk-ns lamp shows the trunk status within 10 seconds of coming back in service. For example, a phone with a trunk-ns button may be unplugged when the system is rebooted. If the phone is plugged back in later, the trunk status is shown on the trunk-ns button within 10 seconds.
Night Service Interactions for Night Console Service ■ Trunk Group Night Service Activation of Night Console Service for the attendant consoles also puts trunk groups into night service, except those trunk groups for which you administered a Trunk Group Night Service button. Interactions for Night Station Service ■ Call Coverage Calls routed to the night extension via Night Station Service follow the coverage path of the night extension under all coverage criteria except Send All Calls.
Features and technical reference ■ Timed Reminder Timed Reminder calls returning to a console that has been placed in Night Service and has an assigned DID-LDN night extension are not redirected to the DID-LDN night extension. Rather, they are dropped. ■ Trunk Answer from Any Station TAAS and Night Station Service can both be assigned within the same system, but cannot be assigned to the same trunk group.
Night Service Interactions for Trunk Group Night Service ■ Call Forwarding All Calls If the individual Trunk Group Night Service mode and the trunk group’s NSE have Call Forwarding All Calls activated, the night service calls terminating to that NSE are forwarded to the designated extension. ■ Forced First Announcements An interaction occurs with System Night Service and Forced First Announcement.
Features and technical reference For Night Station Service See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for information on assigning an extension number to night service. See ‘‘Listed Directory Numbers’’ on page 1015 for information on assigning an extension number to night service. See ‘‘Attendant Console’’ on page 614 for information on administering feature button assignments on an attendant console. See ‘‘Hunt Group’’ on page 875 for information on night service destination.
Off-Premises Station Off-Premises Station Off-Premises Station allows a phone located outside of the building where the switch is located to be connected to the system. If CO trunk circuits are used, the voice terminal must be analog and must be FCC-registered or, outside the US, registered by the appropriate governmental agency. Digital communications protocol (DCP) sets can be used as off-premises terminals with the addition of the DEFINITY extender.
Features and technical reference PC Interface The PC Interface consists of the PC/ISDN Platform product family. These products are used with Avaya MultiVantage to provide users of IBM-compatible PCs fully-integrated voice and data workstation capabilities. Detailed description Two groups of different configurations are available for PC Interface: group 1 uses DCP and group 2 uses the ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) protocol.
PC Interface Figure Notes 1. IBM-compatible PC with DCP Interface card 2. IBM-compatible PC with DCP Interface card 4. DCP phone 5. Avaya Media Server (Digital Line circuit pack) 6. Host 3. DCP Figure 62. DCP PC interface configuration (Group 1) The group 2 configurations link to the switch using a PC/ISDN Interface card installed in the PC. This group can include a stand-alone PC terminal, or up to 4 phones, handsets, or headsets.
Features and technical reference Figure Notes Figure 63. 1. ISDN phone 7. Avaya Media Server 2. PC with application 8. PRI trunks 3. Handset or Headset 9. BRI stations 4. BRI Interface card 10. Interworking 5. 2B + D 11. DMI 6. ISDN-BRI Line, 4-wire S/T-NT, interface circuit pack 12. Switch features ISDN—BRI PC interface configuration (Group 2) PC Interface users have multiple appearances (depending on the software application used) for their assigned extension.
PC Interface Security There are two areas where unauthorized use may occur with this feature: unauthorized local use and remote access. ! SECURITY ALERT: Unauthorized local use involves unauthorized users who attempt to make calls from a PC. The PC software has a security setting so users can place the PC in Security Mode when it is unattended. You can also assign Automatic Security so that the administration program on the PC is always active and runs in Security Mode. This mode is password-protected.
Features and technical reference ■ The 7404D phone with messaging cartridge cannot be used with PC Interface. However, the 7404D with PC cartridge can be used, but only with Group 1 configurations. ■ Data Communications Access Interactions PC Interface uses a digital interface and is not directly compatible with Data Communications Access, which uses an analog interface. Apply Modem Pooling conversion if you use these features together.
Personal Station Access A telecommuting or hoteling employee can also use PSA when working at home. For example, the employee installs a DCP terminal and a DEFINITY Extender at home, calls into the system, and uses PSA to associate the remote phone with their extension. The system associates the home terminal — that is, recognizes the home terminal as having the employee’s preferences and permissions. When someone calls the employee’s extension, the call rings at the employee’s home.
Features and technical reference Dissociated telephones When a user requests to associate a telephone with PSA, any other telephone using that extension is automatically dissociated. It is possible to place emergency calls from a dissociated telephone, provided a COR has been assigned to dissociated phones on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. PSA allows a dissociate request from a bridged appearance.
Personal Station Access ■ Coverage PSA does not change coverage path operations. If a station is dissociated, its calls still go to coverage unless they are forwarded. ■ Property Management System A station assigned to a room, rather than to a person who needs to work in multiple locations, should not use PSA. Such a station should not have PSA in its COS. ■ Save Translations PSA commands cannot be successfully executed during a save translations.
Features and technical reference Priority Calling Priority Calling provides a special type of call alerting between internal telephone users, including the attendant. The called party receives a distinctive ring when the calling party uses Priority Calling. You administer the priority-calling ringing-pattern system wide. Default is a 3-burst alerting signal. You allow feature use for each telephone user by administering the user’s class of service.
Priority Calling ■ Call Vectoring The system generates intercept tone when someone attempts to activate Priority Calling toward a VDN. ■ Call Waiting A Priority Calling call waits on an active single-line telephone even if Call Waiting is not assigned to the telephone. The active, single-line telephone user receiving the call hears a distinctive (default is three-burst) priority Call Waiting tone.
Features and technical reference Recorded Telephone Dictation Access Recorded Telephone Dictation Access permits phone users, including Remote Access and incoming tie-trunk users, to access dictation equipment. Users start by dialing an access code or extension. Start/stop is controlled by voice or dialing. Initial activation and playback are controlled by dial codes.
Remote Access Read the information in ‘‘Security’’ on page 1802 before administering this feature. ! SECURITY ALERT: Avaya has designed the Remote Access feature incorporated in this product that, when properly administered by the customer, enables the customer to minimize the ability of unauthorized persons to gain access to the network.
Features and technical reference The destination of incoming non-DID trunk calls can be an attendant or an extension. The destination is specified on each individual trunk group. When the trunk group is dedicated to Remote Access, the Remote Access extension is specified. In this case, you do all dialing. If an attendant is needed on a call, you dial the public network telephone number assigned, the barrier code, and the attendant access code.
Remote Access Barrier Codes Remote Access has inherent risks; it can lead to large-scale unauthorized long-distance use. To increase your system’s security, use a 7-digit barrier code with Remote Access Barrier Code Aging.
Features and technical reference Alternate Facility Restriction Levels Consider changing FRLs with AFRLs after normal business hours to restrict where calls can be made over your facilities. Take care not to restrict callers from summoning emergency services after hours. Class of Restriction The COR of an authorization code supersedes that of a barrier code. ■ Time of Day Routing — Controlled by the time-of-day entries in COR or by the partition. ■ Toll Restriction and Analysis — Controlled by COR.
Reset Shift Call Related topics See ‘‘QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen’’ on page 1085 for information about and field descriptions on the Remote Access screen. See ‘‘Setting up remote access’’ on page 370 for step-by-step instructions for configuring remote access. See ‘‘Authorization Code — COR Mapping’’ on page 631 for information about and field descriptions on the Authorization Code screen. See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for information about and field descriptions on the Trunk Group screen.
Features and technical reference Interactions ■ Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR) If a user dials the AAR feature access code followed by destination digits to place a call and the destination is busy, reset shift dial tones is heard. If the user then dials a new destination last digit, a new call is placed and the display updates as if the AAR feature access code, followed by the new destination, was dialed originally.
Remotely readable electronic phone IDs ■ Last Number Dialed If a user hits a LAST NUMBER DIALED button while listening to reset shift dial tone, the button press is denied. If a user uses last number dialed after having used reset shift call on the last call, the switch re-attempts the last special-dialed call. ■ Line Lockout An analog user listening to reset shift dial tone is not subject to the line intercept tone timer.
Features and technical reference The remotely readable electronic identification is currently only available with the 6400 Serialized DCP telephones. The 6400 Serialized phone is stamped with the word “Serialized” on the faceplate for easy identification. The remotely readable electronic ID allows both you and Avaya service personnel to obtain more accurate information about the phone, thus simplifying the repair process.
Ringer Cutoff A user may not wish to be disturbed by the arrival of incoming calls, yet not want calls to be redirected immediately to coverage. For example, an executive may want a secretary to answer calls before they redirect to coverage. The bridging user (the secretary) is not affected by the executive’s activation of Ringer Cutoff.
Features and technical reference Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed allows you to assign one of four ring types to each call appearance on a telephone. Whatever treatment is assigned to a call appearance is automatically assigned to each of its bridged call appearances.
Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed For Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed, each call appearance must be: ■ Assigned a ring type ■ Administered to transition when the: — Abbreviated/delayed transition interval is reached or when the user presses the abbreviated ring button — user presses the abbreviated ring button, regardless of the abbreviated/delayed transition interval Considerations ■ You cannot assign Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed to an attendant console.
Features and technical reference ■ Data Extension Calls Data Extension calls are not affected by the ring values, but continue to be directed by the bridged call alerting administration. ■ Hospitality Features — Do Not Disturb The Do Not Disturb feature takes precedence over the Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed feature in blocking ringing to the station.
Security violations notification Security violations notification When a security violation occurs, security violations notification (SVN) notifies a designated referral point. This can be an attendant console, a display-equipped phone, or a phone without display for SVN referral calls with announcements.
Features and technical reference Invalid attempts accumulate at different rates in the various security arenas (login, authorization code, remote access, and station security code), depending on feature usage and the number of users on a server. For this reason, you administer thresholds separately for each type of violation. Sequence of events The following is the sequence of events that occur when an SVN is enabled and a detects a security violation: 1.
Security violations notification SVN- halt buttons You can administer buttons for the notification extension to stop notification calls. However, this may pose a security risk. Do not use these buttons if you do not really need them. To find out what svn-halt buttons exist in the system, type display svn-button-location and press RETURN. The SVN Button Locations screen appears.
Features and technical reference Considerations ■ You may only administer one referral destination per system for each type of violation. ■ Exercise caution when administering bridged appearances for stations that are used as SVN referral destinations. SVN referral calls terminating to bridged appearances must be accompanied by an announcement message or must route to bridge appearances equipped with a display module.
Service observing Service observing Designated users, normally supervisors, can listen to other users’ calls. This capability is often used to train agents and monitor service quality in call centers and other environments where employees serve customers over the phone. On MultiVantage, this is called “service observing” and the user observing calls is the “observer.” This section describes service observing in environments without ACD or call vectoring.
Features and technical reference How to observe calls Observers press the service observing button on their phone or dial a feature access code, and then dial the extension they want to observe. When using a service observing button, observers start in listen-only mode and can toggle between listen-only and listen/talk mode by pressing the button. The button lamp indicates which mode the observer is in.
Service observing Phone displays A local observer’s phone display shows exactly what is displayed on the observed phone’s display, followed by the letters “so”. Trunk calls If a user makes a trunk-call, observation starts after the user finishes dialing. On central office (CO) trunks, dialing is considered complete when answer supervision is returned or when answer supervision timeout occurs. Service observing cannot be activated over trunks without disconnect supervision. Any attempt is denied.
Features and technical reference ■ Call Waiting Incoming calls cannot wait on a single-line phone that is being observed. ■ Conference Observers cannot initiate a conference while observing. If an observed user starts a conference or enters a conference with fewer than 6 parties, the observer is placed in wait state until the call is connected. Then the observer observes the conference and is counted as one party in the conference.
Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed Station Numbering ■ Privacy — Manual Exclusion You can’t observe an extension on which Privacy — Manual Exclusion is active. You also can’t observe an extension while it’s on a conference call with another extension using Privacy — Manual Exclusion. ■ Transfer Observers cannot initiate a transfer while observing. If a user transfers a call, the observer is placed in wait state. The observer is bridged onto the call when the transfer is complete.
Features and technical reference ■ Mixed station numbering extensions can have from one to seven digits and can begin with any digit from 0 to 9. The first digit, in combination with the number of digits dialed, defines the call type. To differentiate between two numbers with the same leading digit but different lengths, the system monitors the interval after a digit is dialed and before the next digit is dialed.
Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed Station Numbering ■ Local calling via ARS DAC 9 ■ 2-digit feature-access codes (FACs) [* or # plus another digit ] change dialplan analysis Page 1 of 3 SPE A DIAL PLAN ANALYSIS TABLE Percent Full: Dialed String 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 Total Length 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 Call Type attd ext ext ext ext ext ext ext ext ext ext ext ext ext Dialed String 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 9 * # Total Length 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 2 Call Type ext ext ext ext ext ext ext ext
Features and technical reference The dialing delays, which may not be perceived by hotel guests, will occur when dialing 6 and 7. The server must wait for the 3- to 9-second interdigit timeout to expire before the call will be sent. The user can preempt the timer by pressing the # key after the number has been dialed. NOTE: When using prefixed extensions, the extension that shows up on a display phone does not show the prefix. The prefix will not show up on CDR reports.
Station Hunting ■ PMS products accept only extensions of 5 digits or shorter. Therefore, a customer using PMS cannot use 6/7-digit extensions ■ .Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) The following limitations apply to a DCS environment: — Extensions that differ in length from the UDP do not distribute to other switches. — If the first two digits of an extension correspond to the floor number, floors cannot be serviced by more than one switch.
Features and technical reference Station Hunting examples In this example (Table 60), extension 2 is the called extension. Because extension 2 is busy, the system follows the station-hunting chain to find an idle extension. The system cannot find an idle extension so it returns busy tone to the caller. Note that the chain terminates with extension 5. This means that the system cannot route the call to extension 1 even though it is an idle extension in the chain. Table 60.
Station Hunting Table 62. Station-Hunting chain — Example 3 Extension State Rings on extension 1 Idle 2 2 Busy 3 3 Busy 4 4 Busy 5 5 Busy 3 Station hunting options You can administer the system to perform station hunting prior to sending calls to coverage.
Features and technical reference Interactions Remember that the system checks the station-hunting chain only for idle and available extensions. ■ Adjunct Switch Applications Interface (ASAI) The system attempts Station Hunting when ASAI routes to an extension with a hunt-to station. ■ Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) An agent extension can be part of a station-hunting chain. The system hunts the agent’s chain only when the call is made directly to the agent’s extension.
Station Hunting ■ Call Detail Recording (CDR) CDR records the called extension, not the answering extension. ■ Call Forwarding Call Forwarding has precedence over Station Hunting. If an idle station has Call Forwarding active, the system forwards the call. If a busy station has Call Forwarding active, a call to the station forwards. If the forwarded-to station is busy, the call follows that forwarded-to station’s hunting chain.
Features and technical reference ■ Do Not Disturb When a phone has Do Not Disturb activated, a call to that phone goes to intercept treatment and not to station hunting. ■ Extension Number Portability (ENP) You cannot assign a remote ENP extension as a hunt-to station. ■ Hunting/Hunting Group You cannot assign a direct departmental calling or Uniform Call Distribution extension as a hunt-to station. ■ Intercom Call The system denies Station Hunting for intercom calls to a busy extension.
Station Lock ■ Tenant Partitioning The system applies normal tenant restrictions to a call to the called extension. However, the system does not check tenant restrictions on hunt-to stations. ■ Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) The system considers a station with TTI separation as busy and bypasses it in the station-hunting chain. ■ Terminating Extension Group (TEG) You cannot assign a TEG as a hunt-to station.
Features and technical reference Analog and XMOBILE stations must dial a FAC to activate the feature. The user hears a special dial tone on subsequent origination attempts from the telephone to indicate that the lock feature is active. Digital stations (including DCP, BRI, IP hardphones and softphones) access Station Lock with a feature button or via a FAC.
Telephone displays Interactions Users need a station security code to use the following system capabilities: ■ Demand printing ■ Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls ■ Leave Word Calling ■ Personal Station Access ■ Voice Message Retrieval Related topics See ‘‘Assigning an extender password’’ on page 366 for information about creating a station security code. See ‘‘Training users’’ on page 373 for information about changing your station security code.
Features and technical reference Button display modes You can assign several display modes to phone buttons. Users access these modes by pressing the assigned button on the phone. All the buttons are administrable. Button Mode Displays Normal Call-related information for the active call appearance, including the call appearance, calling- or called-party name and number, depending on the type of call. Elapsed Time can be invoked anytime the display is in normal mode.
Telephone displays Button Mode Displays Message Retrieval Retrieves messages for phone users. If no messages are stored, display shows NO MESSAGES. Messages can be retrieved even if the retriever is active on a call. Message Retrieval can use 3 additional related buttons: Coverage Message Retrieval Mode ■ Next Message - retrieves the next message or displays END OF FILE, PUSH Next TO REPEAT when in Retrieval mode. ■ Delete - deletes the currently displayed message.
Features and technical reference ■ Calling Party Identification When a call is from inside the system, the display shows the caller’s name or a unique identification administered for the phone being used, along with the calling party’s extension. When the call is from outside the system, the display shows the trunk group name (such as CHICAGO) and the trunk access code assigned to the trunk group used for the call.
Telephone displays For example: dialed digits a=3602 then a=TOM BROWN 3062 or, if no name is available a=EXT 3602 ■ 3062 Call Purpose This identifies the reason for an incoming call or a redirected call. (A normal incoming call is not identified by a call purpose.) The following identifiers sometimes appear on the display: Display Meaning b — (Busy) The called user is active on a call, and has a temporary bridged appearance of the call. c — (Cover All) The called user has Cover All assigned.
Features and technical reference Message retrieval Certain phones and the attendant groups can be designated for system-wide message retrieval. Users of these phones or consoles can retrieve LWC and Call Coverage messages for other phone users, including DDC groups, UCD groups, and TEG. They can also retrieve external call logs. You can assign system-wide retrieving phones or consoles on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
Telephone displays Interactions ■ Distributed Communications System (DCS) Trunk group and attendant information associated with a DCS call can be translated. If the displays are not associated with a DCS call, the name that appears is the name administered on the form used to administer the trunk group. ■ Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed-Station Numbering If prefixed extensions are used in the system’s dial plan, the prefix is not displayed when the extension is displayed.
Features and technical reference ■ OSSI OSSI displays the literal value of the display field, not the enhanced characters. ■ Passageway Direct Connect Not supported. ■ VUStats Use phones that support enhanced characters or screens may clear and displays will be incorrect. Feature information displays Phone displays provide information about the activity on individual phones and consoles, including confirmation that a certain feature is being used.
Telephone displays Table 63. Automatic Wakeup (Continued) English French Italian Spanish WAKEUP ENTRY DENIED SYSTEM FULL DEM. REVEIL REFUSEE ENCOMBREMENT SVEGLIA NON ATTIVATA CONGESTIONE ENTRADA DENEGADA SISTEMA COMPLETO WAKEUP ENTRY DENIED - TOO SOON DEM.
Features and technical reference Table 65. Busy verification of terminals and trunks English French Italian Spanish ALL MADE BUSY TOUS OCC.
Telephone displays Table 68. Call progress feedback displays English French Italian Spanish busy (Extension Busy, Intrusion Not Allowed, Call Waiting Not Allowed) OCCUPE (Occupe) occ (Occupato) OCUPADA (Ocupada) busy(I) (Extension Busy, Intrusion Allowed, Call Waiting Not Allowed) OCC.
Features and technical reference Use the following screens to translate time messages, if appropriate.
Telephone displays Table 71. Date/Time mode — time not available English French Italian Spanish SORRY, TIME UNAVAILABLE NOW HEURE ET DATE INDISPONIBLES ORA E DATA TEMPON DISPONIBILI HORA Y FECHA NO DISPONIBL ES AHORA Table 72.
Features and technical reference Table 73.
Telephone displays Enhanced Abbreviated Dialing -user defined display display-messages ad-programming Language Translations Page 1 of 1 English 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Press button to program. 1. **************************************** Change number? 2. *********************** Yes=1 No=2 3. **************** Enter number: 4. **************************************** Press # to save. 5. **************** Number saved. 6. **************************************** Change label? 7.
Features and technical reference Table 76.
Telephone displays Table 77. Leave Word Calling messages English French Italian Spanish CANNOT BE DELETED CALL MESSAGE CENTER NE PEUT ETRE SUPP./APPELER RECEP. MESS. NON CANENTRYATO. CHIAMARE CENTRO MESSAGGI NO ELIMINADO-LLA MA CENTRO DE MENSAJES DELETED SUPPRIME MESSAGGIO CANENTRYATO ELIMINADO END OF MESSAGES (NEXT TO REPEAT) FIN DES MESSAGES (SUIVANT POUR REPETER) FINE MESSAGGI.
Features and technical reference Table 77. Leave Word Calling messages (Continued) English French Italian Spanish Message Center (AUDIX) CALL APPEL DE LA RECEPTION DE MESS. (AUDIX) Chiamata dal Centro Messaggi (AUDIX) LLAMADA DEL CENTRO DE MENSAJES (AUDIX) NO MESSAGES PAS DE MESSAGES NESSUN MESSAGGIO NINGUN MENSAJE WHOSE MESSAGES? (DIAL EXTENSION NUMBER) MESSAGES DE QUEL NO.? (ENTRER NO. POSTE) LETTURA MESSAGGI. INTRODURRE NUMERO TEL.
Telephone displays Table 78. Malicious Call Trace English French Italian Spanish party: (ISDN PORT ID) demandeur: (REF. PORT) utente: (ID DELLA PORTA) usuario: (ID DEL PUERTO) END OF TRACE INFORMATION FIN DES INFO DE DEPISTAGE INFORMAZIONI FINALI SUL RINTRACCIO FIN DE INFORMACION DE RASTREO voice recorder port: port enregistreur vocal: porta del registratore: puerto de grabado de voz: Continued on next page Table 79. Caller information English French Italian Spanish Info: INFO.
Features and technical reference Table 82. Queue status indication English French Italian Spanish <15 chrs> Q-time xx:xx calls xx <15 chrs> TEMPS-F xx:xx APPELS xx <15 chrs> T-coda xx:xx chiam xx <15 chrs> HORA-C xx:xx LLAMADAS xx Table 83.
Telephone displays Table 83.
Features and technical reference Table 83. Miscellaneous call identifier (Continued) English French Italian Spanish so (Service Observing) ES (ecoute du service) is (Inclusione Supervisore) SS (Supervision del servicio) na (Unanswered or Incomplete DID Call) SR (Sans reponse) pn (Passante Non Risposta) SR (Sin respuesta) ACB (Automatic Callback) R. AUTO.
Telephone displays Table 83. Miscellaneous call identifier (Continued) English French Italian Spanish ARS (Automatic Route Selection) SAA (Selection de l’acheminement automatiqe) SAI (Selez. Autom. Instradam.) SAR (Seleccion automatica de rutas) forward (Call Forwarding) RENVOI (Renvoi) deviata (Deviata) REENVIO (Reenvio de llamada) cover (Cover) SUPPL. (Suppleance) copert.
Features and technical reference Table 83. Miscellaneous call identifier (Continued) English French Italian Spanish b (Cover Busy) o (Suppleance occupee) o (Copertura per Occupato) o (Cobertura ocupada) d (Cover Don’t Answer) n (Suppleance pas de reponse) n (Copertura per Non Risposta) n (Cobertura sin respuesta) s (Send All Calls) E (Envoi tous appels) r (Rinvio) E (Envio de toda llamada) Continued on next page Table 84.
Telephone displays Table 85.
Features and technical reference Table 85. Property Management System interface (Continued) English French Italian Spanish MESSAGE LAMP ON MESSAGES MESSAGGI IN ATTESA LUZ DE MENSAJE ENCENDIDA MESSAGE NOTIFICATION FAILED ECHEC D’AVIS MESSAGES NOTIFICA MESSAGGI ERRATA AVISO DE MENSAJE FALLIDO MESSAGE NOTIFICATION OFF - Ext: xxxxx AVIS DE MESSAGES DESACTIVE POSTE:xxxxx NOTIFICA MESSAGGI DISABIL.
Telephone displays Table 87. Stored number English French Italian Spanish NO NUMBER STORED AUCUN NUMERO EN MEMOIRE NESSUN NUMERO IN MEMORIA NINGUN NUMERO ALMACENADO Table 88.
Features and technical reference Table 91. Time-of-Day routing messages English French Italian Spanish ENTER ACTIVATION ROUTE PLAN, DAY & TIME ENTRER PLAN D’ACTIVATION, JOUR ET HEURE INTRODURRE PIANO DA ATTIV., GIORNO E ORA INTRODUZCA PLAN ACT DE RUTAS, DIA Y HORA ENTER DEACTIVATION DAY AND TIME ENTRER JOUR ET HEURE DE DESACTIVATION INTRODURRE GIORNO E ORA DI DISATTIVAZ INTRODUZCA DIA Y HORA DE DESACTIVACION OLD ROUTE PLAN: x ENTER NEW PLAN: ACHEMINEMEN T ANT.
Telephone displays To enter the day of the week, the user dials 1 for Sunday, 2 for Monday, and so on. Table 92. Time-of-Day routing days of the week English French Italian Spanish Mon LUN Lun LUN Tue MAR Mar MAR Wed MER Mer MIE Thu JEU Gio JUE Fri VEN Ven VIE Sat SAM Sab SAB Sun DIM Dom DOM Table 93.
Features and technical reference US English to Russian characters Table 94. US English to Russian characters Russian US English Russian US English space space … Q ‘ A þ R » B ¤ S — C Ý T ¬ D Ð U ” E à V ¿ F ÷ W ÷ G Þ X – H Õ Y ÿ I ? Z Œ J X { À K ⁄ } ƒ L ý : ‹ M › “ “ N ¡ < Ÿ O ? > « P US English to Japanese characters Table 95.
Telephone displays Table 95. US English to Japanese characters (Continued) Japanese US English Japanese US English $ < % c = & µ > d ‘ b ? ¹ ( j @ e ) i A ¶ * k B ¸ + m C ½ , l D º - n E » .
Features and technical reference Table 95.
Telephone displays US English to European characters Some of the characters in the following map appear in only upper- or lower-case — for example, , Ê, ø, and others. Table 96. US English to European characters European US English European US English Ì space » 8 Ô ! Ë 9 „ “ £ : · # š ; ‡ $ › < % ¯ = & Ê > È ‘ ” ? Ë ( Ó @ Ê )  A Š * ¼ B œ + ‚ C ″ , ° D z° - E .
Features and technical reference Table 96.
Telephone displays US English to Ukrainian characters Table 97. US English to Ukrainian characters Ukrainian US English Ukrainian US English space space … Q ‘ A þ R » B ¶ S — C Ý T ¬ D Ð U ” E à V ¿ F ÷ W ÷ G Þ X – H Õ Y ÿ I ? Z Œ J X { À K ð } ƒ L ý : ‹ M ™ “ “ N ¡ < Ÿ O ? > « P Related Topics See System Parameters Country-Options for more information about and field descriptions on the System Parameters Country-Option screen.
Features and technical reference Temporary Bridged Appearance Temporary Bridged Appearance allows multiappearance telephone users in a TEG or PCOL group to bridge onto an existing group call. If a call has been answered using the Call Pickup feature, the originally called party can bridge onto the call. This feature also allows a called party to bridge onto a call that redirects to coverage before the called party can answer it.
Temporary Bridged Appearance Considerations ■ Temporary Bridged Appearance allows the desired party to bridge onto a call without manually transferring the call, providing convenience of operation and saving time. ■ Temporary Bridged Appearance does not provide any call originating capability or the capability to answer another party’s calls. These capabilities are provided by the Bridged Call Appearance feature.
Features and technical reference Tenant Partitioning (Not available with Offer B) Tenant Partitioning provides telecommunications services to multiple independent groups of users through a single Avaya MultiVantage. Most commonly, Tenant Partitioning provides these services from a single provider to multiple tenants of an office complex. This eliminates the need for each tenant to purchase services separately, while still giving each tenant the appearance of a dedicated Avaya MultiVantage.
Tenant Partitioning You administer Tenant Partitioning via the Tenant Partitioning screen; you need to administer one screen for each tenant partition. Begin the initial administration of the Tenant Partitioning feature by completing the tenant partitioning screen. Keep in mind that you must specify an attendant group for each tenant that you define, even if there are no consoles assigned to the attendant group.
Features and technical reference ■ Most tenant partitions are discrete, separate units. By default, the system prevents all tenants, except partition 1, from accessing stations or trunking facilities belonging to other tenants. However, you can change this default. You can give explicit permission for one tenant to access another. For example, you can allow tenant 6 to call tenants 9 and 16 only.
Tenant Partitioning The system provides one principal and one night or day/night attendant per attendant group. You assign each tenant an attendant group for service. Each attendant group has a separate queue. Queue warning lamps remain dark when Tenant Partitioning is active. However, information displayed when someone presses a queue-status button reflects the status of the attendant-group queue. The total number of calls queued for all tenants cannot exceed the system limit.
Features and technical reference You assign tenant partition 16 to the restaurant in the building complex. You give all tenants permission to call this tenant. However, to prevent the restaurant from accessing trunks and other facilities belonging to tenants, you do not permit the restaurant to call any other tenants. You assign tenant partition 17 to all CO trunk groups. You give all tenants permission to call this tenant. You assign tenant partition 18 to a trunk group that tenants 3 and 7 want to share.
Tenant Partitioning Table 98. Calling permissions for partitions (Continued) Calling tenant partition number Called tenant partition number 1 2, 4—6, 8—15 3,7 16 17 18 16 yes no no yes yes no 17 yes yes yes yes yes no 18 yes no yes no no no Continued on next page Detailed description of Multiple Music-on-Hold Tenant Partitioning allows you to assign each tenant a music source, unique to each tenant partition, to be heard when a call is placed on hold.
Features and technical reference You can assign one of the following music-on-hold types to each tenant partition. Table 99. Music-on-Hold types Type System Response for a caller placed on hold none silence tone system-wide administered tone music the music associated with the administered port. The number of possible music sources equals the number of possible tenant partitions. Each partition can have its own music source.
Tenant Partitioning The function of any feature that specifies a tenant partition is affected by tenant-to-tenant restrictions, as follows. ■ Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR)/ARS Do not confuse tenant partitions with Time-of-Day Plan Numbers and Partition Groups in AAR/ARS. You can still use Time-of-Day Plan Numbers and Partition Groups can still be used to select one of eight route patterns for AAR/ARS routing when Tenant Partitioning is in effect.
Features and technical reference ■ Call Coverage Tenant-to-Tenant access restrictions apply to coverage paths. If a tenant cannot access a particular tenant, it cannot access that tenant as part of another tenant’s coverage point. When an attendant is specified as part of a coverage path, the attendant group of the called tenant, not the calling tenant, is accessed.
Tenant Partitioning ■ Emergency Access to the Attendant When a tenant dials emergency access, it accesses its own assigned attendant group. ■ Expert Agent Selection (EAS) For agents in an EAS system, the COR assigned to the logical agent ID (not the physical extension) determines whether callers on hold can hear music. ■ Hunt groups The tenant number assigned to the hunt group extension determines the music source callers to the hunt group hear while they’re in queue or on hold.
Features and technical reference ■ Night Service Each tenant can have its own LDN night destination, TAAS port, or night attendant. ■ PC Interfaces You must assign each PC interface to a tenant partition. ■ PC/PBX Connections You must assign each PC/PBX Connection to a tenant partition. ■ PC/(ISDN You must assign each PC/ISDN to a tenant partition. ■ Remote Access You must assign each Remote Access barrier code to a tenant.
Terminal Translation Initialization Attendants In order for attendants to use TTI, you must assign an extension to the attendant console. TTI port translations are the same for digital telephones and attendant consoles. To merge a digital TTI voice port and an attendant, you must first administer the attendant as an X port. Then a digital telephone must be plugged into the jack assigned to the attendant console, and the TTI merge digit sequence must be entered on the digital telephone.
Features and technical reference ISDN BRI telephones The TTI separation sequence for Automatic-TEI SPID-initializing BRI telephones is identical to the sequence used for telephones. However, the merge sequence is different. ■ Separation sequence 1. Feature Access Code 2. Security Code 3. Extension ■ Merge sequence 1. Connect the telephone to any port to get power. 2. Program the service profile identifier (SPID) to the extension with which it will be merged. 3.
Terminal Translation Initialization Security measures ! SECURITY ALERT: If you do not manage this feature carefully, its unauthorized use may cause you security problems. For example, someone who knows the TTI security code could disrupt normal business functions by separating telephones or data terminals. You can help protect against this action by frequently changing the TTI security code.
Features and technical reference ■ Call Coverage Answer Group If a extension was an X port, then rejoins the group as a result of a TTI merge, a PSA associate, or a port assignment, that telephone is excluded from all transactions already active in the call coverage answer group. ■ Call Forwarding A telephone can separate while Call Forwarding is active. If a destination extension for call forwarding separates, Call Forwarding to that extension remains active.
Terminating Extension Group Related topics For more information about configuring the TTI system-wide fields, see ‘‘Feature-Related System Parameters’’ on page 795. For more information about setting the TTI feature access codes, see ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781. Terminating Extension Group A TEG allows an incoming call to ring as many as 4 phones at one time. Any user in the group can answer the call.
Features and technical reference ■ Call Coverage A TEG can have a Call Coverage path assigned, but cannot be a point in a Call Coverage path. A Send Term button for the TEG can be assigned to group members who have multiappearance phones. When a user presses Send Term, calls to the TEG redirect to coverage. The merged status lamp lights on all phones with a Send Term button. Any member with a Send Term button can deactivate Send Term by pressing the button. Incoming calls are directed to the group.
Time of Day Routing Time of Day Routing You can use Time of Day Routing to select route patterns for calls according to the time of day and day of the week. You need to define the route pattern you want to use before you set up time of day routing. You can route calls based on the least expensive route, and you can deny outgoing long-distance calls after business hours to help prevent toll fraud. You can use partition groups to assign different time of day route plans for different groups of users.
Features and technical reference Time of Day Clock Synchronization Time of Day Clock Synchronization provides you with the capability of synchronizing your MultiVantage system clock(s) with Internet servers providing Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). Time of Day Clock Synchronization enables a switch to synchronize its internal clock to UTC time provided by Internet time servers. The LINUX or Windows 2000 platforms, running NTP or SNTP software, poll the time servers for the UTC time.
Time of Day Clock Synchronization Use of Time of Day information by MultiVantage MultiVantage features use the time of day information for a variety of reasons.
Features and technical reference Setting time of day clock synchronization The recommended configuration for ASA PC and time synchronization: 1. The PC clock is to be set to the local time including applying the local daylight savings time (DST) rule. 2.
Time of Day Clock Synchronization The recommended configuration for each MultiVantage switch time synchronization: 1. The system clock may be set to either local time using automatic DST changes, local standard time (without DST changes - DST Rule set to 0) or GMT time (without DST changes).
Features and technical reference b. System time set to local time without DST rules - the Date and Time screen has the standard time for the local time zone set and the DST rule field is set to 0. All reports and TOD routing/scheduled events are all based on local standard time regardless of whether DST is being observed or not. Display station sets at the local PPN and remote EPN sites can have actual local time (with DST applied) via the Multiple Locations feature. c.
Transfer ■ If, on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, the Abort Transfer field is y, users can abort the transfer a call by pressing the TRANSFER button, dialing the desired extension, and then hanging up or selecting any non-idle call appearance. The user must press the Transfer button again to complete the process (see Note). If the user selects an idle call appearance, the transfer still is active.
Features and technical reference Interactions ■ Attendant Conference This may not operate properly if the CO does not provide answer supervision. In that case, the Answer Supervision Timeout and Outgoing End of Dial fields (on the CO Trunk Group screen) must be set to the same non-zero number. The Receive Answer Supervision field must be set to n.
Transfer Pull Transfer Pull Transfer allows either the transferring or transferred-to party to press the Transfer button to complete the transfer operation. When attendants control calls, called parties cannot use Pull Transfer. Attendants who are called parties cannot use Pull Transfer. When attendants have parties on hold they are transferred with the standard transfer process.
Features and technical reference Related topics ■ ‘‘Feature-Related System Parameters’’ on page 795 — Music on Transferred Trunk Calls field — Intercept Treatment on Failed Trunk Transfers field — Abort Transfer — Transfer Upon Hang-Up ■ ‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page 658 — Block Transfer Display field Transfer — Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing Trunk Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing Trunk Transfer (OTTOTT) permits a controlling party (such as a station user or attendant) to initiate two or more outgoing trunk c
Transfer — Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing Trunk DCS networks provide a similar but more restrictive version of this feature, called DCS Trunk Turnaround, which permits two outgoing trunks to be connected when the switch at the remote end of one of the trunks agrees to turn around the logical direction of the trunk. DCS trunk turnaround is permitted, when some other party involved in the call (at the remote switch) can provide disconnect supervision.
Features and technical reference Interactions ■ DCS Trunk Turnaround OTTOTT increases the set of cases in which DCS Trunk Turnaround may be accepted. However, use of OTTOTT in combination with a DCS network is strongly discouraged. The following algorithm describes the DCS Trunk Turnaround request process. a. If any party on the call receives a local-dial, busy, intercept, or reorder tone, deny turnaround. b. If any remaining party is an answered station or attendant, accept turnaround. c.
Transfer — Trunk-to-Trunk ■ Release Link Trunks (RLT) RLTs are used by CAS. An outgoing RLT at a remote branch is used to access an attendant at the main. The attendant at the main can transfer the incoming caller to a station or trunk at the branch. The RLT is typically used only for a short period of time and is usually idled after the transfer is established. A station at a branch can transfer an outgoing trunk to the attendant at the main.
Features and technical reference To administer Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer system-wide, complete the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. To restrict Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer on a trunk-group basis, assign COR-to-COR calling-party restrictions on the Class of Restriction screen. To allow individual users to control Trunk-to-Trunk Transfers, assign capabilities on the Class of Service screen.
Trunk Flash ■ Tenant Partitioning Station control of Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is prohibited between trunks in different tenant partitions if those partitions are restricted. Trunk Flash Trunk Flash allows a feature or function button on a multifunction telephone or attendant console to be assigned as a Flash button. Pressing this button while connected to a trunk (which must have been administered to allow trunk flash) causes the System to send a flash signal out over the connected trunk.
Features and technical reference If the trunk group is a DS1 trunk in Italy, the Trunk Flash feature applies only to outgoing calls. If the trunk is not directly connected to the far end or CO providing the customized services, use of the Trunk Flash signal may cause the call to be disconnected by the far end or CO. Calls made after the Flash are not recorded in CDR records.
Trunks and trunk groups ■ In a call involving more than one telephone, one of the telephones may press the Flash button, and another telephone may dial the phone number. The telephone that dials the phone number is not required to have a Flash button. ■ If the far-end/CO does not support custom services, the call may be dropped by the far-end/CO on sending the flash signal or the signal may be ignored and a click-click sound is heard.
Features and technical reference CAMA — Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (E911) CAMA trunks route emergency calls to the local community’s Enhanced 911 systems and provide CESID information to the system. Public Service Answering Points (PSAP) use CAMA trunks to determine the caller’s physical address. NOTE: Avaya does not recommend tandeming 911 calls.
Trunks and trunk groups CO — Central Office CO trunks transmit dialed digits for outgoing calls but not for incoming calls. Use CO trunks when you want all incoming calls go to the same destination, such as an attendant or a voice menu system. Individual users can place outgoing calls without attendant assistance. CO trunks typically connect your switch to the local central office, but they can also connect adjuncts such as external paging systems and data modules.
Features and technical reference FX — Foreign Exchange An FX trunk is essentially a CO trunk that connects your switch directly to a central office outside your local exchange area. Use FX trunks to reduce long distance charges if your organization averages a high volume of long-distance calls to a specific area code. IP Trunks — Internet Protocol Trunks IP trunks allow Avaya MultiVantage to route voice calls and faxes over a local- or wide-area TCP/IP network.
Trunks and trunk groups Tie Tie trunks connect a switch to a central office or to another switch in a private network. These trunks transmit dialed digits with both outgoing and incoming calls. Thus, incoming calls over a tie trunk can be routed directly to the extension the caller dialed. Tie trunks are frequently used in private networks; in addition, use tie trunks when you want a two-way trunk group with the convenience of direct inward dialing for incoming calls.
Features and technical reference Applications for different trunk types To help you select the right type of trunk for a specific application, the following table gives you an overview of key characteristics of different trunk groups. Remember that all analog trunks can carry only voice and voice-grade data. Type of trunk Direction Analog or Digital? CO, FX, WATS Incoming Either Any kind of voice or data traffic. No Outgoing Traffic supported Transmits digits? Two-way CPE N.A.
Trunks and trunk groups Another transmission characteristic is signaling, which is the transmission of supervision, address, alerting, or other switching information. Supervisory signaling establishes or sets up the connection of the local switch to the distant switch. In general, supervisory signaling has 2 phases: ■ ■ Seizure signal — The originating office’s signal for a request for service from the distant office.
Features and technical reference ■ Ground-start signaling allows answer supervision, a positive indication that a distant switch has disconnected from a call. Answer supervision has 2 benefits: — Callers who remain off-hook after completing a call won’t be connected to central office dial tone. For example, this prevents a restricted station from making an unauthorized call after placing an authorized call using the attendant.
Trunks and trunk groups ■ Wink start — The terminating switch sends a wink start (momentary off-hook) signal to the originating switch. This indicates that the terminating switch is ready to receive digits. ■ Delay dial — The terminating switch sends a delay dial signal (an off-hook signal followed by an on-hook signal) to the originating switch. This indicates that the terminating switch is ready to receive digits.
Features and technical reference Digital trunks represent both sound and data as 0’s and 1’s and can be configured to carry any kind of voice or data traffic. Digital trunks connect to a DS1 circuit pack and provide a T1 or E1 carrier. DS1 service provides an interface for CO, FX, DID, tie, and WATS trunks. The DS1 interface supports incoming and outgoing dial types of ground-start, loop-start, auto/auto, auto/delay, auto/immed, and auto/wink.
Uniform Dial Plan Uniform Dial Plan Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) provides a common 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7-digit dial plan - or even a combination of these - that can be shared among a group of switches. The UDP applies interswitch dialing and intraswitch dialing. UDP can be used with an ETN; main, satellite, and tributary switches; and DCS. In a nutshell, UDP provides extension-to-extension dialing among 2 or more private-switching systems. Note that for DCS, a uniform 4 or 5-digit dialing plan must be used.
Features and technical reference ■ For ENP, a node number must be entered. Node-number routing uses this number to determine which route pattern should be used to route the call. If the original extension is 4, 5, or 6 digits, an ENP code is chosen based on the first 1 or 2 digits of the dialed string. Because it is not used for routing, the ENP code can be independent of location.
Uniform Dial Plan Example of how UDP works To administer, assign each UDP code: ■ To a private network location code (RNX) or node number. (The RNX is equivalent to an office code of a central office in a public network. This RNX determines how a UDP call is routed.) ■ Assign each UDP code as either local or remote to the switch. To understand the function of a UDP, review the following example.
Features and technical reference 2 1 5 4 6 3 7 8 r764905 CJL 062296 1. Switch A Dial Plan for extensions is RNX=224 2. Switch B: Dial Plan for Extensions is and 61 RNX=222 41 3. Switch C: Dial Plan for extensions is and 52 RNX=223 51 4. Extension 41000 60 5. Extension 61234 6. Extension 60123 7. Extension 51234 Figure 64.
Uniform Dial Plan If the AAR access code and 222-1234 are dialed, the system finds the route pattern for RNX 222 and routes the call to the switch associated with that RNX. Whenever UDP is used to route a call to another switch, the correct digit deletion and insertion must be specified within the route pattern so that the receiving switch gets digits in the format it expects. Avaya MultiVantage can be configured in several different ways.
Features and technical reference ■ If AAR is active, facility restriction levels (FRLs) and Traveling Class Marks (TCMs) can be sent along with the private network number. UDPCode and AARCode conversions use the FRL assigned to the caller. ENPNode conversion always raises the FRL to the maximum (7). If an FRL is insufficient to access the facility, access is denied. There is no prompt for an authorization code even if authorization codes are enabled and administered.
Voice Message Retrieval Voice Message Retrieval Voice Message Retrieval allows attendants, phone users, and remote-access users to retrieve Leave Word Calling (LWC) and Call Coverage messages. Detailed description Voice Message Retrieval is only used for the retrieval of messages. When a terminal is in Voice Message Retrieval mode, it cannot be used to make calls or access other features. Voice Message Retrieval can be used to retrieve your own messages or messages for another user.
Features and technical reference If your system has a voice-synthesizer circuit pack and LWC Activation is active, users can retrieve messages from two locations: — Users can retrieve LWC messages with Voice Message Retrieval. — Users can retrieve all other messages with AUDIX. If you do not have a TN725B speech-synthesizer board, non-display phone users cannot retrieve LWC messages sent via the LWC button on a phone.
Voice messaging systems Voice messaging systems Avaya MultiVantage supports several Avaya voice or multimedia messaging systems. These systems allow users to send, retrieve, store, and forward messages, as well as perform many other tasks associated with messages. In addition to supporting multiple AUDIX systems, MultiVantage can have multiple hunt groups associated with a single AUDIX system.
Features and technical reference Embedded AUDIX (Not available with GuestWorks) Embedded AUDIX runs on a multifunction circuit pack assembly. This assembly fits into 2 contiguous slots in the MultiVantage switch. Embedded AUDIX communicates with the switch via analog voice ports with a data link. Embedded AUDIX can also communicate exclusively via analog voice ports when set up to emulate a digital phone set. Embedded AUDIX allows up to 16 ports.
Voice messaging systems — Assign a restrictive COR, COS, and FRL to the station lines and trunks serving AUDIX. — Use switch CDR reports to determine if the lines are being used for calls that are normally not within your sphere of business. — Change default passwords on voice mailboxes immediately after installation and use random numbers for passwords. — Require passwords with at least 5 digits. — Change system administration passwords to alphanumeric codes.
Features and technical reference AUDIX and ACD CMS must be connected to the same switch. If AUDIX in the DCS feature is active, a CMS located on a switch other than the host switch (AUDIX location) does not provide measurements for the AUDIX ports. Because AUDIX frequently takes voice ports in and out of service for maintenance testing, high login activity may be seen for the AUDIX split in the measurement reports.
Voice messaging systems ■ DCS — Leave Word Calling (external only) In a DCS network, the called party may be on a different switch than the calling party. If the DCS link is down, attempts to store Leave Word Cancel messages are denied and intercept tone is returned. LWC requests are always denied for principals with AUDIX LWC; in some instances, the request to cancel LWC may appear to be active when it actually is not.
Features and technical reference ■ Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed-Station Numbering AUDIX is designed for use with a Uniform Dial Plan. It supports only one extension length (3-, 4-, or 5-digit) that is used by AUDIX subscribers. Single-Digit and Mixed Station Numbering cannot be used. However, nothing prohibits connecting a switch to AUDIX that provides these features, as long as all AUDIX subscribers have the same extension length.
Whisper paging See ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672 for information about and field descriptions on the Class of Service screen. Complete the Call Fwd-All Calls field on this screen to administer the switch for voice messaging. See ‘‘Coverage Path’’ on page 696 for information about and field descriptions on the Coverage Path screen. Complete all fields on this screen to administer the switch for voice messaging.
Features and technical reference Allowing users to answer whisper pages quickly To give users a feature button for answering a whisper page, use the Station screen and administer an Answerback button on users’ phones. NOTE: You cannot administer an Answerback button on an attendant console. Attendants can make whisper pages but cannot receive them. Normally, before a paged user can answer a whisper page he or she must complete the active call or put it on hold.
Whisper paging For example, let’s say Call Forwarding — All Calls is activated on a phone. If there are no active calls, a whisper page to that phone will ring at that phone as a priority call. For information on blocking incoming whisper pages, see ‘‘Allowing users to block whisper pages’’. Group answering environments Whisper paging does not work with extensions assigned to a group answering environment.
Features and technical reference — If a user makes a whisper page on a call appearance that is a member of a bridge group, then no others users in the bridge group can connect to the call while the whisper page intrusion is active. ■ Busy Verification You can’t make a whisper page to an extension while it’s being busy-verified. You can’t busy-verify an extension while it’s making or receiving a whisper page. ■ Calling Restrictions — Origination Phones with this restriction cannot make whisper pages.
Wideband Switching ■ Last Number Dialed When you make a whisper page, it’s tracked as the last number dialed. ■ QSIG This feature does not operate in a QSIG environment. ■ Remote access You can’t make a whisper page by remote access. Both the paging party and paged party must be on the same switch or the attempt is denied.
Features and technical reference Brief description ISDN-PRI (and the emulation of it by Asynchronous Transfer Mode-Circuit Emulation Service (ATM-CES)) divides a T1 or E1 trunk into 24 (31 for E1) information channels and one signaling channel for standard narrowband communication. Certain applications, like video conferencing, require greater bandwidth. You can combine several narrowband channels into one wideband channel to accommodate the extra bandwidth requirement.
Wideband Switching Channel allocation For standard narrowband communication, ISDN-PRI divides a T1 or E1 trunk as follows: ■ T1 trunks are divided into 23 information channels and 1 signaling channel ■ E1 trunks are divided into 30 information channels, 1 signaling channel, and 1 framing channel Certain applications, like video conferencing, require greater bandwidth. You can combine several narrowband channels into one wideband channel to accommodate the extra bandwidth requirement.
Features and technical reference Typical uses A typical video application uses an ISDN-PRI interface to DS0 1 through 6 of the line-side facility. See the following figure. wdbndex CJL 061996 Figure Notes 1. Video application 8. Network 2. Port 1 9. DS0 24 D-channel 3. Port 2 10. DS0 23 unused 4. ISDN terminal adaptor 11. DS0 1–6 wideband 5. Line-side ISDN-PRI 12. DS0 24 D-channel 6. Avaya Media Server 13. DS0 7–23 narrow bands 7. ISDN or ATM-CES trunk 14. DS0 1–6 wideband Figure 65.
Wideband Switching ISDN-PRI terminal adapters For wideband switching with non-ISDN-PRI equipment, you can use an ISDN-PRI terminal adapter. ISDN-PRI terminal adapters translate standard ISDN signaling into a form that can be used by the endpoint application and vice versa. The terminal adapter also must adhere to the PRI-endpoint boundaries as administered on the Avaya MultiVantage switch when handling both incoming (to the endpoint) applications and outgoing calls.
Features and technical reference One facility can support multiple separate and distinct PRI-endpoints (several extensions) within a single facility. Non-overlapping contiguous sets of DS0s (B-channels) are associated with each PE. Universal digital signal level 1 board The UDS1 board is the interface for line-side and network facilities carrying wideband calls. Non-signaling endpoint applications Wideband can also support configurations using non-signaling (non-ISDN-PRI) line-side T1 or E1 facilities.
Wideband Switching Multiple WAEs are separate and distinct within the facility and endpoint applications must be administered to send and receive the correct data rate over the correct DS0s. An incoming call at the incorrect data rate is blocked.
Features and technical reference The non-ISDN backup data connection is also appropriate for scheduled batch processing applications. Administered Connections are used to schedule daily or weekly sessions originating from this application. Primary data connectivity. Permanent data connections (those always active during business hours), such as interconnections between local area networks (LANs), are well suited for Avaya MultiVantage when ISDN-PRI endpoints are used.
Wideband Switching Given this facility list concept, the algorithms have the ability to search for trunks, by facility, in an attempt to satisfy the bandwidth requirements of a given wideband call.
Features and technical reference If the algorithm cannot find an available facility within the trunk group that meets these constraints, then the call is blocked from using this trunk group.
Wideband Switching H0 When a trunk group is administered to support H0, the algorithm to satisfy a call requiring 384 Kbps of bandwidth also uses a fixed allocation scheme. Unlike the H11 fixed scheme which only supports a single fixed starting point, the H0 fixed scheme supports four (T1) or five (E1) fixed starting points. The H0 algorithm searches for an available quadrant within a facility based on the direction of trunk or hunt administered.
Features and technical reference Regardless of the allocation scheme employed, the N x DS0 algorithm, like the H11 and H12 algorithms, attempts to preserve idle facilities when offered B, H0, and N x DS0 calls. This is important so that N x DS0 calls, for large values of N, have a better chance of being satisfied by a given trunk group.
Wideband Switching Avaya MultiVantage does not negotiate channels for wideband calls.
Features and technical reference To reduce glare probability, the network needs to be administered so both sides of the interface select channels from opposite ends of facilities. For example, on a 23B+D trunk group, the user side could be administered to select B-channels starting at channel 23 while the network side would be administered to start selecting at channel 1. Using the same example, if channel 22 is active but channel 23 is idle, the user side should select channel 23 for re-use.
Wideband Switching Interactions ■ Administered Connections Provides call initiation for WAEs. All Administered Connections that originate from WAEs use the entire bandwidth administered for WAE. The destination of an Administered Connection can be a PRI endpoint. ■ Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) Treats wideband calls as single-trunk calls so that a single ACA-referral call is made if an ACA-referral call is required. The call is on the lowest B-channel associated with the wideband call.
Features and technical reference ■ Class of Service (COS) COS determines the class of features that a wideband endpoint can activate. ■ Facility Associated Signaling (FAS) and Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS) FAS and NFAS with or without D-Channel Backup requires administration via signaling groups for trunk-side wideband interfaces. ■ Facility Busy Indication You can administer a busy-indicator button for a wideband-endpoint extension, but the button does not accurately track endpoint status.
World-Class Tone Detection and Generation Interactions ■ Data Modules Multiline Data Terminal Dialing is disabled if the Multiple-line Level of Tone Detection field is medium or broadband. It is enabled if the Level of Tone Detection field is precise.
Features and technical reference 1948 Issue 5 October 2002 555-233-506
Glossary GL and abbreviations Numerics 800 service A service in the United States that allows incoming calls from certain areas to an assigned number for a flat-rate charge based on usage. A AA Archangel. See angel. AAC ATM access concentrator AAR Automatic Alternate Routing abandoned call An incoming call in which the caller hangs up before the call is answered. Abbreviated Dialing (AD) A feature that allows callers to place calls by dialing just one or two digits. AC 1. Alternating current. 2.
Glossary and abbreviations access endpoint Either a nonsignaling channel on a DS1 interface or a nonsignaling port on an analog tie-trunk circuit pack that is assigned a unique extension. access tie trunk A trunk that connects a main communications system with a tandem communications system in an electronic tandem network (ETN). An access tie trunk can also be used to connect a system or tandem to a serving office or service node. Also called access trunk. access trunk See access tie trunk.
A adjunct-controlled split An ACD split that is administered to be under adjunct control. Agents logged into such splits must do all telephony work, ACD login/ logout, and changes of work mode through the adjunct (except for auto-available adjunct-controlled splits, whose agents may not log in/out or change work mode). adjunct-monitored call An adjunct-controlled call, active-notification call, or call that provides event reporting over a domain-control association.
Glossary and abbreviations ALBO Automatic Line Build Out All trunks busy (ATB) The state in which no trunks are available for call handling. ALM-ACK Alarm acknowledge American Standard Code for Information Interchange See ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). AMW Automatic Message Waiting AN Analog analog The representation of information by continuously variable physical quantities such as amplitude, frequency, and phase. See also digital.
A API Application programming interface APLT Advanced Private-Line Termination appearance A software process that is associated with an extension and whose purpose is to supervise a call. An extension can have multiple appearances. Also called call appearance, line appearance, and occurrence. See also call appearance. application An adjunct that requests and receives ASAI services or capabilities. One or more applications can reside on a single adjunct.
Glossary and abbreviations Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) A packet-like switching technology in which data is transmitted in fixed-size (53-byte) cells. ATM provides high-speed access for data communication in LAN, campus, and WAN environments. ATB See All trunks busy (ATB). ATD See Attention dial (ATD). attendant A person at a console who provides personalized service for incoming callers and voice-services users by performing switching and signaling operations. See also ATM-CES.
A Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) split A method of routing calls of a similar type among agents in a call center. Also, a group of extensions that are staffed by agents trained to handle a certain type of incoming call. Automatic calling unit (ACU) A device that places a telephone call. Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) A feature that tracks calls of unusual duration to facilitate troubleshooting. A high number of very short calls or a low number of very long calls may signify a faulty trunk.
Glossary and abbreviations B B8ZS Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution. bandwidth The difference, expressed in hertz, between the defined highest and lowest frequencies in a range. barrier code A security code used with the Remote Access feature to prevent unauthorized access to the system. Basic Rate Interface (BRI) A standard ISDN frame format that specifies the protocol used between two or more communications systems.
B BLF Busy Lamp Field BN Billing number BOS Bit-oriented signaling BPN Billed-party number bps See bits per second (bps). bridge (bridging) The appearance of a voice terminal’s extension at one or more other voice terminals. BRI The ISDN Basic Rate Interface specification. bridged appearance A call appearance on a voice terminal that matches a call appearance on another voice terminal for the duration of a call. BTD Busy Tone Disconnect BTU British Thermal Unit buffer 1.
Glossary and abbreviations C cabinet Housing for racks, shelves, or carriers that hold electronic equipment. cable Physical connection between two pieces of equipment (for example, data terminal and modem) or between a piece of equipment and a termination field. cable connector A jack (female) or plug (male) on the end of a cable. A cable connector connects wires on a cable to specific leads on telephone or data equipment.
C call work code A number, up to 16 digits, entered by ACD agents to record the occurrence of customer-defined events (such as account codes, social security numbers, or phone numbers) on ACD calls. CAMA Centralized Automatic Message Accounting carrier An enclosed shelf containing vertical slots that hold circuit packs. carried load The amount of traffic served by traffic-sensitive facilities during a given interval.
Glossary and abbreviations CCS See capability. CCS or hundred call seconds A unit of call traffic. Call traffic for a facility is scanned every 100 seconds. If the facility is busy, it is assumed to have been busy for the entire scan interval. There are 3600 seconds per hour. The Roman numeral for 100 is the capital letter C. The abbreviation for call seconds is CS. Therefore, 100 call seconds is abbreviated CCS. If a facility is busy for an entire hour, then it is said to have been busy for 36 CCS.
C CESID Caller’s Emergency Service Identification channel 1. A circuit-switched call. 2. A communications path for transmitting voice and data. 3. In wideband, all of the time slots (contiguous or noncontiguous) necessary to support a call. Example: an H0-channel uses six 64-kbps time slots. 4. A DS0 on a T1 or E1 facility not specifically associated with a logical circuit-switched call; analogous to a single trunk.
Glossary and abbreviations common-control switching arrangement (CCSA) A private telecommunications network using dedicated trunks and a shared switching center for interconnecting company locations. communications system The software-controlled processor complex that interprets dialing pulses, tones, and keyboard characters and makes the proper connections both within the system and external to the system.
C CP Circuit pack CPE Customer-premises equipment CPN Called-party number CPN/BN Calling-party number/billing number CPTR Call-progress-tone receiver CRC Cyclical Redundancy Checking critical-reliability system A system that has the following duplicated items: control carriers, tone clocks, EI circuit packs, and cabling between port networks and center-stage switch in a CSS-connected system. See also duplicated common control, and duplication.
Glossary and abbreviations CWC See call work code. D DAC 1. Dial access code or Direct Agent Calling 2. See digital-to-analog converter (DAC). data channel A communications path between two points used to transmit digital signals. data-communications equipment (DCE) The equipment (usually a modem, data module, or packet assembler/disassembler) on the network side of a communications link that makes the binary serial data from the source or transmitter compatible with the communications channel.
D DCE Data-communications equipment D-channel backup Type of backup used with Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS). A primary D-channel provides signaling for an NFAS D-channel group (two or more PRI facilities). A second D-channel, on a separate PRI facility of the NFAS D-channel group, is designated as backup for the D-channel. Failure of the primary D-channel causes automatic transfer of call-control signaling to the backup D-channel. The backup becomes the primary D-channel.
Glossary and abbreviations digital communications protocol (DCP) A proprietary protocol used to transmit both digitized voice and digitized data over the same communications link. A DCP link is made up of two 64-kbps information (I-) channels and one 8-kbps signaling (S-) channel. The DCP protocol supports two information-bearing channels, and thus two telephones/data modules. The I1 channel is the DCP channel assigned on the first page of the 8411 station form.
D Direct Inward Dialing (DID) A feature that allows an incoming call from the public network (not FX or WATS) to reach a specific telephone without attendant assistance. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk An incoming trunk used for dialing directly from the public network into a communications system without help from the attendant. disk drive An electromechanical device that stores data on and retrieves data from one or more disks.
Glossary and abbreviations DOSS Delivery Operations Support System DOT Duplication Option Terminal DPM Dial Plan Manager DPR Dual-port RAM DS1 Digital Signal Level 1 DS1C Digital Signal Level-1 protocol C DS1 CONV Digital Signal Level-1 converter DSI Digital signal interface DSU Data service unit DTDM Digital-terminal data module DTE Data-terminal equipment DTGS Direct Trunk Group Select DTMF Dual-tone multifrequency DTS Disk-tape system duplicated common control Two processors ensuring conti
E E E1 A digital transmission standard that carries traffic at 2.048 Mbps. The E1 facility is divided into 32 channels (DS0s) of 64 kbps information. Channel 0 is reserved for framing and synchronization information. A D-channel occupies channel 16.
Glossary and abbreviations emergency transfer If a major system failure occurs, automatic transfer is initiated to a group of telephones capable of making outgoing calls. The system operates in this mode until the failure is repaired and the system automatically returns to normal operation. Also called power-failure transfer. EMI Electromagnetic interference end-to-end signaling The transmission of touch-tone signals generated by dialing from a voice terminal to remote computer equipment.
F expansion-archangel link (EAL) A link-access function on the D-channel (LAPD) logical link that exists between a switch-processing element and an expansion archangel (EA). The EAL carries control messages from the SPE to the EA and to port circuit packs in an expansion port network. expansion control cabinet See expansion control carrier. expansion control carrier A carrier in a multicarrier cabinet that contains extra port circuit packs and a maintenance interface.
Glossary and abbreviations FAS Facility-associated signaling FAT Facility access trunk FAX Facsimile FCC Federal Communications Commission FEAC Forced Entry of Account Codes feature A specifically defined function or service provided by the system. feature button A labeled button on a telephone or attendant console used to access a specific feature.
G FTC Facility Test Call FTP File Transfer Protocol FX Foreign exchange G G3-MA Generic 3 Management Applications G3-MT Generic 3 Management Terminal G3r Generic 3, RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computer) generalized route selection (GRS) An enhancement to Automatic Alternate Routing/Automatic Route Selection (AAR/ARS) that performs routing based on call attributes, such as Bearer Capability Classes (BCCs), in addition to the address and facilities restriction level (FRL), thus facilitating a Uniform
Glossary and abbreviations H H0 An ISDN information transfer rate for 384-kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards. H11 An ISDN information transfer rate for 1536-kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards. H12 An ISDN information transfer rate for 1920-kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards. handshaking logic A format used to initiate a data connection between two data module devices. hertz (Hz) A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second.
I I2 The second information channel of DCP. I2 Interface A proprietary interface used for the DEFINITY Wireless Business System for the radio-controller circuit packs. Each interface provides communication between the radio-controller circuit pack and up to two wireless fixed bases. I3 Interface A proprietary interface used for the DEFINITY Wireless Business System for the cell antenna units. Each wireless fixed base can communicate to up to four cell antenna units.
Glossary and abbreviations INADS Initialization and Administration System ICLID Incoming Caller ID incoming gateway A PBX that routes an incoming call on a trunk not administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B to a trunk not administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B. information exchange The exchange of data between users of two different systems, such as the switch and a host computer, over a LAN.
I International Telecommunications Union (ITU) Formerly known as International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT), ITU is an international organization that sets universal standards for data communications, including ISDN. ITU members are from telecommunications companies and organizations around the world. See alsoBX.25. International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee See International Telecommunications Union (ITU).
Glossary and abbreviations ISN Information Systems Network ISO International Standards Organization ISV Independent software vendor ITC Information transfer capability ITP Installation test procedure ITU International Telecommunications Union IXC Interexchange carrier code K kHz Kilohertz kbps Kilobits per second kbyte Kilobyte kg Kilogram L LAN Local area network LAP-D Link Access Procedure on the D-channel LAPD Link Access Procedure data LATA Local access and transport area lb Pound 197
L LBO Line buildout LDN Listed directory number LDS Long-distance service LEC Local exchange carrier LED See light-emitting diode (LED). light-emitting diode (LED) A semiconductor device that produces light when voltage is applied. LEDs provide a visual indication of the operational status of hardware components, the results of maintenance tests, the alarm status of circuit packs, and the activation of telephone features.
Glossary and abbreviations loop-start trunk A trunk on which, after establishing a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing call, the system waits for a signal on the loop formed by the trunk leads before sending the digits of the called number. loss plan The overall plan, used in network design and management, for creating and maintaining consistent signal strength across the network.
M MAPD Multiapplication platform for DEFINITY MASI Multimedia Applications Server Interface MA-UUI Message-Associated User-to-User Signaling Mbps Megabits per second M-Bus Memory bus Mbyte Megabyte MCC Multicarrier cabinet MCS Message Center Service MCT Malicious Call Trace MCU Multipoint control unit MDF Main distribution frame MDM Modular data module MDR Message detail record MEM Memory memory A device into which information can be copied and held, and from which information can later be obt
Glossary and abbreviations MFC 1. Multifrequency code 2. Multi-Frequency Compelled MFE Multifrequency Espana MGP Media Gateway Processor MHz Megahertz MIM Management information message minor alarm An indication of a failure that could affect customer service. Minor alarms are automatically displayed on LEDs on the attendant console and maintenance or alarming circuit pack, sent to the alarm log, and reported to a remote maintenance facility, if applicable.
M modular processor data module (MPDM) A processor data module (PDM) that can be configured to provide several kinds of interfaces (RS-232C, RS-449, and V.35) to customer-provided data terminal equipment (DTE). See also processor data module (PDM). modular trunk data module (MTDM) A trunk data module that can be configured to provide several kinds of interfaces (RS-232, RS-449, and V.35) to customer-provided data terminal equipment. modulator-demodulator See modem.
Glossary and abbreviations multiappearance voice terminal A terminal equipped with several call-appearance buttons for the same extension, allowing the user to handle more than one call on that same extension at the same time. Multicarrier cabinet A structure that holds one to five carriers. See also single-carrier cabinet.
N NCOSS Network Control Operations Support Center NCSO National Customer Support Organization NEC National Engineering Center NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association NETCON Network-control circuit pack network A series of points, nodes, or stations connected by communications channels. network-specific facility (NSF) An information element in an ISDN-PRI message that specifies which public-network service is used.
Glossary and abbreviations NQC Number of queued calls NSE Night-service extension NSF Network-specific facility NSU Network sharing unit null modem cable Special wiring of an RS-232-C cable such that a computer can talk to another computer (or to a printer) without a modem. NXX Public-network office code O OA Operator assisted occurrence See appearance.
P OSSI Operational Support System Interface OTDR Optical time-domain reflectometer othersplit The work state that indicates that an agent is currently active on another split’s call, or in ACW for another split. OTL Originating Test Line OTQ Outgoing trunk queuing OTTOTT Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing Trunk Transfer outgoing gateway A PBX that routes an incoming call on a trunk administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B to a trunk not administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B.
Glossary and abbreviations PC See personal computer (PC). PCM See pulse-code modulation (PCM). PCOL Personal central-office line PCOLG Personal central-office line group PCS Permanent switched calls PDM See processor data module (PDM). PDS Premises Distribution System PE Processing element PEC Price element code PEI Processor element interchange personal computer (PC) A personally controllable microcomputer.
P PLS Premises Lightwave System PMS Property Management System PN Port network PNA Private network access POE Processor occupancy evaluation POP Point of presence port A data- or voice-transmission access point on a device that is used for communicating with other devices. port carrier A carrier in a multicarrier cabinet or a single-carrier cabinet containing port circuit packs, power units, and service circuits. Also called a port cabinet in a single-carrier cabinet.
Glossary and abbreviations PRI endpoint (PE) The wideband switching capability introduces PRI endpoints on switch line-side interfaces. A PRI endpoint consists of one or more contiguous B-channels on a line-side T1 or E1 ISDN PRI facility and has an extension. Endpoint applications have call-control capabilities over PRI endpoints. principal A terminal that has its primary extension bridged on one or more other terminals.
Q PT Personal terminal PTC Positive temperature coefficient PTT Postal Telephone and Telegraph public network The network that can be openly accessed by all customers for local and long-distance calling. pulse-code modulation (PCM) An extension of pulse-amplitude modulation (PAM) in which carrier-signal pulses modulated by an analog signal, such as speech, are quantized and encoded to a digital, usually binary, format.
Glossary and abbreviations RCL Restricted call list read-only memory (ROM) A storage arrangement primarily for information-retrieval applications. recall dial tone Tones signalling that the system has completed a function (such as holding a call) and is ready to accept dialing. redirection criteria Information administered for each voice terminal’s coverage path that determines when an incoming call is redirected to coverage.
S RMATS Remote Maintenance, Administration, and Traffic System RNX Route-number index (private network office code) ROM See read-only memory (ROM). ROSE See Remote Operations Service Element (ROSE). RPN Routing-plan number RS-232C A physical interface specified by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA). RS-232C transmits and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19.2 kbps over cable distances of up to 50 feet.
Glossary and abbreviations SBA Simulated bridged appearance SCC 1. See single-carrier cabinet. 2. Serial communications controller SCD Switch-control driver SCI Switch communications interface SCO System control office SCOTCH Switch Conferencing for TDM Bus in Concentration Highway SCSI See small computer system interface (SCSI).
S small computer system interface (SCSI) An ANSI bus standard that provides a high-level command interface between host computers and peripheral devices. SMDR Station Message Detail Recording SN Switch Node SNA Systems Network Architecture SNC Switch Node Clock SNI Switch Node Interface SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol software A set of computer programs that perform one or more tasks. SPE Switch Processing Element SPID Service Profile Identifier split See ACD work mode.
Glossary and abbreviations SSV Station service ST3 Stratum 3 clock board staffed Indicates that an agent position is logged in. A staffed agent functions in one of four work modes: Auto-In, Manual-In, ACW, or AUX-Work. STARLAN Star-Based Local Area Network Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) An obsolete term now called CDR — a switch feature that uses software and hardware to record call data. See Call Detail Recording (CDR).
T SXS Step-by-step synchronous data transmission A method of sending data in which discrete signal elements are sent at a fixed and continuous rate and specified times. See also association. SYSAM System Access and Administration system administrator The person who maintains overall customer responsibility for system administration. Generally, all administration functions are performed from the Management Terminal.
Glossary and abbreviations tandem tie-trunk network (TTTN) A private network that interconnects several customer switching systems. TC Technical consultant TCM Traveling class mark TDM See time-division multiplexing (TDM). TDR Time-of-day routing TEG Terminating extension group terminal A device that sends and receives data within a system. See also administration terminal. TFTP Trivial file transfer protocol tie trunk A telecommunications channel that directly connects two private switching systems.
U tone ringer A device with a speaker, used in electronic voice terminals to alert the user. TOP Task-oriented protocol trunk A dedicated telecommunications channel between two communications systems or COs. trunk allocation The manner in which trunks are selected to form wideband channels. trunk-data module A device that connects off-premises private-line trunk facilities and DEFINITY ECS.
Glossary and abbreviations UCL Unrestricted call list UDP 1. User Datagram Protocol - Transport layer; connectionless, unreliable, fast. 2. Uniform Dial Plan -A feature that allows a unique 4- or 5-digit number assignment for each terminal in a multiswitch configuration such as a DCS or main-satellite-tributary system.
W Virtual Private Network Private network functionality supported in the PSTN. VIS Voice Information System VLAN Virtual local area network VLSI Very-large-scale integration VLSM Variable Length Subnet Mask VM Voltmeter VMON Voice over Internet Protocol Monitoring Manager VNI Virtual nodepoint identifier VOA VDN of origin announcement voice terminal A single-line or multiappearance telephone. VOM Voice Only Module VPN See Virtual Private Network.
Glossary and abbreviations Wide Area Telecommunications Service (WATS) A service in the United States that allows calls to certain areas for a flat-rate charge based on expected usage. wideband A circuit-switched call at a data rate greater than 64 kbps. A circuit-switched call on a single T1 or E1 facility with a bandwidth between 128 and 1536 (T1) or 1984 (E1) kbps in multiples of 64 kbps. H0, H11, H12, and N x DS0 calls are wideband.
Index Numerics 3-burst ringing, 1798 7-digit barrier codes, 1504 32-character display stations, 1460 40-character display stations, 1460 2420 DCP phone downloading firmware, 127 file download, 128 302D console, 167 302A attendant console, 164 302B attendant console, 164 302C attendant console, 165 4600 telephones, 1389 6200 phones, 1391 6400 Serialized phone Automatic Customer Telephone Rearrangement (ACTR), 102, 1492 remotely readable electronic ID, 1808 7400A data module, 505 7400A/7400B data module, 505
Index activate night service button, 147 ACW (After Call Work), see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers AD programming screen, 986 Add/Remove Skills, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers Administered Connections (AC), 507 access endpoints, 508, 1454 administering, 511 alarm button, 132 applications, 1455 commands, 1325 description, 507, 1454 dropping, 509 dropping administered connections, 1456 errors, 509, 1456 establishi
Index Answer Supervision answer detection, 1469 telecommuting, 358 tests, 1896 timer detection, 1469 answerback paging, 482 applications administered connections, 508, 1455 endpoint, wideband switching, 522 area codes adding, 262 restricted, 254 ARS partitioning, 265 ARS Toll Table commands, 1329 screen, 613 ASA installing, 35 installing from ASA CD, 37 installing from S8700 Media Server, 37 logging in, 35 ASAI, 533 ASG History Log, monitoring, 396 ASG Key, loss, 396 ASG, see Access Security Gateway (ASG)
Index Automatic Route Selection (ARS) allow local information calls, 256 ARS analysis tables, digit analysis default translations, 1502 ARS trunking facilities, 1503 assigning FAC, 249 authorization codes, 1481 defining partitions, 265 digit analysis table commands, 1318 digit conversion table commands, 1319 displaying analysis information, 249 inter-exchange carrier calls (IXC), 253 modifying call routing, 261 operator assisted calls, 252 overriding call restrictions, 264 partitioning, 1447 private networ
Index Call Charge Information administering AOC, 545 administering PPM, 546 advice of charge (AOC) description, 1527 Call Detail Recording (CDR) reports, 1528 charge displays, 1528 collecting information about calls, 537 description, 1527 Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM), 544, 1527 viewing, 547, 1528 call classification answer detection, 1468 Call Coverage adding to a coverage path, 195 administering system-wide characteristics, 190 advanced, 193 assigning coverage paths, 192 basic, 189 call classification, 1
Index Call Pickup, (continued) extended pickup groups, 220, 222 groups, 1623 pickup groups, 219 call progress tones, 1543, 1946 call restrictions, overriding, 264 call routing, modifying, 261 call splitting, see Call Detail Recording (CDR) call timer button, 136 Call Vector commands, 1332 screen, 638 Call Waiting Termination, 1628 call waiting tones, 1946 call work button, 152 callback, automatic, 134 Caller ID, 1665 caller information button, 136 displaying, 181 forwarding (CINFO) routing ISDN, 1741 Call-
Index commands, (continued) Attendant Console, 1329 Authorization Code — COR Mapping, 1330 Best SErvice Routing, 1330 Boot Image, 1331 Bulletin Board, 1331 Button Type, 1332 Call Coverage / Call Forwarding, 1374 Call Vector, 1332 CAMA Numbering Format, 1333 CDR System Parameters, 1333 Class of Restriction (COR), 1333 Class of Service (COS), 1334 Code Calling IDs, 1334 Command Permission Categories, 1334 Console Parameters, 1335 Coverage Answer Group, 1335 Coverage Path, 1336 Coverage Time of Day, 1336 CTI-
Index Conference Meet-me, 1648 No Hold Conference, 1649 Selective Conference Party Display, Drop, and Mute, 1648 Transfer Toggle/Swap, 1648 conference, 1647 Configuration Set screen, 680 Console Parameters commands, 1335 screen, 683 setting, 177 Console Parameters — Default Attendant Group, see Console Parameters screen console permissions, 673 consult button, 138 consult, Call Coverage, 1540 control malicious call trace button, 146 conventions used in this book, 26 Caution, 27 Danger, 27 Note, 27 Security
Index Date and Time button, 139 commands, 1338 displaying, 45 screen, 741 setting, 43 Date-Time screen, 995 daylight savings displaying rules, 43 establishing rules, 41 Daylight Savings Rules commands, 1339 screen, 744 DCP data modules, 493 data-terminal dialing, 493 telephone dialing, 494 DCS interactions with Uniform Dial Plan, 1918 see also Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage Software trunk turnarounds, 1897 DCS to QSIG TSC Gateway commands, 1339 dealing with security violatio
Index displays ISDN calls, 1740 phones, 1387 distinctive ringing, 1658 Distributed Communications System (DCS) feature interactions Uniform Dial Plan (UDP), 1918 Distributed Communications System, see DCS DLG, 1650 DLG CTI Link command, 1341 commands, 1341 DLG Interface command, 1342 commands, 1342 DND button, 140 Do Not Disturb (DND), 1701 do not disturb button, 140 drop button, 140 dropping administered connections, 509, 1456 DS1 alarm button, 148 DS1 Circuit Pack commands, 1342 screen, 756, 757 DS1 Trun
Index feature buttons adding, 129 attendant console, 170 Feature Interactions, 1666 Cellular Service Provider, 1666 Distinctive Alerting, 1666 Feature Access Codes, 1666 Message Waiting Indication, 1666 Feature-Related System Parameters commands, 1347 screen, 795 fiber link administration, 89 File download, 128 File Transfer Protocol (FTP) backing up announcements, 461 copying announcements, 461 deleting announcements, 462 initiating session, 459 moving announcements, 463 terminating session, 466 Firmware
Index Hunt Groups, (continued) hunt group busy options, 1719 hunt group queues, 1717 hunting methods, 1716 queue warning levels, 1717 screen, 875 Send All Calls, 1720 setting up, 224 setting up a queue, 227 setting up night service, 216 I IAA, see Internal Automatic Answer (IAA) ICI button, 143 ICLID, see Incoming Call Line Identification (ICLID) ICLID, see Incoming Call Line Identification on Analog Trunks Inbound Call Management (ICM), see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Release 11 Guide to ACD
Index ISDN service, (continued) displays, 1740 Facility Restriction Levels (FRL), 1741 identification numbers, 1738 ISDN gateway, 1733 ISDN Number — Private, 970, 1355 ISDN Number — Public/Unknown, 973 ISDN Number — Public/Unknown commands, 1355 ISDN-BRI, 1790 ISDN-BRI commands, 1356 ISDN-BRI data modules, 495 ISDN-PRI, 1730, 1737 ISDN-PRI overlap sending, 1503 ISDN-PRI terminal adapters, 522 Malicious Call Trace (MCT), 1741 multiple subscriber number (MSN) – limited, 1741 overlap sending, 1741 private net
Index logins adding, 387 adding login names, 390 changing, 390 changing permissions, 397 displaying, 392 failed, 33 login administration commands, 1362 name parameters, 387 removing, 392 screen, 1020 security violations notification (SVN), 144, 409 system security, 379 Look Ahead Routing (LAR), 1750 loss of ASG Key, 396 Loss plan administering, 1753 Loudspeaker Paging auxiliary paging systems, 1755 commands, 1362 description, 1753 Meet-Me, 1754 multiappearance phones, 1754 placing chime pages, 1755 placing
Index Multimedia Applications Server Interface (MASI) feature AAR and ARS, 297 administration terminal requirements, 277 autonomous MMCX features, 275 basic features not supported, 300 Call Center features not supported, 300 Call Detail Recording (CDR), 297 call redirection, 298 command permissions, 297 conferencing, 299 configurations, 279 DEFINITY/MASI features, 276 detailed feature description, 297 error conditions, 303 features not supported, 299 forms, 283 planning for MASI, 278 status tracking, termi
Index Optional Features commands, 1375 screen, 1186 origin announcement, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers origination, 1666 Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing Trunk Transfer (OTTOTT), 1896 outward restrictions, see Restriction—Controlled overlap sending over ISDN, 1741 overriding call restrictions, Automatic Route Selection (ARS), 264 P Packet Gateway Board commands, 1366 screen, 1072 pager, crisis alert, 1654 paging, 479 parameters, login names, 387, 390 partition
Index Point-to-Point Protocol data module, see PPP data module Port commands, 1368 port address, 69, 94 port network (PN), preferential trunk routing, 526 posting Bulletin Board messages, 54 Power Failure Transfer, see emergency transfer PPM, 546 PPP data module, 504 preferential trunk routing, port network (PN), 526 Prefixed Station Numbering, 1822 prefixes, adding, 263 preventing toll fraud, 379 PRI Endpoints (PE) commands, 1368 screen, 1080 wideband switching, 522 print messages button, 149 printing on
Index removing attendant console, 176 logins, 392 trunks groups, 433 trunks to a trunk group, 432 removing phones, 112 Report Scheduler, see Reports for Avaya MultiVantage Software reports ACA Measurements Report, 1491 Call Detail Recording (CDR), 1545 Coverage Path Measurement Report, 1545 Principal Coverage Measurement Report, 1545 Security Violations Status, 1814 rerouting denied calls, 79 rerouting invalid calls, 79 Reset Shift Call, 1805 restarting temporarily disabled Access Security Gateway (ASG), 3
Index Security Violations Notification (SVN), 401, 1814 description, 1813 disable login IDs, 409 enable login IDs, 409 security violation thresholds and notification, 1813 Security Violations Status report, 1814 SVN referral calls with announcements, 1815 system reporting, 1814 system security, 378 security violations, dealing with, 409 Security-Related System Parameters commands, 1372 screen, 1105 seizure signals, 1909 Selective Conference Party Display, Drop, and Mute, 1648 Self-Administration screen, 10
Index system parameters, changing, 78 system port data module, 504 system printer alarm button, 148 system printer, see Reports for Avaya MultiVantage Software system security, 378 aging login passwords, 390 authorization codes, 1479 changing login permissions, 397 changing passwords, 399 checklist, 382 disabling a login ID, 409 disabling Remote Access, 370, 409 enabling Remote Access, 409 enhanced call transfers (ECT), 378 History report, 378 logins, 379 passwords, 378 physical security, 378, 381 securing
Index total restrictions, see Restriction—Controlled Trace commands, 1382 tracing calls, see Malicious Call Trace (MCT) tracking calls by account codes, 541 trademarks, 28 Transfer, 1892 Transfer - Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing Trunk, 1896 Transfer- Trunk to Trunk, 1899 Transfer Upon Hang-up, 1892 Transfer-conference screen, 1011 transit network selections, 1632 translations copy protection, 55 restoring, see Maintenance for Avaya MultiVantage and DEFINITY Server R, SI, or CSI saving, 55 translations, DEFINIT
Index Vectors and VDNs adding a VDN, 241 commands, 1332 deleting a step, 239 description, 240 diagnosing a vector problem, 239 inserting a step, 238 list of options, 237 managing, 230 messages, 235 playing an announcement, 233 queueing calls, 232 redirecting calls, 236 routing based on time of day, 234 screen, 1306 security alert, 230, 241 VDN commands, 1386 viewing VDNs, 242 VIAS, see Visually Impaired Attendant Service video conferencing, 305 view button, 135 View-buttons screen, 1005 VIP check-in button
Index X X.25 Adjunct Data Module screen, see Data Module screen X.
Index 2026 Issue 5 October 2002 555-233-506
